SNI 1727 2020 en

Translated from Indonesian to English - www.onlinedoctranslator.
com
"Copyright of the National Standardization Agency, a copy of this standard is made for Sub KT 91-01-S4 Materials, Science, Structure & Building Construction, and not for commercial use"
SNI 1727:2020
Minimum design loads and related criteria

for buildings and other structures
Indonesian National Standards
ICS 93.020
© BSN 2020
Copyright is protected by law. It is prohibited to publish and reproduce part or all of the contents
of this document in any way and in any form and to distribute this document either electronically
or in print without BSN's written permission.
BSN
Email: dokinfo@bsn.go.id
www.bsn.go.id
Published in Jakarta
SNI 1727:2020
List of contents
List of contents................................................ ................................................................ ................................ i
List of images.................. ................................................................ ................................................xvii List of
tables . ................................................................ ................................................................ .................xxii
Foreword .................................. ................................................................ .......................................... xxv 1
General ..... ................................................................ ................................................................ ...................1
1.1 Scope................................................ ................................................................ .........1

1.2 Definitions and symbols ................................................ ................................................................ ..1
1.2.1 Definition ................................................ ................................................................ .........................1
1.2.2 Symbols.................................................. ................................................................ .........................3
1.3 Basic requirements ........................................... ................................................................ ..4

1.3.1 Strength and stiffness ............................................ ................................................4
1.3.1.1 Strength procedures ................................................ ................................................................ 4
1.3.1.2 Permissible stress procedures ............................................ ............................................4
1.3.1.3 Performance-based procedures ............................................ ................................................4
1.3.1.3.1 Analysis ............................................ ................................................................ ................6
1.3.1.3.2 Testing ............................................ ................................................................ ............6

1.3.1.3.3 Documentation ............................................ ................................................................ .......6
1.3.1.3.4 Overview............................................ ................................................................ ............6
1.3.2 Serviceability ............................................ ................................................................ ...7

1.3.3 Function ................................................ ................................................................ ......................7
1.3.4 Forces and self-strain effects............................................ ...................................7

1.3.5 Analysis ................................................ ................................................................ ....................7
1.3.6 Action of opposing structures............................................ .....................................7

1.3.7 Fire resistance ................................................ ................................................................ ..........8
1.4 General structural integrity.............................................. ......................................8

1.4.1 Load line connection............................................ ................................................8
1.4.2 Lateral forces ................................................ ................................................................ ..............8
1.4.3 Connections at supports............................................ ......................................8

1.4.4 Anchorage of structural walls ........................................... ......................................9
1.4.5 Extraordinary expenses and events .......................................... ...................................9
1.5 Classification of buildings and other structures ........................................... ......9
1.5.1 Risk categorization ................................................ ................................................................ ....9
1.5.2 Multiple risk categories............................................ ............................................11

1.5.3 Toxic substances and highly toxic substances, and explosive substances ........11
© BSN 2020 i
SNI 1727:2020
1.6 Additions and renovations to structures that have been built.................. 12

1.7 Load test .................................................. ................................................................ .............. 12
1.8 Consensus standards and other reference documents ............................................ .....12

2 Load combinations ................................................ ................................................................ ....... 13
2.1 General................................................ ................................................................ ..................... 13
2.2 Symbols ................................................ ................................................................ .................... 13
2.3 Load combinations for strength design ............................................ ................... 13

2.3.1 Basic combinations ................................................ ................................................................ ....13
2.3.2 Load combinations including flood loads ................................ 14

2.3.3 Load combinations including atmospheric ice loads.................................................. ........... 14
2.3.4 Load combinations including force and self-strain effects ......................... 15

2.3.5 Load combinations for nonspecific loads .......................................... ............... 15
2.3.6 Basic combination with seismic load effects ........................................... ............ 15
2.4 Load combinations for allowable stress design ........................................... ............. 16
2.4.1 Basic combinations ................................................ ................................................................ ....16
2.4.2 Load combinations including flood loads ......................................... .........17

2.4.3 Load combinations including atmospheric ice loads ......................................... .........17
2.4.4 Load combinations including force and self-strain effects ............................ 17
2.4.5 Basic combination with seismic load effects ........................................... ............ 17
2.5 Load combinations for extraordinary events ............................................ ................ 18
2.5.1 Application ................................................ ................................................................ ............ 18
2.5.2 Load combinations ................................................ ................................................................ ... 19
2.5.2.1 Capacity ................................................ ................................................................ ........... 19
2.5.2.2 Remaining capacity.................................................. ................................................................ ..... 19
2.5.3 Stability requirements ............................................ ................................................ 19

2.6 Load combinations for general structural integrity loads..................................... 19
2.6.1 Combination of notional loads for strength design.................................................. ..... 19
2.6.2 Notional load combinations for allowable stress design............................................ 19

3 Dead load, soil load and hydrostatic pressure ........................................... ........... 21
3.1 Dead load ........................................... ................................................................ .............. 21
3.1.1 Definition ................................................ ................................................................ .................. 21
3.1.2 Weight of materials and construction............................................ ......................................... 21
3.1.3 Weight of fixed service equipment ........................................... ................................... 21

3.1.4 Rooftop plants and landscaping............................................ ...................................... 21
3.1.5 Solar panels ................................................ ................................................................ ............ 21
3.2 Soil load and hydrostatic pressure............................................ .......................... 21
© BSN 2020 ii
SNI 1727:2020
3.2.1 Lateral pressure.................................................. ................................................................ .......21
3.2.2 Lifting loads on floors and foundations ............................................ ........................24

4 Live load ................................................ ................................................................ ...............25
4.1 Definition ................................................ ................................................................ ....................25
4.2 Unrequired expenses.................................................. ...................................25

4.3.1 Required live load ........................................... ...................................26
4.3.2 Conditions for partitions ............................................ ................................................29
4.3.3 Partial loads ................................................ ................................................................ .........29
4.4 Concentrated live loads ................................................ ................................................30

4.5 Loads on stair handrails, guard rails, grab bars and vehicle barrier systems, and
fixed stairs ................................ ................................................30
4.5.1 Stair handrails and safety railing systems ............................................ .........30
4.5.1.1 Distributed load.................................................. ................................................................ ......30
4.5.1.2 Loads of safety fence system components............................................ .............30

4.5.2 Grab bar system ............................................ ..........................................30
4.5.3 Loads on vehicle barrier systems............................................ ...............30
4.5.4 Fixed ladders ................................................ ................................................................ ..........31
4.6 Impact loads ................................................ ................................................................ ...........31
4.6.1 General ................................................ ................................................................ ....................31
4.6.2 Elevator ................................................ ................................................................ ......31

4.6.3 Machine ................................................ ................................................................ .....................31
4.6.4 Hoist support elements for facade access and building maintenance
equipment .................................... ................................................................ .........................32
4.6.5 Fall arrest anchors and safety rope anchors ............................................ .......32
4.7 Reduction of uniform live loads ................................................. ......................................32
4.7.1 General ................................................ ................................................................ ....................32
4.7.2 Reduction of uniform live load ........................................... ...................................32

4.7.3 Heavy live loads ............................................ ................................................................ ...33
4.7.4 Passenger car garage............................................ ..........................................33
4.7.5 Meeting place.................................................. ................................................................ .33
4.7.6 Limitations forslabOne Way ................................................ ................................33
4.8 Reduction in roof live load ............................................ ................................33
4.8.1 General ................................................ ................................................................ ....................33
4.8.2 Ordinary roofs, awnings and canopies ............................................ ...................................34
4.8.3 Occupable roof............................................ ............................................34

4.9 Crane load (crane loads)................................................. ......................................35
© BSN 2020 iii

SNI 1727:2020
4.9.1 General............................................ ................................................................ .................... 35
4.9.2 Maximum wheel load............................................ ................................................ 35

4.9.3 Vertical impact force ............................................ ................................................................ 35
4.9.4 Lateral forces.................................................. ................................................................ ............ 35
4.9.5 Longitudinal force ................................................ ................................................................ ... 35
4.10 Parking/garage loads ............................................ ......................................... 35

4.10.1 Passenger vehicle parking/garage ......................................... ........... 35
4.10.2 Truck and bus parking/garage ............................................ ............................. 36
4.11 Loadhelipad................................................................ ................................................................ ....36
4.11.1 General ................................................ ................................................................ ................. 36
4.11.2 Centralized helicopter load ............................................ ...................................... 36

4.12 Unoccupied attic............................................ ................................................................ 36
4.12.1 Unoccupied attic without storage ............................................ ....... 36
4.12.2 Unoccupied attic with storage ............................................ ....36
4.13 Library shelf space ................................................ ......................................... 37
4.14 Seating for gatherings ................................................ ................................. 37
4.15 Sidewalks, motorized vehicle roads, and yards for trucks to pass.......... 37
4.15.1 Distributed load ................................................ ................................................................ ...... 37
4.15.2 Concentrated load ................................................ ................................................................ .... 37
4.16 Steps ................................................ ................................................ 37

4.17 Solar panel load.............................................. ................................................................ 38
4.17.1 Solar panel roof loads............................................ .......................................... 38
4.17.2 Load combinations ................................................ ................................................................ 38
4.17.3 Open grid roof structure supporting solar panels.................................................. .... 38
4.18 Consensus standards and other reference documents ............................................ ...... 38
5 Robust flood load.............................................. ................................................................ .......... 39
5.1 General................................................ ................................................................ ..................... 39
5.2 Definition ................................................ ................................................................ ................... 39
5.3 Design requirements................................................ ................................................................ 40
5.3.1 Design loads.................................................. ................................................................ ........40
5.3.2 Erosion and scour............................................ ................................................................ .. 40
5.3.3 Loads on relief walls............................................ ..................................... 40

5.4 Loads during floods ................................................ ................................................ 40
5.4.1 Basis for determining loads............................................ ............................................ 40
5.4.2 Hydrostatic load ................................................ ................................................................ ... 40
5.4.3 Hydrodynamic loads ................................................ ................................................ 41
© BSN 2020 iv
SNI 1727:2020
5.4.4 Wave loads ................................................ ................................................................ ..41

5.4.4.1 Breaking wave loads on vertical piles and vertical columns.......42
5.4.4.2 Loads due to breaking waves on vertical walls..................................42
5.4.4.3 Breaking wave loads on nonvertical walls ......................................... .45
5.4.4.4 Breaking wave load at an oblique angle to the incident wave.45
5.4.5 Impact loads ................................................ ................................................................ ..........45
5.5 Consensus standards and other related criteria............................................ .............45

6 Tsunami loads and effects ................................................ ................................................46
6.1 General requirements................................................ ................................................................ ..46
6.1.1 Scope ................................................ ................................................................ ........46

6.2 Definition ................................................ ................................................................ ....................47
6.3 Symbols and notation............................................ ................................................................ .....53
6.4 Tsunami risk categories ................................................ ................................................56

6.5 Design analysis of immersion depth and flow velocity..................................57
6.5.1 Buildings and other structures Tsunami Risk Categories II and III ......................57
6.5.1.1 Evaluationrunupfor areas where map values are missing.................................57
6.5.2 Buildings and other structures Tsunami Risk Category IV................................58
6.5.3 Changes in sea level............................................ ................................................58
6.6 Immersion depth and flow rate based onrunup..........................59
6.6.1 Maximum immersion depth and flow rate based onrunup.....59
6.6.2 Energy level line analysis of maximum immersion depth and flow
velocity .................................... ................................................................ ..........................59
6.6.3 Roughnessterrain................................................................ ................................................61
6.6.4Boretsunami ................................................................ ................................................................ ......61
6.6.5 Amplified flow velocity ............................................ ................................61

6.7 Immersion depth and flow velocity based on probabilistic analysis of tsunami
hazard according to location specifics.................................. ................................61
6.7.1 Tsunami waveforms ............................................ ......................................61
6.7.2 Tsunamigenic sources ............................................ ................................................62
6.7.3 The tsunami function originates from the unitruptureearthquake for offshore tsunami
amplitude ............................................ ................................................................ ........................63
6.7.4 Treatment of modeling and natural uncertainties............................................ ........63

6.7.5 Offshore tsunami amplitude ........................................... .................................64
6.7.5.1 Offshore tsunami amplitudes for remote seismic sources...............64
6.7.5.2 Direct calculation of probabilistic immersion andrunup.........................65
6.7.6 Procedure for determining immersion andrunuptsunami................................65
© BSN 2020 v
SNI 1727:2020
6.7.6.1 Representative design bath parameters ........................................... ............ 65

6.7.6.2 Seismic subsidence before tsunami arrival ........................................... .... 65
6.7.6.3 Model macro roughness parameters ........................................... ......................... 65
6.7.6.4 Nonlinear immersion modeling ............................................ ............................ 65
6.7.6.5 Model spatial resolution ............................................ .......................................... 66
6.7.6.6 Built environment............................................ .......................................... 66
6.7.6.7 Validation of immersion model ............................................ ...................................... 66
6.7.6.7.1 Historical data or paleotsunami submergence............................................ ........... 66
6.7.6.7.2 Model validation with benchmark tests ....................................... ...................... 66

6.7.6.7.3 Formationboretsunami or fissionsoliton................................................................ .........66
6.7.6.8 Determine bath flow parameters according to site specifics ............... 66

6.7.6.9 Tsunami design parameters for flow over land ...................................... 67
6.8 Structural design procedures for tsunami effects ........................................... ... 67
6.8.1 Performance of buildings and other structures in tsunami risk categories II and III 67
6.8.3 Structural performance evaluation............................................ ......................................... 67
6.8.3.1 Load cases............................................ ................................................................ ....... 68

6.8.3.2 Important tsunami factors ............................................ .......................................... 68
6.8.3.3 Load combinations ................................................ ................................................................ 68
6.8.3.4 Acceptance criteria for lateral force resistance systems ............................................ .... 69
6.8.3.5 Structural component acceptance criteria ........................................... .............. 70

6.8.3.5.1 Acceptance criteria by component design strength .................................. 70
6.8.3.5.2 Alternative performance-based criteria ......................................... .......................... 70
6.8.3.5.2.1 Alternative analysis procedures ........................................... ................................ 70
6.8.3.5.2.2 Acceptance criteria for alternative structural components .................................... 70
6.8.4 Minimum fluid density for tsunami loads ......................................... .......... 71

6.8.5 Flow velocity amplification............................................ ..................................... 72
6.8.5.1 Upstream barrier structure ............................................ ...................................... 72
6.8.5.2 Amplification of flow velocity by physical or numerical modeling ................ 72
6.8.6 Flow directivity ................................................ ................................................................ 72
6.8.6.1 Flow direction............................................ ................................................................ ........... 72
6.8.6.2 Directions according to site specifics ........................................... ................................ 73
6.8.7 Minimum coverage ratio for load determination ............................................ 73

6.8.8 Minimum number of tsunami flow cycles............................................ ......................... 73
6.8.9 Seismic influences on foundations precede the tsunami considered to be maximum in

local subduction zones ................................... ................................................ 73
6.8.10 Physical modeling of tsunami flows, loads and effects ...................................... ........73
© BSN 2020 vi
SNI 1727:2020
6.9 Hydrostatic loads............................................ ................................................................ .....74
6.9.1 Buoyant force............................................ ................................................................ ............74
6.9.2 Unbalanced lateral hydrostatic force .......................................... ........................75

6.9.3 Additional residual water load on floors and walls ............................................ ..75
6.9.4 Additional hydrostatic pressure on foundations .......................................... .............75
6.10 Hydrodynamic loads ................................................ ................................................75
6.10.1 Simplified equivalent uniform lateral static pressure ......................76
6.10.2 Detailed hydrodynamic lateral forces ........................................... ................................76
6.10.2.1 Styledragoverall in buildings and other structures ............................76

6.10.2.2 Styledragon components ................................................ ............................77
6.10.2.3 Tsunami loads on vertical structural components,Fw.................................77
6.10.2.4 Hydrodynamic loads on perforated walls,F............................78

pw
6.10.2.5 Walls at an angle to the flow............................................ ........................78

6.10.3 Hydrodynamic pressure associated with the slab ....................................78
6.10.3.1 Stagnant current pressure ............................................ .........................................78
6.10.3.2 Hydrodynamic liftsurgeon horizontal slabs ................................78
6.10.3.2.1 Slab submerged during tsunami inflow ....................................... .........78
6.10.3.2.2 Slab on site slope............................................ ................................79
6.10.3.3 Flowboretsunami trapped in gaps in structural plate walls .......79
6.10.3.3.1 Pressure loads in structural slab wall gaps.................................... ......79
6.10.3.3.2 Load reduction with immersion depth ............................................ ....79
6.10.3.3.3 Load reduction for wall openings ............................................ ................80
6.10.3.3.4 Load reduction for slab openings ............................................ .........................80
6.10.3.3.5 Load reduction for tsunami relief walls............................................ ......80
6.11 Debris impact load ................................................ ................................................................ 80
6.11.1 Simplified alternative debris impact static load..................................81

6.11.2 Logs and poles ........................................... ...................................81
6.11.3 Impact by vehicles ............................................ ................................................83
6.11.4 Impact by rolling boulders and submerged concrete debris.......83
6.11.5 Site hazard assessment for containers, ships and barges ......................83
6.11.6 Containers............................................ ................................................................ ............85
6.11.7 Extraordinary debris impacts............................................ ................................................85
6.11.8 Alternative methods of response analysis .......................................... .....................86

6.12 Foundation design............................................ ................................................................ .......86
6.12.1 Resistance factors for foundation stability analysis ........................................... ....86
© BSN 2020 vii

SNI 1727:2020
6.12.2 Characterization of loads and their effects ........................................... ................... 86

6.12.2.1 Lifting forces and flow forces in the soil ............................................ ............. 87
6.12.2.2 Loss of strength ............................................ .......................................... 87
6.12.2.3 General erosion............................................ ................................................................ ....... 87
6.12.2.4 Scour .......................................... ................................................................ ........... 87

6.12.2.4.1 Scour by continuous flow ......................................... ...................... 87
6.12.2.4.2 Scourplunging................................................................ ............................................88
6.12.2.5 Horizontal soil loads ............................................ ......................................... 89

6.12.2.6 Displacement ........................................... ................................................................ .... 89
6.12.3 Alternative foundation performance-based design criteria ............................................ ..... 89
6.12.4 Foundation mitigation.................................................. ............................................ 90

6.12.4.1 Stockpiles ................................................ ................................................................ .........90
6.12.4.2 Slab protection on site ........................................... ................................... 90

6.12.4.3 Geotextiles and soil system reinforcement.......................................... ................ 90
6.12.4.4 Front system (facing systems) ................................................ .................. 91
6.12.4.5 Soil improvement.................................................. ................................................................ 91
6.13.1 Open structures ................................................ ................................................................ ... 92
6.13.2 Tsunami barriers ............................................ ................................................ 92

6.13.2.1 Information about existing buildings and other protected structures.......... 92
6.13.2.2 Location layout............................................ ................................................................ 92
6.14.1 Minimum immersion depth and elevation............................................ ........... 92
6.14.2 The burden of life for refugees............................................ .......................................... 93
6.14.3 Rolling impact (laydowns)................................................. ...................................... 93

6.14.4 Information about construction documents ............................................ ................... 93
6.14.5 Peer review.................................................. ................................................................ ...... 93
6.15 Components and systems designated non-structural............................................ 93

6.15.1 Performance requirements............................................ ................................................ 93
6.16 Non-building structures Tsunami Risk Categories III and IV................................... 94

6.16.1 Requirements for non-building structures Tsunami Risk Category III ............. 94
6.16.2 Requirements for non-building structures in Tsunami Risk Category IV............ 94
6.17 Consensus standards and other reference documents ............................................ ....94
7 Snow load ................................................ ................................................................ ................. 95
8 Rainwater load.............................................. ................................................................ ........... 96
8.1 Definitions and symbols............................................ ................................................................ ... 96
8.1.1 Definition ................................................ ................................................................ .................. 96
8.1.2 Symbols ................................................ ................................................................ ................... 96
© BSN 2020 viii

SNI 1727:2020
8.2 Roof drainage ................................................ ................................................................ ..........97
8.3 Design rain load ................................................ ................................................................ .97

8.4 Instability due to flooding and waterlogging loads ....................................97
8.5 Controlled drainage ................................................ ................................................................ ..97
8.6 Consensus standards and other Reference documents ........................................... ...97

9 Provided for future provisions............................................ ...................98
10 Ice load ................................................ ................................................................ ................98
ARTICLE 11 TO ARTICLE 25 CONCERNING EARTHQUAKE LOADING IN INDONESIA, ARE
IN THE SCOPE OF SNI 1726 ................................ .........98
26 Wind loads: general requirements............................................ ................................99
26.1 Procedure ................................................ ................................................................ ...............99
26.1.1 Scope ................................................ ................................................................ ......99

26.1.2 Permitted procedures............................................ ..........................................99
Additional outlines and notes are provided at the beginning of each chapter for more
detailed step-by-step procedures for determining wind loads. ................100
26.1.2.1 Main Wind Force Resisting System (SPGAU)................................... ......101
26.1.2.2 Components and Clading (C&K)................................... ................................101
26.2 Definitions ................................................ ................................................................ ................101
26.3 Symbols................................................ ................................................................ ................105
26.4 General ................................................ ................................................................ ................110
26.4.1 Sign agreement ................................................ ................................................................ ,110
26.4.2 Critical load conditions ............................................ ................................................110

26.4.3 Wind pressure acting on opposite faces of each building
surface ................................... ................................................................ .....................110
26.5 Wind hazard map ................................................ ................................................110
26.5.1 Basic wind speed ............................................ .........................................110
26.5.2 Special wind areas ............................................ ..........................................110
26.5.3 Baseline wind speed estimates from regional climate data ............................110
26.6 Wind direction ................................................ ................................................................ ...........111
26.7 Exposure................................................ ................................................................ .............111
26.7.1 Wind direction and sectors ........................................... ................................................111
26.7.2 Surface roughness categories............................................ ............................112

26.7.3 Exposure categories ................................................ ................................................112
26.7.4 Exposure requirements ................................................ ..........................................112
26.7.4.1 Directed procedures (Article 27) ......................................... ................................112
26.7.4.2 Envelope procedure (Article 28) ......................................... ................................113
© BSN 2020 ix
SNI 1727:2020
26.7.4.3 Directed procedures for building equipment of buildings and other structures (Article
29) ................................. ................................................................ ................................... 113
26.7.4.4 Components and Clading (Article 30) ............................................ ......................... 113
26.8 Topographic effects.............................................. ................................................................ ...... 113
26.8.1 Increased wind speed over hills, long hills and steep cliffs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
26.8.2 Topographic factors............................................ ................................................................ .. 115
26.9 Land surface elevation factor .................................................. ............................ 115

26.10 Speed pressure ................................................ ............................................ 115
26.10.1 Speed pressure exposure coefficient ........................................... .............. 115
26.10.2 Speed pressure ................................................ .......................................... 116
26.11 Effects of wind gusts.................................................. .......................................... 117
26.11.1 Wind gust effect factors............................................ ................................. 117
26.11.2 Frequency determination.................................................. .......................................... 117
26.11.2.1 Limitations for natural frequency estimation .......................................... ....117

26.11.3 Approximate natural frequencies ............................................ ................................ 118
26.11.4 Rigid buildings or other structures............................................ ................... 119

26.11.5 Flexible sensitive buildings or dynamic sensitive buildings or other structures
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
26.11.6 Rational analysis ................................................ ................................................ 121

26.11.7 Restrictions................................................ ................................................................ ....121
26.12 Classification of closure.............................................. ......................................... 121

26.12.1 General ................................................ ................................................................ ............. 121
26.12.2 Apertures.................................................. ................................................................ ............ 121
26.12.3 Glass-mounted opening protection ........................................... .................. 121

26.12.3.1 Windborne debris areas ........................................... .......................... 122
26.12.3.2 Requirements for protection of glazed openings ........................................... .....122
26.12.4 Some classifications.................................................. .......................................... 123

26.13 Internal pressure coefficient ................................................ ................................... 123
26.13.1 Reduction factors for large buildings,Ri.......................123
26.14 Tornado restrictions ................................................ .......................................... 123
26.15 Consensus standards and other reference documents............................................ 123
27 Wind loads on buildings: Main Wind Force Resisting System (directional

procedure) ................................. ................................................................ ...................... 125
27.1 Scope................................................ ................................................................ ..... 125
27.1.1 Building type............................................ ......................................... 125
27.1.2 Conditions ................................................ ................................................................ .............. 125
© BSN 2020 x
SNI 1727:2020
27.1.3 Restrictions .......................................... ................................................................ ......125

27.1.4 Protectors ................................................ ................................................................ ..........125
27.1.5 Minimum design wind load ........................................... ................................125

27.2 General requirements............................................ ................................................126
27.2.1 Wind load parameters required in Article 26 ............................127
27.3 Wind loads: Main Wind Force Resisting System ......................................... ...127
27.3.1 Enclosed, partially enclosed rigid and flexible buildings ...................127
27.3.2 Open buildings with single-sided, pitched or concave free
roofs ................................. ................................................................ ................................................128
27.3.3 Console from roof ............................................ ................................................................ ..128
27.3.4 Parapets ................................................ ................................................................ ..............128
27.3.5 Design wind load cases............................................ ...................................129

27.4 General requirements................................................ ................................................139
27.4.1 Design procedures ................................................ ................................................................ ,139
27.4.2 Conditions.................................................. ................................................................ ...............139
27.4.3 Wind load parameters specified in Article 26 ............................139

27.4.4 Topographic effects ................................................ ................................................................ .....139
27.4.5 Diaphragm flexibility ......................................... ......................................140

27.5 Wind loads: Main Wind Force Resisting Systems ......................................... ...140
27.5.1 Wall and roof surfaces: Class 1 and Class 2 buildings...........140
27.5.2 Parapets ................................................ ................................................................ ..............140
27.5.3 Console from roof ............................................ ................................................................ ..141
27.6 Consensus standards and other referenced documents ............................141

28 Wind loads on buildings: SPGAU (envelope procedure)...................168
28.1 Scope ........................................... ................................................................ .....168
28.1.1 Building type ............................................ ......................................168
28.1.2 Conditions.................................................. ................................................................ ...............168
28.1.3 Limitations .......................................... ................................................................ .............168
28.1.4 Protectors ................................................ ................................................................ ..........168
28.2 General requirements............................................ ................................................169

28.2.1 Wind load parameters specified in Article 26 ............................169
28.3 Wind loads: Main Wind Force Resisting Systems ......................................... ...169
28.3.1 Design wind pressure for low-rise buildings.................169
28.3.1.1 External pressure coefficient (GCpf)................................................. ...............173
28.3.2 Parapets ................................................ ................................................................ ..............173
28.3.3 Console roof.................................................. ................................................................ .........174
© BSN 2020 xi
SNI 1727:2020
28.3.4 Minimum design wind load ........................................... ................................. 174

28.3.5 Horizontal wind loads in open or partially closed buildings with transverse
frames and gable roofs................................ ................................... 174
28.4 General requirements ................................................ ................................................ 175
28.4.1 Wind load parameters specified in Article 26................................. 175
28.5 Wind loads: Main Wind Force Resisting System.................................................. ... 175
28.5.1 Scope............................................ ................................................................ .... 175
28.5.2 Conditions ................................................ ................................................................ .............. 175
28.5.3 Design wind load............................................ ................................................ 176

28.5.4 Minimum design wind load............................................ ................................. 176
28.6 Consensus standards and other Reference documents ........................................... .... 176
29 Wind loads on other structures and building equipment: Main Wind Force Resisting
Systems.................................. ................................................................ ..... 182
29.1 Scope................................................ ................................................................ ..... 182
29.1.1 Type of structure ................................................ ................................................................ ....... 182
29.1.2 Conditions ................................................ ................................................................ .............. 183
29.1.3 Limitations............................................ ................................................................ ............. 183
29.1.4 Protectors ................................................ ................................................................ .......... 183
29.2 General requirements ................................................ ................................................ 184

29.2.1 Wind load parameters specified in Article 26................................. 184
29.3 Design wind loads: Freestanding solid walls and solid guide panels ....... 184
29.3.1 Freestanding solid walls and freestanding solid sign panels ................ 184
29.3.2 Bonded solid instruction panels ............................................ .......................... 184
29.4 Design wind loads: other structures ............................................ ............................. 184
29.4.1 Roof structures and equipment for buildings ................................ 185
29.4.2.1 External walls of containers (son), silos, and insulated round-section tanks
186
29.4.2.2 Container roof (son), insulated silos and round-section tanks ............ 192
29.4.2.3 Bottom side of container (son), insulated elevated circular-section silos and
tanks ......................................... ................................................................ ................................ 193
29.4.2.4 Roof and walls of containers (son), grouped silos and round-section
tanks.................................................. ................................................................ ............... 193
29.4.3 Rooftop solar panels for buildings of all heights with flat or gable roofs or shield
roofs with a slope of less than 7°............... 193
29.4.4 Solar panels on the roof parallel to the roof surface of the building throughout
the height and slope of the roof ................................ .......................... 194
29.5 Parapets ................................................ ................................................................ .............. 199
© BSN 2020 xii

SNI 1727:2020
29.6 Roof consoles ................................................ ................................................................ .........199
29.7 Minimum design wind loading ................................................ .....................199

29.8 Consensus Standards and other referenced documents ............................199
30 Wind loads: Components and Clading (C&K) ...................................... ...................200
30.1 Scope .................................................. ................................................................ .....200
30.1.1 Building type ................................................ ................................................................ 200
30.1.2 Condition................................................. ................................................................ ............200
30.1.3 Restrictions ................................................ ................................................................ ...201
30.1.4 Protector ................................................ ................................................................ .......201
30.1.5 Air permeable cladding.............................................. ...................................201
30.2 General requirements................................................ ................................................201
30.2.1 Wind load parameters specified in Article 26 .................................201
30.2.2 Minimum design air pressure.............................................. ..........................201
30.2.3 The area of the tributary is greater than 700 ft2(65 m2) ................................................ ..201
30.2.4 External pressure coefficient................................................ ................................201
30.3 Building type .................................................. ................................................................ ....202
30.3.1 Condition................................................. ................................................................ ............202

30.3.2 Design air pressure................................................ ................................................202
30.4 Building type ................................................ ..........................................203
30.4.1 Condition................................................. ................................................................ ............203
30.5 Building type ................................................ ..........................................221
30.5.1 Condition................................................. ................................................................ ............221
30.6 Building type ................................................ ..........................................237
30.6.1 Wind loads: Components and Clading ......................................... .....................237
30.6.1.1 Wall and roof surfaces.............................................. ..........................237
30.6.1.2 Parapet ................................................ ................................................................ ........238
30.6.1.3 Console roof................................................ ................................................................ ...238
30.7 Building type ................................................ ..........................................249
30.7.1 Condition................................................. ................................................................ ............249
30.8 Parapet ................................................ ................................................................ ..............251
30.9 Roof console ................................................ ................................................................ ........256
30.10 Building roof structures and equipment............................................ .....257
30.11 The canopy is connected to the building withh≤ 60 ft (h≤ 18.3 m).......257
© BSN 2020 xiii

SNI 1727:2020
30.12 Containers (son), silos, and round-section tanks withh≤ 120 ft (h≤ 36.6
m) ................................................ ................................................................ ................................. 260
12.30.1 Design air pressure ................................................ ..................................... 260

12.30.2 The external walls of the container (son), silos, and round-section tanks
isolated ................................................ ................................................................ ...................... 261
30.12.3 Internal surfaces of exterior walls of containers (son), silos, and insulated open-
top round-section tanks.................................................. ......................... 261
12.30.4 The roof of the container (son), silos, and insulated round-section tanks ..... 264
12.30.5 The bottom side of the container (son), silos, and elevated round-section tanks
isolated ................................................ ................................................................ ...................... 264
30.12.6 Roofs and walls of containers (son), grouped silos and round-section
tanks............................................ ................................................................ ......................... 264
30.13 Rooftop solar panels for buildings of all heights with flat or gable roofs or shield
roofs with a slope of less than 7° ...... 265
30.14 Consensus standards and other reference documents............................................ .... 265
31 Wind tunnel procedures ................................................ ..................................... 267

31.1 Scope................................................ ................................................................ ..... 267
31.2 Test Conditions ................................................. ................................................ 267
31.3 Dynamic response ........................................... ................................................................ .. 267
31.4 Load effects.................................................. ................................................................ .... 267
31.4.1 Average repetition interval of load effect............................................ ........267

31.4.2 Wind speed limitations............................................ ................................ 267
31.4.3 Wind direction.................................................. ................................................................ .......... 267
31.4.4 Limitations on loads ............................................ ............................................ 268

31.5 Windborne debris ................................................ ................................................ 268
31.6 Roof-mounted solar collectors for roof slopes of less than 7°.... 268
31.6.1 Wind tunnel test requirements............................................ ......................... 269
31.6.1.1 Wind load limitations for rooftop solar collectors............................................ 269
31.6.1.2 Peer review requirements for wind tunnel tests of roof-mounted solar
collectors................................. ................................................ 269
31.7 Consensus standards and other referenced documents ......................... 270
APPENDIX C ................................................. ................................................................ ............... 271
Serviceability considerations................................................ ................................... 271

C.1 Serviceability considerations ................................................ .......................... 271
C.2 Deflection,driftand vibration ................................................ ......................................... 271
C.2.1 Vertical deflection ................................................ ................................................................ 271
C.2.2 Driftwalls and frames................................................ ...................................... 271
© BSN 2020 xiv

SNI 1727:2020
C.2.3 Vibration ................................................. ................................................................ ..............271
C.3 Design for long term deflection.................................................. .........................271

C.4 Fight slime ................................................ ................................................................ .......271
C.5 Expansion and contraction.............................................. ..........................................272
C.6 Durability ................................................ ................................................................ ...........272
ATTACHMENT CC ................................................. ................................................................ .............273
Serviceability considerations ................................................ ...................................273

CC.1 Serviceability considerations................................................ ........................273
CC.2 Deflection, vibration and deviation............................................ ............................274
CC.2.1 Vertical deflection ................................................ ................................................274
CC.2.2 Driftfrom walls and frames ................................................ ............................275
CC.2.3 Vibration ................................................. ................................................................ ...........276
CC.3 Design for long-term deflection ............................................ ................277

CC.4 Fight slime................................................ ................................................................ .....277
CC.5 Expansion and contraction ................................................ ................................................277

CC.6 Durability ................................................ ................................................................ ........278
C3 Dead load, soil load and hydrostatic pressure ........................................... .......280
C3.1 Dead load.................................................. ................................................................ ............280
C4 Live load................................................ ................................................................ ...........284

C4.3 Live load evenly distributed ........................................... ............................284
C4.3.1 Required live load............................................ ................................284
C4.7 Reduction in uniform live load .......................................... ..........................287
C4.7.1 General ................................................. ................................................................ ............287
C4.7.3 High live load ................................................ ................................................289

C4.7.4 Passenger vehicle garage................................................ ..........................290
C4.7.6 Restrictions on one-way slabs ................................................ .........................290
C4.8 Reduction in roof live load .......................................... ................................291
C4.8.2 Ordinary roofs, awnings and canopies ........................................... ............................291
C4.8.3 Occupied roof .................................................. ................................................291

C4.9 Crane load ................................................ ................................................................ ......291
C4.11 Load on helipad ................................................ ................................291
C4.11.1 General ................................................. ................................................................ ..........291
C4.11.2 Centralized helicopter load ................................................ ................................292

C4.13 Library stacking cupboard room .................................................. ................292
C4.14 Stand for assembly use ................................................ ...............292
C4.17 Solar panel load................................................ ................................................292
© BSN 2020 xv
SNI 1727:2020
C4.17.1 Roof load on solar panels............................................ .......................... 292

C4.17.3 Open grid roof structure supporting solar panels .......................................... 292
APPENDIX D ................................................ ................................................................ ............... 295
Buildings are exempt from cases of wind torsion loads ................................... 295
D.1 Scope ................................................ ................................................................ ..... 295
D.2 One and two storey buildings that meet the following requirements..... 295
D.3 Buildings controlled by seismic loads................................. 295
D.3.1 Buildings with inflexible diaphragms at all levels............... 295
D.3.2 Buildings with flexible diaphragms at every level..................... 295
D.4 Buildings are classified as regular against torsion due to loads
wind 295
D.5 Buildings with flexible diaphragms and designed for increased wind
loads .................................... ................................................................ ................................ 296
D.6 Class 1 and Class 2 simple diaphragm buildings withh≤ 160 ft (48.8 m) meets the
following requirements (see Article 27.5.2) ................................. ..................... 296
D.6.1 Case A — Class 1 and class 2 buildings ....................................... 296
D.6.2 Case B — Class 1 and class 2 buildings. ...................................... 296
D.6.3 Case C — Class 1 and class 2 buildings.................................. 296
D.6.4 Case D — Class 1 and class 2 buildings.................................. 297
D.6.5 Case E — class 1 and class 2 buildings ...................................... 297
D.6.6 Case F — Class 1 building ........................................... ................ 297
Appendix E................................................ ................................................................ ................... 299
Performance-based design procedures for fire effects on structures............................ 299

E.1 Scope................................................ ................................................................ ...... 299
E.2 Definition ................................................ ................................................................ ................ 299
E.3 General requirement ................................................ ................................................ 300
E.4 Performance plan ................................................ ................................................................ .. 300
E.4.1 Structural integrity................................................ ................................................ 300
E.4.2 Project specific performance plans................................................ .......................... 301
E.5 Thermal analysis of fire effects............................................ ............................ 301
E.5.1 Fuel load ................................................ ................................................ 301
E.5.2 Fire for structural design ................................................ ......................... 301
E.5.3 Heat transfer analysis................................................ ................................................ 301
E.6 Structural analysis of fire effects ........................................... ................................ 301
E.6.1 Temperature history for structural components and connections ...................... 301
E.6.2 Temperature dependent properties.............................................. .................. 302
© BSN 2020 xvi

SNI 1727:2020
E.6.3 Load combinations ................................................ ................................................................ ,302
Supporting information regarding standard formulators ................................................ .....................0
List of Figures
Figure 5.4-1 - Pressure of a breaking wave coming perpendicular to a vertical

wall ................................... ................................................................ .........................................44
(space behind dry vertical wall) ........................................... ............................44
Figure 5.4-2 - Pressure of a breaking wave coming perpendicular to a vertical
wall ................................... ................................................................ .........................................44
(instantaneous water level on both sides of the wall is the same) ............................................ ..........................44
Figure 6.2-1 - Illustration of key definitions along a flow transect in the tsunami design
zone ................................. ................................................................ ..........................................47
Figure 6.5-1 - Ratiorunup R/HQ, as a function of the mean slope of the parameters
similaritysurf,-,where
100 map submergence boundaries do not exist .......................................57
Figure 6.6-1 - Energy method for tsunami immersion depth and velocity over
land.................................. ................................................................ ................................60
Figure 6.7-2 - Illustration of incoming tsunami waveform parameters offshore at a
depth of 328 ft (100 m) ................................ ................................................................ ........63
Figure 6.8-1 - Soaking load of load cases 2 and 3 ...................................... ...........69
Figure 6.11-1 - Illustration of determining the hazard area by impact of floating debris [1 ft
= 0.3048 m] ........................... ................................................................ ................................84
Figure 6.12-1 - Scour depth caused by continuous flow and softening of pore pressure
[1 ft = 0.305 m] ........................... ................................................88
Figure 6.12-2 - Scour parametersplunging................................................................ ..............89
Figure 6.14-1 - Minimum refuge level elevation [1 ft=0.305 m] ..........................93

Figure 26.1-1 - Outline of the process for determining wind loads..................................100
Figure 26.8-1 - Topographic factors,Kzt................................................................ ..........................114
Figure 27.3-1 - Main Wind Force Resisting System, Part 1 (entire height): external
pressure coefficient,Cp,for closed buildings and buildings partially covered with walls
and roofs ............................................ ................................................................ ...130
Figure 27.3-2 - Main Wind Force Resisting System, Part 1 (all heights): external pressure
coefficient, Cp , for enclosed and partially enclosed buildings and
structures................. ................................................................ ......................................132
dome roof with circular base.................................................. ................................132
Figure 27.3-3 - Main Wind Force Resisting System and Components and Clading, Part 1
(all heights): external pressure coefficient,Cp,for closed and partially covered buildings
and structures with curved roofs.................................................. ....133
© BSN 2020 xvii

SNI 1727:2020
Figure 27.3-4 - Main Wind Force Resisting System, Part 1 (0.25 ≤h/L≤ 1.0): net pressure
coefficient,CN, for open buildings with sloping roofs
unilateral without walls, θ ≤ 45°,--0o , 180°) ................................................ ............... 134
coefficient,CN,for open buildings with regular gable roofs
without walls, θ ≤ 45°,--0o , 180° .................................................. ............................. 135
coefficient,CN,for open buildings with gable roofs
inverted without walls, θ ≤ 45°,--0o , 180° .................................................. ................ 136
coefficient,CN,for open buildings with no roof
wall, θ ≤ 45°,--90o , 270° .................................................. ..................................... 137
Figure 27.3-8 - Main Wind Force Resisting System, Part 1 (entire height): design wind
load case ................................ ................................................................ ............... 138
Figure 27.4-1 - Main Wind Force Resisting System, Part 2 [h ≤ 160 ft (h ≤ 48.8
m)]:.................... ................................................................ .......................................... 142
building class for closed simple diaphragm buildings (building geometry
requirements) ................................... ................................. 142
Figure 27.5-1 - Main Wind Force Resisting System, Part 2 [h≤ 160 ft (h≤ 48.8 m)]: closed
simple diaphragm building, wind pressure, walls and roof
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Figure 27.5-2 - Main Wind Force Resisting System, Part 2 [h≤ 160 ft (h≤ 48.8 m)]: closed
simple diaphragm building, parapet wind load .............. 143
Figure 27.5-3 - Main Wind Force Resisting System, Part 2: closed simple diaphragm
building, console roof wind load .......................... ................... 144
Figure 28.3-1 - Main Wind Force Resisting System, Part 1 [h≤ 60 ft. (h≤ 18.3m)]: external
pressure coefficient, (GCpf), closed and partially covered buildings with low-rise walls
and roofs..................................... .......................................... 171
Figure 28.3-2 - Horizontal wind loads in open or partially closed buildings with
transverse trusses and gable roofs: definition ........................... .......... 173
geometric terminology ................................................ ................................................................ .. 173
Figure 28.5-1 - Main Wind Force Resisting System, Part 2 [h≤ 60 ft (h≤ 18.3 m)]: design
wind pressure for buildings covered with walls and roofs................... 178
Figure 29.3-1 - Design wind load (entire height): force coefficient,Cf, for other structures
freestanding solid walls and freestanding guide panels.................. 187
Figure 29.4-1 - Other structures (entire height): force coefficient,Cf,for chimneys, tanks
and similar structures ............................................ ................................. 189
Figure 29.4-2 - Other structures (entire height): force coefficient,Cf, for open guide
panels and single plane open frames.................................................. ........... 190
© BSN 2020 xviii

SNI 1727:2020
Figure 29.4-3 - Other structures (entire height): force coefficient,Cf, for open structures
of truss towers ........................................... ..........................................191
Figure 29.4-4 - Other structures, design wind loads for main wind force resisting
systems [h<120 ft (h<36.6 m)]: containers (bins), silos and tanks of round cross-section
at ground level or supported by columns, withD≤ 120 ft (D≤ 36.6 m), 0.25 ≤H/D<
4.0 ................................................ ................................................................ ....................192
Linear interpolation must be permitted. ................................................................ ................................195
Figure 29.4-5 - Other structures, design wind loads for Main Wind Force Resisting System [h
< 120 ft (h < 36.6 m)]: external pressure coefficient .................................. .....195
, Cp, for insulated roofs of containers (bins), silos and tanks of round section, with D ≤
120 ft (D ≤ 36.6 m), 0.25 ≤ H/D < 4.0................................................ ..........195
Figure 29.4-6 - Other structures, design loads for main wind force resisting systems [h < 120
ft (h<36, 6 m)]: drag force coefficient, ....................................... ..........................196
Cf,and roof pressure coefficient,Cp, for containers (bins), silos and tanks of round cross-
section grouped at ground level or supported by columns, with......196
D≤ 120 ft (D≤ 36.6 m), 0.25 ≤H/D<4.0, and center to center distance ≤ 1.25.................196
Figure 29.4-7 - Design wind load (entire height): rooftop solar panels for enclosed and
partially enclosed buildings, roof θ ≤ 7°.................... ................197
Figure 29.4-8 - Solar panel array pressure equalization factor, γa , for enclosed and
partially enclosed buildings over all heights .......................... ..........198
Figure 30.3-1 - Components and Clading [h≤ 60 ft (h≤ 18.3 m)]: external pressure
coefficient, (GCp),for closed buildings and partially enclosed walls...205
Figure 30.3-2A - Components and Clading [h≤ 60 ft (h≤18.3 m)]: external pressure
coefficient, (GCp), for closed buildings and partially covered gable roofs, θ ≤
7° ................................. ................................................................ ................................................206
Figure 30.3-2B - Components and Clading [h≤ 60 ft (h≤ 18.3 m)]: external pressure
coefficient, (GCp), for enclosed and partially enclosed buildings—gable roof, 7° < θ ≤
20°............................................ ................................................................ .....................207
Figure 30.3-2C - Components and Clading [h≤ 60 ft (h ≤ 18.3 m)]: external pressure
coefficient, (GCp), for closed and partially covered gable roof buildings, 20° < θ ≤
27°................................................ ................................................................ ...................208
Figure 30.3-2D - Components and Clading [h≤ 60 ft (h≤18.3 m)]: external pressure
coefficient, (GCp), for closed and partially gabled buildings, 27° <θ≤
45°................................................ ................................................................ ................209
Figure 30.3-2E - Components and Clading [h≤ 60 ft (h≤ 18.3 m)]: external pressure
coefficient, (GCp), for closed and partially covered buildings with shield roofs, 7° < θ ≤ 20°
(roof) ........................................... ................................................................ ..........................210
Figure 30.3-2F - Components and Clading [h≤ 60 ft (h≤ 18.3 m)]: external pressure
coefficient, (GCp), for closed and partially covered buildings with shield roofs, 7° <θ≤ 20°
(console) ............................................ ................................................................ .........................211
© BSN 2020 xix

SNI 1727:2020
Figure 30.3-2G - Components and Clading [h≤ 60 ft (h≤ 18.3 m)]: external pressure
coefficient, (GCp), for closed and partially covered buildings with shield roofs, 20° <θ ≤ 27°
(roof and console)............................................ ................................................................ ...... 212
Figure 30.3-2H - Components and Clading [h≤ 60 ft (h≤ 18.3 m)]: external pressure
coefficient, (GCp), for closed and partially shielded buildings, 27° <θ ≤ 45°
(roof) ............................................ ................................................................ ...................... 213
Figure 30.3-2I - Components and Clading [h≤ 60 ft (h≤ 18.3 m)]: external pressure
coefficient, (GCp), for closed and partially shielded buildings, 27° <θ≤ 45°
(console) ............................................ ................................................................ ...................... 214
Figure 30.3-3 - Components and Clading [h≤ 60 ft (h≤ 18.3 m)]: external pressure coefficient,
(GCp), for closed buildings and partially covered multi-storey
roofs ....................................... ................................................................ ................................ 215
Figure 30.3-4 - Components and Clading [h≤ 60 ft (h≤ 18.3 m)]: external pressure
coefficient, (GCp), for closed and partially covered buildings with multi-span gable
roofs ..................................... ................................................................ ...................... 216
Figure 30.3-5A - Components and Clading [h≤ 60 ft (h≤ 18.3 m)]: external pressure
coefficient, (GCp), for closed and partially covered buildings with unilateral sloping roofs, 3°
< θ ≤ 10°............................................ ................................................................ ...... 217
Figure 30.3-5B - Components and Clading [h≤ 60 ft (h≤ 18.3 m)]: external pressure
coefficient, (GCp), for closed and partially covered buildings with unilateral sloping roofs,
10° < θ ≤ 30° ................................................ ................................................................ ... 218
Figure 30.3-6 - Components and Clading [h≤ 60 ft (h≤ 18.3 m)]: external pressure coefficient, (GCp), for closed and partially covered buildings saw
roofs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
219
Figure 30.3-7 - Components and Clading (all heights): external pressure coefficient, (GCp), for closed buildings and partially covered dome
roofs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
220
Figure 30.4-1 - Components and Clading, Part 2 [h≤ 60 ft (h≤ 18.3 m)]: ............... 222
design wind pressure for enclosed buildings—walls and roofs................ 222
Figure 30.5-1 - Components and Clading, Part 3 [h >60 ft (h >18.3 m)]: external pressure coefficient,
(GCp), for enclosed and partially enclosed buildings with walls and
roofs ..... ................................................................ ................................................................ ......................... 235
Figure 30.6-1 - Components and Clading, Part 4 [h≤ 160 ft (h≤ 18.3 m)]: parapet wind
load for closed simple diaphragm buildings application of parapet wind
load ......................... ................................................................ ....................... 248
Figure 30.6-2 - Components and Clading, Part 4 [h ≤ 160 ft (h ≤ 18.3 m)]: roof console
wind loads for simple closed diaphragm buildings application of roof console wind
loads......... ................................................................ ..................................... 248
Figure 30.7-1 - Components and Clading (0.25 ≤h∕L≤ 1.0): net pressure coefficient,CN,
for open buildings with unilateral free-sloping roofs, θ ≤ 45° ........................ 252
Figure 30.7-2 - Components and Clading (0.25 ≤h∕L≤ 1.0): net pressure coefficient,CN
, for open buildings with free slatted roofs, θ ≤45° ......................... 253
© BSN 2020 xx
SNI 1727:2020
Figure 30.7-3 - Components and Clading (0.25 ≤h∕L≤ 1.0): net pressure coefficient,CN
, for open buildings with concave-free roofs, θ ≤ 45° ...................................254
Figure 30.8-1 - Components and Clading, Part 6 (all building heights): parapet wind
loads, all building types parapet wind loads 255
Figure 30.9-1 - Components and Clading (all building heights): roof console wind loads
for all building types C&K wind loads on roof
consoles.................. ................................................................ ................................................................ ...........25
Figure 30.11-1A - Pressure coefficient on separate surfaces of a connected
canopy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Figure 30.11-1B - Net pressure coefficient on a connected canopy considering

simultaneous contributions from the top and bottom surfaces ..........258
Figure 30.12-1 - Components and Clading [h≤ 120 ft (h≤ 36.6 m)]: external compression
coefficient, (GCp), for the walls of the container (son), silos, and insulated round-section
tanks withD<120 ft (36.6 m) and 0.25 <H∕D<4.0 other structures .....................262
coefficient, (GCp),for the roof of the container (son), silos, and round-section tanks i
insulated withD<120 ft (36.6 m) and 0.25 <H∕D<4.0 other structures .....................263
G ................................................................ ................................................................ ................................265
figure 30.12-3 - Components and Clading [h≤ 120 ft (h≤ 36.6 m)]: external compression
coefficient, (GCp), for roofs of containers (bins), silos and round-section tanks in groups with
D<120 ft (D<36.6 m) and 0.25 <H/D<4.0 (center to center distance < 1.25D) other
structures................................................ ................................................................ ....265
coefficient, (GCp), for the walls of the container (son), silos, and round-section tanks
grouped withD<120 ft (D<36.6 m) and 0.25 <H/D<4.0 (center to center distance < 1.25D)
other structures................................................ ................................................................ ....266
Figure C4.7-1 - Area of influence and size of typical tributary..................................... ........289
Figure D.6-1 - Main Wind Force Resisting System, Appendix D (h ≤ 160 ft) (48.8 m):
SPGAU Requirements for Case E for Enclosed Simple Diaphragm Buildings. For
Exceptions to Twisting Due to Wind Loads, see Figure 27.3-8 .........298
Figure D.6-2 - Main Wind Force Resisting System, Appendix D (h ≤ 160 ft) (48.8 m):
SPGAU Requirements from Case F for Enclosed Simple Diaphragm Buildings. For
Exceptions to Twisting Due to Wind Loads, see Figure 27.3-8. ........................298
© BSN 2020 xxi

SNI 1727:2020
list of Tables
Table 4.3-1 - Minimum evenly distributed live load,Loand minimum concentrated live
load.................................................. ................................................................ ............................ 26
Table 4.3-1 (Continued) - Minimum uniformly distributed live load, Lo and minimum concentrated live
load ................................ ................................................................ ............................ 27
Table 4.3-1 (Continued) - Minimum uniformly distributed live load,Loand minimum concentrated
live load ................................................ ................................................................ ............. 28
Table 4.3-1 (Continued) - Minimum uniformly distributed live load,Loand minimum concentrated
live load ................................................ ................................................................ ............. 29
Table 27.5-1 (Continued) - Main Wind Force Resisting Systems, Part 2 [h≤ 160 ft (h≤ 48.8
m)]: .......................................... ................................................................ ............................. 145
simple diaphragm building closed wall wind pressure .................... 145
m)]: .......................................... ................................................................ ............................. 146
m)]: .......................................... ................................................................ ............................. 147
Table 27.5-2 (Continued) - Main Wind Force Resisting Systems, Part 2 [h≤ 160 ft (h≤
48.8m)]: simple diaphragm closed building roof wind pressure .......... 149
m)]: .......................................... ................................................................ ............................. 150
simple diaphragm building covered by roof wind pressure.................................. 150
Exposure C:h=140 – 160 ft,V=110-120 mi/h............................................ .............. 150
m)]: .......................................... ................................................................ ............................. 151
m)]: .......................................... ................................................................ ............................. 152
m)]: .......................................... ................................................................ ............................. 153
simple diaphragm building covered by roof wind pressure.................. 153
© BSN 2020 xxii

SNI 1727:2020
m)]:............................................ ................................................................ ................................154
simple diaphragm building covered with roof wind pressure .........................154
Exposure C:h=110 – 130 ft,V=130-150 mi/h ............................................ ..............154
m)]:............................................ ................................................................ ............................155
Exposure C:h=110 – 130 ft,V=160-200 mi/h ............................................ ..............155
m)]:............................................ ................................................................ ................................156
Exposure C:h=80 – 100 ft,V=110-120 mi/h ............................................ ................156
m)]:............................................ ................................................................ ................................157
m)]:............................................ ................................................................ ................................158
m)]:............................................ ................................................................ ............................159
Exposure C:h=50 – 70 ft,V=110-120 mi/h ............................................ .................159
m)]:............................................ ................................................................ ................................160
simple diaphragm buildings covered with roof wind pressure .........................160
m)]:............................................ ................................................................ ................................161
m)]:............................................ ................................................................ ............................162
m)]:............................................ ................................................................ ................................163
© BSN 2020 xxiii

SNI 1727:2020

Exposure C:h=20 – 40 ft,V=130-150 mi/h ............................................ .................. 163
m)]: .......................................... ................................................................ ............................. 164
exposure c:h=20 – 40 ft,v=160-200 mi/h............................................ .................... 164
m)]: .......................................... ................................................................ ............................. 165
Exposure C:h=15ft,V=110-120 mi/h ............................................ .......................... 165
m)]: .......................................... ................................................................ ............................. 166
simple diaphragm building covered with roof wind pressure........................... 166
m)]: .......................................... ................................................................ ............................. 167
Table 30.6-2 (Continued) - Components and Clading, Part 4 [h≤ 160 ft (h≤ 48.8 m)]: K&K
zone for roof and wall pressure closed buildings K&K ............ 240
zone for closed buildings—roof and wall pressure K&K........... 241
zone for roof and wall pressure-closed buildings K&K ............. 242
zone for roof and wall pressure closed buildings K&K.............. 246
zone for pressure-covered buildings K&K roofs and walls.............. 247
Table C3.1-1 (Continued) Table C3.1-1 - Minimum design dead load (kN∕m2)a........... 281
Table C3.1-1 (Continued) - Minimum design dead load (kN∕m2)a................................. 282
Table C3.1-2 (Continued) - Minimum density for design load of material ......... 283
Table C3.1-2 (Continued) - Minimum density for design load of material ......... 284
© BSN 2020 xxiv

SNI 1727:2020
Foreword
Indonesian National Standard (SNI) 1727:2020 with the title "Minimum design loads
and related criteria for buildings and other structures" is a revision of SNI 1727:2013,
Minimum loads for the design of buildings and other structures and referring to ASCE
7-16,Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures
. The translation is carried out in accordance with what is required for the loading
conditions of buildings and other structures in Indonesia. Snow loads and ice loads
have not been accommodated in this standard, while earthquake loads are regulated in
SNI 1726.
This Indonesian National Standard (SNI) was prepared by the Building Construction Materials
and Civil Engineering Technical Committee through the Building Materials Working Group at the
Building Materials, Science, Structure and Construction Technical Subcommittee. The writing
procedure is prepared following BSN Head Regulation Number 4 of 2016 concerning Guidelines
for Writing Indonesian National Standards (SNI), which was discussed in the Consensus Meeting
forum on 24 September 2018 at the Housing and Settlement Research and Development Center.
This consensus meeting forum was attended by representatives from producers, consumers,
associations, research institutions, universities and related government agencies.
If users encounter doubts about this standard, they are advised to look at the original
standard, namely ASCE 7-16, and/or other related documents that accompany it.
This standard has gone through the opinion poll stage from 23 December 2019 to 20
February 2020, with the final result being approved as SNI.
It should be noted that it is possible that some elements of this standard document
may constitute patent rights. The National Standardization Agency is not responsible
for identifying any or all existing patent rights.
© BSN 2020 xxv

SNI 1727:2020
Minimum design loads and related criteria for buildings and structures
other structures
1 General
1.1 Scope
This standard contains minimum loads, hazard levels, related criteria, and expected
performance targets for buildings, other structures and their non-structural
components that meet building code requirements. The loads, load combinations and
related criteria given in this standard shall be used for design by strength methods or
design by allowable stress methods contained in design specifications for conventional
structural materials. The design combination of loading and strength is considered
capable of providing the level of performance expected in the provisions of this
standard. Procedures for implementing alternative means to demonstrate acceptable
performance are also described in this standard.
1.2 Definitions and symbols
1.2.1 Definition
The following terms and definitions apply to all provisions in the standard.
allowable stress design

method of designing structural components in which the calculated elastic stresses due to
nominal loads do not exceed the specified allowable stresses (also called working stress
design)
authorized party
agencies, bodies or individuals responsible for regulating and enforcing the provisions
of this standard
building
a structure enclosed by walls and a roof, built to protect its occupants
design strength
the product of the nominal strength by the endurance factor
focused nonstructural system

non-structural components or systems that are important in accordance with the
expected function of structures in Risk Category IV or that are important for life safety
in structures that fall into other risk categories
important facilities
Buildings and other structures that are planned to remain functional in conditions of
extreme environmental loads such as due to floods, wind, snow or earthquakes
factored load
the product of the nominal load by the load factor
© BSN 2020 1 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
highly toxic substance

as stipulated in Ministerial Regulations or Decrees dealing with environmental affairs
priority factor
factors that contribute to the degree of risk to human life, health and well-being
associated with damage to property or loss of use or function
boundary conditions
conditions where a structure or structural component is no longer suitable for service and
is decided not to be used anymore according to its intended function (serviceability limit
conditions) or unsafe conditions (strength limit conditions)
load effect
forces and deformations produced in structural components due to applied loads.
load factor
factors that take into account deviations of actual loads from nominal loads, i.e.
uncertainties in the analysis that convert loads into load effects, and to account for the
possibility of more than one extreme load occurring simultaneously
burden
forces or other actions due to the weight of all building materials, occupants and
belongings, environmental effects, differences in movement, and restraint forces due
to changes in dimensions. Permanent loads are loads whose variations over time are
very rare or small. All other loads are variable loads (see also "nominal loads")
nominal load
The magnitude of the load required in this standard is for dead, live, soil, wind, snow, rain,
flood and earthquake loads
nominal power
the ability of a structure or structural component to withstand the effects of loads,
which is calculated using the required material strength as well as dimensions and
formulas derived from recognized principles of engineering mechanics or through field
test results or laboratory test results from scaled models, which take into account
differences between conditions laboratory and field
residential function
the intended use of the building or other structure, or parts thereof, for which it is used
or is planned to be used
other structures
structures, other than buildings, where the loads are specified in this standard
P-Delta effect
second order effects on shear forces and moments of frame structural components
resulting from axial loads on frame structures experiencing lateral displacement
© BSN 2020 2 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
performance-based procedures
an alternative to the prescriptive procedures set forth in this standard whose level of
performance is demonstrated through project-specific engineering analysis, optionally
supplemented by limited testing, to determine the reliability of an individual building or
structure
resilience factor
a factor that takes into account the deviation of actual strength from nominal strength
(also called strength reduction factor).
risk category
categorization of buildings and other structures for determination of flood, wind, snow, ice
and earthquake loads based on risks associated with unacceptable performance. See Table
1.5-1
service load
loads acting on a building or other structure due to (1) self-weight and additional dead
loads, (2) live loads assumed to exist during normal occupancy or use of the building or
other structure, (3) environmental loads expected to occur during its service life
defined for buildings or other structures, and (4) force and strain effects themselves.
Service live loads and environmental loads for certain limit conditions are permitted to
be less than the design loads required in the standard. The service load must be
identified for each serviceability condition being investigated
design using the strength method

a method that proportions structural components in such a way that the calculated
forces due to factored loads do not exceed the design strength (also called design with
load factors and resistance factors)
temporary facilities
buildings or other structures that are normally used for a limited time and that have a
limited period of exposure to environmental loads
toxic substance
as stipulated in the Ministerial Regulation/Kepmen of the Ministry of the Environment.
1.2.2 Symbols
D = Dead load.
Fx = Minimum design lateral force applied to the levelxof structure and use
for the purpose of evaluating structural integrity according to Article 1.4.2.
L = Live load.
Lr = Roof live load.
N = Notional load for structural integrity. =
R Rainwater load.
S = Snow load.
x = Part of the total dead load of the structure,D,that is situated or worn on a level
x.
© BSN 2020 3 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
1.3 Basic requirements
1.3.1 Strength and stiffness
Buildings and other structures, and all parts thereof, shall be designed and constructed
with sufficient strength and rigidity to provide structural stability, protect nonstructural
components and systems, and meet the serviceability requirements of Article 1.3.2.
Acceptable strength must be demonstrated using one or more of the following

procedures:
1. Power procedures Article 1.3.1.1,
2. Permissible stress procedures Article 1.3.1.2, or
3. Fulfill approval from regulatory authorities for individual projects, performance-
based procedures Article 1.3.1.3.
It is permitted to use alternative procedures for different parts of a structure and for
different load combinations, meeting the limitations of Article 2. When resistance to
extraordinary events is taken into account, the procedures of Article 2.5 shall be used.
1.3.1.1 Strength procedures
Structural and nonstructural components and their connections must have adequate
strength to withstand the load combinations applicable to Article 2.3 of this standard
without exceeding the strength limit conditions applicable to construction materials.
1.3.1.2 Permissible stress procedures
Structural and nonstructural components and their connections must have adequate
strength to withstand the load combinations applicable to Article 2.4 of this standard
without exceeding the permissible stresses applicable to the construction materials.
1.3.1.3 Performance-based procedures
Structural and non-structural components and their connections designed using

performance-based procedures must be demonstrated by analysis in accordance with
Article 2.3.6 or by analytical procedures supplemented by tests to provide reliability
that generally corresponds to the target reliability specified in this Article. Structural
and non-structural components that bear dead, live, environmental and other loads
except earthquakes, tsunamis, floods and loads from extraordinary events must be
based on the target reliability in Table 1.3-1. Structural systems that resist earthquakes
must be based onreliabilitytargets in Table 1.3-2 and Table 1.3-3. The analytical
procedures used must take into account uncertainties in loading and resistance.
© BSN 2020 4 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Table 1.3-1 - Target reliability (annual failure probability,PF) and the associated
reliability index (β)1for load conditions that do not include earthquakes, tsunamis,
or extraordinary events2
Risk Category
Base
I II III IV
Failure that is not PF=1.25x10-4/yr PF=3.0x10-5/yr PF=1.25x10-5/yr PF=5.0x10-6/yr
suddenly or not
lead to -=2.5 -=3.0 -=3.25 -=3.5
progressive damage
which spreads
That failure PF=3.0x10-5/yr PF=5.0x10-6/yr PF=2.0x10-6/yr PF=7.0x10-7/yr

suddenly or
lead to -=3.0 -=3.5 -=3.75 -=4.0
progressive damage
which spreads
That failure PF=5.0x10-6/yr PF=7.0x10-7/yr PF=2.5x10-7/yr PF=1.0x10-7/yr

suddenly and
result -=3.5 -=4.0 -=4.25 -=4.5
progressive damage
which spreads
1The target reliability index is given for a Reference period of 50 years, and the annual probability of failure.
The equations presented in Article 2.3.6 are based on a 50-year reliability index because the load
combination requirements in Article 2.3.2 are based on the maximum load for a 50-year Reference period.
2The Explanation to Article 2.5 includes References to publications describing the historical development of
the reliability of these targets.
Table 1.3-2 - Target reliability (conditional failure probability) for stability

structural damage due to earthquake
Conditional probability of failure due to shock hazardMCER

Risk category
(%)
I & II 10
III 5
IV 2.5
Table 1.3-3 - Target reliability (conditional failure probability) for

normal non-critical structural components resulting from earthquakes
Conditional failure probability of a component or anchor resulting from

Risk category
danger of shockMCER(%)
I & II 25
III 15
IV 9
The test methods in Article 1.3.1.3.2 apply only to individual projects and shall not be
applied to the development of material resistance values for general use in structural
systems.
Structures and non-structural components must meet the serviceability and function
requirements in Article 1.3.2 and Article 1.3.3.
Performance-based design provisions for structures experiencing tsunamis must meet the
requirements of Article 6.
© BSN 2020 5 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
1.3.1.3.1 Analysis
The analysis will use rational methods based on common principles of engineering
mechanics and will consider all significant sources of deformation and resistance.
Assumptions of stiffness, strength, damping and other properties of components and
connections included in the analysis must be based on approved test data or
referenced Standards.
1.3.1.3.2 Testing
Tests used to support the performance capabilities of structural and nonstructural

components and their connections under loading must accurately represent the
material, configuration, construction, loading intensity, and boundary conditions
anticipated in the structure. If an industry standard is approved or a practice governing
the testing of similar components is available, the test program and determination of
design values from the test program must be in accordance with industry standards
and practice. Where such standards or practices do not exist, specimens should be
constructed to the same scale as the intended application unless it can be
demonstrated that the effect of scale is not significant to the demonstrated
performance. Evaluation of test results should be made on the basis of values
obtained from not less than 3 tests, provided that the deviation of each value obtained
from any single test does not differ from the average value for all tests by more than
15%. If the deviation from the average value for any test exceeds 15 %, additional tests
must be performed until the deviation of any test from the average value does not
exceed 15 % or a minimum of 6 tests have been performed. Tests will not be eliminated
unless a reason for Exclusion is provided. The test report should document the
location, time and date of the test, characteristics of the specimen tested, laboratory
facilities, test configuration, applied loading and deformation due to the load, and the
occurrence of any damage demonstrated by the specimen, together with the loading
and deformation at which the damage occurred. happen.
1.3.1.3.3 Documentation
The procedures used to demonstrate compliance with this Article and the results of
analyzes and tests must be documented in one or more reports submitted to the
Competent Authority and to the independent reviewer.
1.3.1.3.4 Overview
The procedures and results of analysis, tests and calculations used to demonstrate
compliance with the requirements of this Article must be subject to independent
review approved by the competent authority. The assessment includes one or more
persons who have the skills and knowledge necessary to evaluate compliance,
including knowledge of the expected performance, structural and component
behavior, specific loads calculated, structural analyzes of the type performed,
construction materials, and element and component testing laboratories for determine
structural durability and performance characteristics. The review should include
assumptions, criteria, procedures, calculations, analysis models, test setup, test data,
final drawings and reports. Upon satisfactory completion, the reviewer must submit a
letter to the appropriate authority indicating the scope of the study and its findings.
© BSN 2020 6 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
1.3.2 Serviceability
Structural systems, and their components, must be designed to have sufficient stiffness
to limit deflection, lateral drift, vibration, or other deformation due to service loads that
affect the use and performance of buildings and other structures based on the
requirements specified in applicable regulations and standards, or as required in the
project design criteria.
1.3.3 Function
Structural systems and structural components and connections in Risk Category IV

must be designed with a reasonable probability of having sufficient structural strength
and stiffness to limit deflection, lateral drift, or other deformation so that their behavior
will not prevent immediate functioning of the facility after one of the design
environmental hazard levels specified in this standard. Designated nonstructural
systems and their attachments to structures shall be designed with sufficient strength
and rigidity so that their behavior will not prevent immediate functioning of the facility
after any of the design environmental hazard levels specified in this standard.
Designated nonstructural system components shall be designed, qualified, or
protected such that they shall be demonstrated to be capable of performing their
critical functions after the facility has endured the design level environmental hazards
required in this standard.
The provisions in Article 1.3.1.1 and Article 1.3.1.2 in this standard are deemed to fulfill the
requirements of this Article.
1.3.4 Gaya and the effects of self-strain
Provisions must be made to anticipate self-straining forces and their effects arising from
differences in foundation settlement that occur and dimensional changes due to
temperature, water content, shrinkage, creep and other similar effects.
1.3.5 Analysis
The effect of loads on each structural component must be determined using structural
analysis methods that take into account balance, stability, geometric compatibility,
short-term and long-term material properties. Structural components that tend to
experience cumulative deformation under repeated workloads must take into account
the eccentricities that occur during the service life of the building.
1.3.6 Opposing structural action
All structural components and structural systems, as well as all structural systems in
components and cladding of buildings and other structures, must be designed to withstand
forces due to earthquakes and winds, taking into account the effects of overturning, sliding
and lifting forces, and continuous load paths must be provided to distribute the load. –the
load to the foundation. When shear strength is used to isolate elements, the effect of
friction between the elements must be taken into account as a force. If all or part of this
resisting force is obtained due to dead load, the dead load must be taken as the minimum
dead load. Vertical and horizontal deflections due to these forces must be taken into
account.
© BSN 2020 7 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
1.3.7 Fire resistance
Structural fire resistance must be provided in accordance with the requirements specified in
the applicable building regulations. Alternatively, the performance-based design
procedures in Appendix E are permitted, if approved.
1.4 General structural integrity
All structures shall be provided with continuous load paths in accordance with the
requirements of Article 1.4.1 and shall have a complete lateral force resisting system of
sufficient strength to resist the forces indicated in Article 1.4.2. All structural components of
the structural system must be connected to the structural components in accordance with
Article 1.4.3. Structural walls shall be anchored to diaphragms and supporting elements in
accordance with Article 1.4.4. The effects on the structure and components resulting from
the forces specified in this Article shall be taken as notional loads,N, and combined with the
effects of other loads in accordance with load combinations Article 2.6. When material
resistance depends on the duration of the load, the notional load is permitted as a load
having a duration of 10 minutes. Structures designed in accordance with the requirements
of this standard for Seismic Design Categories B, C, D, E, or F shall be deemed to comply
with the requirements of Article 1.4.2, Article 1.4.3, and Article 1.4.4.
1.4.1 Load line connection
All parts of the structure between separation joints must be interconnected to form a
continuous path to the lateral force resisting system, and the joints must be capable of
transmitting the lateral forces caused by the connected parts. Any smallest part of the
structure shall be secured to the rest of the structure by a member having the strength
to withstand a force of not less than 5 % of the weight of that part.
1.4.2 Lateral forces
Each structure must be analyzed for the effects of static lateral forces applied
independently in each of the two orthogonal directions. In each direction, static lateral
forces at all levels must be applied simultaneously. For analysis purposes, the force at
each level must be determined using Equation 1.4 -1 as follows:
Fx=0.01Wx (1.4-1)
with
Fx = the design lateral force applied to the levelxAnd
Wx = part of the total dead load of the structure,D, which is located or worn at levelx.
Structures explicitly designed for stability, taking into account second-order effects,
shall be considered to meet the requirements of this Article.
1.4.3 Connections at supports
A positive connection that resists a horizontal force acting parallel to the structural
member must be provided on each beam, girder, or truss either directly with the
supporting elements or for slabs designed to work as a diaphragm. If the connection is
through a diaphragm, the structural components supporting the element must also be
connected to the diaphragm
© BSN 2020 8 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
the. Connections must have the strength to withstand a force equal to 5 percent of the
unfactored dead load plus the live load reaction imposed by the supporting structural
member on the supporting structural member.
1.4.4 Anchorage of structural walls
Walls that provide vertical load support or lateral shear resistance for that part of the
structure must be anchored to the roof and all floors and structural components that
provide lateral support for the wall or that are supported by the wall. Anchors must
provide a direct connection between the wall construction and the roof or floor
construction. Joints must be able to withstand a level of horizontal force perpendicular
to the plane of the wall equal to 0.2 times the weight of the wall attachment for the
joint, but not less than 5 psf (0.24 kN/m2).
1.4.5 Extraordinary expenses and events
When taken into account, the design for resistance to extraordinary loads and events must be in
accordance with the procedures of Article 2.5.
1.5 Classification of buildings and other structures
1.5.1 Risk categorization
Buildings and other structures shall be classified, based on the risks to human life,
health, and welfare associated with their damage or failure by the nature of occupancy
or use, according to Table 1.5-1 for purposes of applying the flood, wind, snow,
earthquake, and ice provisions. Each building or other structure must be assigned to
the applicable higher risk category or higher categories. Minimum design loads for
structures shall include the applicable essential factors in Table 1.5-2, as required by
other Articles of this Standard. It is permitted to apply a building or other structure to
several risk categories based on the type of load conditions being evaluated (e.g. snow
or seismic).
If building regulations or other referenced standards require an occupancy category,

the risk category cannot be taken lower than the occupancy category required therein.
© BSN 2020 9 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Table 1.5-1 - Risk categories of buildings and other structures for flood loads,
wind, snow, earthquake*, and ice
Use or utilization of functions Category

buildings and structures risk
Buildings and other structures that pose a low risk to human life in the event of I
failure
All buildings and other structures unless they are listed in risk categories I, III, II
and IV
Buildings and other structures, the failure of which can pose a major risk to III
human life.
Buildings and other structures, not included in risk category IV, with the
potential to cause substantial economic impact and/or mass disruption of day-
to-day civil life in the event of failure.
Buildings and other structures are not included in risk category IV (including,
but not limited to, facilities that manufacture, process, handle, store, use, or
dispose of substances such as hazardous fuels, hazardous chemicals, hazardous
waste, or explosives) containing toxic or explosive substances where the
quantity of the material exceeds a threshold amount established by the
competent authority and is sufficient to pose a threat to the public if releaseda
Buildings and other structures that are considered essential facilities. IV

Buildings and other structures, the failure of which could pose a major danger
to the public.
Buildings and other structures (including, but not limited to, facilities that
produce, process, handle, store, use, or dispose of hazardous substances such
as fuels, hazardous chemicals, or hazardous waste) that contain sufficient
quantities of the substance which is highly toxic where the quantity exceeds the
threshold amount set by the authorities and is sufficient to pose a threat to
society if releaseda.
Buildings and other structures required to maintain the function of risk category
IV other structures.
aBuildings and other structures containing toxic, highly toxic substances, or explosive materials shall qualify
for classification into a lower risk category if it satisfies the competent authority with a hazard assessment
as described in Article 1.5.3 that the release of the substance is commensurate with the risk involved.
related to risk categories.
Table 1.5-2 - Importance factors based on building risk categories

and other structures for snow, ice and earthquake loads
Category Factor Factor Factor Factor

risk the virtue of snow, priority of ice priority of ice priority
from is thickness, wind, seismic,
Table 1.5-1 ii iw ie
I 0.80 0.80 1.00 1.00
II 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
III 1.10 1.15 1.00 1.25
IV 1.20 1.25 1.00 1.50
NOTES Component priority factors,Ip, applicable to earthquake loads, not included
in this table because it depends on the importance of individual components rather than the
building as a whole, or its occupancy. Refer to Article 1.3.1.3.
© BSN 2020 10 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
1.5.2 Multiple risk categories
When a building or other structure is divided into sections by independent structural

systems, the classification for each section is permitted to be determined
independently. If building systems, such as required exits, HVAC (Heating, Ventilation,
and Air Conditioning), or electrical power, for a section with a higher risk category
passing through or depending on other parts of a building or other structure having a
lower risk category, these sections must be assigned to the higher risk category.
1.5.3 Toxic substances and highly toxic substances, and explosive substances
Buildings and other structures containing toxic, highly toxic or explosive substances
are classified as Category II structures if the toxic, highly toxic or explosive substances
can be proven by the competent authorities to meet the requirements of not
threatening public health.
To ensure the quality of this classification, owners or operators of buildings or other

structures that contain toxic, highly toxic or explosive substances must have a risk
management plan that establishes three minimum items, namely hazard mitigation,
prevention programs and emergency response plans.
Hazard mitigation should include preparation and reporting of worst-case scenarios for
each structure under review, demonstrating any potential effects to the public. As a
minimum condition, the worst case must include complete failure of an entityvessels,
piping systems, or other storage structures. In this assessment, the evaluation of the
effectiveness of measurements for disaster prevention should be based on the
assumption that complete collapse of the main storage structure has occurred. The
impact around the building must be determined in terms of the population of the area
that is significantly affected. To ensure the quality of the classification, the hazard
assessment must demonstrate that the notification of hazardous building materials
resulting from this worst-case event does not endanger public health beyond the
boundaries of the structure under review.
The prevention program should consist of comprehensive elements of the safety

management process, which is based on the prevention of accidents through the
implementation of on-site management controls from planning, implementation,
operation, and maintenance. Secondary prevention of toxic, highly toxic or explosive
substances (including and not limited to, double-walled tanks, trenches of sufficient
dimensions to contain spills of toxic, highly toxic or explosive substances within the
property boundary and prevent release of hazardous pollutants into the air, soil,
groundwater or surface water) may be used to prevent the risk of release of these
hazardous substances. Where countermeasures are available, they must be designed
for all environmental loads and do not qualify for this reduced classification. In
hurricane-prone areas, mandatory guidelines and procedures that effectively reduce
the effects of wind on critical structural elements or that alternatively provide
protection during and after a hurricane can be used to reduce the risk of damage.
As a general condition, emergency response plans must be made available to the

public, emergency medical care, and emergency response procedures to announce
consequences occurring outside the property boundaries of the facility. Plan
11 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Emergency response must be directed at potential sources so that action can be taken
against the incident that caused the emergency condition.
1.6 Additions and renovations to existing structures
If buildings and other structures that have already been constructed are to be enlarged, or
overhauled, the affected structural components must be strengthened if necessary, so that
the factored loads specified in this regulation can be accepted without exceeding the
design strength of the construction materials. When using allowable stress design,
reinforcement is required if the stress due to the nominal load exceeds the allowable stress
of the construction material.
1.7 Load test
Load tests of any construction must be carried out if requested by the competent
authority if there is reason to question the safety of the structure for its function.
1.8 Consensus standards and other reference documents
This Article contains a list of consensus standards and other documents adopted by
reference in this Article.
OSHA Standards for General Industry, 29 CFR (Code of Federal Regulations) Part
1910.1200. Appendix A, with Amendments as of February 1, 2000, United States
Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration, 2005.
Cited in: Section 2.3.5
© BSN 2020 12 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
2 Load combinations
2.1 General
Buildings and other structures must be designed using the provisions of Article 2.3 or
Article 2.4. If structural elements are designed based on material standards or certain
specifications, they must be specifically designed according to Article 2.3 or Article 2.4.
2.2 Symbols
Ak = burden or burden effect arising from extraordinary eventsA =

D dead load
Di = weight of ice
E = earthquake load
F = load due to a fluid with a clearly defined and high pressure
maximum
Fa = flood load
H = load due to lateral soil pressure, groundwater pressure, or pressure from
large amounts of material =
L live load
Lr = roof live load
N =notional charge for structural integrity, Article 1.4 =
R rain load
S = snow load
=the cumulative effect of self-stretching forces and their effects arising from contraction
or expansion due to changes in environmental or operational temperature,
shrinkage, changes in humidity, creep in component materials, movement
caused bydecrease difference, or a combination thereof = wind load
i = wind on ice determined according to Article 10
2.3 Load combinations for strength design
2.3.1 Basic combinations
Structures, components, and foundations shall be designed so that their design

strengths equal or exceed the effects of factored loads in the following combinations.
The effects of one or more idle loads must be considered. The effects of seismic loads
must be combined loads in accordance with Article 2.3.6. Wind and seismic loads do
not need to be considered acting simultaneously. See Article 1.4, Article 2.3.6, and
Article 7.4 and Article 7.4.3 in SNI 1726 (Article 12.4 and Article 12.14.3 ASCE 7-16)For
specific definition of earthquake load effectsE. Any relevant strength boundary
conditions should be investigated.
1.1.4D
2.1,2D-1.6L-0.5-LrorSorR-
3.1,2D-1.6-LrorSorR---Lor 0.5W-
4.1,2D-1.0W-L-0.5-LrorSorR-
5. 0.9D-1.0W
13 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
EXCEPTION:
1. Load factor forLin combination 3 and 4 is allowed at 0.5 for all levels
residential ifLin
o Article 4, Table 4.3-1 less than or equal to 100 psf (4.78
kN/m2), with the exception of garage/parking areas or occupied areas which are public
meeting places.
2. In combinations 2 and 4, companion loadSshould be taken as one snow load of a flat roof (pf)
or the snow load of a sloping roof (ps).
When there is a fluid loadF,the combination must include the same load factor as the
dead loadDin combination (1) to combination (4).
When there is a loadH, the combination must take into account:
1. When the effectHadd to the main load effect, take it into accountHwith a load factor
of 1.6;
2. If the effectHwithstand the effects of the main load, take it into accountHwith a load
factor of 0.9 where the load is permanent or a load factor of 0 for other conditions.
The effects of one or more unaccounted for loads should be investigated. The most
unfavorable effects of wind loads should be investigated, according to the conditions,
but should not be taken into account acting simultaneously with seismic loads.
Any relevant strength boundary conditions should be investigated.
2.3.2 Load combinations that include flood loads
If a structure is located in a flood zone (Article 5.3.1), the following load combinations must be
taken into account in addition to the basic combinations in Article 2.3.1:
1. In zone V or coastal zone A, for load combinations (4) and (5) which are of value1.0W
must be changed to1.0W- 2.0Fa.
2. In non-coastal areas of zone A, for load combinations (4) and (5) which are of value
1.0Wmust be changed to0.5W-1.0Fa.
2.3.3 Load combinations include atmospheric ice loads
When structures are subjected to atmospheric ice loads and windy ice loads, the following load
combinations must be taken into account:
1. 0.5-LrorSorR-on load combination (2) must be replaced with

0.2Di- 0.5S.
2.1.0W-0.5-LrorSorR-on load combination (4) must be replaced
withDi-Wi- 0.5S.
3.1.0Win combination (5) must be replaced withDi-Wi.
4.1.0W-L-0.5-LrorSorR-in combination (4) must be replaced withDi.
© BSN 2020 14 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
2.3.4 Load combinations include force and self-strain effects
When structural effects Whichexpected to adversely affect safety or structural performance,

must be taken into account in combination with other loads. The load factor should
be established by considering the uncertainties related to the likely magnitude of
structural forces and effects, the probability that the maximum effects will occur
simultaneously with other loads, and the potential for adverse consequences if the
effects are greater than assumed. The load factor cannot be less than 1.0.
2.3.5 Load combinations for nonspecific loads
When approved by the competent authority, the responsible professional planner is

permitted to determine the effects of load combinations for strength design using
methods consistent with the methods on load combination requirements under Article
2.3.1. The method must be probability-based and must be accompanied by
documentation regarding the analysis and collection of supporting data that is
acceptable to the competent authorities.
2.3.6 Basic combination with seismic load effects
When the structure is subjected to the effects of seismic loads, the following load combinations
must be taken into account in addition to the basic combinations in Article 2.3.1. The most
unfavorable effects of seismic loads should be investigated, where appropriate, but should not
be taken into account working simultaneously with wind loads.
If the seismic load effect is specified,E-f-Ev,Eh-(defined in Art

7.4.2 and Article 7.4.3.1 in SNI 1726 [Article 12.4.2 or Article 12.14.3.1 ASCE 7-16])
combined with other load effects, the following seismic load combinations should be
used:
6.1,2D-Ev-Eh-L- 0.2S
7.0.9D-Ev-Eh
If the effects of seismic loads are greater,Em-f-Ev,Emh-, set

in Article 7.4.3 SNI 1726 (See Article 12.4.3 ASCE 7-16), combined with other load
effects, the following seismic load combinations for structures must be used:
6.1,2D-Ev-Emh-L- 0.2S
7.0.9D-Ev-Emh
EXCEPTION:
1. Load factor onLin combination (6) it is allowed to be equal to 0.5 for all
residence withLoin Article 4, Table 4.3-1, less than or equal to 100 psf (4.78
kN/m2), except for garages/parking lots or occupied areas which are public meeting places.
2. In combination (6), the companion loadSshould be taken as one, the snow load of a flat
roof -pf-or the snow load of a sloping roof-ps-.
dead loadDin combinations (6) to (7).
15 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
1. WheneffectHadd the effect of the main variable load, take it into accountHwith load
factor of 1.6;
2. If the effectHwithstand the effects of major variable loads, take them into accountH
with a load factor of 0.9 where the load is permanent or a load factor of 0 for other
conditions.
2.4 Load combinations for allowable stress design
2.4.1 Basic combinations
The loads listed in this standard shall be calculated to work in the following
combinations; which produces the least favorable effect on the building structure,
foundation, or structural components must be taken into account. The effects of one or
more unaccounted for loads must be considered. The effects of seismic loads must be
combined with other loads in accordance with Article 2.4.5. Wind and seismic loads
need not be considered to act simultaneously. . See Article 1.4, Article 2.4.5, and Article
7.4 and Article 7.4.3 in SNI 1726 (Article 12.4 and Article 12.14.3 ASCE 7-16) for specific
definitions of earthquake load effectsE.
Increased allowable stresses shall not be used with the loads or combinations of loads
provided in this standard unless it can be demonstrated that such increases are
demonstrated by structural behavior resulting from the rate or duration of the load.
1.D
2.D-L
3.D--LrorSorR-
4.D-0.75L-0.75-LrorSorR-
5.D--0.6W-
6.D- 0.75L-0.75-0.6W--0.75-LrorSorR-
7.0.6D- 0.6W
EXCEPTION:
1. In combination (4) and combination (6), companion loadSmust be taken one of
flat roof snow load-pf-or the snow load of a sloping roof-ps-.
2. For non-building structures, where the wind load is determined from the force coefficient,
Cf,shown in Figures 29.4-1, 29.4-2 and 29.4-3 and the projected areas
contributing wind forces to foundation elements exceeding 1,000 ft2(93 m2) in any of the
vertical or horizontal planes, it is permissible to replace with
0.9Win combination (7) for foundation design, excluding structural anchors to the foundation.
dead loadDin combinations (1) to (6).
1. WheneffectHadd to the main load effect, take it into accountHwithload factor of 1.0;
2. WheneffectHwithstand the effects of the main load, take it into accountHwithload

factor of 0.6 where the load is permanent or load factor of 0 for other conditions.
© BSN 2020 16 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
The least favorable effects of wind and earthquake loads should be taken into account,
where appropriate, but need not be assumed to act simultaneously. See Article 1.4,
Article 2.4.5, and Article 7.4 and Article 12.4 of SNI 1726 (See Article 12.4 and Article
12.14.3 of ASCE 7-16) for specific definitions of earthquake load effects E.
Increases in allowable stresses shall not be used with the loads or combinations of
loads given in this standard unless it can be demonstrated that such increases are
justified by the structural behavior caused by the rate or duration of the load.
2.4.2 Load combinations that include flood loads
If a structure is located in a flood zone, the following load combinations must be taken into
account in addition to the basic combinations in Article 2.4.1:
1. In zone V areas or in coastal areas zone A (Article 5.3.1),1.5Fmust a

added to the other load combinations in (5), (6), and (7), as well as earthquake
loadsEmust be taken equal to zero in load combinations (5) and (6).
2. In non-coastal areas of zone A, the value is0.75Fashould be added on

combinations (5), (6), and (7), as well as earthquake loadsEmust be taken equal to zero in
load combinations (5) and (6).
2.4.3 Load combinations include atmospheric ice loads
When a structure is subject to both atmospheric ice loads and icy wind loads, the following load
combinations should be considered:
1.0.7Dimust be added to combination 2.

2.-LrorSorR-in combination 3 must be replaced with0.7Di- 0.7Wi-S.
3.0.6W in combination 7 must be replaced with0.7Di- 0.7Wi.
4.0.7Di must be added to combination 1.
2.4.4 Load combinations include force and self-strain effects
When structural effects that is expected to adversely affect safety or structural performance,
must be taken into account in combination with other loads. If the maximum effect
of a load is not expected to occur simultaneously with the maximum effect of another
variable load, it is permitted to reduce its magnitude Which
calculated in combination with other loads. The calculated fraction in combination with
other loads should not be less than 0.75.
2.4.5 Basic combination with seismic load effects
When a structure is subjected to the effects of seismic loads, the following load combinations must be
taken into account in addition to the basic combinations and Exceptions related in Article 2.4.1.
If the seismic load effect is determined,E-f-Ev,Eh-(stated in Article 7.4.2 SNI 1726

[See Article 12.4.2 ASCE 7-16]) combined with other load effects, the following seismic
load combinations shall be used:
17 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
8.1.0D- 0.7Ev- 0.7Eh

9.1.0D-0.525Ev-0.525Eh-0.75L-0.75S
10.0.6D-0.7Ev- 0.7Eh
If the effects of seismic loads are greater,Em-f-Ev,Emh-, set in

Article 7.4.3 SNI 1726 (See Article 12.4.3 ASCE 7-16), combined with other load effects,
the following seismic load combinations for structures that do not carry flood loads or
atmospheric ice loads must be used:
8.1.0D- 0.7Ev- 0.7Emh

9.1.0D-0.525Ev-0.525Emh-0.75L-0.75S
10.0.6D-0.7Ev- 0.7Emh
If the allowable stress design methodology is used with the effects of seismic loads
specified in Article 7.4.3 SNI 1726 (See Article 12.4.3 ASCE 7-16) and is applied in
combination (8), combination (9), or combination (10), the stress allowable clearance is
determined using an allowable stress increase factor of 1.2. This increase shall not be
combined with increases in allowable stress or reductions in other load combinations
permitted by this standard or material reference documents except for increases
caused by adjustment factors in accordance with the AWC NDS.
EXCEPTION:
1. In combination 9, companion loadS should be taken as the snow load of a flat roof
-pf-or the snow load of a sloping roof-ps-.
2. Allowed to replace0.6Dwith0.9Din combination (10) for wall design
shiftmasonryspecially reinforced where the wall meets the requirements of Article 14.4.2
ASCE 7-16 (See SNI 1726).
dead loadDin combinations (8), (9), and (10).
1. WheneffectHadd the effect of the main variable load, take it into accountHwith load
factor of 1.0;
2. WheneffectHwithstand the effects of major variable loads, take them into accountH
withload factor of 0.6 where the load is permanent or load factor of 0 for other
conditions.
2.5 Load combinations for extraordinary events
2.5.1 Implementation
Where required by the employer or applicable standards, strength and stability must
be checked to ensure that the structure is able to withstand the effects of extraordinary
(i.e. low probability) events such as fire, explosion and impact from vehicles without
causing unusual collapse.
© BSN 2020 18 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
2.5.2 Load combination
2.5.2.1 Capacity
To check the capacity of a structure or structural element to withstand the effects of an

extraordinary event, the following gravity load combinations must be taken into account:
(0.9 or 1.2)D+Ak+0.5L+0.2S (2.5-1)
with:
A=burden
k or burden effects resulting from extraordinary eventsA.
2.5.2.2 Residual capacity
To examine the remaining load-carrying capacity of a structure or structural element

following the occurrence of a damaging event, selected load-bearing elements
identified by the Responsible Professional Designer should be ostensibly removed, and
the capacity of the damaged structure should be evaluated using the following gravity
load combinations :
(0.9 or 1.2)D+0.5L+0.2(LrorSorR) (2.5-2)
2.5.3 Stability requirements
Stability must be provided for the structure as a whole and for each of its elements. Any
method that considers the influence of second-order effects is permitted.
2.6 Load combinations for general structural integrity loads
Notional expenses,N,required in Article 1.4 for structural integrity shall be combined

with other loads in accordance with Article 2.6.1 for strength design and Article 2.6.2
for allowable stress design.
2.6.1 Notional load combinations for strength design
1.1,2D-1.0N-L- 0.2S
2.0.9D-1.0N
2.6.2 Notional load combinations for allowable stress design
1.D- 0.7N
2.D- 0.75-0.7N--0.75L- 0.75-LrorSayou know R-
3.0.6D- 0.7N
2.7 Other reference documents and consensus standards
This Article's list of consensus standards and other documents that are subject to
consideration is part of these standards whose references are expanded in this Article.
19 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
ANSI/AISC 300,Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, American Institute of

Steel Construction, 2016.
AWC NDS 12,National Design Specification for Wood Construction, Including
Supplements, AmericanWood Council, 2012.
Cited in: Section2.4.5
AWC NDS 15,National Design Specification for Wood Construction, Including
Supplements, AmericanWood Council,2014.
Cited in: Section2.4.53 Dead load, soil load and hydrostatic pressure
© BSN 2020 20 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
3 Dead load, soil load and hydrostatic pressure
3.1 Dead load
3.1.1 Definition
Dead load is the weight of all installed building construction materials, including walls,
floors, roofs, ceilings, stairs, fixed partition walls,finishing, building cladding and other
architectural and structural components and other installed service equipment
including crane weightand material conveying systems.
3.1.2 Weight of materials and construction
In determining the dead load for design, the actual weight of materials and
construction must be used, provided that in the absence of clear information, the value
that must be used is the value approved by the competent authority.
3.1.3 Weight of fixed service equipment
In determining the design dead load, the weight of the fixed service equipment must
be taken into account, including the maximum weight of the fixed service equipment
filler. Variable fixed service equipment components, such as fluid contents and
movable containers, must not be used to resist forces that cause tipping, rolling or
falling conditions.slip, and lifted in accordance with Article 1.3.6.
EXCEPTION:
1. If the force effect is the result of a variable component, then that component is permitted
to be used to offset the load effect. In such cases, the structure must be designed for force
effects with variable components present and without them.
2. For the calculation of seismic force effects, variable fixed service equipment components,
such as fluid content andreceptaclethat can be moved, need not exceed that expected
during normal execution.
3.1.4 Rooftop plants and landscaping
The weight of all landscaping materials and equipment should be considered dead
load. The weight must be calculated by considering completely saturated soil material
and drainage layer material as well as perfectly dry soil material and drainage layer
material to determine the greatest load effect on the structure.
3.1.5 Solar panels
Solar panel weight, support system andballastit must be calculated as dead load.
3.2 Soil load and pressurehydrostatic
3.2.1 Lateral pressure
Underground structures must be designed to withstand lateral soil loads from adjacent
soil. If the lateral soil load is not given in the geotechnical report approved by the
Competent Authority, then the lateral soil load required in Table 3.2-1 shall be used as
the minimum design lateral soil load.
21 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Where applicable, lateral pressure from fixed loads or additional moving loads shall be
added to the lateral soil load. If part or all of the adjoining land is below the free water
table, calculations shall be based on the weight of the soil reduced by buoyancy, plus
full hydrostatic pressure.
Soil lateral pressure should be increased if the soil has the potential to expand as
determined in the soil investigation.
© BSN 2020 22 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Table 3.2-1 - Design lateral soil loads
Design lateral soil loada

Type classification
No. Description of embankment material psf per foot of depth (kN/
land
m2per meter depth)
1 Well graded, clean gravel, a
GW 35 (5.50)b
mixture of sand and gravel
2 Poorly graded clean gravel,
GP 35 (5.50)b
sand-gravel mixture
3 Gravel contains silt, a
sand-gravel mixture GM 35(5.50)b
poor grade
4 Gravel contains clay, a
mixture of clay with poorly GC 45(7.07)b
graded gravel
5 Well graded, clean sand;
SW 35(5.50)b
gravel sand mixture
6 Poorly graded clean sand;
SP 35(5.50)b
sand gravel mixture
7 Silty sand, a poorly graded
BC 45(7.07)b
silt-sand mixture
8 A mixture of silt-sand clay with
SM-SC 85(13.35)c
fine plastic
9 Clayey sand, a poorly graded
S.C 85(13.35)c
clay-sand mixture
10 Inorganic silt and clay silt
M.L 85(13.35)c
11 A mixture of inorganic silt and

ML-CL 85(13.35)c
clay
12 Inorganic clay from
CL 100(15.71)
medium-low plasticity
13 Organic silt and silt, low
OL d
plasticity
14 Inorganic clay silt, elastic silt
MH d
15 High plasticity inorganic clay

CH d
16 Organic clay and silt clay

OH d
Notes:
aLateral soil loads for specified soils are given for damp conditions at density
optimum. The actual conditions of the field determine. The pressure of soil that is submerged in water or that is
saturated must use the weight of the soil which is reduced due to buoyancy force plus hydrostatic load.
b For relatively stiff walls, because they are attached to the floor, the planned lateral soil load for gravel
and sand type soils must be increased to 60 psf (9.43 kN/m2) per foot (meter) depth. Basement walls that
are no more than 8 ft (2.44 m) below grade and support a lightweight flooring system are not considered
relatively rigid walls.
c For walls that are relatively stiff, because they are attached to the floor, the planned lateral soil load for
mud and clay soils must be increased to 100 psf (15.71 kN/m2) per foot (meter) depth. Basement walls
that are no more than 8 ft (2.44 m) below grade and support a lightweight flooring system are not
considered relatively rigid walls.
d Not suitable as backfill material.
23 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
3.2.2 Lifting loads on floors and foundations
basement floor,slababove ground, foundations, and other similar nearly horizontal

elements below ground level must be designed to withstand the applied lifting loads.
The upward water pressure must be calculated as the full hydrostatic pressure acting
over the entire area. Hydrostatic load must be measured from the underside of the
construction.
Foundation,slababove ground, and other components placed in expansive soil must be

designed to accommodate movement or resist upward loads caused by expansive soil,
or expansive soil must be removed or stabilized around and beneath the structure.
This article does not refer to consensus standards or any other documents considered to be
part of these standards.
© BSN 2020 24 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
4 Live load
4.1 Definition
The following definitions apply to the provisions of this Article.
fixed ladder
stairs that are permanently attached to structures, buildings, or equipment
handlebar system
rods, including anchors and their fastenings to structural systems, to support the
weight provided in toilets, bathrooms, and around bathtubs
safety fence system

system of components, including anchors and fastenings to the structural system, near
open sides with higher surfaces to minimize the possibility of people, equipment or
materials falling
stair handrail system

rail rods that can be held as guides and supports and connected to anchors and ties in
the structural system
helicopter pad
a structural surface used for landing, takeoff,taxiingand helicopter parking
living load
loads caused by users and occupants of buildings or other structures that do not
include construction loads and environmental loads, such as wind loads, rain loads,
earthquake loads, flood loads, or dead loads
roof live load

loads on the roof resulting (1) during maintenance by labor, equipment, and materials,
and (2) during the service life of the structure due to moving objects, such as potted
plants or other similar small decorative fixtures that are not residentially related.
Occupancy-related live loads on roofs such as roof gathering areas, roof decks and
vegetative roofs or roof landscaping on usable areas, are calculated as live loads on the
roof rather than live loads on the roof
veil of cover
a building or part of a building, standing alone in whole or in part, in the form of walls
or a roof that protects insects or sunlight fiberglass, aluminum, plastic, or similar
lightweight materials, which cover residences or are used as covers for outdoor
swimming pools, back patios or decks, and horticultural and agricultural production
facilities.
vehicle barrier system

building component systems, including anchors and fasteners in the structural system, near
the side of the opening or wall of the garage floor orramps, which works to hold the vehicle
4.2 Unrequired expenses
For occupancy or use not required in this Article, the burden is large
25 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
life must be determined according to a method approved by the competent authority.
4.3 Live loads are evenly distributed
4.3.1 Required live load
The live load used in the design of buildings and other structures must be the
maximum load expected to occur due to occupancy and use of the building, but must
not be less than the minimum uniform load specified in Table 4.3-1.
Table 4.3-1 - Minimum evenly distributed live load,Loand burdens of life

minimum centralized
Reduction
burden
Reduction
life
Equally,Lo living load Centralized Also See
Occupancy or use floored
psf (kN/m2) allowed? lb (kN) Chapter
Lots
(Article No.)
allowed?
(Article No.)
Apartment(see residential house)
Access floor system

Office room 50 (2.4) Yes (4.7.2) Yes (4.7.2) 2,000 (8.9)
Computer room 100 (4.79) Yes (4.7.2) Yes (4.7.2) 2,000 (8.9)
Armory and training room 150 (7.18) No (4.7.5) No (4.7.5)

Meeting room
Fixed chairs (fixed to the floor) 60 (2.87) No (4.7.5) No (4.7.5)
Lobby 100 (4.79) No (4.7.5) No (4.7.5)
Chairs can be moved 100 (4.79) No (4.7.5) No (4.7.5)
Meeting stage 100 (4.79) No (4.7.5) No (4.7.5)
Podium floor 150 (7.18) No (4.7.5) No (4.7.5)
100 (4.79) No (4.7.5) No (4.7.5) 4.14
Stadium and arena spectator stands 60 (2.87) No (4.7.5) No (4.7.5)
with fixed chairs (fixed to the floor) 4.14
Other meeting rooms 100 (4.79) No (4.7.5) No (4.7.5)
Balcony and deck 1.5 times load Yes (4.7.2) Yes (4.7.2)
live for
area which
served. No
need to exceed
100 psf
(4.79 kN/m2)
Path for maintenance access 40 (1.92) Yes (4.7.2) Yes (4.7.2) 300 (1.33)
Corridor
First floor 100 (4.79) Yes (4.7.2) Yes (4.7.2)
Another floor Same as

service
residential except
mentioned otherwise
Dining room and restaurant 100 (4.79) No (4.7.5) No (4.7.5)
Residential (see residential)
Elevator machine stand

- - 300 (1.33)
(in area 2 in. x 2 in. [50 mm x 50 mm])
Floor slab constructionfinishinglight (in
- - 200 (0.89)
area 1 in. x 1 in. [25 mm x 25 mm])
© BSN 2020 26 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Table 4.3-1 (Continued) - Minimum evenly distributed live load, Lo and load
minimum centered living
Reduction
burden
Reduction
life
Lots
(Article No.)
allowed?
(Article No.)
Rescue route during fire 100 (4.79) Yes (4.7.2) Yes (4.7.2)
One family residence only 40 (1.92) Yes (4.7.2) Yes (4.7.2)
Permanent stairs - - See Art

4.5.4
Garage/Parking(See Article 4.10)

Passenger cars only 40 (1.92) No (4.7.4) Yes (4.7.4) See Art
4.10.1
Trucks and buses See Art - - See Art
4.10.2 4.10.2
Stair handrails and safety railings See 4.5.1 - - See 4.5.1

Handle bar See 4.5.2
Helipad(See Article 4.11)

Helicopter heavily takes off 40 (1.92) No (4.11.1) - See Art
of 3,000 lb (13.35 kN) or less 4.11.2
Helicopter heavily takes off 60 (2.87) No (4.11.1) - See Art

Over 3,000 lb (13.35 kN) 4.11.2
Hospital
Operating room, laboratory 60 (2.87) Yes (4.7.2) Yes (4.7.2) 1,000 (4.45)
Patient room 40 (1.92) Yes (4.7.2) Yes (4.7.2) 1,000 (4.45)
Corridor above the first floor 80 (3.83) Yes (4.7.2) Yes (4.7.2) 1,000 (4.45)
Hotel (see residence)
Library
Library Yes (4.7.2) Yes (4.7.2) 1,000 (4.45)
60 (2.87)
Storage space No (4.7.3) Yes (4.7.3) 1,000 (4.45) 4.13
150 (7.18)
Corridor above the first floor Yes (4.7.2) Yes (4.7.2) 1,000 (4.45)
80 (3.83)
Factory
No (4.7.3) Yes (4.7.3) 2,000 (8.90)
Light 125 (6.00)
No (4.7.3) Yes (4.7.3) 3,000 (13.35)
Heavy 250 (11.97)
Office building
Archive and computer rooms are a must
designed for heavier loads
based on expected occupancy
Office first floor lobby and 100 (4.79) Yes (4.7.2) Yes (4.7.2) 2,000 (8.90)
corridor 50 (2.40) Yes (4.7.2) Yes (4.7.2) 2,000 (8.90)
Legal institutions
Cell block Yes (4.7.2) Yes (4.7.2)
40 (1.92)
Corridor Yes (4.7.2) Yes (4.7.2)
100 (4.79)
Recreation areas
Bowling, billiards and 75 (3.59) No (4.7.5) No (4.7.5)
similar use
Dance hall andballroom 100 (4.79) No (4.7.5) No (4.7.5)
Gymnasium 100 (4.79) No (4.7.5) No (4.7.5)
27 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Table 4.3-1 (Continued) - Minimum uniformly distributed live load,Loand load

Reduction
burden
Reduction
Equally,
life
living load Centralized Also See
Lots
(Article No.)
allowed?
(Article No.)
Residential home
One- and two-family residences
An uninhabitable attic without 10 (0.48) Yes (4.7.2) Yes (4.7.2) 4.12.1
storage
Uninhabitable attic with 20 (0.96) Yes (4.7.2) Yes (4.7.2) 4.12.2

storage
Livable loft and sleeping 30 (1.44) Yes (4.7.2) Yes (4.7.2)

space
All rooms except stairs 40 (1.92) Yes (4.7.2) Yes (4.7.2)
All other residential residences

Private spaces and corridors 40 (1.92) Yes (4.7.2) Yes (4.7.2)
Public spaces 100 (4.79) No (4.7.5) No (4.7.5)
Public space corridor 100 (4.79) Yes (4.7.2) Yes (4.7.2)
Roof
Flat, pitched and curved roofs. Roofs 20 (0.96) Yes (4.8.2) - 4.8.1
used by residents Together with Yes (4.8.3) -
use
who is served
Roofs for gathering places Vegetative 100 (4.70) Yes (4.8.3) -
roofs and landscape roofs
Roofs not for residential 20 (0.96) Yes (4.8.2) -
purposes Roofs for gathering 100 (4.79) Yes (4.8.3) -
places Roofs for other uses Together with Yes (4.8.3) -
use
who is served
Awningsand canopy
Construction rooffabricWhich 5 (0.24) No (4.8.2) -
supported by a light rigid frame
structure
Cover screen support frame 5 (0.24) No (4.8.2) - 200 (0.89)
based on
tribute area
from that roof
powered by
component
frame structure
All other construction The main roof 20 (0.96) Yes (4.8.2) 4.8.1
structural components, which are
directly connected to the floor
work where you work
Single panel point of chord 2000 (8.90)

under the roof truss or at a point
along the main structural
component supporting the roof
above factories, storage
warehouses and
the workers, and the garage
workshop - - 300 (1.33)
All roof structural components

other major - - 300 (1.33)
All roof surfaces with

maintenance worker load
© BSN 2020 28 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Table 4.3-1 (Continued) - Minimum uniformly distributed live load,Loand load

Reduction
burden
Reduction
life
Lots
(Article No.)
allowed?
(Article No.)
School 40 (1.92) Yes (4.7.2) Yes (4.7.2) 1,000 (4.45)

Classroom 80 (3.83) Yes (4.7.2) Yes (4.7.2) 1,000 (4.45)
Corridor on the first floor
Scuttles, ribs for glass roofs and 200 (0.89)

accessible ceiling
Road on the side for pedestrians, road 250 (11.97) No (4.7.3) Yes (4.7.3) 8,000 (35.60) 4.15
vehicle traffic, and land/roads for
trucks
Stairs and exits 100 (4.79) Yes (4.7.2) Yes (4.7.2) 300 (1.33) 4.16
Homes for one and two 40 (1.92) Yes (4.7.2) Yes (4.7.2) 300 (1.33) 4.16
just family
Warehouse above the ceiling 20 (0.96) Yes (4.7.2) Yes (4.7.2)
Storage warehouse and workers (must

be designed for heavier loads if required)
Light 125 (6.00) No (4.7.3) Yes (4.7.3)

Heavy 250 (11.97) No (4.7.3) Yes (4.7.3)
Shop
Retail
100 (4.79) Yes (4.7.2) Yes (4.7.2) 1,000 (4.45)
First floor
75 (3.59) Yes (4.7.2) Yes (4.7.2) 1,000 (4.45)
Floor above
125 (6.00) No (4.7.3) Ys (4.7.3) 1,000 (4.45)
Wholesale, on all floors
See Art
Vehicle barrier
4.5.3
The walkway and stage 60 (2.87) Yes (4.7.2) Yes (4.7.2)
exalted(other than the exit)
Yard and terrace, walking paths 100 (4.79) No (4.7.5) No (4.7.5)

foot
4.3.2 Provisions for partitions
In office buildings and other buildings where the location of partitions can change,
provisions for the weight of partitions must be determined, regardless of whether there are
partitions in the floor plan. The partition load should not be less than 15 psf (0.72 kN/m2).
EXCEPTION Partition live load is not required if the minimum live load is sufficient
determined to be taken at 80 psf (3.83 kN/m2) or greater.
4.3.3 Partial load
The full intensity of a properly reduced live load applied to only a portion of the
structure or structural component shall be taken into account to see if it produces a
more favorable load effect than the same intensity applied over the full structure or
structural component. The roof live load must be distributed as required in Table 4.3-1.
29 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
4.4 Centralized live load
Floors, roofs, and similar surfaces shall be designed to safely support the uniformly
distributed live loads specified in Article 4.3 or the concentrated loads, in pounds (lb) or
kilonewtons (kN) listed in Table 4.3-1, whichever produces the greatest load effect. .
Unless otherwise required, the indicated concentrated loads shall be assumed to act
uniformly over an area of 2.5 ft (762 mm) x 2.5 ft (762 mm) and shall be located so as
to produce maximum load effect in the structural member.
4.5 Loads on banisters, guardrails, grab bars and vehicle barrier systems, and
fixed stairs
4.5.1 Stair handrail and safety railing system
Stair handrails and guardrail systems shall be designed to support a single

concentrated load of 200 lb (0.89 kN) applied in one direction at a point on the handrail
or top rail to produce the maximum load effect on the element considered and
transmit this load to the structural support.
4.5.1.1 Even load
The banister and guard rail system must also be designed to withstand a load of 50 lb/
ft (0.73 kN/m) applied in a direction along the handrail and top rail and transmit this
load to the support of the structure. This load does not need to be assumed to work
simultaneously with the centralized load required in Article 4.5.1.
EXCEPTIONThis uniform load does not need to be taken into account for the following occupancies:
1. One- and two-family residences.

2. Factories, industries and storage warehouses in areas that are not accessible to the public and
that serve residents of no more than 50 people.
4.5.1.2 Loads of safety fence system components
Short pillars, panel infills, and guardrail infill components, including all handrails except
banisters and top handrails, shall be designed to withstand an applied horizontal
normal load of 50 lb (0.22 kN) over an area not exceeding 12 in. x 12 in. (305 mm x 305
mm), including openings and spaces between rails and placed to produce maximum
load effect. The reaction due to this load does not need to be added up to the loads
required in Article 4.5.1 and Article 4.5.1.1.
4.5.2 Grab bar system
The grab bar system shall be designed to withstand a single concentrated load of 250
lb (1.11 kN) applied in a direction at a point on the grab bar to produce maximum load
effect.
4.5.3 Loads on vehicle barrier systems
Vehicle barrier systems for passenger cars must be designed to withstand a single load
of 6,000 lb (26.70 kN) applied in the horizontal direction
© BSN 2020 30 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
in any direction in the barrier system, and there must be anchorages capable of
transmitting this load to the structure. For the design of this system, the load is
assumed to act at a minimum height of 1 ft 6 in. (460 mm) and 2 ft 3 in. (686 mm) above
the floor or surfaceramps, placed to produce maximum load effects. Loads must be
installed over an area not exceeding 12 in. x 12 in. (305mm x 305mm). This load does
not need to act in conjunction with the stair handrail or safety bar load specified in
Article 4.5.1. Garages for trucks and buses must be designed according to AASTHO
LRFDBridge Design Specifications.
4.5.4 Fixed stairs
Fixed ladders with risers shall be designed to withstand a single concentrated load of
300 lb (1.33 kN) applied at a point to produce maximum load effect on the element
being considered. The number and position of additional centralized live load units is a
minimum of 1 unit of 300 lb (1.33 kN) for every 10 ft (3.05 m) of stair height.
Whenfixed handrails extend above the floor or balcony at the top of the stairs, each
handrail extension shall be designed to withstand a single concentrated live load of 100
lb (0.445 kN) applied in a direction at a height to the top of the handrail extension. Ship
ladder (ships ladders) with steps that are not steps must be designed to withstand the
ladder loads listed in Table 4.3-1.
Whenfixed handrails extend above the floor or balcony at the top of the stairs, each
handrail extension shall be designed to withstand a single concentrated live load of 100
lb (0.445 kN) applied in a direction at a height to the top of the handrail extension. Ship
ladder (ships ladders) with steps that are not steps must be designed to withstand the
ladder loads listed in Table 4.3-1.
4.6 Impact loads
4.6.1 General
The live loads specified in Articles 4.3 to 4.5 must be assumed to have taken into
account normal impact conditions. In designing structures with unusual vibration loads
and impact forces, special arrangements are needed.
4.6.2 Elevator
All dynamic load-bearing elements of elevators must be designed for impact loads and
deflection limits specified by ASME A17.1.
4.6.3 Machine
For design purposes, the weight of machines and moving loads should be increased as
follows to allow for impact: (1) light machines, shafts or motorized machines, 20 %; and (2)
machine units that move back and forth or power unitsdriven, 50 %. All percentages must
be increased when required by the manufacturer.
31 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
4.6.4 Hoist support elements for facade access and building maintenance
equipment
Structural elements supporting hoists for facades and building maintenance

equipment must be designed for a live load of 2.5 times the manufacturer's
recommended hoist load or the maximum hoist load, whichever is greater.
4.6.5 Fall arrest anchors and safety rope anchors
Fall arrest anchors and anchorssafety ropeand the structural elements supporting
these anchors shall be designed for a live load of 3,100 lb (13.8 kN) for eachsafety rope
attached in all directions so that fall arrest loads can be applied.
4.7 Even reduction of live loads
4.7.1 General
Except for the uniform live load on the roof, all live loads are distributed evenly
other minimums,Lino Table 4.3-1, can be reduced in accordance with the provisions of
Article 4.7.2 to Article 4.7.6.
4.7.2 Reduction of uniform live loads
Following the restrictions from Article 4.7.3 to Article 4.7.6, structural components
which has valueKLLAQis 400 ft2(37.16 m2) or more is permitted to be designed with a
reduced live load according to the following formula:
- 15 -
L-L- o- 0.25- - (4.7-1)
-
- KLLAQ-
In SI:
- 4.57 --
L-L-0.25 - (4.7-1si)
o- -
- KLLAQ-
with
L = reduced design live load per ft2(m2) of the area supported by the component
structure
Lo = design live load without reduction per ft2(m2) of the area supported by
structural components (see Table 4.3-1)
KLL = live load element factor (see Table 4.7-1)
AQ = tributary area in ft2(m2)
Lcannot be less than 0.50Lofor structural components supporting one floor

AndLcannot be less than 0.40Lofor structural components supporting two floors or
more than two floors.
© BSN 2020 32 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Table 4.7-1 - Live load element factors,KLL
Element KLL a
Interior columns 4
Exterior columns withoutslabcantilever 4
Column edge withslabcantilever 3
Corner column withslabcantilever 2
Beam edge withoutslabcantilever 2
Interior beam 2
All structural components not mentioned above:
Edge beam withslabcantilever
Cantilever beam
SlabsOne Way 1
Slabstwo-way direction
Structural components without provisions for transmission of

continuous shear perpendicular to their span
aApart from the above values,KLLallowed to be calculated separately.
4.7.3 Heavy live loads
Live loads exceeding 100 lb/ft2(4.79 kN/m2) cannot be reduced.
EXCEPTION Live load for structural components that support two or more
the floor is allowed to be reduced by a maximum of 20%, but the live load cannot be reduced
less thanLas calculated in Article 4.7.2.
4.7.4 Passenger car garage
Live loads for passenger car garages must not be reduced.
EXCEPTION Live load for structural components that support two or more
the floor is allowed to be reduced by a maximum of 20%, but the live load cannot be reduced
less thanLas calculated in Article 4.7.2.
4.7.5 Meeting place
The burden of life should not be reduced at the meeting place.
4.7.6 Limitations forslabOne Way
Tributary areaAQ, Forslabone direction should not exceed the area determined by the span
slabmultiplied by the width perpendicular to the span is 1.5 times the spanslabthe.
4.8 Reduction in roof live load
4.8.1 General
Minimum roof live load evenly distributed,Loin Table 4.3-1, is permitted to be reduced
in accordance with the requirements of Article 4.8.2 and Article 4.8.3.
If the uniform live load on the roof is reduced to less than 20 lb/ft2(0.96 kN/m2) in
accordance with Article 4.8.2 and applied to the design of structural components
arranged in such a way as to ensure continuity,Reduced roof live loads should be
applied to adjacent spans or to alternate spans, whichever produces the least adverse
load effect.
33 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
4.8.2 Ordinary roofs, awnings and canopies
Ordinary flat roofs, pitched roofs, curved roofs, awnings and canopies, apart from
construction roofsfabricsupported by a frame structure, it is permitted to be designed
with a reduced roof live load, as specified in Equation 4.8-1 or another specified load
combination, as described in Article 2, selected which produces the greatest load. In
structures such as greenhouses, where special scaffolding is used as a surface for
workers and materials during maintenance and repair work, no roof load lower than
that specified in Equation 4.8-1 shall be used unless approved by the competent
authority. In such structures, the minimum roof live load should be taken as 12 psf
(0.58 kN/m2).
Lr=LoR1R2 with 12 ≤Lr≤ 20 (4.8-1)
Lr=LoR1R2 with 0.58 ≤Lr≤ 0.96 (4.8-1si)
with
Lr=reduced roof live load per ft2 (m2) from a horizontal projection supported by
structural components and
Lo= design roof live load without reduction per ft2(m2) from horizontal projections supported by
structural components (see Table 4.3-1).
Reduction factorR1AndR2must be determined as follows:
1 ForAQ- 200 ft 2
R1= 1.2 – 0.001AQ for 200 ft2-AQ-600 ft2
0.6 ForAQ- 600 ft 2
In SI:
1 ForAQ-18.58 m2
R1= 1.2 – 0.011AQ for 18.58 m2-AQ-55.74 m2
0.6 ForAQ-55.74 m2
with
AQ=tributary area in ft2(m2) which is supported by each structural component and
1 ForF-4
R2= 1.2 – 0.05F for 4 -F-12
0.6 ForF-12
where, for a pitched roof,F=amount of elevation in in. per foot (in SI:F = 0.12 x slope (
slope), with the slope expressed as a percentage), and for curved or domed roofs,F=the
height to span ratio is multiplied by 32.
4.8.3 Occupiable roof
Roofs that have a residential function, such as for roof gardens or other special purposes, are
permitted to have a uniformly reduced live load in accordance with the requirements of Article
4.7.
© BSN 2020 34 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Roofs used for other special purposes must be designed for appropriate loads as
approved by the competent authority.
4.9 Crane load (crane loads)
4.9.1 General
The live load of the crane must be the rated capacity of the crane. Design loads for
runway beams, including joints and short console supports, of moving bridge cranes
and single-rail cranes shall include the maximum wheel loads of the crane and the
vertical, lateral, and longitudinal impact forces resulting from the moving crane.
4.9.2 Maximum wheel load
The maximum wheel load must be taken as the wheel load produced by the weight of the
bridge, as used, plus the total capacity and weight of the trolley where the trolley is placed
at the location where the load effect is maximum.
4.9.3 Vertical impact force
BurdenThe maximum wheel well of the crane determined in accordance with Article 4.9.2
shall be increased by the percentage indicated in the following text to take into account the
effects of vertical impact or vibration:
Single rail crane (with power) 25

Cab with operator or bridge crane operated remotely (powered)
25
Bridge crane operated with hanger (powered) 10
Bridge crane or single rail crane with hand-operated gear bridge, trolley and
lifting equipment 0
4.9.4 Lateral forces
The lateral force on a runway beam crane with a powered trolley shall be calculated as
20 percent of the rated amount of the crane capacity and the weight of the lifting
equipment and trolley. Lateral forces shall be assumed to act horizontally on the
traction surfaces of the runway beam, both in a direction perpendicular to the beam,
and shall be distributed according to the lateral stiffness of the runway beam and
supporting structures.
4.9.5 Longitudinal force
The longitudinal force of runway beam cranes, except for bridge cranes with hand-
cranked gear bridges, shall be calculated as 10 percent of the maximum wheel load of
the crane. Longitudinal forces shall be assumed to act horizontally on the traction
surface of the runway beam in a direction parallel to the beam.
4.10 Parking lot/garage load
4.10.1 Passenger vehicle parking/garage
35 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Floors in parking lots/garages or parts of buildings used for motor vehicle storage
must be designed for evenly distributed live loads in Table 4.3-1 or the following
concentrated loads: (1) for parking lots/garages limited to passenger vehicles that
accommodate no more than nine passengers, 3,000 lb (13.35 kN) working on a 4.5 in. x
4.5 in. (114mm x 114mm); and (2) for mechanical parking structures withoutslabor a
deck used solely for storing passenger vehicles, 2,250 lb (10 kN) per wheel.
4.10.2 Truck and bus parking/garage
Live loads in parking lots/garages or parts of buildings used for truck and bus storage
must comply withAASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications; However, provisions for
fatigue and dynamic loads do not need to be applied.
4.11 Loadhelipad
4.11.1General
The live load must not be reduced. Determination of helicopter capacity must be in accordance
with those required by the competent authorities.
4.11.2 Centralized helicopter load
Two single concentrated loads, spaced 8 ft (2.44 m) apart, must be applied to the
landing area (which represents twogearsmain landing areas of helicopters, whether
slide or wheel type), each have a value of 0.75 times the helicopter's maximum take-off
weight and are positioned to produce maximum effect on the structural elements
considered. Concentrated loads should be applied over an 8 in. area. x 8 in. (200 mm x
200 mm) and is not required to work simultaneously with a uniform live load or other
concentrated live load.
A single concentrated load of 3,000 lb (13.35 kN) must be applied to a 4.5 in. area. x 4.5
in. (114 mm x 114 mm), placed to produce maximum effect on the structural elements
considered. Centralized loads are not required to work simultaneously with distributed
live loads or other centralized live loads.
4.12 The attic is unoccupied
4.12.1 The attic is unoccupied without storage
In residential occupancies, unoccupied attic areas without storage are those where the
maximum clear height between joists and rafters is less than 42 in. (1,067 mm) or
where no two or more adjacent trusses with a web configuration are capable of
accommodating a rectangle assumed to be 42 in. high. (1,067 mm) by 24 in. wide (610
mm), or greater, within the plane of the truss. The live loads in Table 4.3-1 do not need
to be assumed to work in conjunction with other live load requirements.
4.12.2 Unoccupied attics with storage areas
In residential occupancies, unoccupied attic areas with storage are those where the
maximum clear height between joists and rafters is 42 inches (1,067 mm) or greater or
where there are two or more adjacent trusses with a web configuration capable of
accommodating four rectangle
© BSN 2020 36 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
length assumed to be 42 in. high. (1,067 mm) by 24 inches (610 mm) wide, or greater,
in the plane of the truss. For attics with truss construction, the live loads in Table 4.3-1
need only be applied to the lower chord elements with both of the following conditions
being met:
i. The attic area is accessible from an opening no less than 20 inches (508 mm) wide
and 30 inches (762 mm) long with a minimum attic clear height of 30 inches (762
mm); And
ii. The slope of the lower chord elements of the truss is not greater than 2 units vertical
to 12 units horizontal (9.5% slope).
The remainder of the lower chord elements shall be designed for a uniformly distributed
live load occurring simultaneously and not less than 10 lb/ft2(0.48 kN/m2).
4.13 Library shelf space
The live loads for library shelf space given in Table 4.3-1 apply to shelf space floors
supporting fixed two-sided library book shelves with the following limitations:
1.The nominal height of bookshelves shall not exceed 90 inches (2,290 mm);
2.The nominal depth of the shelf shall not exceed 12 inches (305 mm) for each side;
3.Parallel rows of two-sided bookshelves shall be separated by aisles no less than 36
inches (914 mm) wide.
4.14 Seating for gathering
In addition to the vertical live loads given in Table 4.3-1 for grandstands, stadiums and
arenas with fixed seating anchored to the floor, the design must take into account the
horizontal rocking forces applied to each row of seats as follows:
1. 24 lb per linear ft (0.35 kN/m) of seats applied in a parallel direction to each row of
seats and
2. 10 lb per linear ft (0.15 kN/m) of seats applied in a perpendicular direction to each
row of seats.
Parallel and perpendicular horizontal rocking forces do not need to be applied simultaneously.
4.15 Sidewalks, motorized vehicle roads and yards for trucks to pass through
4.15.1 Uniform load
Uniform loads, other than those given in Table 4.3-1, shall also be calculated if any,
according to an approved method containing provisions for truck loads.
4.15.2 Concentrated load
The wheel concentrated loads listed in Table 4.3-1 should be applied to an area of 4.5 in. x
4.5 in. (114mm x 114mm).
4.16 Step footing
The concentrated loads on the stair treads given in Table 4.3-1 for stairs and egress,
and for stairs in one- and two-family residences, should be
37 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
applied to an area of 2 in. x 2 in. (50 mm x 50 mm) and applied not simultaneously
with an even load.
4.17 Solar panel load
4.17.1 Solar panel roof loads
Roof structures supporting solar panel systems must be designed to withstand each of the
following conditions:
1.The roof live load is evenly distributed and concentrated as required in Table 4.3-1 along
with the dead load of the solar panel system.
EXCEPTION The live load of the roof does not need to be applied to the area covered by the panels
solar where the clearance between the panel and the roof surface is 24 in. (610 mm) or less.
2.The roof live load is evenly distributed and centralized as required in Table 4.3-1 without a
solar panel system.
4.17.2 Load combination
Roof systems that provide support for solar panel systems must be designed for the
load combinations required in Article 2.
4.17.3 Open grid roof structure supporting solar panels
Structures with open grid frames and without a roof deck or sheathing supporting a
solar panel system shall be designed to support the uniform and concentrated roof live
loads required in Table 4.3-1, unless the roof uniform live load is permitted to be
reduced to 12 psf (0.57 kN/m2).
This article lists consensus standards and other documents that should be considered part of
this standard to the extent referred to in this Article:
AASHTO LRFDBridge Design Specifications, 7th Ed.,American Association of State Highway

and Transportation Officials, 2014, with 2015 interim revisions Cited in: Section 4.5.3,
Section 4.10.2
ASME A17,American National Standard Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators,
American Society of Mechanical Engineers, 2013 Cited in: Section 4.6.2
© BSN 2020 38 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
5 Robust flood load
5.1 General
The provisions of this Article apply to buildings and other structures in locations within
flood-prone areas as defined on the flood risk map.
5.2 Definition
The following definitions are used in the provisions of this Article:
Approved
acceptable to the competent authorities
basic flooding
floods that have a 1% chance of being equaled or exceeded in one year.
base flood elevation (base flood elevation/bfe)

flood elevation, including wave height, which has a 1% chance of being met or
exceeded in one year
release wall (breakaway)

any type of wall that resists flooding which is not a supporting structure for a building
or other structure, and which is designed and constructed in such a way that in the
event of a base flood or smaller flood, the wall will collapse in such a way that: (1) it can
pass flood water , and (2) does not damage the supporting structure or foundation
system
coastal area zone a

an area within a special flood risk area, landward from zone v or landward from an
open coast without a zone v map. To be classified as a zone A coastal area, the main
source of flooding must occur due to astronomical tides, storm surges,seiches, or
tsunami, is not the result of a river flood and the potential for breaking wave heights
greater than or equal to 1.5 ft (0.46 m) must exist during base flooding
high danger areas along the coast (zone v)

an area within a special flood prone area, from the coastal area to the land boundary of
the main dune face along an open beach, and any other area that resists high wave
velocities resulting from hurricanes or earthquake sources.
design flood
flooding in an area that is declared by the local community as a flood risk area or is
declared legal according to law
design flood elevation (design flood elevation/dfe)

elevation of the design flood, including wave height, relative to the datum required in a
group/section of the flood hazard map
flood hazard areas

areas affected by flooding during a design flood
flood hazard map
39 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
maps depicting flood hazard areas adopted by competent authorities.
special flood hazard areas

land in a flood area that has a 1% chance of being met or exceeded in one year. This
area is determined by the competent authorities
5.3 Design requirements
5.3.1 Design loads
The structural system of a building or other structure must be designed, constructed,

connected and anchored to withstand the possibility of floating, collapsing and
permanent lateral displacement due to flood loads in accordance with the design flood
load (see Article 5.3.3) and other loads in accordance with the load combination of
Section 2.
5.3.2 Erosion and scour
The effects of erosion and scouring must be considered in calculating loads on

buildings and other structures in flood risk areas.
5.3.3 Loads on relief walls
Walls and partitions required by ASCE/SEI 24 to be detached, including their

connections to the structure, must be designed for the following greatest loads acting
perpendicular to the plane of the wall:
1. wind load specified in Article 26
2. earthquake loads specified in Article 7 SNI 1726 (See Article 12 ASCE 7-16), and
3. 10 psf (0.48 kN/m2).

The load on a relief wall that is planned to fail must not exceed 20 psf (0.96 kN/m2)
unless the design meets the following conditions:
1. The failure of the relief wall was designed as a result of flood loading
which is smaller than that which occurs during base flooding; And
2. The foundation system and superstructure of the building must be designed so that
not experience collapse, permanent lateral displacement, and other structural
damage due to the combined influence of flood loads and other loads as required in
Article 2.
5.4 Loads during flooding
5.4.1 Basis for determining loads
In flood-prone areas, structural design should be based on design flooding.
5.4.2 Hydrostatic load
Hydrostatic loads as high as the water depth at the Design Flood Elevation level must
be taken into account on all relevant surfaces, both above and below ground, except
for surfaces both sides of which are submerged in water, where the design depth must
be increased by 1 ft (0.30 m).
© BSN 2020 40 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Reduced lift forces and lateral loads on the surface of an enclosed space below the
design flood elevation can only be used if flood water can enter and exit freely.
5.4.3 Hydrodynamic loads
The dynamic effects of water movement must be determined by detailed analysis using
basic fluid mechanics concepts.
EXCEPTION If the water speed does not exceed 10 ft/s (3.05 m/s), the effects of
dynamic water movement is allowed to be converted into an equivalent hydrostatic load with an
increase in DFE for design purposes with an increase in depth
dhequivalent, only on the surface of the upstream area and above ground level, the same as
a.V2
dh- (5.4-1)
2g
with
V = average water speed, expressed in ft/s (m/s)
g = acceleration due to gravity, taken as 32.2 ft/s2(9.81 m/s2)
a = coefficientdragor form factor (not less than 1.25)
An equivalent additional depth shall be added to the design depth of the design flood
elevation and the resultant hydrostatic pressure applied, and distributed uniformly
along the vertical projected area of the building or structure perpendicular to the
flow. Surfaces that are parallel to the flow or surfaces that are wet due to water tails (
tailwater)must take into account hydrostatic pressure for depth to design flood
elevation only.
5.4.4 Wave loads
Wave loads shall be determined by one of the following three methods: (1) by using the
analytical procedures listed in this Article, (2) by sophisticated numerical modeling
procedures, or (3) by laboratory test procedures (physical models).
Wave load is the load caused by sea waves propagating over the water surface and
hitting a building or other structure. The design and construction of buildings and
other structures subject to wave loads should account for the following loads: breaking
waves on parts of the building or structure; lifting force (uplift)caused by waves in
shallow waters beneath a building or structure, or part thereof; waverunupthat strikes
part of a building or structure; drag caused by waves and inertial forces; and scour
caused by waves at the base of a building or structure, or its foundations. Wave loads
must be included in Zone V and Zone A. In Zone V, waves are 3 ft (0.91 m) high, or
more; Coastal flood plains inland from Zone V, wave heights smaller than 3 ft (0.91 m).
Unbreaking wave loads and breaking waves must be calculated according to the
procedures set out in Article 5.4.2 and Article 5.4.3 which show how to calculate
hydrostatic loads and hydrodynamic loads.
41 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
The loads due to breaking waves must be calculated using the procedures specified in
Articles 5.4.4.1 to Article 5.4.4.4. The height of breaking water waves according to the
procedures in Article 5.4.4.1 to Article 5.4.4.4 must be calculated for Zone V and Zone A
of the coast using Equation (5.4-2) and Equation (5.4-3).
Hb-0.78ds (5.4-2)
with
Hb = height of breaking wave in ft (m)
ds = local depth of instantaneous water height in ft (m)
The local depth of instantaneous water height shall be calculated using Equation
(5.4-3), unless more sophisticated procedures or laboratory tests specified in this clause
are used.
ds-0.65-BFE-G- (5.4-3)
with
BFE = Base Flood Elevation (Base Flood Elevation) in ft (m) =
G height of land in ft (m)
5.4.4.1 Breaking wave loads on vertical piles and vertical columns
The net force obtained from a breaking wave acting on a pile or rigid vertical column
must be assumed to act at the instantaneous water level and must be calculated using
the following Equation (5-4).
FD-0.5 .-C Dw D Hb2 (5.4-4)
with
FD = net wave force, in lb (kN)
-w = specific gravity of water = 62.4 pcf (9.80 kN/m3) for fresh water and = 64.0 pcf (10.05 kN/m3) for
sea water
CD = coefficientdragfor breaking waves = 1.75 for round piles or round columns, and = 2.25
for rectangular piles or rectangular columns
D = pile diameter or column diameter, expressed in ft (m) for
round section, or for rectangular piles or rectangular columns, 1.4 times the width of
the pile or 1.4 times the width of the column, expressed in ft (m)
Hb = breaking wave height, expressed in ft (m)
5.4.4.2 Loads due to breaking waves on vertical walls
Maximum pressure and net force result from breaking waves with a perpendicular
incident direction (limited depth, equal toHb-0.78ds)who works on
a rigid vertical wall, must be calculated according to Equation (5.4-5) and Equation
(5.4-6) below.
Pmax-Cp-wds-1,2-wds (5.4-5)
And
© BSN 2020 42 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Ft- 1, 1Cp-wds 2-2,4-wd2 s (5.4-6)

with
Pmax=maximum wave pressure, the dynamic combination is taken as-Cp-wds-And
static is taken as-1,2-wds-, also considered for sudden pressure in lb/ft2
(kN/m2)
Ft = the net force of breaking waves per unit length of the structure, is also considered for force
sudden, impulse, or wave impact force in kN/m (lb/ft), acting near the instantaneous water
level
Cp - -
= dynamic pressure coefficient 1.6 -Cp-3.5 (see Table 5.4-1)
-w = specific gravity of water, in lb per ft3(kN/m3) = 62.4 pcf (9.80 kN/m3) for fresh water, and 64.0 pcf
(10.05 kN/m3) for sea water
ds = instantaneous water depth in ft (m) at the base of a building or other structure where
breaking wave
This procedure assumes that a vertical wall causes a reflection or standing wave
against the wall on the side facing the water with a wave peak of 1.2dsabove the water
level momentarily. The static dynamic pressure distribution and total pressure
distribution on the wall are in accordance with Figure 5.4-1.
This procedure also assumes that the space behind the vertical wall is dry, with no fluid
to balance the static component of the wave force on the outer wall. If the free water is
behind the wall, part of the hydrostatic components of the wave pressure and wave
force disappears (see Figure 5.4-2) and the net force must be calculated using Equation
5.4-7 (the maximum combined wave pressure is still calculated using Equation 5.4- 5).
2 2
Ft-1.1Cp- w ds-1.9-wds (5.4-7)
with
Ft = net breaking wave force per unit length of structure, also called shock force,
impulse, or wave impact force acting near the instantaneous water level in lb/ft (kN/m)
Cp = - -
dynamic pressure coefficient 1.6 -Cp-3.5 (see Table 5.4-1)
-w = specific gravity of water, in lb per ft3(kN/m3), for fresh water = 62.4 pcf (9.80 kN/m3) and for
seawater 64.0 pcf (10.05 kN/m3)
ds = instantaneous water depth in ft (m) at the base of a building or other structure where
the wave breaks
Table 5.4-1 - Dynamic pressure coefficient values,Cp
Building risk categoriesa Cp

I 1.6
II 2.8
III 3,2
IV 3.5
aFor building risk categories, see Table 1.5-1.
43 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Figure 5.4-1 - Pressure breaking wave incident perpendicular to a wall

vertical (space behind dry vertical walls)
Instantaneous water level
Figure 5.4-2 - Pressure breaking wave incident perpendicular to a wall

vertical (instantaneous water level on both sides of the wall is the same)
© BSN 2020 44 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
5.4.4.3 Breaking wave loads on nonvertical walls
The breaking wave force specified in Equation 5.4-6 and Equation 5.4-7 must be
modified in situations where the wall or surface on which the wave breaks is
nonvertical. The horizontal component of the breaking wave force should be calculated
according to Equation 5.4-8.
Fn--Ftsyn2- (5.4-8)
with
Fn- = horizontal component of breaking wave force, in lb/ft (kN/m)
Ft = net breaking wave force acting on a vertical surface, in lb/ft (kN/m) vertical angle
- = between nonvertical and horizontal surfaces
5.4.4.4 Breaking wave load at an oblique angle to the incident wave
The breaking wave forces specified in Equation 5.4-6 and Equation 5.4-7 must be
modified for waves that are at an angle to the incident wave. The breaking wave force
at an oblique angle must be calculated according to Equation 5.4-9.
Foi- Ftsyn2- (5.4-9)
with
Foi=the horizontal component of the inclined angle breaking wave force in lb/ft
(kN/m)
Ft = net breaking wave force (perpendicular breaking wave) acting on
vertical surface in lb/ft (kN/m)
- = the horizontal angle between the direction of the incident wave and the vertical surface
5.4.5 Impact loads
Impact loads are loads resulting from debris, ice and any objects carried by flooding
and hitting buildings and structures, or parts thereof. Impact loads must be
determined using rational measures because they are concentrated loads acting
horizontally at the most critical locations located at or below the design flood elevation.
5.5 Consensus standards and other related criteria
This Article contains a list of consensus standards and other related criteria that should be
considered part of this Standard to the extent referred to in this Article.
ASCE/SEI 24Flood resistant design and construction, ASCE, 2014.

45 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
6 Tsunami loads and effects
6.1 General requirements
6.1.1 Scope
Buildings and other structures located within the tsunami design zone must be
designed to withstand the maximum considered tsunami effects, including hydrostatic
and hydrodynamic forces, accumulated waterborne debris loads and the effects of
impact loads, land subsidence and scouring. in accordance with this Article:
a. Tsunami Risk Category IV for buildings and structures;

b. Tsunami Risk Category III for buildings and structures with a submergence depth of
more than 3 ft (0.914 m) at any location within the site of the affected structure, and
c. If required by the central government or regional government to adopt building

regulations to take into account the effects of tsunamis in design, Tsunami Risk
Category II is for buildings with an average height above the site area (grade plane)
as a reference, greater than the height specified in building regulations and having a
submergence depth of more than 3 ft (0.914 m) at any location within the planned
structure site.
EXCEPTION Tsunami Risk Category II, one-story building with a height

without a mezzanine or roof level that can be occupied and there is no important equipment or
facilities, so it does not need to be designed for the loads and effects of a tsunami specified in
this Article.
For the purposes of this Article, tsunami risk categories shall be determined in accordance with Article
6.4.
The Tsunami Design Zone will be determined usingGeodatabaseIndonesian Tsunami

Design.GeodatabaseThe Indonesian Tsunami design refers to dots runupwhich is
associated with the submergence boundaries of the tsunami design zone available in
the Indonesian Tsunami Map Book.
EXCEPTION For coastal areas that have the potential to be submerged by a tsunami but are not
included in the Indonesian Tsunami Map Book, tsunami design zones, submergence limits and
elevationrunupshould be determined using procedures that take into account site specificities (
site-specific) in Article 6.7, or for the structure of Tsunami Risk Category II or III, determined in
accordance with the procedures in Article 6.5.1.1 according to the Indonesian Tsunami Map
Book reference.
Non-structural components and systems specifically designed in relation to Tsunami

Risk Category III critical facilities and Tsunami Risk Category IV structures regulated in
this Article must be placed above, protected from, or if not, must be designed to
withstand submersion in accordance with Article 6.15 so that the structure can function
immediately after the maximum considered tsunami event.
NOTES GeodatabaseIndonesian Tsunami Design from Reference pointrunup geocode

and Submergence limits of Tsunami Design Zones, available in the Indonesian Tsunami Map
Book. Sea level rise has not been included in the Tsunami Design Zone maps, and other
additional effects on inundation at the site must be explicitly evaluated.
© BSN 2020 46 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
6.2 Definition
The following definitions apply only to the tsunami requirements of this Article. Also
see Figure 6.2-1 to illustrate some key terms.
The structure
reviewed
Tsunami height Sea face

Depth
offshore reference
marinade
Amplitude
Elevation
a tsunami broke out
runup, R
beach Elevation
Surface elevation marinade
land
Distance from
coastline
Horizontal distance of immersion limit
Reference elevationGeoid(Geodetic Datum

Geospatial Information Agency – BIG)
Figure 6.2-1 - Illustration of key definitions along flow transects in a zone

tsunami design
Indonesian tsunami design geodatabase

Indonesian database fromgeocodedwith a reference point offshore at a depth of 328 ft (100
m), the tsunami amplitude,ht, and dominant periodtTsuof the maximum considered tsunami,
a description of the contribution of hazard sources separately, subsidenceprobabilistic,
elevationrunupand reference pointsgeocodesubmerged areas, and tsunami design zone
maps
bathymetric profile
cross section showing ocean depth plotted as a function of horizontal distance from a
reference point (such as a coastline)
canal-shaped scour
scour produced by a flow that bends and focuses in an area such as a backflow within a
pre-existing channel or along the side of a sea wall
containment ratio (to the area of the vertical projection area of the impoundment) the
ratio of the area of the submerged area, excluding glass windows and openings, that is
submerged to the total area of the vertical projection area whose surface is exposed to flow
pressure
level of structural performance to prevent collapse

a post-incident damage condition in which a structure has experienced component
failure and is still carrying gravity loads but retains little or no safety against collapse
critical equipment or critical systems

non-structural components that are considered essential for the function of critical
facilities or important facilities or that are needed to secure hazardous material storage
areas
47 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
critical facilities
Buildings and structures that provide services determined by the central, regional
government or local communities are the basis for implementing emergency response
and recovery management plans or for the continued functioning of a community,
such as electricity, fuel, water, communications, public health and infrastructure
facilities. main transportation, and basic facilities in running government. Critical
facilities consist of all public and private facilities deemed essential by a community for
vital services, special shelter by residents, and the provision of other services essential
to that community.
deadweight tonnage(dead weight tonnage/dwt)

Deadweight tonnage is the ship's displacement tonnage (displacement tonnage/dt)
minus the actual weight of the ship (lightship weight/via). dwt is a classification used
for a ship's carrying capacity which is equal to the total weight of cargo, fuel, fresh
water, ballast water, supplies, passengers and crew; does not include the weight of the
ship itself. Displacement tonnage (dt) is the total weight of a fully loaded ship. The
actual weight of the ship (lwt) is the weight of the ship without cargo, fuel, fresh water,
ballast water, provisions, passengers or crew.
design strength
The nominal strength is multiplied by the resistance factor,-.
tsunami design parameters

The tsunami parameters used for design, consist of immersion depth and flow velocity
at the inflow and outflow stages that are most critical to the structure and momentum
flux.
specified non-structural systems and components

non-structural components and systems that are assigned a component priority factor,Ip,
equal to 1.5 based on Article 9.1.1 SNI 1726 (See Article 13.1.3 ASCE 7-16).
ductility controlled action

any action on a structural component characterized by a post-elastic force versus
deformation curve that has (1) sufficient ductility and (2) results from discontinuous
impulsive (short-period) forces
sustainable style action

Any action on a structural component characterized by a sustained force or post-elastic
force versus a deformation curve that is not affected by ductility due to lack of
sufficient ductility
Froude number,Fr
a dimensionless number defined asu/-gh-,withuis
average velocity of flow over a cross section perpendicular to the flow, used to
measure normalized tsunami flow velocity as a function of water depth
general erosion
significant scouring and erosion of the soil surface of the submerged area, excluding local
scouring action
© BSN 2020 48 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
tread area (grade plane)

an on-site horizontal reference plane representing the average elevation of mature ground
levels adjacent to the structure on all exterior walls. where the ground surface slopes away
from the exterior wall, the site plane is formed by the lowest point in the area between the
structure and the property line or where the property line is more than 6 ft (1.83 m) from
the structure, between the structure and the point 6 ft (1.83 m) .83 m) of the structure.
tsunami hazard-consistent scenario

one or more substitute tsunami scenarios generated from a disaggregated main
earthquake source area that mimics the characteristics of offshore tsunami waveforms
for the location under consideration (Indonesian tsunami map book), taking into
account the net effect of uncertain probabilistic treatment into the wave amplitude
scenarios offshore.
hydrodynamic load
loads acting on an object against the flow of water and around it
hydrostatic load
loads acting on an object by a mass of still water
immediate level of residential structural performance

post-incident damage condition where the structure remains safe for habitation
impact load
loads originating from debris or other objects carried by a design tsunami striking a
structure or part thereof
immersion depth
design tsunami water level depth, including relative sea level changes, and to the
surface area of the structure
immersion elevation
design tsunami water surface elevation, including relative sea level changes, and against
the vertical datum in the Indonesian Vertical Datum (Datum BIG)
immersion limit
the maximum horizontal landward flood extension for the tsunami considered is
maximum, where the submergence depth above the ground surface becomes zero; the
horizontal distance submerged, relative to the coastline defined where the height of
the Indonesian Vertical Datum (Datum BIG) is zero.
level of safety structural performance

a post-incident state of damage where structural components have been damaged but
still have security to prevent partial or total collapse
liquefaction scour
the limiting case of pore pressure softening is associated with hydrodynamic flow,
where the effective stress drops to zero. in noncohesive soils, the shear stress required
to initiate sediment transport also drops to zero during liquefaction scouring.
local co-seismic tsunami

A tsunami preceded by an earthquake with damaging effects felt in submerged areas.
49 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
local scour
the removal of material from a localized portion of the ground surface, resulting from
flow around, over, or under a structure or structural element
tsunami considered maximum

A probabilistic tsunami with an exceedance probability of 2% in a 50 year period or an
average recurrence interval of 2,475 years
momentum flux
quantityρshoo2for unit width based on depth average flow velocityu, above the
immersion depthh, for fluid density ρswhich is equivalent, has units of force per unit
width
profile near the beach

cross-sectional bathymetric profile from shoreline to 328 ft (100 m) water depth
tsunami amplitude near the coast

The maximum tsunami amplitude considered is near the coastline, namely at a sea
depth of 33 ft (10 m).
non-building critical facility structures

non-building structures whose tsunami risk category is designated as III or IV
non-building structures
structures other than buildings
offshore tsunami amplitude

maximum considered tsunami amplitude relative to reference sea level, measured at
an undisturbed water depth of 328 ft (100 m)
offshore tsunami height

The vertical dimension of the wave from the tsunami under consideration is maximum
from successive troughs to crests, measured at an undisturbed water depth of 328 ft
(100 m), after removing tidal variations
open structure
a structure where the interior submergence depth does not have a containment ratio
of more than 20%, and where the containment does not include tsunami escape walls,
and has no interior partitions or materials that prevent tsunamis from passing through
and exiting the structure as waterborne debris
pole scour
special cases of local scour that increase and occur at the pole,piersbridge, or similar
slender structure
scourplunging
a special case of localized scour that increases and occurs when flow passes through a
full or nearly full barrier, such as a barrier wall and falls sharply to the ground surface
below and forms a depression
softening pore pressure

a mechanism that increases scour through increased water pressure in pores
generated in the soil during rapid tsunami loading and pressure release when the
tsunami recedes.
© BSN 2020 50 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
main structural components

structural components required to withstand the force and action of a tsunami, and
submerged structural components of gravity load-bearing systems
recognized literature
published research findings and technical papers approved by the competent
authorities
reference sea level

The sea level datum used in modeling subsidence for a specific location, usually taken
Mean High Water Level (MHWL)
changes in relative sea level

local changes in sea level relative to land, which may be caused by sea level rise and/or
land subsidence
elevationrunup
land elevation at the maximum tsunami submergence limit, including changes in relative sea level,
against the reference datum, namely the Indonesian vertical datum
secondary structural components non-

major structural components
shallowing
an increase in wave height and wave steepness caused by a decrease in water depth as
the wave moves towards shallower water
fissionsoliton
short-period waves generated at the edge of a tsunami wave front in shallowing
conditions on long, slightly sloping seabed slopes or that have sudden seabed
discontinuities, such as nearshore coral reefs
structural components
a component of a building that provides resistance to carrying gravity loads or lateral
forces as part of a continuous load path transmitted to the foundation, including
beams, columns, plates, braces, walls,pierswalls, coupling beams, and joints
structural walls
walls that provide the carrying capacity to carry gravity loads or that are designed to
provide resistance to lateral forces
surge
Rapidly rising water levels produce horizontal flow onto land
continuous flow scour

increased local scour resulting from accelerated flow around the structure. Flow
acceleration and associated vortices increase shear stress at the base and erode out
local basins
foot scour
a special case of increased local scouring occurring at the base of a seawall or similar
structure on the side directly exposed to the flow. Foot scours can occur whether the
structure is displaced or not.
51 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
topographic cross section

vertical elevation data profile versus horizontal distance along a cross section, where
the orientation of the cross section is perpendicular or at some angle to the coastline
tsunami
a series of waves with varying periods of length, typically resulting from uplift or
subsidence of the sea floor resulting from earthquakes
tsunami amplitude
the absolute value of the difference between a particular peak or trough of a tsunami and
the undisturbed sea level at any given moment
boretsunami
A steep, turbulent breaking wave front produced at the leading edge of a long-period
tsunami waveforms when shallowing occurs along a gently sloping seabed or an
abrupt seabed discontinuity such as a coral reef near the coast, or at a river mouth,
according to Article 6.6.4. Fissionsolitonin nearshore profiles can result in frequent
occurrenceboretsunami.
tallboretsunami
The height of the tsunami breaking wave hits above the surface of the water in front
bore or land elevation ifborearrived on dry land nominally.
Tsunami relief wall

any type of flood wall that is not required to provide structural bearing capacity to a
building or other structure and that is designed and constructed such that, prior to the
development of the design flow conditions of Soaked Load Case 1, as defined in Article
6.8.3.1, the wall will collapses or detaches in such a way that (1) the wall allows passage
completely free of flood water and debris from water originating from outside or
inside, including unattached building contents and (2) the wall does not damage
structure or supporting foundation system.
tsunami design zone

an area identified on a tsunami design zone map between the coastline and the
submergence boundary, where structures are analyzed and designed for submersion
by the maximum considered tsunami.
tsunami design zone map

The map given in figure 6.1-1 shows the potential horizontal submergence limits of the
maximum considered tsunami, or a probabilistic map of state or local jurisdiction
produced in accordance with clause 6.7 of this article.
tsunami evacuation map

evacuation maps based on tsunami inundation maps based on assumed scenarios
developed and provided to the public by authorized state agencies under the National
Tsunami Hazard Mitigation Program. Tsunami soak maps for evacuation may be very
different compared to probabilistic tsunami design zones, and tsunami evacuation
maps are not intended for design or spatial planning.
© BSN 2020 52 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
tsunami-prone areas
The Indonesian coastal areas discussed by this article are with quantitative probability
in the literature recognized as being at risk of tsunami inundation withrunupgreater
than 3 ft (0.914 m) caused by an earthquake that generates a tsunami according to the
probabilistic tsunami hazard analysis method given in this Article.
tsunami risk category

risk categories of Article 1.5, as modified for specific use relating to this Article
according to Article 6.4.
vertical tsunami evacuation shelter structure

a structure established and designed to function as a refugee point where part of the
community population can evacuate in the event of a tsunami if high ground is not
available.
6.3 Symbols and notation
Abeam = vertical projection area of individual beam elements

Acol = vertical projection area of individual column elements
Ad = vertical projected area of debris clogging and collecting on
structure
Awall = vertical projection planes of individual wall elements

a1 = amplitude of the initial wave (negative for the first tsunami valley)
a2 = amplitude of the next wave, or the second
b = width exposed to force overall
B = building width force coefficient with
Cbs = relief slab
Ccx = proportion of closing coefficient
Cd = coefficientdragbased on quasi-fixed forces (quasi-steady)
Cdis = runoff discharge coefficient
Co = orientation coefficient (of debris)

c2V = scour coefficientplunging
D = dead load
Da = diameter of coastal protective rocks (rock armor)
dd = additional settlement of the ground to the base of the wall on the seawall side
or freestanding retaining walls that are exposed to scourplunging
Ds = scour depth
DT = tonnage transfer
DWT = dead load ship tonnage
E = earthquake load
Eg = hydraulic head (hydraulic heads) in the energy level line analysis (Energy
Grade Line Analysis)
Emh = Horizontal seismic load effect, including overstrength factor, which
defined in Article 7.4.3.1 SNI 1726 (See Article 12.4.3.1 ASCE 7-16)
53 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Fd = styledragon elements or components
Fdx = styledragin buildings or structures at each level the hydrostatic

Fh = lateral forces are not balanced
Fi = debris impact design style
Fhere = nominal maximum instantaneous debris impact force
Fpw = hydrodynamic force on a wall with a hole
Fr = Froude number =u/-gh-
FTSU = load or effects of a tsunami
fugh = equivalent uniform lateral force per unit width of

Fv = buoyancy
Fw = load on the wall orpiers
Fw- = styles on walls oriented at cornersθto the direction of flow
g = acceleration due to gravity
h = tsunami submergence depth above the surface area of a high structure
HB = retaining an embankment, seawall, or freestanding retaining wall
he = immersion height of individual elements
hi = immersion depth at pointi
hmax = maximum immersion depth above the surface of the structure
ho = offshore water depth
HO = the depth to which the barrier extends above the height of the barrier height of
hr = residual water in the building
hs = tallslabstructural floor above the surface of the structure
hss = height of the baseslabstructural floor, taken above the tread plane
on structure
hsx = floor heightx
HQ = offshore tsunami amplitude
HTSU = loads caused by lateral earth pressure caused by tsunamis in submerged
conditions
ITsu = priority factor for tsunami forcing to account for uncertainty
addition in the estimated parameters
k = the effective stiffness of the impacting debris or the lateral stiffness of the
affected structural element
ks = fluid density factor to account for suspension of soil and objects
other smaller objects carried by the flow that are not considered in Article
6.11
L = living load
Lrefuge = burden of living in public gathering areas on shelter floor area
tsunami
lw = structural wall length

LWT = actual weight of the ship
© BSN 2020 54 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
m = a component requirement modification factor that takes into account the

expected ductility, applied to the expected forces from the action of the
ductility-controlled element, to obtain an acceptable structural component
capacity at a given performance level when using linear static analysis
procedures
mcontents= mass of contents in the container
MCTs = A tsunami is considered the maximum mass
md = of a debris object
n = Manning coefficient
Pu = lifting pressure onslabor horizontal elements of a building
Pur = reduced lifting pressure for a slab with discharge openings
q = per unit width over a structure that exceeds the expected
QC.E = forces in the structural element
QCS = established strength of structural elements
QUD = ductility controlled force caused by loading

gravity and tsunamis
QUF = maximum force produced in the element caused by
gravity loading and tsunami
R = elevationrunuptsunami mapped
Rmax = dynamic response ratio
Rs = net upward resistance of foundation elements
s = friction slope of the snow load energy
S = level line
t = time
td = duration of debris impact
TDZ = tsunami design zone(tsunami design zone)
to = timeoffsetof the wave train
TSU = pre-dominant wave period, or time from the start of the wave (pulse)
first to the end of the wave (pulse) both
u = tsunami flow speeds
U = fast flow speed of the streamplunging maximum
umax = tsunami flow velocity in the structure of the vertical
uv = component of tsunami flow velocity
w
= the volume of water displaced by the
wg = width of the gap opening inslab
s
= structure weight
x = horizontal distance inland from the BIG coastline

xR = the distance of the submergence boundary is mapped inland from the BIG coastline
z = land elevation above the Indonesian Vertical Datum (Datum
- = BIG) Froude number coefficient in energy level line analysis
55 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
- = effective wake angle downstream from the barrier structure to the structure under
consideration
-s = minimum fluid weight density for the design hydrostatic load
-sw = effective weight density of seawater
-xi = Incremental distance used in the analysis of similarity parameter energy level
-100 = linessurfusing nearshore wave characteristics

328 ft (100 m)
- = free surface elevation as a function of time,t, used to create
offshore boundary conditions at a depth contour of 328 ft (100m) angle
- = between the longitudinal axis of a wall and the direction of flow
- = structural resistance factor
-s = minimum fluid mass density for the design hydrodynamic load
-sw = effective mass density of sea water the mean

- = slope of the land on the structure of the mean
-i = slope of the land at a pointi
- = average angular inclination of the nearshore profile
= angle between fast flowsplungingin scour holes and parts
horizontally
- = the angular frequency of the waveform, is equal to,2-/Qwith the is
wave period
-O = overstrength factor for a given lateral force resisting system
in Table 12 of SNI 1726 (See Table 12.2-1 ASCE 7-16).
6.4 Tsunami risk categories
For the purposes of this Article, the tsunami risk categories for buildings and other
structures are the risk categories given in Article 1.5 with the following modifications:
1. Central, Provincial and Regency/City Governments are permitted to include
critical facilities in Tsunami Risk Category III, such as power generating stations,
drinking water treatment facilities, waste water treatment facilities and other
public facilities not included in Risk Category IV.
2. The following structures do not need to be included in Tsunami Risk Category IV,
and Provincial, Regency/City governments,permitted to designate it as Tsunami
Risk Category II or III:
a. fire stations, ambulance facilities, and emergency vehicle garages;
b. shelter (shelters) earthquake or hurricane;

c. emergency aircraft hangar; And
d. police stations that do not have holding cells and that are not specifically
required for post-disaster emergency response as critical facilities.
3. Vertical tsunami evacuation shelter structures must be included in Tsunami Risk
Category IV.
© BSN 2020 56 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
6.5 Design analysis of immersion depth and flow velocity
6.5.1 Buildings and other structures Tsunami Risk Category II and III
The maximum considered tsunami submergence height and characteristics of tsunami

flow velocity in Tsunami Risk Category II or III buildings or other structures must be
determined using the energy level line analysis of Article 6.6 using submergence limits
and heights.runupThe maximum considered tsunami is as given in Figure 6.1-1.
Site-specific probabilistic tsunami hazard analysis (PTHA) in Article 6.7 should be

permitted as an alternative to energy level line analysis. Location-specific speeds
determined by the PTHA must meet the limitations stated in Article 6.7.6.8.
EXCEPTION For tsunami-prone areas not covered in Figure 6.1-1,

Article 6.5.1.1 procedures apply to buildings and other structures in Tsunami Risk Categories II and
III.
6.5.1.1 Evaluationrunupfor regions where map values do not exist
For buildings and other structures in Tsunami Risk Category II and III where map
submergence limits do not exist as shown in Figure 6.1-1, the height ratiorunup tsunami
above the Highest Average Water Level (MHWL) to the amplitude of the release tsunami
beach,R/HQ, is allowed to be specified using the similarity parametersurf,-, according to
100
Equation (6.5-2a, b, c, d, or e) and Fig. 6.5-1.
Similarity ParametersSurf
Figure 6.5-1 - Ratiorunup R/HQ, as a function of the average slope of

similarity parameterssurf,-100,where map submergence boundaries do not exist
Similarity parameterssurf,-100,for tsunami engineering applications is determined

according to Equation (6.5-1).
(6.5-1)
57 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
with is the average dip angle of the nearshore profile taken from
water depth of 328 ft (100 m) to the height of the Highest Average Water Level (MHWL)
along the cross-sectional axis topography for the site.His Q
offshore tsunami amplitude, and TSUis the period of tsunami waves in
328 ft (100-m) depth.Hand Indonesia.

Q TSU shown in the Tsunami Map Book
(6.5-2a)
For-100- 0.6 R/HQ -1.5
For-100- 0.6d and (6.5-2b)

R/HQ -2.5[log10--100-] -2.05
(6.5-2c)
For-100- 6And-100- 20,R/HQ - 4.0
For-100- 20And-100-100, (6.5-2d)

R/HQ - - 2.15[log10--100-] -6.80
(6.5-2e)
For-100-100,R/HQ -2.5
EXCEPTION This equation is not used if there is an estimate of wave convergence

such as on headlands, in V-shaped bays, or where the onshore flow field is expected to vary
significantly in a direction parallel to the shoreline due to alongshore topographic variability.
6.5.2 Buildings and other structures Tsunami Risk Category IV
The energy level line analysis in Article 6.6 must be carried out for buildings and other structures
of Tsunami Risk Category IV, and Probabilistic Analysis of Tsunami Hazard (Probabilistic Tsunami
Hazard Analysis/PTHA) with location specificity in Article 6.7 must also be carried out. Speed
according to location specificity determined by PTHAaccording to the specifics of the location is
determined to be smaller than the energy level line analysis that meets the limitations in Article
6.7.6.8. The speed according to the specificity of the location is determined to be greater than
the energy level line analysis used.
EXCEPTION For structures other than vertical tsunami evacuation shelter structures,
Probabilistic analysis of tsunami hazard according to site specificity does not need to be carried out if
the immersion depth resulting from energy level line analysis is determined to be less than 12 ft (3.66
m) at any point. in Tsunami Risk Category IV structural locations.
6.5.3 Changes in sea level
The direct physical effects of potential changes in relative sea level must be considered
in determining the maximum immersion depth during the project's service life cycle. A
project service life cycle of no less than 50 years should be used. The minimum
potential rate of relative sea level change is the rate of sea level change recorded
historically for that location. Potential relative sea level changes during the project's
service life cycle must be added to the Reference Sea Level and elevationrunuptsunami.
© BSN 2020 58 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
6.6 Immersion depth and flow rate based onrunup
6.6.1 Maximum immersion depth and flow rate based onrunup
The maximum immersion depth and flow velocity associated with the tsunami flood
stage shall be determined in accordance with Article 6.6.2. The calculated flow velocity
should not be taken less than 10 ft/s (3.0 m/s) and should not be taken more
larger than smaller between 1.5 gh and - -
50 ft/s (15.2 m/s).
max
1/2
If the maximum topographic elevation along the topographic cross section between the
coastline and the submergence boundary is greater than therunup, one of the following
methods must be used:
1. The site-specific procedures of Article 6.7.6 shall be used to determine the immersion
depth and flow velocity at the site, in accordance with the calculated velocity ranges
stated above.
2. For the determination of immersion depth and flow velocity at the site, the
procedures of Article 6.6.2, energy level line analysis shall be used, assuming
elevation runupand horizontal submergence boundaries that have at least 100% of
the maximum topographic elevation along the topographic cross section.
6.6.2 Energy level line analysis of maximum immersion depth and flow velocity
The maximum velocity and maximum immersion depth along the soil elevation profile
to the immersion boundary shall be determined using energy level line analysis. The
orientation of the topographic cross-sectional profile used must be determined taking
into account the requirements of Article 6.8.6.1. Ground elevation along the cross
section,z,must be represented as a series
i
linear inclined segments each with a Manning coefficient consistent with the soil
surface macroroughness friction (terrain)equivalent to with segmentterrain the. Energy
level line analysis should be carried out in stages according to Equation (6.6-1) across
topographic cross sections in a stepwise procedure. Equation (6.6-1) must be applied
over the entire topographic cross section of runupwhere is the hydraulic head at the
immersion limit,x,is zero, and the water elevation R
together withrunup,R,by calculating the change in hydraulic head at each segment
increaseterraintowards the coastline until you reach the desired location, as shown in
Figure 6.6-1.
Eg, i-Eg, i -1- --i-si --xi (6.6-1)
with
E g, i
= hydraulic head on pointi-hi-ui 2
/2g-hi-1- 0.5F2 ri -;
hi = immersion depth at pointi; maximum flow
ui = velocity at the pointi; the average land slope
-i = between pointsiAndi -1; Froude number =u/-gh-1/2
Fri = on pointi;
-x i
= xi -1-xi , the increment of horizontal distance, which is no coarser than a 100 ft spacing
(30.5m);
xi = the horizontal distance inland from the BIG coastline at pointi;And
si = the slope of the friction energy level line between pointsiAndi -1, calculated using
Equation (6.6-2).
59 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
s i--ui- 2 -
/ -1.49/n- 2h4/3
i --gF 2 ri -
/ -1.49/n- 2h1/3
i - (6.6-2)
si -ui- -/ 2 --1.00/- n h2i - -gF

4/3
2 ri /--1.00/- n h2i -
1/3
(6.6-2.si)
with
n = Manning coefficient of the segmentterrainwhich is analyzed, according to Table 6.6-1, and the
ER = hydraulic head is from zero at pointrunup
The speed will be determined as a function of immersion depth, according to the value
determined from the Froude number calculated according to Equation (6.6-3).
- x-0.5
Fr---1-- - (6.6-3)
- x-R-
Runup
xR
Direction of analysis, starting from the pointrunup
NOTES:
R = elevationrunupdesign tsunami over BIG datum;
x R
= the design bath distance inland from the BIG coastline; And
zi = ground elevation above BIG Datum at pointi.
Figure 6.6-1 - Energy methods for tsunami immersion depth and velocity
above land
Table 6.6-1 - Manning Roughness,n,for energy level line analysis
Description of friction surfaces n
Bottom friction in nearshore waters 0.025 to 0.03
Open land or fields 0.025
All other cases 0.03
The building with the least 0.04

density of the city
with the value of the Froude number coefficient,-, equal to 1.0 should be used. Whenbore
tsunamis need to be considered according to Article 6.6.4, conditionsborethe tsunami
© BSN 2020 60 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
specified in Article 6.10.2.3 and Article 6.10.3.3 shall be applied using thehAnd-heu2-
e bore
evaluated with-=1.3.
6.6.3 Roughnessterrain
It is permissible to carry out soaking analysis assuming bare soil conditions with
equivalent macro roughness. The basic roughness should be determined using the
Manning coefficient,n. It is permitted to use the values listed in Table 6.6-1 or other
values based on analysisterrainin the literature that are recognized or specifically
validated for the immersion model used.
6.6.4Boretsunami
BoreA tsunami should be considered if any of the following conditions occur:

1. The bathymetric slope near the coast is 1/100 or more gentle,
2. Shallow nearshore coral reefs or other ladder-like discontinuities that occur on
nearshore bathymetric slopes
3. If historically documented,
4. As described in recognized literature, or
5. As determined from soaking analysis according to site specifics.
Ifborea tsunami is considered to occur, then the conditionsboretsunami specified in Article

6.10.2.3 and Article 6.10.3.3 must be applied.
6.6.5 Amplified flow velocity
The flow velocities specified in this Article shall be adjusted for flow amplification in
accordance with Article 6.8.5 where appropriate. The adjusted value need not exceed
the maximum limit specified in Article 6.6.1.
6.7 Immersion depth and flow velocity are based on probabilistic analysis of
tsunami hazard according to site specifics
Where required by Article 6.5, soak depth and flow velocity shall be determined by site
specific soak studies that meet the requirements of this Article. Analysis according to
site specificity should be usedGeodatabase Design Indonesian tsunami from reference
pointsgeocodeof the offshore tsunami amplitude and the dominant period of the
waveform (waveforms) shown in the Indonesian Tsunami Map Book as input to a
numerical subsidence model or must use an integrated generation, propagation and
submergence model that replicates the amplitude and period of offshore tsunami
waves given from seismic sources available in the Indonesian Tsunami Map Book.
6.7.1 Tsunami waveforms
The tsunami waveform used along the offshore boundary at a bathymetric depth of
328 ft (100 m) must be created in accordance with Equation (6.7-1), as depicted in
Figure 6.7-2.
2
-- --
- ----t - QTSU -t o ---
--2
- - a 1e - -- t -- to
-a e2- -
2 --
(6.7-1)
61 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
with the total wave height of the waveform being =abs-a1--abs-a2-, And
- = free surface elevation (in ft or m) as a function of time,t,used for
determine offshore boundary conditions at the 328 ft (100 m) depth contour; initial wave
a1 = amplitude (in ft or m); must be negative for an initiated tsunami
valley shape;
a2 = amplitude of the following, or second, wave (in ft or m);
TSU
= wave period, or starting time from the start of the wave (pulse) first to last
wave (pulse) second
- = the angular frequency of the waveform, is equal to2-/QTSU;And
to = offset time of the wave train, generally set equal to TSU
The possible negative and positive initial amplitudes of the tsunami must be
considered, with the waveform given by Equation (6.7-1) using the parameter values
given byGeodatabase DesignIndonesian tsunami from reference pointsgeocodeshown
in the Indonesian Tsunami Map Book. For the inundation numerical model, the values
given in the Indonesian Tsunami Map Book should also be used to determine at least
two possible waveforms using minimum and maximum set values ofa.A model
2
Integrated generation, propagation and submergence that replicates given offshore

tsunami wave amplitudes and periods from seismic sources does not need to use the
values given in the Indonesian Tsunami Map Book.
6.7.2 Tsunamigenic sources
Tsunami sources should consider the following to the extent that the probabilistic
hazard is documented in recognized literature:
1. Local and distant sources of subduction zones: It is permitted to use the delineated
and discretized subduction zone systems in the Indian and Pacific Ocean basins as
well as in Indonesian waters consisting of rectangular sub-fault systems and
associated tectonic parameters.
a. The main sources of seismicity must include but are not limited to underwater
faults near Indonesia and also faults located further away,
b. The maximum moment value considered in the seismicity probability

distribution should include the value given in the Indonesian Tsunami Map
Book.
2. Local, local non-subduction zone seismic fault sources capable of producing moment
values of 7 or more, including offshore and/or underwater fault sources that are
tsunamigenic in nature.
3. Local coastal and underwater landslide sources documented in the literature that are
recognized as tsunamigenic are similarrunup, as determined by historical evidence
or having an estimated probability within the value levels of major sources of
seismic faulting.
© BSN 2020 62 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
6.7.3 The tsunami function originates from the unitruptureearthquake to offshore

tsunami amplitude
Tsunami modeling algorithms should be based on slip distributionruptureearthquake

for a tsunami event, which is allowed to be represented by a linear combination of unit
source functions using a precomputed database of green functions as tsunami
sources.
Figure 6.7-2 - Illustration of the waveform parameters of an incoming tsunami

beach at a depth of 328 ft (100 m)
1. Tsunami waveform generation is allowed to be modeled by deconstructing a

tsunami generated by an earthquake into a sum of individual tsunami waveforms
composed of a series of sub-faults originating from a scalable unit that describes
ruptureearthquakes in terms of location, orientation, and direction and sequence
rupture.
2. The waveform that determines the time series of wave heights and velocities of slip
units on each sub-fault must be weighted by the slip distribution orruptureactual for
events and then summed linearly.
3. The algorithm must take into account co-seismic vertical displacements.
6.7.4 Treatment of modeling and natural uncertainties
Approachlogic treeStatistically weighted data should be used to account for epistemic

uncertainty in model parameters and should provide a sample of tsunamigenic
earthquake and event probabilities from tectonic, geodetic, historical, and
paleotsunami data, as well as estimates of plate convergence rates, as follows:
63 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
1. Subdivide the probability of occurrence systematically to take into account variations

in parameters of magnitude, fault depth, geometry, location, slip distribution and
arearuptureevents consistent with maximum magnitude, and tidal variations taking
into account at least the reference sea level.
2. To expand its practical use and to enable it to be quantified, follow the approachlogic
treewhich is similar for determining tsunami source samples such as non-
subduction zone earthquakes, landslides, and volcanic eruptions.
Unintended uncertainties, such as natural variability in source processes, modeling

uncertainties, and tidal variations as they relate to nearshore processes and waves
runup, should be included in the probabilistic analysis. When calculating the duration
of long waves with multiple maxima in tsunami time series, it is allowed to take into
account tidal variability by selecting rational tidal elevations independently of the
probabilistic distribution of tidal stages for each wave maximum. The intercept of the
randomness distribution should be chosen at a level appropriate for the return period
but should not be less than one standard deviation based on the regression analysis of
the computational results versus the observed data in Article 6.7.6.7.2.
6.7.5 Offshore tsunami amplitude
Probabilistic analysis must be carried out either by direct calculation in accordance with
Article 6.7.5.2 or by carrying out a probabilistic analysis of tsunami hazard for a given
area to produce an offshore tsunami amplitude hazard map according to the specific
location and predominant wave period at a depth of 328 ft (100 m) in accordance with
the following:
1. Digital Elevation Models (DEMs) from global, regional and coastal datasets should be
used to cover the computational domain from the tsunami source to the location under
consideration. The bathymetric grid for the ocean should have a DEM resolution finer
than 4.35 mi (7000 m), and offshore model regimes with depths greater than 656 ft (200
m) should have a DEM resolution finer than 3281 ft (1000 m).
2. The deformation of the earth's surface must be determined from seismic source
parameters using a planar fault model by calculating vertical changes to the seabed.
6.7.5.1 Offshore tsunami amplitudes for remote seismic sources
Offshore tsunami amplitudes should be determined probabilistically according to the

following:
1. A weighted combination of tsunami waveforms determined for each fault segment
unit according to the slip distribution should be used for tsunami propagation in
the deep sea using the linear long wave equation, also called the shallow water
wave equation, where the water depth is much smaller than the wavelength, to
account for spatial variations in seabed depth.
2. The offshore wave amplitude distribution and associated wave parameters including
period, shall be determined for the design exceedance level (design exceedance
rate) amounting to a Maximum Considered Tsunami of 2,475 years taking into
account uncertainties according to Article 6.7.4
3. The analysis must include the separation of seismic sources and their relationship to
moment values that together contribute at least 90% to the net offshore tsunami
hazard at the location under consideration.
© BSN 2020 64 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
4. The offshore tsunami wave amplitude value must not be less than 80% of the value
given by the Indonesian Tsunami Map Book for offshore amplitudes outside the
Maximum Considered Tsunami.
6.7.5.2 Direct calculation of probabilistic immersion andrunup
It is allowed to calculate the probabilistic immersion andrunupdirectly from the

probabilistic set of sources, source characterizations, and uncertainties consistent with
Article 6.7.2, Article 6.7.4, and the calculation conditions specified in Article 6.7.6. The
calculated offshore wave amplitude must not be lower than 80% of the wave amplitude
given in the Indonesian Tsunami Map Book.
6.7.6 Procedure for determining immersion andrunuptsunami
6.7.6.1 Representative design bath parameters
Each disaggregated tsunami event must be analyzed to determine the representative

design parameters it consists ofrunupmaxima, immersion depth, flow velocity, and
momentum flux.
6.7.6.2 Seismic subsidence prior to tsunami arrival
If the seismic source is a local subduction event, the Maximum Considered Tsunami
subsidence must be determined for the overall subsidence elevation value to be
directly calculated for the seismic source mechanism.
6.7.6.3 Model macro roughness parameters
It is permitted to carry out subsidence mapping under bare soil surface conditions with
macro roughness. The basic roughness is allowed to be established using the Manning
coefficient,n. Unless otherwise specified for a location, the predetermined value of
0.025 or 0.030 shall be used for the seabed and on land. Use of other values based on
analysisterrainmust be based on recognized literature or specifically the submergence
model must be validated by referring to historical tsunami field reference values. If
values other than those initially specified are used, the effects of roughness
degradation due to detrimental flow characteristics must be considered in the selection
of the Manning coefficient.
6.7.6.4 Nonlinear immersion modeling
Nonlinear shallow water wave equations or equivalent modeling techniques, should be

used to transform offshore wave amplitudes from a depth of 328 ft (100 m) shoreward,
to nearshore tsunami amplitudes and maximum submergence. The following effects
should be included as they apply to bathymetry:
1.Shoaling, refraction, and diffraction to determine nearshore tsunami amplitude;

2. Dispersion effects in the case of shortwave sources, such as landslides and volcanic
sources;
3. Reflected waves;
4. Channelization in the bay;
5. Edge waves, and resonances on shelves and bays;
6. Formationboreand spreading; And
7. Harbors, breakwaters and embankments.
65 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
6.7.6.5 Spatial resolution of the model
Digital Elevation Models (DEMs) for nearshore bathymetric depths of less than 656 ft
(200 m) must have a resolution no coarser than 295 ft (90 m). At bathymetric depths
less than 32.8 ft (10 m) and on land, the DEM should have a resolution no coarser than
the highest resolution available from digital elevation tsunami elevation models. If a
nested grid approach is used, the reduction in grid spacing between consecutive grids
should not be more than a factor of 5. If such a model is not available, use of the best
available Integrated Digital Elevation Model of Indonesia data should be permitted
after approval by the competent authority.
6.7.6.6 Built environment
If buildings and other structures are included for the purposes of more detailed flow analysis,
the resolution of the Digital Elevation Model (DEM) must have a minimum resolution of 10 ft (3.0
m) to capture the deceleration and acceleration of flow around the building.
6.7.6.7 Validation of immersion model
6.7.6.7.1 Historical data or paleotsunami soaking
Model scenario results must be validated with available historical and/or paleotsunami
records.
6.7.6.7.2 Validate the model with benchmark tests
The submergence model must be validated using the certification criteria of the
competent authority by providing satisfactory performance in a series of benchmark
tests within 10% of the known data set determined by the tsunami model validation
advisory group, standards, criteria and procedures for the evaluation of numerical
tsunami models , which was modified by the authorized parties.
6.7.6.7.3 Formationboretsunami or fissionsoliton
In the area where the formationborecan occur, the model must be validated with
independent scenarios using recognized literature, and its acceptability must be
determined using the modelrunup.
6.7.6.8 Determine bath flow parameters according to site specifics
Soaking parameters for scenarios from each disaggregated source region will be
determined. Probabilistic flow parameters must be developed for the locations of the
calculated tsunami samples and their probability of occurrence. Each tsunami event
must be analyzed to determine representative parameters such asrunupmaximum,
immersion depth, flow velocity, and/or specific momentum flux by one of the following
techniques:
1. Take weighting average from scenario executed Which
grouping offshore wave amplitudes for return periods to determine tsunami
hazard-consistent scenarios. The submergence limit should be determined by the
area submerged by tsunami hazard-consistent scenario waves from disaggregated
seismic primary source zones affecting the location according to the maximum
tsunami return period.
2. Determining the distribution of probabilistic flow parameters from the calculated tsunami
samples and the probability of their occurrence, and reconstructing the distribution of parameters
© BSN 2020 66 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
flow statistics such as immersion depth, velocity, and location-specific momentum

flux from scenarios calculated for at least three load cases, as indicated in Article
6.8.10.
In urban environments, the resulting flow velocity at a particular structure location

shall not be reduced from 90% of that determined in accordance with Article 6.6 prior
to any velocity adjustments caused by flow amplification. For rough conditionsterrain
else, the resulting flow velocity at a particular structural location shall not be taken to
be less than 75 % of that determined in accordance with Article 6.6 before any velocity
adjustments caused by flow amplification.
6.7.6.9 Tsunami design parameters for flow over land
The flow parameters of bath depth, flow velocity, and/or specific momentum flux at the
location under consideration must be taken from the time history bath analysis.
Immersion depth and tsunami velocity should be evaluated for locations at the
immersion stage defined by the Load Case in Article 6.8.3.1. If the maximum
momentum flux obtained occurs at a different immersion depth than Load Case 2, the
flow conditions corresponding to the maximum momentum flux must be taken into
account in addition to the Load Case defined in Article 6.8.3.1.
6.8 Structural design procedures for tsunami effects
Structures, components and foundations must comply with the requirements of this Article
when carrying the maximum calculated tsunami loads and effects.
6.8.1 Performance of buildings and other structures in tsunami risk categories II and
III
Structural components, connections and foundations of Risk Category II buildings and

other Risk Category III buildings and structures must be designed to meet the
structural performance criteria of preventing collapse or better.
6.8.2 Performance of critical facilities in Tsunami Risk Category III and buildings and
other structures in Tsunami Risk Category IV
Tsunami Risk Category III Critical Facilities and other Tsunami Risk Category IV buildings
located within the Tsunami Design Zone must be designed in accordance with the following
requirements.
1. Operational non-structural components and building equipment required for
essential functions and the base elevation of the lowest horizontal structural
components at the support level such as components and equipment will be above
the maximum considered tsunami submergence elevation
2. Structural components and connections at habitable levels and foundations shall be
designed in accordance with Immediate Occupancy Structural Performance criteria.
Occupable levels are permitted if the elevation is equal to or exceeds the maximum
considered tsunami submergence elevation.
3. Vertical tsunami evacuation shelter structures must comply with Article 6.14.
6.8.3 Evaluation of structural performance
67 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Strength and stability must be evaluated to determine that the structural design is
capable of withstanding a tsunami in the Load Cases defined in Article 6.8.3.1. The
structural acceptance criteria for this evaluation shall be in accordance with Art
6.8.3.4 or Article 6.8.3.5.
6.8.3.1 Load cases
As a minimum, the following three Soaked Load Cases should be evaluated:
1.Load Case 1: At exterior inundation depths that do not exceed the maximum
inundation depth or are less than one story or top of first story window height, the
minimum condition of combined hydrodynamic forces with buoyancy forces shall
be evaluated in relation to the interior water depth. Interior water depth shall be
evaluated in accordance with Article 6.9.1.
EXCEPTION Load Case 1 does not need to be applied to open structures or

structures where the properties/properties of the soil or foundation and the design of the structure prevent
detrimental hydrostatic pressure at the bottom of the foundation and lowest structural slab.
2. Load Case2: The depth at two-thirds of the maximum immersion depth when the
maximum velocity and maximum specific momentum flux must be assumed to
occur in either the tidal (incoming) or tidal (outgoing) direction.
3. Load Case3: Maximum immersion depth when the speed is assumed to be one third
of the maximum speed in either the high or low tide direction. The defined
immersion depth and speed for Load Cases 2 and 3 shall be determined by Figure
6.8-1, unless a site-specific tsunami analysis is performed in accordance with
Article 6.7.
6.8.3.2 Important tsunami factors
Important Tsunami Factors,ITSU given in Table 6.8-1 should be applied

on tsunami hydrodynamic loads and impact loads in Article 6.10 and Article 6.11
respectively.
6.8.3.3 Load combination
The main tsunami forces and effects must be combined with certain other loads
according to the load combination Eq. (6.8-1):
0.9D-FTSU-HTSU (6.8-1a)
1,2D-FTSU- 0.5L- 0.2S-HTSU (6.8-1b)
With
FTSU=effects of tsunami loads for incoming and outgoing flow directions, and
HTSU= load caused by tsunami-induced lateral foundation pressure which
arise/develop under submerged conditions. Where is the net effect ofHTSUoppose
main load effect, load factor forHTSUis 0.9
© BSN 2020 68 of 302

Translated from Indonesian to English - www.onlinedoctranslator.com
"Copyright of the National Standardization Agency, a copy of this standard is made for Sub KT 91-01-S4 Materials, Science, Structure &
SNI 1727:2020
Figure 6.8-1 - Soaking load of load cases 2 and 3

Table 6.8-1 - Important tsunami factors for hydrodynamics and impact loads
Tsunami risk categories ITSU

Tsunami Risk Category II 1.0
Tsunami Risk Category III 1.25
Vertical Evacuation Refugees in Tsunami Risk Category IV, and Critical 1.25
Facilities in Tsunami Risk Category III
6.8.3.4 Acceptance criteria for lateral force resistance systems
To evaluate the ability of a structural system at the life safety structural performance
level to withstand the lateral force effects of a design tsunami event for Seismic Design
Categories D, E, or F, it is permitted to use a value of 0.75 times the required horizontal
seismic load effect,Emh, which includes strength factors
69 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
over system, Ωo, as defined in Article 7 SNI 1726 (See Article 12 ASCE 7-16) in this
standard. For Immediate residential structural performance purposes, the lateral force
resistance system must be explicitly analyzed and evaluated.
6.8.3.5 Structural component acceptance criteria
Structural components must be designed for forces resulting from the overall tsunami
force on the structural system combined with the resultant action caused by tsunami
pressure acting locally on individual structural components for that flow direction.
Acceptance criteria for structural components shall be in accordance with Article
6.8.3.5.1, or in accordance with the alternative procedures of Article 6.8.3.5.2 or Article
6.8.3.5.3, as applicable.
6.8.3.5.1 Acceptance criteria by component design strength
The internal forces and displacements of the system must be determined using linear
elastic and static analysis. The required structural performance criteria in Article 6.8.1,
Article 6.8.2, and Article 6.8.3, as applicable, shall be deemed to be met if the design
strength of structural components and connections is shown to be greater than the
Maximum Considered Tsunami load and its effect is calculated in accordance with load
combination in Article 6.8.3.3. Material resistance factors, ϕ, should be used as
specified in the material-specific standard for the component and behavior under
review.
6.8.3.5.2 Alternative performance-based criteria
6.8.3.5.2.1 Alternative analysis procedures
It is permitted to use either linear or nonlinear static analysis procedures. In linear

static analysis procedures, buildings and structures must be modeled using equivalent
effective stiffnesses that are consistent with secant or near yield point values. For the
nonlinear static analysis procedure, the mathematical model is directly coupled to the
nonlinear deformation load characteristics of the individual components of the
structure which must be subjected to monotonic load increments until the required
tsunami force and application of action is achieved. For nonlinear static analysis
procedures, the expected deformation capacity must be greater than or equal to the
maximum deformation calculated from the required tsunami force and the applied
actions. For debris impacts, nonlinear dynamic analysis procedures can be used. For
Tsunami Risk Category IV buildings and structures, an independent peer review should
be conducted as part of the performance-based design review by the competent
authority.
6.8.3.5.2.2 Acceptance criteria for alternative structural components
All actions shall be classified as either ductility-controlled actions or continuous force-

resisting actions based on the inelastic behavior of the component and the duration of
the load effect, as follows:
1. Fluid forces in primary and secondary structural components detailed in accordance
with the requirements of Seismic Design Category D, E, or F shall be evaluated as
sustained force-bearing actions
2. Debris impacts and foundation settlement effects on primary and secondary structural
components should be evaluated as ductility-controlled actions
© BSN 2020 70 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
3. Debris impacts and foundation settlement effects on primary and secondary

structural components not detailed in accordance with Seismic Design Categories
D, E, or F shall be evaluated as sustained force-bearing actions.
For sustained force-bearing action, structural components must have a specified

design strength that is greater than or equal to the maximum design force. Continuous
force resisting actions must be allowed to satisfy Equation (6.8-2):
QCS-QUF (6.8-2)
with
QCS = Strength of specified structural elements, and

QUF = maximum force generated in the element due to gravity and tsunami loads.
The desired material properties as defined in ASCE 41 (2014) are permitted to be used
for ductility controlled actions. The results of the linear analysis procedure must not
exceed the component acceptance criteria for the ASCE 41 (2014) linear procedure,
Articles 9 through 11, for the applicable structural performance criteria required for a
tsunami Risk Category building or structure. Ductility controlled action is allowed to
satisfy Equation (6.8-3):
mQC.E-QUD (6.8-3)
with:
m = Component requirement modification factor value defined in ASCE 41 (2014)

to take into account the expected ductility at the required level of structural
performance;
QC.E = The expected strength of structural elements is determined in accordance with ASCE 41
(2014); And
QUD = Ductility-controlled forces caused by tsunami loading 6.8.3.5.3
Alternative Acceptance with progressive collapse prevention. If the tsunami load or
its effects exceed the acceptance criteria for a structural element or if it is necessary
to accommodate extraordinary impact loads, it is permitted to check the residual
load carrying capacity of the structure, assuming that the element has failed, in
accordance with Article 2.5.2.2 and alternative load paths through a progressive
collapse procedure in the recognized literature.
6.8.4 Minimum fluid density for tsunami loads
Density specific gravity of sea water-swshould be taken as 64.0 lb/ft3(10 kN/m3). Density
of sea water-sw should be taken as 2.0 sl/ft3(1.025 kg/m3).
Minimum fluid specific gravity density-sto determine the hydrostatic load of a tsunami
taking into account suspended solids and debris flows that smaller objects attach to is
-s-ks-sw (6.8-4)
71 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Minimum fluid mass density,-s,to determine the hydrodynamic load of a tsunami

that calculates suspended solids and debris flows attached to smaller objects should
-s-ks-sw (6.8-5)
withk s , the fluid density factor, should be taken as 1.1.
6.8.5 Flow velocity amplification
The influence of upstream obstruction buildings and structures is permitted to be

considered at a location exposed to the diffraction flow conditions given in Article
6.8.5.1 by any of the following:
1. Soak analysis according to site specifics which includes modeling of the building
environment in accordance with Article 6.7.6.6, or
2. The building environment is considered in selecting the Manning roughness in Table
6.6-1 in accordance with Energy Grade Line Analysis Article 6.6.2, or
3. Physical or numerical modeling according to location specificity in accordance with Article
6.8.5.2 or as applicable in Article 6.8.10.
6.8.5.1 Upstream barrier structure

The effect of upstream obstructions on flow shall be considered when the obstruction is an
enclosed structure of concrete, masonry or steel structural construction located within 500
ft (152 m) of the site, and both of the following apply:
1. Structures have a plan width greater than 100 ft (30.5 m) or 50% of the width of the
downstream structure, whichever is greater.
2. The structure is in a sector between 10 and 55 degrees to either side of the flow vector aligned with the
center of one third of the width of the downstream structure.
6.8.5.2 Amplification of flow velocity by physical or numerical modeling
The influence of upstream structures on flow velocity at downstream locations is

permitted to be evaluated using numerical or physical modeling according to site
specifics, as described in Article 6.7.6.6 or Article 6.8.10. The specified speed for bare
ground submersion (bare earth) must be enlarged for the conditions of Article 6.8.5.1.
This analysis is not permitted to reduce flow velocity except for tsunami mitigation
structures designed in accordance with Article 6.13.
6.8.6 Flow directionality
6.8.6.1 Flow direction
Structural design for tsunami loads and effects must consider inflow and outflow conditions. The
main flow direction should be assumed to vary ± 22.5 degrees from a perpendicular cross
section with an average shoreline orientation of more than 500 ft (152 m) to either side of the
site. The center of rotation of the cross-sectional variation must be located at the geometric
center of the structure in plan on the site plane.
© BSN 2020 72 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
6.8.6.2 Directions according to site specifics
Site-specific soak analysis carried out in accordance with Article 6.7.6 is permitted to be
used to determine flow direction, provided that the determined direction is considered
to vary by at least ± 10 degrees.
6.8.7 Minimum coverage ratio for load determination
Loads on buildings shall be calculated assuming a minimum coverage ratio of 70% of

the projected submerged area along the perimeter of the structure, except in open
structures as defined in Article 6.2. The effect of loads facing accumulated debris or
within open structures should be considered using a minimum coverage ratio of 50 %
of the projected submerged area along the perimeter of the open structure. Open
Structures do not need to satisfy Load Case 1 of Article 6.8.3.1.
6.8.8 Minimum number of tsunami flow cycles
The design should consider a minimum of two tsunami inflow and outflow cycles, the
first should be based on a soaking depth of 80% of the maximum considered tsunami
(MCT) and the second is assumed to occur at the maximum considered tsunami
soaking depth at the site.
The local scour effects determined in accordance with Article 6.12, caused by the first
cycle, shall be assumed to occur at 80 % of the MCT immersion depth at the site and be
considered as initial conditions of the second cycle.
6.8.9 The seismic influence on foundations preceding the tsunami is considered to be

maximum in local subduction zones
At subject locations located in local subduction tsunami zones from offshore subduction
earthquakes, structures must be designed against the preceding co-seismic effects. The
foundation of the structure must be designed to withstand the preceding earthquake
ground movements and related effects as in Article 6 of SNI 1726 (See also Article 11 of
ASCE 7-16) using the geometric mean of the earthquake considering the maximum peak
ground acceleration in the Figure in SNI 1726 .
Building foundation designs should incorporate site surface changes and local soil
properties resulting from the design seismic event as initial conditions for subsequent
design tsunami events. The geotechnical investigation report should include an
evaluation of foundation effects that refers to pre-tsunami seismic effects, taking into
account slope instability, liquefaction, differential and total settlement, surface
displacement caused by faults, and lateral spreading caused by seismic or lateral flow.
The additional requirements of Article 6.12 must also be evaluated.
6.8.10 Physical modeling of flows, loads and tsunami effects
Physical modeling of tsunami loads and effects shall be permitted as an alternative to the
prescriptive procedures in Article 6.8.5 (flow velocity amplificationi), Article 6.10 (hydrodynamic
loads), Article 6.11 (debris impact loads), and Article 6.12 (foundation design), provided that all of
the following criteria are met:
73 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
1. The facilities used for physical modeling must be capable of producing the
appropriate flow scale and immersion depth as specified for the Load Case in
Article 6.8.3.1.
2. Test facilities must be configured so that reflections and edge effects will not affect
the test section for the duration of the experiment.
3. The scale factors used in physical modeling should not be less than those shown in
Table 6.8-2. Scale model tests not directly addressed in Table 6.8-2 should include
correct implementation of the model and scaling procedures.
4. Debris impact of full or partial components shall be tested at full scale unless
accompanied by appropriateness of scale testing in terms of hydrodynamic and
structural mechanics, as well as material properties.
5. Test results reports should include a discussion of the accuracy of determining load
conditions and scale effects caused by dynamic and kinematic considerations, including
the dynamic response of the structure and materials tested.
6. The test results must be adjusted to take into account the effective density, as
calculated in Article 6.8.4.
7. Test results must be adjusted to the Priority Factors from Article 6.8.3.2.
8. Test results shall include flow direction effects in accordance with Article 6.8.6. This
coverage can be implemented either by direct testing of the flow at various angles
of incidence or by a combination of numerical and physical modeling that takes
flow directivity into account.
Table 6.8-2 - Minimum scale factors for physical modeling
Model elements Minimum scale factor

Individual buildings 1:25
Flow model for building groups 1:200
Structural components (e.g., walls, columns, piers) 1:10
Geotechnical investigation 1:5
6.9 Hydrostatic load
6.9.1 Buoyancy
The net weight loss caused by buoyancy must be evaluated for all submerged
structural and non-structural elements of the building in accordance with Equation
(6.9-1). Buoyancy-induced uplift should include enclosed spaces without tsunami
escape walls that have an opening area of less than 25% of the submerged exterior
wall area. Buoyancy forces will also include the effects of air trapped under floors,
including integral structural slabs, and in enclosed spaces where walls are not designed
to escape (break away). All windows, except those designed to withstand the impact of
large projectile debris carried by wind or blast loads, are permitted to be considered
openings when the immersion depth reaches the top of the window or the estimated
strength of the glass, whichever is less. Volumetric displacements of foundation
elements, excluding deep foundations, must be included in these uplift calculations.
© BSN 2020 74 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Fv--sVw (6.9-1)
6.9.2 Unbalanced lateral hydrostatic forces
Submerged structural walls with openings less than 10% of the wall area and/or longer
than 30 ft (9.14 m) without adjacent tsunami relief walls or having a two- or three-sided
perimeter wall configuration of any length must be designed to withstand lateral
hydrostatic forces without balance given by Equation (6.9-2), occurs during Load Case 1
and Load Case 2 inflow defined in Article 6.8.3.1. In what condition
flow beyond the wall,hmaxin Equation (6.9-2) must be replaced by the height of the wall.
1
Fh-- 2
(6.9-2)
2sbramax
6.9.3 Additional residual water load on floors and walls
All horizontal floors below the maximum immersion depth shall be designed for dead
load plus additional residual water pressure,pr,given by
Equation (6.9-3). Structural walls that have the potential to retain water during low tide
drawdown must also be designed for residual water hydrostatic pressure.
pr--shrhr-hmax- hs (6.9-3)
withhs=peak floor elevation of slab. However,hrit is not necessary to exceed the height of the
continuous section of any perimeter structural element in the floor.
6.9.4 Additional hydrostatic pressure on foundations
The additional hydrostatic pressure caused by tsunami inundation should be calculated

as
ps--shmax (6.9-4)
6.10 Hydrodynamic loads
Hydrodynamic loads shall be determined in accordance with this Article. Structures

with lateral force resistance systems and all structural components below the
submerged elevation at the site must be designed for the hydrodynamic loads listed in
either Article 6.10.1 or Article 6.10.2. All wall and slab components must also be
designed for all applied loads as listed in Article 6.10.3.
75 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
6.10.1 Simplified equivalent uniform lateral static pressure

It is allowed to take into account a combination of lateral hydrostatic and hydrodynamic loads
unbalanced by applying the equivalent maximum uniform pressure,p, ugh
determined according to Equation (6.10-1), applied at more than 1.3 times the
calculated maximum immersion depthhmaxon site, in any direction of flow.
pugh-1.25ITSU-shmax (6.10-1)
6.10.2 Detailed hydrodynamic lateral forces
6.10.2.1 Styledragoverall in buildings and other structures
Lateral-force-resisting systems must be designed to resist the forcedragoverall at each

level caused by inflow or outflow in Load Case 2 given by Equation (6.10-2) and
Equation (6.10-3).
Fdx--
1
2s
--
I TSUCdCcxB hu 2
(6.10-2)
withCd is the coefficientdragfor buildings as given in Table 6.10-1 andCdefined as
cx
--Acol-Awall--1.5A Bhsx beam

Ccx- (6.10-3)
AcolAndAwalllis the vertical projection area of all column and wall elements
individual.Abeamis the combined vertical projection area of the edgesslabfacing
flow and the deepest blocks laterally exposed to the flow. The sum of the areas of columns,
walls and beams is divided by the total area of the building walls by the widthB
times the average level height,hsx, above and below each story for each story below the
tsunami submergence height for each of the three Load Cases specified in Article
6.8.3.1. Structural or non-structural walls that are not
is a tsunami relief wall that must be inserted insideAwalll,Ccxshould not
taken less than the cover ratio value given in Article 6.8.7, but need not be taken
greater than 1.0.
Table 6.10-1 - Coefficientsdragfor square structures
The ratio between width and depth Coefficientdrag

marinadeaB/Hsx Cd
< 12 1.25
16 1.3
26 1.4
36 1.5
60 1.75
100 1.8
≥120 2.0
© BSN 2020 76 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
aThe immersion depth for each of the three Load Cases of the immersion is specified in Article
6.8.3.1. Interpolation should be used for intermediate values of the submergence width to
depth ratioB/hsx.
6.10.2.2 Styledragon components
The lateral hydrodynamic load given by Equation (6.10-4) must be applied as a

resultant pressure at the projected submergence height,h,from e
all structural components and exterior wall assemblies below the immersion depth.
I TSUCdb h-eu- 2
1
Fd - - (6.10-4)
2s
with for value interior componentsCdgiven in Table 6.10-2 must

used, andbis the width of the component perpendicular to the flow. For exterior
components, values must be usedCdof 2.0, and wide dimensionsbmust
taken as the tributary width multiplied by the cover ratio value stated in Article 6.8.7.
Styledragon component elements should not be added to the styledrag total calculated
in Article 6.10.2.1.
Table 6.10-2 - Coefficientsdragfor structural components
Cross-section of structural elements CoefficientdragCd
A round column or equal-sided polygon with six or more 1,2

sides
Rectangular columns with an aspect ratio of at least 2:1 with 1.6
longer sides oriented parallel to the flow
Triangular column that leads to the flow 1.6
The freestanding wall is submerged in the flow 1.6
Square or rectangular columns with longer sides oriented 2.0
perpendicular to the flow
Triangular column facing away from the stream 2.0
A flat wall or plate, perpendicular to the flow 2.0
Diamond-shaped columns, facing the flow (based on face 2.5
width, not projected width).
Rectangular beam, perpendicular to the flow 2.0
I, L and canal shapes 2.0
6.10.2.3 Tsunami loads on vertical structural components,Fw
StyleFonwvertical structural components must be determined as a forcedrag

hydrodynamics according to Equation (6.10-5a). If the flow fromborea tsunami occurs
with a Froude number at a location greater than 1.0 and where
77 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
individual walls, wall piers, or column components having a width to depth ratio of 3 or
more, shall be determined by Equation (6.10-5b). StyleFapplied to all vertical structural
components w
wider than
3 times the immersion depth associated with Load Case 2 during inflow as defined in
Article 6.8.3.
- sI TsuCdb -heu-2
1
Fw- (6.10-5a )
2
-sI TsuCdb -heu-2

3
Fw- bore
(6.10-5b)
4
6.10.2.4 Hydrodynamic loads on perforated walls,Fpw
For walls with openings that allow flow to pass between wall piers, the forces on the
perforated wall elements,Fpw,allowed to be determined with
using Equation (6.10-6), but cannot be less thanFpwon
Equation (6.10-4):
Fpw--0.4Ccx- 0.6-Fw (6.10-6)
6.10.2.5 Walls are at an angle to the flow
For walls oriented at an angle of less than 90° to the flow direction considered in Article
6.8.3, the temporary lateral load per unit width,Fw-,
should be determined according to Equation (6.10-7).
Fw- -Fwsyn2- (6.10-7)
with-is the angle formed between the wall and the direction of flow.
6.10.3 Hydrodynamic pressure associated with the slab
6.10.3.1 Stagnant current pressure
Walls and slabs of interior spaces of buildings subject to stagnant flow pressures shall
be designed to withstand pressures determined in accordance with Equation (6.10-8).
1 2
Pp--sITsuu (6.10-8)
2
withuis the maximum free flow velocity at that location and Load Case.
6.10.3.2 Hydrodynamic liftsurgeon horizontal slabs
Slabs and other horizontal components shall be designed to withstand the applicable
lifting pressures given in this Article.
6.10.3.2.1 Slab submerged during tsunami inflow
© BSN 2020 78 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Horizontal slabs submerged during tsunami inflow should be designed for minimum
hydrodynamic pressure with a lift pressure of 20 psf (0.958 kPa) applied to the
underside of the slab. This lift constitutes an additional Load Case for any hydrostatic
buoyancy effects required by Article 6.9.1.
6.10.3.2.2 Slab on site slope
Horizontal slabs located above a site slope φ greater than 10 degrees should be
designed to redirect the uplift pressure applied to the underside of the slab, given by
Equation (6.10-9), but not less than 20 psf (0.958 kPa) .
Pu-1.2ITsu-suv 2
(6.10-9)
with
uv-utan-,
u = Horizontal flow velocity corresponds to equal or greater water depth
fromhelevation
ss of the underside of the floor system,
- and = Average slope of the footprint under the slab.
6.10.3.3 FlowboreTsunami trapped in cracks in structural plate walls
Hydrodynamic loads for flowboretrapped in structural plate wall gaps shall be

determined in accordance with this Article.
The load reductions provided in Articles 6.10.3.3.2 through 6.10.3.3.5 may be combined
multiplicatively, but the net load reductions may not exceed the respective maximum
individual reductions provided by any of these Articles.
6.10.3.3.1 Pressure loads in structural slab wall gaps
If flowboretsunamis under elevated slabs are prevented by structural walls located downstream
from the upstream edge of the slab, walls and inner slabshswalls must be designed
for outward pressure,Pu, amounting to 350 psf (16.76 kPa). More thanhbut
s deep
distancehs+lwfrom the wall, the slab should be designed for an upward pressure of half
thePu[i.e., 175 psf (8.38 kPa)]. Slab out of rangehs+lwfrom the wall must be
designed for an upward pressure of 30 psf (1,436 kPa).
6.10.3.3.2 Reduction of load with immersion depth
If the immersion depth is less than two-thirds of the free floor height, the lifting
pressure specified in Article 6.10.3.3.1 is permitted to be reduced in accordance with
Equation (6.10-10) but shall not be taken less than 30 psf (1,436 kPa).
- h-
Pu-ITsu-590 -160 s- [psf] (6.10-10)
- h-
79 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
- h-
Pu-ITsu-28.25 - 7.66 s- [kPa] (6.10-10si)
- h-
withhs/his the ratio of slab height to immersion depth.
6.10.3.3.3 Load reduction for wall openings
If the wall is in the wayborebelow the slab has openings through which flow can pass,
the reduced pressure in the walls and slab shall be determined according to Equation
(6.10-11).
Pur-CcxPu (6.10-11)
withCcxis the ratio of the solid wall area to the total submerged area of the vertical
plane of the submerged portion of the wall at that level.
6.10.3.3.4 Load reduction for slab openings
If the slab has openings or release panels designed to create wide gaps,wg, adjacent to
the wall, then the uplift pressure on the remaining portion of the slab shall be
determined according to Equation (6.10-12).
Pur-CbsPu (6.10-12)
wg
with forwg- 0.5h, s C bs- 1- (6.10-13)
hs
wg
and towg- 0.5hs, Cbs- 0.56 - 0.1 2 (6.10-14)
hs
MarkCbs cannot be less than zero.
6.10.3.3.5 Load reduction for tsunami relief walls
If the flow-restricting wall is designed as a tsunami wave relief wall, then uplift in the
slab is permitted to be determined in accordance with Article 6.10.3.1, but need not
exceed a pressure equivalent to the nominal total shear force required to cause
detachment of the relief wall from the slab.
6.11 Debris impact load
Debris Impact Load shall be determined in accordance with this Article. These loads do
not need to be combined with other tsunami-related loads as specified in other sub-
Articles of this Article. If the minimum immersion depth is 3 ft (0.914 m) or greater, the
design must include the effects of debris impact forces. The most severe impact load
effects within the immersion depth shall be applied to the perimeter of gravity load-
bearing structural components located on the main structural axes perpendicular to
the range of inflow or outflow directions specified in Article 6.8.7.
© BSN 2020 80 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
EXCEPTIONExcept as specified below, loads shall be applied at critical points for flexure and
shear on all such structural components within the immersion depth being evaluated.
Immersion depths and speeds appropriate to Load Cases 1, 2, and 3 specified in Article 6.8.3.1
shall be used. Impact loads do not need to be applied simultaneously to all affected structural
components.
All buildings and other structures meeting the above requirements must be designed
for impact by wooden beams, logs, and floating vehicles, and for rolling boulders and
concrete debris, in accordance with Articles 6.11.2 through 6.11.4. If a site is adjacent to
a port or container yard, the potential for impact from containers and ships and barges
shall be determined by the procedures in Article 6.11.5. Buildings and other structures
determined by the procedure to be in the container impact hazard zone shall be
designed for impact loads in accordance with Article 6.11.6. In lieu of Articles 6.11.2
through 6.11.6, it is permitted to alternatively evaluate impacts by piles, logs, vehicles,
rolled rocks, concrete debris, and containers by applying the simplified alternative
static loads of Article 6.11.1.
Category III Tsunami Risk Critical Facilities and Category IV Tsunami Risk Buildings and
structures are determined to be in the danger zone for impact by ships and barges
with a Dead Load (DWT) exceeding 38,000 lb (39,916 kg), as determined by the
procedures of Article 6.11 .5, shall be designed for impact by these vessels in
accordance with Article 6.11.7.
6.11.1 Simplified alternative debris impact static load
It is permitted to take into account the impact of debris by applying the force given by
Equation (6.11-1) as the maximum static load, in lieu of the load defined in Articles
6.11.2 to 6.11.6. This force must be applied at critical points for bending and shearing
on all such structural components within the immersion depth in accordance with Load
Case 3 specified in Article 6.8.3.1.
Fi- 330CoITsu[kips] (6.11-1)
Fi-1,470CoITsu[kN] (6.11-1.si)
withCis the
o
orientation coefficient, equal to 0.65.
If it is determined by the site hazard assessment procedure in Article 6.11.5 that the
site is not within the impact zone for containers, ships and barges, it is permitted to
reduce the simplified debris impact force to 50% of the value given by Equation (6.11-
1).
6.11.2 Logs and poles
Maximum nominal value of instantaneous debris impact force,Fhere,should be determined

Fhere-umax kmd (6.11-2)
81 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Instantaneous debris impact style design,Fifor logs and posts must be determined
Fi-ITsuCoFhere (6.11-3)
with
ITsu = Priority factors (given in Table 6.8-1);

Co = Orientation coefficient, equal to 0.65 for logs and posts;
umax = Maximum flow velocity at a location at a depth sufficient for

float debris;
k = The effective stiffness of the impact debris or the lateral stiffness of the impacted structural
element, which is deformed by the impact, is taken to be the smaller; And
md = Mass of debris d /g
Logs and posts are assumed to be struck longitudinally for calculation of debris
stiffness in Equation (6.11-2). The stiffness of a log or post should be calculated as,k-
EA/LwithEis the longitudinal modulus of elasticity of the log,Ais the cross-sectional
area, andLis the length. Minimum weight of 1000 lb (454 kg) and minimum log stiffness
of 350 kip/in. (61,300 kN/m) must be assumed.
The impulse duration (instantaneous duration) for elastic impact should be calculated from Equation (6.11- 4):
2mdumax
td - (6.11-4)
Fhere
For equivalent elastic static analysis, the impact force must be multiplied by the
dynamic response factorRmaxspecified in Table 6.11-1. To get value
between,Rmom,linear interpolationmustused. For walls, the impact must be assumed to
act along the horizontal center of the wall, and the natural period is permitted to be
determined based on the fundamental period of an equivalent column with a width
equal to half the vertical span of the wall. It is permissible to use alternative analysis
methods according to Article 6.11.8.
© BSN 2020 82 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Table 6.11-1 - Dynamic response ratio for impulse loads,Rmax
Ratio of Impact duration to natural period of

impacted structural elements Rmax (response ratio)
0.0 0.0
0.1 0.4
0.2 0.8
0.3 1.1
0.4 1.4
0.5 1.5
0.6 1.7
0.7 1.8
0.9 1.8
1.0 1.7
1.1 1.7
1,2 1.6
1.3 1.6
≥1.4 1.5
6.11.3 Impact by vehicles
Floating vehicle impacts must be applied to vertical structural elements at any point
more than 3 ft (0.914 m) above the tread to the maximum depth. Style
the impact should be taken as 30 kip (130 kN) multiplied byITsu.
6.11.4 Impact by large rolling rocks and submerged concrete debris
If the maximum immersion depth exceeds 6 ft (1.83 m), the 8,000 lb (36 kN) Impact
force is multiplied byITsumust be applied to 2 ft (0.61 m) vertical structural elements
above the tread.
6.11.5 Site hazard assessment for containers, ships and barges
Containers and ships or barges transported from container yards and ports must be
evaluated as potential debris impact objects. In such cases, probable distribution areas
must be identified for each source to determine whether the structure is located within
a debris impact hazard area as defined by the procedures in this Article. If the structure
is in a debris impact hazard area, then impacts by containers and/or ships and barges,
as appropriate, must be evaluated in accordance with Article 6.11.6 and Article 6.11.7.
The estimated total design area of the debris objects at the source must be
determined. For containers, here is the average number of containers on site
multiplied by the planned area. For barges, the nominal area of the AASHTO (2009)
design barge is [195 ft × 35 ft, or 6,825 ft2(59.5 m × 10.67 m, or 635 m2)] multiplied by
the average number of barges at the source. For ships, the average plan area of the
ship's deck at the site should be used.
The geographic center of the source shall be identified, along with the main flow
direction, as defined in Article 6.8.6.1. Line ± 22.5° from this center line
83 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
should be projected in the direction of the tsunami inflow, as shown in Figure 6.11-1. If
topography (such as hills) will retain water from this 45° sector, the direction of the sector
must be rotated to accommodate the hill line or the banks must be narrowed where
restricted to two or more sides.
Figure 6.11-1 - Illustration of the determination of the hazard area by debris impact
float [1 ft = 0.3048 m]
First, the arc of the debris impact hazard area for the inflow should be described as
follows: one arc and two radial boundary lines of the 45° sector define a circular sector
area with an area that is 50 times the total area of the debris area from the source,
representing a concentration of 2% of the debris . However, the arc of the landward
bath is permitted to be restricted according to the following limitations:
a. The sector area is permitted to be limited where the maximum submergence depth
is less than 3 ft (0.914 m), or in the case of ships where the submersion depth is less
than the ballast draft plus 2 ft (0.61 m).
b. Steel structures and/or concrete structures are permitted to be considered working
as the effective grounding depth limit of a sector if their height is at least equal to
(1) for containers and barges, submergence depth minus 2 ft (0.61 m), or (2) for
ships , the immersion depth minus the sum of the ballast draft and 2 ft (0.61 m).
Second, the debris impact hazard area for inflow and outflow shall be determined by
rotating the circular segment by 180° and locating the center at the intersection of the
centerline and arc defining the 2% concentration level or an approved alternative limit,
as defined above. Buildings and other structures located only in the first sector must be
designed to be hit by containers and/or other vessels carried by incoming traffic.
Buildings and
© BSN 2020 84 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
other structures located only in the second sector must be designed to be struck by
containers and/or other vessels carried by the outflow. Buildings and other structures
in both sectors must be designed to be hit by containers and/or other ships moving in
any direction.
6.11.6 Containers
The impact force of the container must be calculated from Equation (6.11-2) and
Equation (6.11-3). Massmdis the mass of the empty container. It must be assumed that
the impact contact originates from one of the lower front (or rear) corners of the
container. The container stiffness is,k-EA/LwithEis the modulus of elasticity
container bottom rail,Ais the cross-sectional area of the bottom rail, andLis the length of the bottom
rail of the container. Minimum values are given in Table 6.11-2.Co, orientation factors,
should be considered equal to 0.65 for containers. Nominal design Impact Force,Fhere,
from Equation (6.11-2) for containers it is not necessary to take more than 220 kips (980
kN).
For empty containers, the impulse duration for elastic impact should be calculated
from Equation (6.11-4). For a loaded container, the impulse duration is determined
from Equation (6.11-5):
-md-m-ufill
td - max
(6.11-5)
Fhere
withmfill must be taken at 50% of the permitted content capacity

maximum of the container. Minimum value-md-mfill-given in Table 6.11-2 for
loaded container containers. The design must consider both empty and loaded
containers.
For equivalent static analysis, the impact force must be multiplied by the dynamic
response factorRmaxrequired in Table 6.11-1. To get the intermediate value of
Rmax,linear interpolation can be used. For walls, Impact must be assumed
works along the horizontal center of the wall, and the natural period is permitted to be
determined based on the period of an equivalent column with a width equal to half the
vertical span of the wall. It is also permitted to use alternative analysis methods
according to Article 6.11.8.
6.11.7 Exceptional debris impact
If the maximum immersion depth exceeds 12 ft (3.66 m), extraordinary debris impacts
from vessels of the largest deadweight tonnage with a ballast draft less than the
immersion depth within the impact hazard area of piers and wharves defined in
Article 6.11.5 shall be assumed to have impacted perimeter of Tsunami Risk Category
III Critical Facilities and Tsunami Risk Category IV buildings and structures anywhere
from the base of the structure to 1.3 times the submergence depth plus the height to
the vessel deck. The load must be calculated from Equation (6.11-3), based on the
stiffness of the structural element affected and a weight equal to the Actual Weight (
Lightship Weight, LWT) plus 30% of Deadweight Tonnage (Deadweight TonnageDWT).
Alternative analysis of Article 6.11.8 is permitted. Either as a primary approach, or
where the impact load exceeds the acceptance criteria for each impacted structural
element, it is permitted to accommodate the impact through the alternative load path
progressive collapse provisions of Article 6.8.3.5.3, applied to all
85 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
frame level from bottom to floor level above 1.3 times the submergence depth plus the
height to the ship's deck measured from the waterline.
6.11.8 Alternative methods of response analysis
Dynamic analysis is permitted to be used in determining the response of a structure to

an applied force as a rectangular impulse of time durationtd
with values calculated according to Equation (6.11-3). If the impact is large enough to
cause inelastic behavior in the structure, it is permissible to use a mass-spring system
with a single degree of freedom equivalent to nonlinear stiffness that takes into
account the ductility of the impacted structure for dynamic analysis. As an alternative,
inelastic impact, structural response is allowed to be calculated based on the work-
energy method with nonlinear stiffness incorporating the ductility of the impacted
structure. The speed applied in the work energy analysis method must be equal toumax
multiplied by
product of Priority Factors,ITsu,and orientation factors,C. o
6.12 Foundation design
The design of structural foundations and tsunami barriers must provide resistance to
the loads and effects of Article 6.12.2, must provide the capacity to support the
structural load combinations defined in Article 6.8.3.1, and must accommodate
displacements determined in accordance with Article 6.12.2.6. The depth of foundation
embedding and the capacity of exposed piles to withstand structural loads, including
beam loadssloof, should be determined taking into account the cumulative effects of
general erosion and local scour. Alternatively, it is permitted to use the performance-
based criteria of Article 6.12.3. Site characterization must include the relevant
information specified in Article 6.7 of SNI 1726 (See Article 11.8 ASCE 7-16),
Geotechnical Investigation Report required for Subsurface Soil Conditions.
6.12.1 Resistance factors for foundation stability analysis
Resilience factor-should be given a value of 0.67 applied to the endurance capacity

for use with stability analysis and for potential failures related to soil bearing capacity,
lateral pressure, internal stability of geotextiles and soil reinforcement systems, and
slope stability, including drawdown conditions. A resistance factor of 0.67 shall also be
specified for the resistance capacity of the lift-resisting anchorage elements.
6.12.2 Characterization of loads and their effects
Foundations and tsunami barrier walls must be designed to accommodate the effects of
lateral soil pressure in accordance with Article 3.2, hydrostatic forces calculated in
accordance with Article 6.9, hydrodynamic loads calculated in accordance with Article 6.10,
and uplift forces and flow forces in the soil calculated in accordance with Article 6.12.2.1.
The foundation must provide the capacity to withstand lifting and overturning forces due to
hydrostatic, hydrodynamic tsunami and debris loads hitting the building's superstructure.
In addition, the effects of loss of soil strength, general erosion, and scour shall be
considered in accordance with the requirements of this Article. A minimum of two wave
cycles should be considered for such an effect.
© BSN 2020 86 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
6.12.2.1 Lifting forces and flow forces in the soil
Tsunami lift forces and ground flow forces must be evaluated as described in this
Article.
1. Lifting forces and flow forces in the soil will include the three submerged Load Cases
defined in Article 6.8.3.1.
2. Loss of strength caused by scouring and other soil effects such as liquefaction and
pore pressure softening must be considered. In addition, uplift forces and flow
forces in the soil at the foundation must be determined for cases where
a. The ground is expected to be saturated before the tsunami, or

b. Soil saturation is anticipated to occur during a series of incoming tsunami waves,
or
c. Areas of concern are expected to remain submerged after the tsunami.
3. The effects of live load and snow load will not be used for lifting resistance.
6.12.2.2 Loss of strength
Loss of shear strength due to tsunami-induced softening of pore pressure must be taken
into account to a depth of 1.2 times the maximum immersion depth, in accordance with
Article 6.12.2.5. Tsunami-induced softening of pore pressure does not need to be
considered at locations where the maximum Froude Number is less than 0.5.
6.12.2.3 General erosion
Erosion is common during tsunami submergence conditionsrunupand drawdown

conditions must be considered. General erosion analysis must take into account flow
amplification as described in Article 6.8.5; and must also take into account the increase
caused by the softening of pore pressure caused by the tsunami.
EXCEPTION General erosion analysis is not required for rocks or impassable layers
other erosion that is able to prevent scouring from tsunami flows of 30 ft/s (9.14 m/s). General
erosion during downdraft conditions must take into account the flow concentration in the
channel, including newly formed channels during tsunami inundation and downdraft (canal-
forming scour). Analysis of channel-forming scour does not necessarily include increases
resulting from softening of pore pressure.
6.12.2.4 Scour
The depth and extent of scour must be evaluated using the methods of Article 6.12.2.4.1
and Article 6.12.2.4.2.
EXCEPTION Scour evaluation is not required for rocks or layers that are not
can be eroded which prevents scouring from tsunami flows of 30 ft/s (9.14 m/s) or for Open
Structures.
6.12.2.4.1 Scour by continuous flow
Scour, including the effects of continuous flow around the structure and including
building corner pillars, must be considered. The depth and extent of continuous flow
scour design should be determined by physical modeling and dynamic numerical
modeling or empirical methods from recognized literature. It is permissible to
determine continuous flow scour and is associated with pressure softening
87 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
pores according to Table 6.12-1 and Figure 6.12-1. The local scour depth caused by
continuous flow given by Table 6.12-1 and Figure 6.12-1 is allowed to be reduced by an
adjustment factor in areas where the maximum flow Froude number is less than 0.5.
The adjustment factor should be taken as varying linearly from 0 at the horizontal
soaking limit to 1.0 at the point where the Froude number is 0.5. The boundary area
assumed to be considered includes the exposed building perimeter and extends to
either side of the foundation perimeter a distance equal to the scour depth for
consolidated or cohesive soils and a distance equal to three times the scour depth for
unconsolidated or non-cohesive soils.
Table 6.12-1 - Design scour depth caused by flow

sustained and softening of pore pressure
Soaking depthh Scour depthDa

< 10 ft (3.05 m) 1,2h
≥10 ft (3.05 m) 12 ft (3.66 m)
aDoes not apply to scour in locations with intact rock layers
Figure 6.12-1 - Depth of scour caused by continuous flow

and softening of pore pressure [1 ft = 0.305 m]
6.12.2.4.2 Scourplunging
Horizontal extent of scourplungingand its depth must be determined by dynamic

numerical or physical modeling or by empirical methods. In the absence of dynamic
modeling and analysis appropriate to site specificities, the depth of scour plunging Ds
must be determined by Equation (6.12-1).
qUsyn-
Ds-c2V [U.S. standard or SI units] (6.12-1)
g
with
c2V = dimensionless scour coefficient, permitted to be taken equal to 2.8; = The
angle between the fast flow at the scour hole and the horizontal, taken
as a value lower than 75° and a side slope of the structure that is exceeded on
the eroded side, in the absence of other information;
g = acceleration caused by gravity;
q = Discharge per unit width above the structural overload, as illustrated
in Figure 6.12-2 and calculated according to Equation (6.12-2); And
© BSN 2020 88 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
U = Fast flow velocity approaching the scour hole, obtained according to

Equation (6.12-4).
2
q-C 3 2gH3/2
dis O (6.12-2)
withCdisis the dimensionless discharge coefficient obtained according to Equation

(6.12-3):
H
Cdis- 0.611- 0.08O (6.12-3)
HB
Uis the speed of flow rapidly approaching a scour hole, resulting from a fall between
heightshfrom the upstream water level, plus additional elevation differencesddon the
eroded side, according to Equation (6.12-4):
U- 2g-h-d- d (6.12-4)
withddis the additional elevation difference between the upstream and eroded sides of
the structure, as illustrated in Figure 6.12-2.
Figure 6.12-2 - Scour parametersplunging

6.12.2.5 Horizontal soil loads
Horizontal soil loads caused by unbalanced scour must be included in the design of
foundation elements.
6.12.2.6 Displacement
Vertical and horizontal displacements of foundation elements and slope displacements

shall be determined using elastoplastic or numerical empirical or analytical methods in
recognized literature by applying the tsunami loads specified in Article
6.12.2Together with other applicable geotechnical and foundation loads required by
this standard.
6.12.3 Alternative foundation performance-based design criteria
89 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
In situ soil stresses from tsunami loads and effects must be included in foundation
pressure calculations. For a local coseismic tsunami hazard to occur as a result of a
local earthquake, the on-site soil and surface conditions at the onset of the tsunami
load must be those that existed at the end of the earthquake shaking, including
liquefaction, lateral spreading, and the effects ofrupturefault.
Building foundations must provide sufficient capacity and stability to withstand

structural loads and the effects of general erosion and scouring in accordance with
recognized literature. For buildings and structures of Tsunami Risk Category IV, it is
permitted to evaluate the overall performance of the foundation system for pore
pressure softening potential by performing two- or three-dimensional numerical
modeling analyzes of structure-soil-tsunami interactions. The results shall be evaluated
to demonstrate consistency with the structural performance acceptance criteria in
Article 6.8. For Tsunami Risk Category IV buildings and structures, an independent peer
review should be conducted as part of the performance-based design review by the
competent authority.
6.12.4 Foundation mitigation
Embankment, slab protection on site, geotextile and soil reinforcement system, front
system (facing systems), and land improvements are permitted to reduce the effects of
tsunamis.
6.12.4.1 Backfill
Fill used for structural support and protection shall be placed in accordance with ASCE
24 (2005), Article 1.5.4 and Article 2.4.1. Structural embankments shall be designed to
be stable during immersion and to withstand the loads and effects required in Article
6.12.2.
6.12.4.2 Slab protection on site
Exterior slabs on the site shall be assumed to lift and move during the Maximum
Considered Tsunami unless otherwise determined by site specific design analysis
based on recognized literature. Protective slabs on treads used as countermeasures
must have the minimum strength required to withstand the following loads:
1. Shear force of continuous flow at maximum tsunami flow velocity, umax, on the tread
slab;
2. Lift pressure from flow acceleration at the upstream and downstream slab edges for
both inflow and return flow;
3. Seepage flow gradient beneath the slab if there is potential for soil saturation during
successive tsunami waves;
4. Pressure fluctuations over the slab cross-section and at the joints;
5. Pore pressure increases from liquefaction and from the passage of multiple tsunami
waves; And
6. Substrate erosion upstream, downstream, and parallel flow of slab edges, as well as between slab cross-
sections.
6.12.4.3 Geotextiles and soil system reinforcement
Geotextiles should be designed and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's

installation requirements and as recommended in recognized literature. Factors
© BSN 2020 90 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
the resistance required in Article 6.12.1 shall be provided for bearing capacity, uplift,
lateral pressure, internal stability, and slope stability.
The following soil reinforcement systems are permitted for use:

1. Geotextile tubes made from high-strength woven material capable of achieving full
tensile strength without being limited by deformation when carrying design loads and
tsunami effects;
2. A geogrid system and slope reinforcement system that includes adequate protection
against general erosion and scour, and a maximum lift thickness of 1 ft (0.3 m) and
face protection; And
3. Design of slope strengthening and erosion protection systemsgeocellgeocell earth,
including analysis to determine anticipated performance against general erosion
and scour if no face is used.
6.12.4.4 Front system (facing systems)
The face system and its anchors must be strong enough to withstand lifting and
displacement during the design load of the bath. The following advance methods for soil
reinforcement systems are permitted for use:
1. Vegetation to provide general erosion and scour resistance where tsunami flow
velocity is less than 12.5 ft/s (3.81 m/s). The design must conform to recognized
methods and requirements in the literature.
2. Geotextile filter layer, including primary filter protection countermeasures using a
composite grid assuming high contact stress and high energy wave action design
criteria in AASHTO M288-06, including soil retention, permeability, blockage
resistance, and survival.
3. The mattress provides adequate flexibility and includes energy dissipation
characteristics. The edge must be embedded to maintain edge stability under the
design bath flow.
4. Concrete for dealing with tsunamis is provided in accordance with the slab protection in
the site countermeasures in Article 6.12.4.2 and contains adequate anchors to the soil
reinforcement system below the design flow of the soak.
5.ArmorAndriprapstones provided to withstand tsunamis must be designed as follows:
The diameter of the stones must not be less than the size determined in
accordance with design criteria based on tsunami immersion depth and currents
using design criteria in recognized literature. If the Froude number is maximum,Fr,
is 0.5 or greater, high-speed turbulence currents associated with tsunamis should
be specifically considered, using methods in the recognized literature.
Where independent review is undertaken, forward systems are permitted to base their
design on physical or numerical modeling
6.12.4.5 Soil improvement
Soil improvement measures must be designed using a soil-cement mixture to provide

scour protection that cannot be eroded in accordance with Article 6.12.2.4 and provide
a minimum of 100 psi (0.69 MPa) average unconfined compressive strength.
6.13 Structural countermeasures for tsunami loading
The following countermeasures allowed to reduce the structural effects of the tsunami.
91 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
6.13.1 Open structures
Open Structures shall not be subjected to Load Case 1 of Article 6.8.3.1. The effect of
accumulated debris loads on or within the Open Structure shall be evaluated by
assuming a minimum coverage ratio of 50% of the projected submerged area along
(the perimeter) of the Open Structure.
6.13.2 Tsunami barriers
Tsunami barriers used as external perimeter structural countermeasures must be

designed consistent with the performance objectives of the protected structure to
jointly achieve the performance criteria. These criteria include barrier strength,
stability, slope erosion protection, toe scour, and geotechnical stability requirements as
well as barrier height and barrier footprint to completely prevent submersion during a
Maximum Considered Tsunami. If the barrier is designed to be exceeded by a design
event or is intended to provide only partial resistance from a design event, the
protected structure and its foundation must be designed for the residual submersion
resulting from the design event. The foundation system maintenance requirements in
Article 6.12 of this Article shall also be applied.
6.13.2.1 Information about existing buildings and other protected structures
Information as awakened (As-built)on building configuration, building components,

location, and foundations are permitted to be evaluated in accordance with ASCE 41 (2014),
Chapters 9 through 11.
6.13.2.2 Site layout
The spatial boundaries of a tsunami barrier layout should include the following:
1. Tsunami barriers must be set back from the protected structure for perimeter
protection. Any changes to the building path (alignment) must have a minimum
radius of curvature equal to at least half the maximum immersion depth.
2. For upper or partial runoff barriers to submergence, at a minimum the barrier boundary must
protect the structure from submergence flow based on an incident angle of ± 22.5 degrees
from the shoreline. The flow angle of incidence shall be evaluated in accordance with Article
6.8.6.1 and Article 6.8.6.2.
6.14 Vertical tsunami evacuation shelter structure
Vertical tsunami evacuation shelter structures designated as alternative means of

evacuation by competent authorities must be designed in accordance with the additional
requirements of this Article.
6.14.1 Minimum immersion depth and elevation
Tsunami shelter floors should be located no less than 10 ft (3.05 m) or one level above
1.3 times the maximum considered tsunami submergence elevation at the site as
determined by site specific submergence analysis, as shown in Figure 6.14-1 . The
submergence elevation according to the particularity of the tsunami location under
consideration is the same maximum given
© BSN 2020 92 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
factor 1.3, should also be used for the design of Vertical Tsunami Evacuation Shelter
Structures in accordance with Articles 6.8 to 6.12.
6.14.2 The burden of life for refugees
Combined live load,Lrefuge of 100 psf (4.8 kPa) must be used in each
planned evacuation floor area within the ground floor of the tsunami shelter.
6.14.3 Rolling impact (laydowns)
If the maximum immersion depth exceeds 6 ft (1.83 m), Overturning impact (laydowns) of
adjacent pile structures collapsing onto occupied portions of the building must be taken
into consideration
6.14.4 Information about construction documents
Construction documents must include tsunami design criteria and occupancy capacity of
tsunami evacuation areas. The floor plan should show all evacuation areas rather than
facilities and exit routes from each area. The latitude and longitude coordinates of the
building must be recorded on the construction documents.
6.14.5 Peer review
The design shall be subject to independent peer review by an appropriately licensed design
professional who shall present a written report to the Authorized Person as to the design's
conformity with the requirements of this standard.
Figure 6.14-1 - Minimum refuge level elevation [1 ft=0.305 m]
6.15 Components and systems specified as non-structural
6.15.1 Performance requirements
Nonstructural designated components and systems in structures located in the

Tsunami Design Zone must be protected either from the effects of tsunami
submergence or positioned within the structure above the submergence height of the
Maximum Considered Tsunami, so that the specified components and systems
93 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Non-structural structures will be able to perform critical functions during and after the
Maximum Considered Tsunami. Tsunami barriers used as submergence protection
must have a top edge elevation of the wall that is not less than 1.3 times the maximum
submergence height of the barrier. Tsunami barriers must also meet the requirements
of Article 6.13. It is alternatively permitted to design nonstructural specified
components and systems directly for tsunami effects, provided that immersion will not
prevent them from performing essential functions during and after the Maximum
Considered Tsunami.
6.16 Non-building structures Tsunami Risk Category III and IV
6.16.1 Requirements for non-building structures in Tsunami Risk Category III
Tsunami Risk Category III non-building structures located in the Tsunami Design Zone must
be protected from the effects of tsunami submergence or designed to withstand the impact
of tsunami loads in accordance with Article 6.8 of this Article and in accordance with the
specific performance requirements of Article 6.8.3. Tsunami barriers used as submergence
protection must have an elevation of the top edge of the wall not less than 1.3 times the
maximum submergence elevation of the barrier. Tsunami barriers must also meet the
requirements of Article 6.13.
6.16.2 Requirements for non-building structures in Tsunami Risk Category IV
Tsunami Risk Category IV which is intended for non-structural systems in non-building

structures located in the Tsunami Design Zone must be (1) protected from the effects of
tsunami submergence, (2) positioned above 1.3 times the submergence elevation of the
Tsunami being considered Maximum such that non-building structures Tsunami Risk
Category IV Structures will be capable of performing critical functions during and after a
Maximum Considered Tsunami, or (3) be designed to withstand the impact loads of a
tsunami in accordance with Article 6.8 and the specific performance requirements of Article
6.8.3. Tsunami barriers used as protection against inundation must have an elevation of the
top edge of the wall that is not less than 1.3 times the maximum submergence elevation of
the barrier. Tsunami barriers must also meet the requirements of Article 6.13.
This section lists consensus standards and other Reference documents that should be
considered as part of this standard to the extent referred to in this Article. Referenced
documents identified by an asterisk (*) are not consensus standards; Rather, they are
documents developed within the industry and represent acceptable procedures for
design and construction as far as the intended Articles are concerned.
AASHTOGuide Specifications and Commentary for Vessel Collision Design of Highway

Bridges, 2nd Ed.,American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials, 2009,
with 2010 Interim Revisions.
AASHTO M288-06,Standard Specification for Geotextile Specification for Highway
Applications, American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials, 2006.
Cited in: Section 6.12.4.4
ASCE/SEI 24-05,Flood Resistant Design and Construction, American Society of Civil
Engineers, 2005.
Cited in: Section 6.12.4.1
© BSN 2020 94 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
ASCE/SEI 41-13,Seismic Evaluation and Retrofit of Existing Buildings, American Society

of Civil Engineers, 2014.
Cited in: Sections 6.8.3.5.2.2 and 6.13.2.1
* NOAA Technical Memorandum OAR PMEL-135,Standards, Criteria, and Procedures
for NOAA Evaluation of Tsunami Numerical Models, National Oceanic and Atmospheric
Administration, Pacific Marine Environmental Laboratory, 2007.
Cited in: Section 6.7.6.7.
7 Snow load
This article is not relevant for Indonesia.
95 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
8 Rainwater load
8.1 Definitions and symbols
8.1.1 Definition
controlled drainage
a system deliberately designed to regulate the flow rate through the main channel.
puddle
accumulation of water caused by deflection of the roof structure, resulting in additional
load.
instability due to waterlogging

component instability caused by progressive deflection due to flooding of the roof.
primary drainage system

A roof drainage system that is usually used to drain water out of the roof.
primary components
in relation to determining vulnerable spans, structural components that have direct
connections to columns, including beams and trusses.
gutter hole (scupper)

an opening in the side of a building (usually through a parapet wall) for the purpose of
channeling water out of the roof.
secondary drainage system

a roof drainage system at a higher elevation than the primary drainage system, where
water flows out of the roof when the primary system is blocked or not working.
secondary components
in relation to determining vulnerable spans, structural components that do not have a
direct connection to the column.
vulnerable stretch
Structural spans are susceptible to overload from water accumulation.
8.1.2 Symbols
dh = additional water depth in the roof that does not sag above the inlet
secondary drainage system at its design flow (i.e., hydraulic head), in in. (mm)
ds =the depth of water on a non-sliding roof increases towards the inlet

secondary drainage system if the primary drainage system is closed (i.e., static
height), in in. (mm)
R =rainwater load on a roof that does not sag, in lb/ft2(kN/m2). If
the term "roof that does not sag" used, the deflection from the load (including dead load)
does not need to be taken into account when determining the amount of rainwater on the
roof.
© BSN 2020 96 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
8.2 Roof drainage
The roof drainage system must be designed in accordance with applicable regulations.
Design flow rate of secondary channels as overflow channels (including roof drains and
gutter pipes) or gutter holes (scupper),and hydraulic head (dh) calculated must be
based on rainfall intensity of 15 minutes duration with a return period equal to 100
years or longer than that. The primary drainage system must be designed for rainfall
intensity of 60 minutes with a return period (frequency) of 100 years or more.
8.3 Design rain load
Each part of the roof must be designed to be able to withstand the load from rainwater
that accumulates if the primary drainage system in that part is blocked plus the even
load due to the rise of water above the inlet of the secondary drainage system at the
design flow.
R=5.2 ( ) (8.3-1)
R=0.0098 ( ) (8.3-1si)
If the secondary drainage system consists of several channels, these channels and their
discharge points must be separated from the primary channel. Stormwater loads
should be based on total head (i.e., static head [ds] plus hydraulic head [dh]) related to
the design flow rate for the specified drainage system and secondary channels. The
total head corresponding to the design flow rate for the specified channel shall be
based on hydraulic test data.
8.4 Instability due to flooding and waterlogging loads
Vulnerable spans must beinvestigatedwith structural analysis to ensure that the span
has sufficient stiffness to prevent progressive deflection (i.e., instability) and sufficient
strength to withstand additional waterlogging loads. The following conditions should
be considered vulnerable spans: (1) spans with a roof slope of less than 1/4 in. (6.25
mm) per foot (1.19°) when the secondary member is perpendicular to the free edge of
the channel, (2) spans with a roof slope of less than 1 in. (25 mm) per foot (4.76°) when
the secondary member is parallel to the free edge of the channel, (3) spans with a roof
slope of 1 in. (25 mm) per foot (4.76°) and the span to distance ratio for the secondary
component is greater than 16 if the secondary component is parallel to the free edge
of the channel, or (4) the span that accommodates water accumulation (in whole or in
part) if the channel system The main channel is blocked but the secondary channel
system is functioning. The greater of the snow load or stormwater load equal to the
design conditions for an obstructed main system should be used in this analysis.
8.5 Controlled drainage
Roofs equipped with hardware in the primary drainage system designed to

intentionally regulate the rate of drainage must be equipped with a secondary
drainage system at higher elevations. Flow-controlled roof drains should not be used in
secondary drainage systems.
8.6 Consensus standards and other Reference documents
97 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
9 Provided for future provisions
10 Ice loads
This article is not relevant for Indonesia.
ARTICLE 11 TO ARTICLE 25 CONCERNING EARTHQUAKE LOADING IN INDONESIA,

ARE IN THE SCOPE OF SNI 1726
NOTES The structure of this Standard includes an Article numbering method following SEI/ASCE 7-10
as a reference standard in this SNI. This is intended to ensure traceability of the reference
standard so as to make it easier to unify perceptions of the application of the substance of this
standard.
© BSN 2020 98 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
26 Wind loads: general requirements
26.1 Procedures
26.1.1 Scope
Buildings and other structures, including the Main Wind Force Resisting System
(SPGAU) and all building Components and Cladding (K&K), must be designed and
implemented to withstand wind loads as determined according to Articles 26 to Article
31. The provisions in this Article define basic wind parameters for use with other
provisions contained in this standard.
26.1.2 Permitted procedures
Design wind loads for buildings and other structures, including SPGAU and building
C&C elements, must be determined using one of the procedures as required in this
Article. An outline of the entire process for determining wind loads, including clause
references, is given in Figure 26.1-1.
99 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Article 26 - General Requirements:Used to determine basic parameters in

determining wind loads on SPGAU and K&K. These basic parameters are:
- Basic wind speed,V, see Article 26.5 for definitions and the
Indonesian Wind Map Book according to the risk categories of
buildings and other structures.
- wind direction factor,Kd, see Article 26.6
- Exposure, see Article 26.7
- topographic factors,Kzt, see Article 26.8
- Land surface elevation factor,Ke, see Article 26.9
- Speed pressure, see Article 26.10
- Wind gust influence factors, see Article 26.11
- Classification of closure, see Article 26.12
- Internal pressure coefficient, (GCpi), see Article 26.13
The wind load on the SPGAU may be The wind load on K&K may be
determined by: determined by:
Article 27:Directed procedures for Article 30:

full height buildings
- Envelope procedures in Parts 1 and 2, or
- Directed procedures in Parts 3, 4 and 5

Article 28:Envelope procedures for - Building equipment (roof consoles and
low-rise buildings parapets) in Section 6
- Non-building structures in Section 7
Article 29:Directed procedures for

building equipment (roof consoles and
parapets) and other structures
Article 31:Wind tunnel procedures for

any building or other structure
Article 31:Wind tunnel procedures for

any building or other structure
Figure 26.1-1 - Outline of the process for determining wind loads
Additional outlines and notes are provided at the beginning of each chapter for more detailed
step-by-step procedures for determining wind loads.
© BSN 2020 100 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
26.1.2.1 Main Wind Force Resisting System (SPGAU)
The wind load for the SPGAU shall be determined using one of the following
procedures:
1. Directed procedures for buildings of all heights as required in Article 27 for buildings
meeting the requirements required therein;
2. Envelope procedures for low-rise buildings as required in Article 28 for buildings that
meet the requirements required therein;
3. Proceduredirectedfor building equipment (rooftop structures and equipment) and
other structures (such as freestanding solid walls andsolid indicator panelfree
standing, chimney, tank,indicator panelopen, single plane open frames, and truss
towers) as required in Article 29; or
4. Wind tunnel procedures for all buildings and other structures as required in Article
31.
26.1.2.2 Components and Clading (C&K)
Wind loads on Components and Cladding in all buildings and other structures shall be
designed using one of the following procedures:
1. Analytical procedures provided in Parts 1 to 6, as appropriate, of Article 30; or
2. Wind tunnel procedures as required in Article 31.
26.2 Definitions
The following definitions apply to the provisions of Articles 26 to 31:
Approved
accepted by the competent authorities
attached canopy
horizontal terrace cover (maximum slope 2%) attached to the building wall at a height;
different fromconsolewhich is an extension of the roof surface
basic wind speed,v

wind gust speed 3 secondskat a height of 33 ft (10 m) above the ground at Exposure C
(see Section 26.7.3) determined in accordance with Section 26.5.1
building, closed
buildings that have a total area of openings in each wall, which receives positive
external pressure, is less than or equal to 4 ft2(0.37 m2) or 1% of the wall area,
whichever is smaller. This condition is expressed for each wall by the following
equation:
Ao<0.01Ag; or 4 ft2(0.37 m2); choose the smaller one,
withAoAndAgis as specified for open-air buildings
buildings, low-rise
closed or partially closed buildings that meet the following conditions:
101 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
1. Average roof heighthequal to or less than 60 ft (18 m).

2. Average roof heighthdoes not exceed the smallest horizontal dimension.
building, open
buildings that have walls that are at least 80% open. This condition is expressed for
each wall by the equationAo- 0.8Ag,with
Ao=the total area of an opening in a wall subject to positive external pressure, in

ft2(m2); And
Ag= gross wall area forAoidentified, in ft2(m2)
building, partially closed

a building that meets both of the following conditions:
1. The total area of openings in walls subject to positive external pressure exceeds the
sum of the areas of openings in the equilibrium building envelope (walls and roof)
by more than 10%.
2. The total area of the openings in the wall subject to positive external pressure exceeds 4 ft2
(0.37 m2) or 1 % of the wall area, whichever is smaller, and the percentage of
openings in the balance of the building envelope does not exceed 20 %.
This condition is expressed by the following equation:

Ao>1.10Aoi
Ao>4ft2(0.37 m2) or > 0.01Ag, take the smallest, andAoi/Agi≤ 0.20 withAo,Agis
as specified for open buildings;
Aoi = the sum of the areas of openings in the building envelope (walls and roof) is not
includedAo, in ft2(m2); And
Agi = the sum of the gross surface areas of the building envelope (walls and roof) is
not includedAg, in ft2(m2).
building, partially open

buildings that do not meet the requirements as open, partially closed or closed
buildings.
buildings, simple diaphragms

a building where the wind load is on the windward side (windward) and on the
windward side go (leewards), both of which are transmitted by the roof and vertical
span wall assemblies, via continuous floor and roof diaphragms, to the SPGAU.
buildings, uniform torsional against wind loads

a building with spgau about each principal axis is proportioned so that the maximum
displacement at each story in Case 2, the torsional wind load case, of Figure 27.3-8,
does not exceed the maximum displacement at the same location in Case 1 of Figure
27.3-8, the load case basic wind.
building envelope
building cladding, roof, outer walls, glass, door assemblies, window assemblies, roof glass,
and other components that cover the building.
buildings and other structures, flexible

buildings and other slender structures with a fundamental natural frequency of less
than 1 Hz.
© BSN 2020 102 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
buildings or other structures, regularly shaped

a building or other structure does not have unusual geometric deviations in spatial
form
buildings or other structures, rigid

a building or other structure whose fundamental frequency is greater than or equal to
1 Hz.
components and cladding (k&k)

elements of the building envelope or elements of building equipment and roof
structures and equipment that do not meet the requirements as part of SPGAU.
design style,F
equivalent static force used in determining wind loads for other structures.
design pressure,p
equivalent static pressure used in determining wind loads for buildings.
diaphragm
roof, floor, or other membrane or bracing system that works to transmit lateral forces
to the main vertical wind force resisting system. For analysis of the effects of wind
loads, steel deck diaphragms without top layer, steel deck filled with concrete, andslab
concrete, each having a span to cross-sectional height ratio of 2 or less, may be
idealized as a rigid diaphragm. Diaphragms made from structural wood panels can be
idealized as flexible diaphragms.
targeted procedures
a procedure for determining wind loads on buildings and other structures for specified
wind directions, where the external pressure coefficients used are obtained from
previous wind tunnel testing of prototypical building models for appropriate wind
directions.
height of the bottom of the roof,he

the distance from the ground surface next to the building to the bottom line of the roof
of a particular wall section. If the height of the bottom of the roof varies along the wall,
use the average height.
effective wind area,A

The area used to determine the external pressure coefficient, (GCp) and (GCrn). For
component and cladding elements, the effective wind area in Figure 30.3-1 to Figure
30.3-7, Figure 30.4-1, Figure 30.5-1, and Figure 30.7-1 to Figure 30.7-3 is the span
length multiplied by the effective width should not be smaller than one third of the
span length. For solar panel roofs, the effective wind area in Figure 29.4-7 is the same
as the tributary area for the structural element considered, except that the width of the
effective wind area must not be less than one-third of its length. For cladding fasteners,
the effective wind area shall not be greater than the tributary area of each fastener.
envelope procedure
procedure for determining wind load cases in buildings, in which artificial external
pressure coefficients are obtained from model wind tunnel tests
103 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
earlier prototypical buildings were gradually rotated through 360°, as in the case of
dummy pressures that produce major structural actions (lift, horizontal shear, bending
moments, etc.) that are envelopes of maximum values among all possible wind
directions.
steep cliff
also known as a steep slope, in connection with the topographic effects in Article 26.8,
a cliff or steep slope that generally separates two levels or a certain sloping area (see
Figure 26.8-1).
free roof
a roof with a configuration that generally corresponds to that shown in Figures 27.3-4
to Figures 27.3-6 (unilaterally slanted, pitched, or concave) in an open building without
walls enclosing below the roof surface.
reflection
transparent glass or sheet or translucent plastic sheet used in windows, doors,
skylights, orcurtain walls.
glass, impact protection

glass that has been tested through testing to withstand the impact of projectiles. See Article
26.12.3.2.
Hill
taking into account the influence of topography in Article 26.8, is a land surface with
sharp relief characteristics in each horizontal direction (see Figure 26.8-1).
typhoon-prone areas
areas that are prone to typhoon attacks (basic wind speed for Risk Category II buildings
is greater than 115 miles/hour).
impact protection system

construction that has been shown by testing to withstand the impact of projectiles and
that is applied, attached, or locked to exterior glazing. See Article 26.12.3.2.
main wind force resistance system (SPGAU)

a series of structural elements that function to support and provide stability to the
entire structure. These systems generally receive wind loads from more than one
surface.
average roof height,h

the average height of the lowest part of the roof and the height of the highest point on the roof
surface, except for roof angles that are less than or equal to 10°, the average roof height is the height
of the lowest part of the roof.
aperture
a gap or hole in the building envelope that allows air to flow through the building
envelope and that is designed to be "open" as long as the design winds persist as
defined by these provisions.
recognized literature
published research findings and approved technical papers.
© BSN 2020 104 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Hill
taking into account the influence of topography in Article 26.8, is a land surface with
sharp relief characteristics in both horizontal directions (see Figure 26.8-1).
rooftop solar panels

a device for receiving solar radiation and converting it into electricity or heat energy.
usually these are photovoltaic modules or solar thermal panels.
row of solar panels

a group of solar panels close together on the roof.
area of wind-borne debris

areas within hurricane-prone areas where impact protection is required for glazed
openings; see Article 26.12.3.
wind tunnel procedure

procedures for determining wind loads on buildings and other structures, where the
pressure and/or force and moment are determined for each wind direction taken into
account, from the model of the building or other structure and its surroundings, in
accordance with Article 31.
26.3 Symbols
The following symbols only apply to the provisions of Articles 26 to Article 31:
A = effective wind area, in ft2(m2)
Af = area of open buildings and other structures both perpendicularly

against the wind direction or projected on a plane perpendicular to the wind
direction, in ft2(m2)
Ag = gross area of the wall whereAolocated, in ft2(m2)
Agi = the total gross surface area of the building envelope (walls and roof) is not
includedAg, in ft2(m2)
An = normalized wind area for the solar roof panel in Figure 29.4-7
Ao = total area of openings in a wall subject to positive external pressure, in ft2(m2)
Aog = total area of openings in the building envelope, in ft2(m2)

Aoi = total area of openings in the building envelope (walls and roof) no
includingAo, in ft2(m2)
As = gross area of freestanding solid walls or sign panels, in ft2(m2)
a = pressure coefficient zone width, in ft (m)
B = horizontal dimensions of the building measured perpendicular to the wind direction,
in ft (m)
105 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
b = factor the average hourly wind speed in Equation 26.11-16 of Table 26.11-1
-
b = wind gust speed factor in 3 seconds from Table 26.11-1
c = turbulence intensity factor in Equation 26.11-7 of Table 26.11-1
Cf = force coefficient used in determining wind loads for structures-
other structures
CN = net pressure coefficient used in determining the wind load for

open building
Cp = external pressure coefficient used in determining wind load
for buildings
D = diameter of circular structure or structural component, in ft (m)
D′ = height of protruding elements such as ribs and fins, in ft (m)
d1 =for a rooftop solar panel array, the horizontal distance is orthogonal to the edge of the panel
against adjacent panels or building edges, ignoring roof equipment in Figure
29.4-7, in ft (m)
d2 =for a row of solar panel roofs, the horizontal distance from the edge of one panel to the edge
closest in the next row of panels in Figure 29.4-7, in ft (m)
F = design wind force for other structures, in lb (N) gust effect

G = factor
Gf = wind gust effect factors for SPGAU from flexible buildings and other
structures
(GCp) = The multiplication of the external pressure coefficient and the wind gust
effect factor is used in determining the wind load for buildings
(GCpf) = product of the equivalent external pressure coefficient and the blowing effect factor
wind used in determining the wind load for SPGAU from low-rise buildings
(GCpi) = product of the internal pressure coefficient and the wind gust effect factor
used in determining wind loads for buildings
(GCpn) = combined net pressure coefficient for the parapet
(GCr) = The product of the external pressure coefficient and the wind gust effect
factor is used to determine the wind load for the roof structure
-GCrn-= net pressure coefficient forrooftop solar panels, in Equation (29.4-

4) and Equation (29.4-5)
-GCrn-nom=nominal net pressure coefficient for specified rooftop solar panels

from Figure 29.4-7
gQ = peak factor for the background response in Equations 26.11-6 and
26.11-10
gR = peak factor for the resonant response in Equation 26.11-10
© BSN 2020 106 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
gv = peak factors for wind response in Equations 26.11-6 and 26.11-10

H = height of hill or cliff in Figure 26.8-1, in ft (m)
h = average height of building roofs or height of other structures,
except for the height of the lowest part of the roof which is used for the roof
cornersθless than or equal to 10°, in ft (m)
h1 = height of the solar panel above the roof at the lowest edge of the panel, in ft (m)
h2 = height of the solar panel above the roof at the top edge of the panel, in ft (m)
he = the height of the lowest part of the roof on a particular wall, or the average
height if the lowest part of the roof varies along the wall
hp =height to the top of the parapet in Figures 27.5-2 and 30.6-1
hPT = average parapet height above adjacent roof surfaces for

used with Equation (29.4-5), in ft (m)
Iz = turbulence intensity from Equation 26.11-7
K1,K2,K3= multiplier in Figure 26.8-1 to obtainKzt

Kd = wind direction factors in Table 26.6-1
Ke = land surface elevation factor
Kh = velocity pressure exposure coefficient at heightz=h
Kz = velocity pressure exposure coefficient at heightz

Kzt = topographic factors as defined in Article 26.8
L = Horizontal dimensions of a building measured parallel to the wind direction,

in ft (m)
Lb = normalized building length, for use in Fig

29.4-7, in ft (m)
Lh = the horizontal distance on the windward side from the top of the hill or cliff
to half the height of the hill or cliff in Figure 26.8-1, in ft (m)
Lp = longchordspanels for use on rooftop solar panels in Figure 29.4-7, in ft (m)
Lr = Horizontal dimensions of the bend of a freestanding solid wall or guide panel

in Figure 29.3-1, in ft (m)
Lz = turbulence integral length scale, in ft (m)
ℓ = integral length scale factor from Table 26.11-1, ft (m)
N1 = reduced frequency in Equation (26.11-14)
n1 = fundamental natural frequency, Hz
107 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
na = natural frequency lower approximate limit (Hz) of Article 26.11.2

p = design pressure used in determining the wind load for
buildings, in lb/ft2(N/m2)
PL = wind pressure acting on the face on the windward side in Fig

27.3-8, in lb/ft2(N/m2)
pnet = net design air pressure from Equation 30.4-1, in lb/ft2(N/m2)

pnet30 = net design wind pressure for Exposure B ath=30 ft (9.1 m) andI=
1.0 from Figure 30.4-1, in lb/ft2(N/m2)
pp = combined net pressure on the parapet in Equation 27.3-4, in lb/ft2
(N/m2)
ps = net design wind pressure in Equation 28.5-1, in lb/ft2(N/m2)

ps30 = simplified design air pressure for Exposure B ath=30 ft (9.1 m) andI=1.0 from
Figure 28.5-1, in lb/ft2(N/m2)
PW = The wind pressure acting on the face on the windward side comes in Figure
27.3-8, in lb/ft2(N/m2)
Q = background response factor in Equation 26.11-8
q = velocity pressure, in lb/ft2(N/m2)
qh = velocity pressure at heightz=h, in lb/ft2(N/m2)
qi = pressure velocity to determine internal pressure, in lb/ft2(N/m2)
qp = Velocity pressure at the top of the parapet, in lb/ft2(N/m2)
qz = velocity pressure at highzabove ground, in lb/ft2(N/m2)
R = resonance response factor in Equation 26.11-12
r = height-to-span ratio for curved roofs
RB,Rh,RL= values from Equation 26.11-15a and Equation (26.11-15b)
Ri = reduction factor from Equation 26.13-1
Rn = value from Equation 26.11-13

s = Vertical dimensions of a freestanding solid wall or panel guide from Figure
29.3-1, in ft (m)
V = basic wind speed obtained from the Indonesian Wind Map Book,
in mi/h (m/s). Base wind speed corresponds to the speed of wind gusts in 3
seconds at a height of 33 ft (10 m) above the ground in Exposure Category C
Vi = internal volume of unlined space, ft3(m3)
z = Average hourly wind speed at altitudez,ft/s (m/s)
W = building widths in Figures 30.3-3 and 30.3-5A and 30.3-5B and span widths in
Figures 30.3-4 and 30.3-6, in ft (m)
© BSN 2020 108 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
WL = building width on the longest side in Figure 29.4-7, in ft (m)
WS = building width on the shortest side in Figure 29.4-7, in ft (m)
x = distance on the downwind side or downwind side of the peak in Figure

26.8-1, in ft (m)
z = height above ground elevation, in ft (m)
z = equivalent structure height, in ft (m)
zg = nominal height of the atmospheric boundary layer used in this Standard
(Values can be seen in Table 26.11-1)
zmin = exposure constant from Table 26.11-1

- = exponent to the power of 3 second wind speed-gust from Table 26.11-1
-
- = reciprocal of-in Table 26.11-1
- = power exponent for average hourly wind speed in Equation 26.11-16 of Table
26.11-1
- = damping ratio, critical percent for buildings or structures

other
-c = panel chord factor for use in conjunction with rooftop solar panels in
Equation (29.4-5)
-E = edge array factor for use in conjunction with rooftop solar panels in Figure
29.4-7 and Equations (29.4-4) and (29.4-5)
-p = parapet height factor for use with rooftop solar panels in Equation (29.4-5)
- = ratio of solid area to gross area for freestanding solid walls, solid sign panels,
exposed sign panels, tower truss surfaces, or lattice structures
- = power exponent for the integral length scale in Equation 26.11-9

from Table 26.11-1
- = values used in Equation (26.11-15a) and Equation (26.11- 15b) (see Article
26.11.4)
θ = the angle of the roof plane to the horizontal, in degrees
- = adjustment factor for building height and exposure of
Figures 28.5-1 and 30.4-1
- = the height to width ratio for the instructions panel is solid

- =the angle between the solar panels and the roof surface in Figure 29.4-7,
in degrees
109 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
26.4 General
26.4.1 Sign agreement
Positive pressure acts towards the surface and negative pressure acts away from the
surface.
26.4.2 Critical load conditions
The values of the external and internal pressures must be combined algebraically to
determine the most critical load.
26.4.3 Wind pressure acting on opposite faces of each building surface
In calculating the design wind load for the SPGAU and for the components and
cladding of the building, the algebraic sum of the pressures acting on opposite faces of
each surface of the building must be taken into account.
26.5 Wind hazard map
26.5.1 Basic wind speed
Basic wind speed,V, used in determining the design wind load on buildings and other
structures must be determined from the Indonesian Wind Chart Book except as
specified in Articles 26.5.2 and 26.5.3:
See the Indonesian Wind Map Book for buildings and structures according to Risk
Category I to Risk Category IV.
Wind must be assumed to come from all horizontal directions. The basic wind speed
must be increased if records or experience show that the wind speed is higher than
that stated in the Indonesian Wind Chart Book.
26.5.2 Special wind areas
Mountain areas, valleys and special wind areas as shown in the Indonesian Wind Map
Book should be checked for unusual wind conditions. The competent authority shall, if
necessary, adjust the values given in the Indonesian Wind Chart Book to account for
higher local wind speeds. Adjustments should be based on meteorological information
and basic wind speed estimates obtained.
26.5.3 Baseline wind speed estimates from regional climate data
Outside hurricane-prone areas, regional climate data can only be used as a substitute
for the basic wind speed given in the Indonesian Wind Chart Book if (1) proven extreme
value statistical analysis procedures are used in reducing the data, and (2) length of
record, sampling error sample, averaging time, anemometer height, data quality, and
surrounding topography of the anemometer have been taken into account. In that
case, a reduction in the basic wind speed from that listed in the Indonesian Wind Map
Book is permitted if necessary.
© BSN 2020 110 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
In hurricane-prone areas, wind speeds obtained from simulation results can only be
used as a substitute for basic wind speeds in the Indonesian Wind Map Book if tested
simulation procedures and statistical analysis of extreme values are used.
If the base wind speed is estimated from regional climate data or simulations, the
resulting estimate must be adjusted for the mean return interval and equated to a 3
second wind gust speed at 33 ft (10 m) above the ground at Exposure C.
Table 26.6-1 - Wind direction factors,Kd
Structure type Wind direction factorKd

Building
Main Wind Force Resisting System (SPGAU) 0.85
Components and Clading (K&K) 0.85
Curved roof 0.85
The dome is round 1.0a
Chimneys, tanks and similar structures 0.90
Rectangle 0.95
Hexagon 1.0a
Octagonal 1.0a
Round
Free standing solid wall, roof section equipment, and 0.85
freestanding solid instruction panels as well as
bonded instruction panels
Open instruction panels and single plane open 0.85
frame
Tower truss
Triangular, square, or rectangular All 0.85
other cross-sections 0.95
aWind direction factorKd=0.95 is permitted for round structures or octagonal structures with
non-asymmetric structural systems.
26.6 Wind direction
wind direction factor,Kd, shall be determined from Table 26.6-1 and shall be included in the
wind loads calculated in Articles 27 to Article 30. The effect of wind direction in determining
the wind load in accordance with Article 31 shall be based on a rational analysis of the wind
speed in accordance with the requirements of Article 26.5.3 and Article 31.4.3.
26.7 Exposure
For each wind direction considered, the upwind exposure is based on ground surface
roughness determined from natural topography, vegetation, and constructed facilities.
26.7.1 Wind direction and sector
For each wind direction selected to determine the wind load, the exposure of the
building or structure shall be determined for two downwind sectors extending 45° on
each side of the selected wind direction. Exposure in these two sectors shall be
determined in accordance with Articles 26.7.2 and 26.7.3, and the exposure
111 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
its use will result in the highest wind load should be used to represent the wind from
that direction.
26.7.2 Surface roughness categories
The roughness of the ground surface within each 45° sector shall be determined for a
distance upwind of the site as defined in Article 26.7.3 from the categories defined in
the following text, for the purpose of establishing an exposure category as defined in
Article 26.7. 3.
Surface Roughness B:Urban and suburban areas, wooded areas, or other areas with
closely spaced obstructions the size of a single-family residence or larger in large
numbers.
Surface Roughness C:Open plains with scattered obstructions that are generally less
than 30 ft (9.1m) high. This category includes flat open areas and grasslands.
Surface Roughness D:Flat surfaces, unobstructed areas and water levels. This category
includes fine mud beds.
26.7.3 Exposure categories
Exposure B:For buildings or other structures with an average roof height of less than
or equal to 30 ft (9.1m), Exposure B applies when the roughness of the ground surface,
as determined by Surface Roughness B, applies in the downwind direction for a greater
distance from 1,500 ft (457m). For buildings or other structures with an average roof
height greater than 30 ft (9.1m), Exposure B applies when Surface Roughness B is in an
upwind direction for a distance greater than 2,600 ft (792 m) or 20 times the height
building or structure, choose the largest.
Exposure C:Exposure C applies to all cases where Exposure B or Exposure D does not
apply.
Exposure D:Exposure D applies when the roughness of the ground surface, as

determined by Surface Roughness D, applies in the upwind direction for a distance
greater than 5,000 ft (1,524m) or 20 times the height of the building or structure,
whichever is greater. Exposure D also applies when the roughness of the ground
surface near the site in the upwind direction is B or C, and the site is within 600 ft (183
m) or 20 times the height of the building or structure height, whichever is greater, from
the conditions of Exposure D as specified in the previous sentence.
For sites located in the transition zone between exposure categories, the category with the
greatest wind force should be used.
EXCEPTION Intermediate exposure between the previous categories is acceptable

used in the transition zone, provided that it is determined by rational analysis methods described in
recognized literature.
26.7.4 Exposure requirements
26.7.4.1 Directed procedures (Article 27)
© BSN 2020 112 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
For each wind direction considered, the wind load for SPGAU design of enclosed and
partially enclosed buildings using the Directed Procedure of Article 27 shall be based
on the exposure as described in Article 26.7.3. Wind loads for open building designs
with free-sloping, gable, or concave roofs shall be based on the exposure, as described
in Article 26.7.3, resulting in the highest wind load for each wind direction at the site.
26.7.4.2 Envelope procedure (Article 28)
Wind loads for SPGAU design for all low-rise buildings designed using the Envelope
Procedure in Article 28 shall be based on the exposure category resulting in the highest
wind load for each wind direction at the site.
26.7.4.3 Directed procedures for building equipment of buildings and other structures
(Article 29)
Wind load for complete designand building structures (such as roof structures and
equipment) and other structures (such as free-standing solid walls and free-standing
signal panels, chimneys, tanks, open signal panels, single-plane open frames, and
towers with trusses) as required in Article 29 should be based on exposureappropriate
for each wind direction considered.
26.7.4.4 Components and Clading (Article 30)
The design wind pressure for K&K should be based on the exposure category that
results in the highest wind load for each wind direction at the site.
26.8 Topographic effects
26.8.1 Increased wind speed over hills, long hills and steep cliffs
The effects of increased wind speed on hills, elongated hills, and isolated steep cliffs
that generally cause sudden changes in topography, in any exposure category, should
be included in wind load calculations if the condition and location of building sites and
other structures meet all of the following conditions:
1. A hill, elongated hill, or escarpment is isolated and unobstructed by similar topography in

an upwind direction with a height equivalent to a distance 100 times the height of the
topographic feature (100H) or 2 miles (3.22 km), whichever is smallest. This distance
should be measured horizontally to the point where it is highHfrom a designated hill,
ridge, or cliff.
2. Hills, elongated hills, or escarpments project upward by a factor of two or more the
height of terrain features in upwind directions within a 2-mile (3.22 km) radius for
each quadrant.
3. Buildings or other structures located as shown in Figure 26.8-1 on the upper half of a
hill or ridge or near the top of a cliff.
4.
H/Lh- 0.2 .
113 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
5.His greater than or equal to 15 ft (4.5 m) for Exposures C and D and 60 ft (18 m) for
Exposure B.
Diagram
Cliff 2-D Elongated Hill or 3-D Symmetrical Hill
Topographic multiplier for exposureCa B C

MultiplierK1 MultiplierK2 MultiplierK3
Entire
H/Lh Hill Cliff Hill x/Lh Cliff x/Lh Hill Cliff Hill
case
2-D 2-D 3-D 2-D 2-D 2-D 3-D
other
0.20 0.29 0.17 0.21 0.00 1.00 1.00 0.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
0.25 0.36 0.21 0.26 0.50 0.88 0.67 0.10 0.74 0.78 0.67
0.30 0.43 0.26 0.32 1.00 0.75 0.33 0.20 0.55 0.61 0.45
0.35 0.51 0.30 0.37 1.50 0.63 0.00 0.30 0.41 0.47 0.30
0.40 0.58 0.34 0.42 2.00 0.50 0.00 0.40 0.30 0.37 0.20
0.45 0.65 0.38 0.47 2.50 0.38 0.00 0.50 0.22 0.29 0.14
0.50 0.72 0.43 0.53 3.00 0.25 0.00 0.60 0.17 0.22 0.09
3.50 0.13 0.00 0.70 0.12 0.17 0.06
4.00 0 .00 0 .00 0 .80 0.09 0.14 0 .04
0.90 0 .07 0 .11 0.03
1.00 0.05 0.08 0.02
1.50 0.01 0.02 0.00
2.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
aFor valuesH/Lh,x/LhAndz/LhApart from what is shown, linear interpolation is permitted.
bForH/Lh>0.5, assumeH/Lh=0.5 to countK1and replace itLhwith 2Hto countK2AndK3.
cThe multiplier is based on the assumption that the wind is heading towards the hill or cliff along the direction of maximum gradient. Notation:
H:The height of the hill or cliff relative to the elevation of the area on the windward side (upwind), in feet (meters). K1:
factors to take into account the shape of topographical features and the effect of increasing maximum speed.
K2:factor to account for the reduction in speed increase with respect to distance to the upwind side or
to the windward side away from the summit.
K3: a factor to account for the reduction in speed gain with respect to height over elevation
local area.
Lh : horizontal distance on the windward side (upwind), from the top of a hill or cliff to half the height of the hill
or cliff, in feet (meters)
x : the distance (on the downwind side or the downwind side) from the top to the location of a building or other structure, in feet
(meters).
z : height above ground level at the location of a building or other structure, in feet (meters).
-:horizontal attenuation factor.
-:height attenuation factor.

Equality:
Kzt= (1+K1K2K3)2
K1determined from the table below

- x-
K-2 -- 1- -
- -L-h-
K3-e--z/Lh
Parameters for increasing speed on hills and cliffs

K1/(H/Lh) -
Exposure - Windward side Windward side
Hill shape
B C D come from go from
peak peak
2-dimensional elongated hills

1.30 1.5 1.55 3 1.5 1.5
(or valleys with negative HinK
1/(H/Lh) 2-dimensional cliff
0.75 0.85 0.95 2.5 1.5 4
3-dimensional symmetrical hills 0.95 1.05 1.15 4 1.5 1.5
Figure 26.8-1 - Topographic factors,Kzt
© BSN 2020 114 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
26.8.2 Topographic factors
The effect of increasing wind speed should be included in the design wind load
calculation using factorsKzt:
Kzt= (1+K1K2K3)2 (26.8-1)
withK1,K2, AndK3given in Figure 26.8-1.
If the conditions of the site and location of buildings and other structures do not meet
all the conditions required in Article 26.8.1, thenKzt=1.0.
26.9 Land surface elevation factor
Factorsurface elevationsoil to adjust air density,Ke, should be determined according to

Table 26.9-1. For all elevations, values may be takenKe=1.
26.10 Speed pressure
26.10.1 Speed pressure exposure coefficient
By categoryexposurespecified in Article 26.7.3, coefficientn exposure speed pressure,Kz

orKh, as applicable, shall be determined from Table 26.10-1. For locations that are in the
transition zone between categoriesexposure which approximates the change in
ground surface roughness, an intermediate value may be taken fromKzorKhthose in
Table 26.10-1, provided they are determined by rational analysis methods defined in
recognized literature.
Table 26.9-1 - Land surface elevation factors,Ke

Land elevation above sea level (Sea Level) Surface elevation factor
Ft m land
Ke
<0 <0 See note 2
0 0 1.00
1,000 305 0.96
2,000 610 0.93
3,000 914 0.90
4,000 1,219 0.86
5,000 1,524 0.83
6,000 1,829 0.80
> 6,000 > 1,829 See note 2
NOTES
1. Conservative estimates, may be takenKe=1.00 in all cases.
2. FactorsKemust be determined from the table above using interpolation or from the following
formula for all elevations:
K e -e-0.0000362z (zg=land elevation above sea level in ft).
g
K e -e-0.000119z (zg=land elevation above sea level in m).

g
3. In all casesKecan be taken at 1.00.
115 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Table 26.10-1 - Speed pressure exposure coefficient,KhAndKz

Height above the surface
Exposure
land
ft m B C D
0 – 15 0 – 4.6 0.57 (0.70)a 0.85 1.03
20 6.1 0.62 (0.70)a 0.90 1.08
25 7.6 0.66 (0.70)a 0.94 1.12
30 9.1 0.70 0.98 1.16
40 12.2 0.76 1.04 1.12
50 15.2 0.81 1.09 1.27
60 18.0 0.85 1.13 1.31
70 21.3 0.89 1.17 1.34
80 24.4 0.93 1.21 1.38
90 27.4 0.96 1.24 1.40
100 30.5 0.99 1.26 1.43
120 36.6 1.04 1.31 1.48
140 42.7 1.09 1.36 1.52
160 48.8 1.13 1.39 1.55
180 54.9 1.17 1.43 1.58
200 61.0 1.20 1.46 1.61
250 76.2 1.28 1.53 1.68
300 91.4 1.35 1.59 1.73
350 106.7 1.41 1.64 1.78
400 121.9 1.47 1.69 1.82
450 137.2 1.52 1.73 1.86
500 152.4 1.56 1.77 1.89
aUse 0.70 in Article 28, Exposure B, ifz<30 ft (9.1 m).
Notes
1. Speed pressure exposure coefficientKzcan be determined from the following formula:
For 15 ft (4.6 m)≤z≤zg Kz- 2.01 z/z g- - 2/-
Kz- 2.01-15/z-g
2/-
Forz<15 ft (4.6 m)
2.-Andzg tabulated in Table 26.11-1.
3. Linear interpolation for medium values from highzcan be done.
4. Exposure categories are defined in Article 26.7.
26.10.2 Speed pressure
speed pressure,qz,evaluated at heightzabove ground must be calculated using the

following equation:
qz -0.00256K zK zt KdK V
e 2 ( lb/ft2); in mi/h (26.10-1)
qz -0.613KzK ztKdK V
e 2 ( N/m2); in m/s (26.10-1.si)
with
Kz = speed pressure exposure coefficient, see Article 26.10.1.
Kzt = topographic factors, see Article 26.8.2.
Kd = wind direction factor, see Article 26.6.
© BSN 2020 116 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Ke = land surface elevation factor, see Article 26.9.

= basic wind speed, see Article 26.5.
qz = speed pressure at altitudez.
The velocity pressure at the average roof height is calculatedasqh=qzwhich is evaluated
from Equation (26.10-1) usingKat an average
z roof heighth.
Taking basic wind speed values, , which is used in determining

Design wind loads on roof structures and equipment, as well as other building
equipment must take into account the largest Risk Category among:
1. Risk Category for the building where the equipment or supplies are placed, or
2. Risk Category for any facility that is provided with required services by its equipment
or supplies.
26.11 Effects of wind gusts
26.11.1 Wind gust effect factors
The wind gust effect factor for buildings and other rigid structures may be taken as
0.85.
26.11.2 Frequency determination
To determine whether a building or other structure is rigid or flexible as defined in

Article 26.2, fundamental natural frequency,n1, should be determined using the
structural properties and deformation characteristics of the supporting elements in a
properly substantiated analysis. Low-rise buildings, as defined in 26.2, may be
considered rigid.
26.11.2.1 Limitations for natural frequency estimation
As an alternative to carrying out an analysis to determinen1, the approximate natural

frequency of the building,na, may be calculated in accordance with Article 26.11.3 for
structural steel, concrete, or masonry buildings that meet the following requirements:
1. Building height is less than or equal to 300 ft (91 m), and

2. The height of the building is less than 4 times its effective length,Leff.
effective length,Leff, in the direction of calculation must be determined from the following equation:
n
-h L i i
Leff
-i-1 n
(26.11-1)
-i hi
-1
The summation along the height of the building with

hi is high above class levelI; And
Li is the length of the building at leveliparallel to the wind direction
117 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
26.11.3 Approximate natural frequencies
Lower-bound approximate natural frequencies (na), in Hertz, concrete buildings or structural

steel buildings that meet the conditions of Article 26.11.2.1, may be determined from one of the
following equations:
For structural steel moment-resisting frame buildings:
na- 22.2 /h0.8 (26.11-

2)
For concrete moment resisting frame buildings:
na- 43.5 /h0.9 (26.11-3)
For structural steel buildings and concrete buildings with other lateral force resisting
systems:
na- 75 /h (26.11-4)
For concrete shear wall buildings or masonry walls, you can also use it
/h
na- 385-C-w
0.5
(26.11-5)
with
100 n - h -2 Ai
Cw- - - -
AB i -1 -h-i - -2-
- hi
-1- 0.83- --
-- - Di- --
Information:
h = average roof height (ft) (m)
n = The number of shear walls in a building is effective in resisting lateral forces in the direction
being calculated
AB = area of the base of the structure (ft2) (m2)
Ai = horizontal cross-sectional area of the shear walli” (ft2) (m2)

Di = shear wall length”i” (ft) (m)
hi = shear wall height”i” (ft) (m)
© BSN 2020 118 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
26.11.4 Rigid buildings or other structures
For rigid buildings or other structures as described in Article 26.2, the wind gust effect
factor must be taken as 0.85 or calculated using the formula:
-1- 0.7g I Q zQ -
G- 0.925-- -- (26.11-
-1- 0.7gvIz -
6)
-33 -1/6
Iz -c- - (26.11-7)
-z-
-10 -1/6
Iz-c- - (26.11-7.si)
- z-
withIzis intensity turbulence at heightz Wherez is high

the equivalent of a building or structure is determined at 0.6h, but not less thanzminfor
all heights of buildings or structuresh.zminAndcare listed for each exposure in Table
26.11-1;gQAndgvshould be taken as 3.4. Background responseQis
1
Q- -0.63 (26.11-8)
-B-h
1- 0.63-- --
-Lz -
withBAndhexplained in Article 26.3 andLzis the integral length scale of the turbulence
at equivalent height is
ℓ (26.11-9)
ℓ (26.11-9.si)
withℓ And- are the constants listed in Table 26.11-1.
Table 26.11-1 - Terrain exposure constants

b
- -
Exposure Zg(ft) c ℓ(ft) Zmin (t)
fa
-
a b - -
B 7.0 1,200 1/70 0.84 1/4.0 0.45 0.30 320 1/3.0 30

C 9.5 900 1/9.5 1.00 1/6.5 0.65 0.20 500 1/5.0 15
D 11.5 700 1/11.5 1.07 1/9.0 0.80 0.15 650 1/8.0 7
azmin=minimum height that can guarantee equivalent height which is greater than 0.6horzMin.
z
For buildings or other structures withh-zMin, should be taken as largezMin.

z
119 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
In metrics
b
- -
Exposure - Zg(m)
a b - c ℓ(m) -
zmin(m) a
B 7.0 365.76 1/7 0.84 1/4.0 0.45 0.30 97.54 1/3.0 9.14
C 9.5 274.32 1/9.5 1.00 1/6.5 0.65 0.20 152.4 1/5.0 4.57
D 11.5 213.36 1/11.5 1.07 1/9.0 0.80 0.15 198.12 1/8.0 2.13
azmin=minimum height that can guarantee equivalent height which is greater than 0.6horzMin.
z
For buildings or other structures withh-zMin, should be taken as largezMin.

z
26.11.5 Flexible sensitive buildings or dynamic sensitive buildings or other structures
For flexible sensitive buildings or dynamic sensitive buildings or other structures as

described in Article 26.2, the wind gust effect factor shall be calculated by
-1 - 1.7Iz gQ2Q 2 -gRR2 -

2
G f -0.925- - (26.11-10)
- 1-1.7g I v z -
- -
gQAndgv should be taken as 3.4 andgRis
(26.11-11)
R ,resonant response factor, is
1
R- RnRhRB-0.53 - 0.47R L- (26.11-12)
-
7.47N1
Rn- (26.11-13)
-1-10.3N-1 5/3
nL
N 1 -1z (26.11-14)
Vz
For--0 (26.11-15a)
For--0 (26.11-15b)
with subscriptℓin Equation (26.11-15a) and Equation (26.11-15b) should be taken ash,B,
AndL, where is the explanationh,B, AndLcan be seen in Article 26.3, and
n1 = fundamental natural frequency
Rℓ =Rhset--4.6n1h/Vz
© BSN 2020 120 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Rℓ =RBset--4.6n1B/Vz
Rℓ = RL set--15.4n1L/Vz
- = damping ratio, percent of critical damping (i.e. for 2 % use 0.02 in the equation)
z = average hourly wind speed (ft/s) (m/s) at heightzdetermined from

Equation 26.11-16:
-z---88 -
z -b - - - -V (26.11-16)
-33 - -60 -
-z--
In SI: z -b- -V
-10 -
withbAnd- are the constants listed in Table 26.9-1 andVis

basic wind speed in miles/h (m/s).
26.11.6 Rational analysis
In lieu of the procedures specified in Article 26.11.4 and Article 26.11.5, the determination
of the wind gust effect factor is permitted according to a rational analysis determined
according to recognized literature.
26.11.7 Restrictions
When the combination of wind gust effect factors and pressure coefficient (GCp), (GCpi), And
(GCpf) are given in the figures and tables, the wind gust effect factors should not be
determined separately.
26.12 Classification of closure
26.12.1 General
To determine the internal pressure coefficient, all buildings must be classified as

closed, partially closed, partially open, or open as described in Article 26.2.
26.12.2 Openings
A determination of the number of openings in the building envelope must be made to

determine the closure classification. To make this determination, each wall of the
building must be assumed to be a windward wall to consider the number of openings
present in relation to the enveloperemaining buildings.
26.12.3 Glass-mounted opening protection
Openings installed with glass in Risk Category II, III or IV buildings located in areas
prone to strong winds must be protected as required in this Article.
121 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
26.12.3.1 Windborne debris areas
Glazed openings shall be protected in accordance with Article 26.12.3.2 in the following
locations:
1. Within 1 mile (1.6 km) of the coastline the mean high water where the base wind
speed is equal to or greater than 130 mi/h (58 m/s), or
2. In areas where the base wind speed is equal to or greater than 140 mi/h (63 m/s).
For buildings and other structures with Risk Category II and buildings and other
structures with Risk Category III, except health care facilities, the area of windborne
debris must be based on the Indonesian Wind Map Book for Risk Category II. For
health care facilities in Risk Category III, windborne debris areas must be based on the
Indonesian Wind Map Book for Risk Category III. For buildings and structures in Risk
Category IV, the area of windborne debris must be based on the Indonesian Wind
Map Book for Risk Category IV. Risk Categories must be determined in accordance with
Article 1.5.
EXCEPTIONGlass that is above 60 ft (18.3 m) above the ground and above 30 ft (9.2 m) above
aggregate surface roofs, including roofs with gravel or stone ballast, that are at 1,500 ft (458 m)
from the building must be permitted without being protected.
26.12.3.2 Requirements for protection of glazed openings
Glass in buildings that requires protection must be protected with an impact protection
system or impact-resistant glass.
Protection systems and impact-resistant glass must be subjected to missile tests and cyclic
pressure difference tests in accordance with applicable ASTM E1996. Tests to prove
compliance with ASTM E1996 shall be in accordance with ASTM E1886. Impact resistant
glazing and impact protection systems must comply with the pass/fail criteria of Article 7, of
ASTM E1996 based on the missiles required by Table 3 or Table 4 of ASTM E1996. Glass on
panel garage doors androlling doorsshall undergo missile tests and cyclic pressure
difference tests in accordance with ANSI/DASMA 115 as appropriate.
Table 26.13-1 - Main wind force resisting systems and components and cladding
(all heights): internal pressure coefficient,-GC-, for closed
pi
buildings,
partially closed, partially open, and open buildings (walls and roofs)
Classification Criteria for classification Pressure Pressure coefficient
closure closure internal internal,-GCpi-
Closed building Aoless than the smallest 0.01Ag Currently − 0.18
or 4 ft2(0.37 m2) AndAoi/Agi≤0.2 − 0.18
Closed building Ao>1.1Aoifundo> smallest than 0.01Ag Tall − 0.55

part or 4 ft2(0.37 m2) AndAoi/Agi≤0.2 − 0.55
Open building Buildings that do not comply with the Currently − 0.18
part closed, partially closed, or open − 0.18
classifications
Open building Each wall is at least 80% open Ignored 0.00
NOTES
1. The plus and minus signs indicate pressure acting toward and away from the inner surface,
respectively.
© BSN 2020 122 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
2. Value (GCpi) should be used withqzorqhas required.

3. Two cases must be taken into account to determine the critical load requirements for the appropriate
conditions:
a. Positive value (GCpi) applied to all internal surfaces, or
b. Negative value (GCpi) appliedon all internal surfaces.
EXCEPTION Other test methods and/or performance criteria are permitted to be used if
Approved.
Glazing and impact protection systems in buildings and other structures classified as
Risk Category IV in accordance with Article 1.5 must meet the "increased protection"
from Table 3 ASTM E1996. Glazing and impact protection systems in all other structures
must meet the "basic protection" from Table 3 ASTM E1996.
26.12.4 Multiple classifications
If a building meets the definition of an "open" and "partially closed", then the building
should be classified as an "open" building.
26.13 Internal pressure coefficient
Internal pressure coefficient, (GCpi), must be determined from Table 26.13-1 based on
the building closure classification determined from Article 26.12.
26.13.1 Reduction factors for large buildings,Ri
For a partially enclosed building that has a large room without partitions, the internal
pressure coefficient, (GCpi), must be multiplied by the reduction factor,Rithe following:
Ri=1.0 or
- -
- -
- 1 -
Ri- 0.5-1- - -1.0 (26.13-1)
- Vi -
1-
- 22,800Aog -
- -
Where
Aog = total area of openings in the building envelope (walls and roof, in ft2); And
Vi = internal volume of a room without partitions, in ft3
26.14 Tornado restrictions
Tornadoes have not been considered in the wind load provisions.
This article lists consensus standards and other documents that should be considered part
of this standard to the extent referred to in this Article.
AAMA 512,Voluntary Specifications for Tornado Hazard Mitigating Fenestration

Products, American Architectural Manufacturers Association, 2011.
123 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Cited in:C26.14.4
ANSI A58.1,Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, American
National Standards Institute, 1982.
Cited in:Section C26.5.2
ASTM E1886,Standard test method for performance of exterior windows, curtain walls,
doors, and impact protective systems impacted by missile(s) and exposed to cyclic pressure
differentials, ASTM International, 2013. Cited in:Sections 26.12.3.2, C26.12, C26.14.4.
ASTM E1996,Standard specification for performance of exterior windows, curtain walls,

doors, and impact protective systems impacted by windborne debris in hurricanes, ASTM
International, 2014.
Cited in:Sections 26.12.3.2, C26.12, C26.14.4.
ANSI/DASMA 115,Standard Method for Testing Sectional Garage Doors: Determination

of Structural Performance under Missile Impact and Cyclic Wind Pressure, Door and
Access Systems Manufacturers Association International, 2005. Cited in:Section
26.12.3.2, C26.12.
ASTM E330,Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,

Doors, Skylights, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference, ASTM
International, 2014.
Cited in:Section C26.5.1
CAN/CSA A123.21,Standard test method for the dynamic wind uplift resistance of
membrane-roofing systems, CSA Group, 2014. Cited in:Section C26.5.1
ICC 500, ICC/NSSAStandard for the Design and Construction of Storm Shelters,
International Code Council and National Storm Shelter Association, 2014.
Cited in:Sections C26.14.1, C26.14.3, C26.14.
© BSN 2020 124 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
27 Wind loads on buildings: Main Wind Force Resisting Systems

(directed procedure)
27.1 Scope
27.1.1 Building type
This article is used to determine SPGAU wind loads on closed, partially closed and open
buildings from all heights using directional procedures.
Part 1 is applied to buildings of all heights where it is necessary to separate the wind
loads applied to the wall on the downwind side, the downwind side, and the building
side to account for the internal forces in the SPGAU structural components.
Part 2 applies to a special class of buildings categorized as closed simple diaphragm

buildings, as defined in Article 26.2, withh≤ 160 ft (48.8 m).
27.1.2 Conditions
Buildings whose design wind loads are determined according to this Article must meet all
of the following conditions:
1. The building in question is a building that has a regular shape as defined in Article
26.2, and
2. Buildings do not have response characteristics that make them experience wind
loading in a transverse direction, decay of wind vortices, instability due to rapid
movement or fluttering; or not located in a location where tunnel effects or
repeated blows as a result of obstructions on the side of the incoming wind require
special consideration.
27.1.3 Limitations
The provisions of this Article have taken into account the effects of load magnification
caused by wind gusts that resonate with vibrations in the wind direction of flexible
buildings. Buildings that do not meet the requirements of Article 27.1.2, or have
unusual shapes or response characteristics, shall be designed using recognized
literature addressing the effects of such wind loads or shall use the wind tunnel
procedures required in Article 31.
27.1.4 Protectors
There shall be no reduction in velocity pressure due to the installation of protective

barriers on buildings and other structures or by surface terrain features.
27.1.5 Minimum design wind load
The wind load used in SPGAU design for enclosed or partially enclosed buildings shall
not be less than 16 lb/ft2(0.77 kN/m2) multiplied by the area of the building walls and 8
lb/ft2(0.38 kN/m2) multiplied by the area of the building roof projected in a vertical
plane perpendicular to the direction
125 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
assumed wind. Wall and roof loads must be applied simultaneously. The design wind
force for open-air buildings shall be no less than 16 lb/ft2
(0.77 kN/m2) multiplied by the areaAf.
Part 1: Enclosed, partially enclosed and open buildings from all heights
NOTES Use Part 1 of Article 27 to determine the wind pressure at the SPGAU
closed, partially closed or open buildings with the general planning form, building height or roof
geometry in accordance with the drawings provided. This provision uses the "all heights"
traditional (directional procedure) by calculating wind pressure usingspecific wind pressure
equationwhich applies to every surface of the building.
Steps for determining wind loads at SPGAU for closed, partially closed, and open
buildings of all heights are provided in Table 27.2-1.
Table 27.2-1-Steps to determinewind loadSPGAU for closed, partially closed

and open buildings from all heights
Step 1:Determine the risk category of the building; see Table 1.5-1
Step 2:Determine the basic wind speed,V, for the appropriate risk category that applies;
see the Indonesian Wind Map Book.
Step 3:Determine the wind load parameters:
- Wind direction factor,Kd; see Article 26.6 and Table 26.6-1.
- Exposure category; see Article 26.7.
- topographic factors,Kzt; see Article 26.8 and Table 26.8-1.
- Land surface elevation factor,Ke; See Article 26.9
- Wind gust effect factor,G, orGf; see Article 26.11
- Classification of closure; see Article 26.12
- Internal pressure coefficient, (GCpi); see Article 26.13 and Table 26.13-1
Step 4:Determine the velocity pressure exposure coefficient,KzorKh; see Table 26.10.1 Step
5:Determine the velocity pressureqz, orqhEquation (26.10-1) Step 6:Determine the external
pressure coefficient,CporCN
- Figure 27.3.1 for flat, gable, shield, one-sided or sloping walls and roofs
mansards
- Figure 27.3-2 for dome roof
- Figure 27.3-3 for curved roof
- Figure 27.3.4 for one-sided sloping roof, open building
- Figure 27.3-5 for pitched roofs, open buildings

- Figure 27.3.6 for concave roof, open building
- Figure 27.3-7 for wind loads along the ridge in the case of unilaterally
sloping, pitched or concave roofs, open buildings
Step 7:Calculate wind pressure,p, on every surface of the building
- Equation (27.3-1) for rigid and flexible buildings
- Equation (27.3-2) for open buildings
© BSN 2020 126 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
27.2.1 Wind load parameters required in Article 26
The following wind load parameters shall be determined according to Article 26:
– Basic wind speed,V(Article 26.5)

– Wind direction factor,Kd(Article 26.6)
– Exposure categories (Article 26.7)
– Topographic factors,Kzt(Article 26.8)
– Land surface elevation factor,Ke; see Article 26.9
– Wind gust effect factor (Article 26.11)
– Classification of closure (Article 26.12)
– Internal pressure coefficient, (GCpi) (Article 26.13).
27.3 Wind loads: Main Wind Force Resisting Systems
27.3.1 Enclosed, rigid partially enclosed and flexible buildings
Design wind pressure for SPGAU of buildings at all heights in lb/ft2(N/m2) must be
determined by the following equation:
p=qGCp–qi(GCpi) (27.3-1)
with
q = qzfor walls on the downwind side measured at heightzabove the surface
land
q = qhfor walls on the windward side, side walls, and roofs are measured on
heighth
qi =qhfor the wall on the windward side, the side wall, the wall on the windward side, and
roofs of closed buildings, and to evaluate negative internal pressure in partially closed
buildings.
qi =qzto evaluate positive internal pressure in closed buildings
some if highzdefined as the level of the highest opening in a building that can influence
positive internal pressure. For buildings located in windborne debris areas, glass that is
not impact resistant or protected with impact resistant coverings, must be treated as
openings in accordance with Article 26.12.3. To calculate positive internal pressure,qi
conservatively can be calculated on the heighth(qi=qh)
G =wind gust-effect factors, see Article 26.11. For flexible buildings,Gf

determined according to Article 26.11.5 shall replaceG.
Cp = external pressure coefficient from Figures 27.3-1, 27.3-2 and 27.3-3
(GCpi) = internal pressure coefficient from Table 26.13-1
qAndqishall be calculated using the exposure specified in Article 26.7.3. Pressure must
be applied simultaneously to the walls on the downwind side and the downwind side of
the roof surface as specified in Figure 27.3-1, Figure 27.3-2 and Figure 27.3-3.
127 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
27.3.2 Open buildings with roofs that are free from one-sided slopes, pitched or
concave
The net design pressure for the SPGAU of an open-air building with a one-sided,
pitched or concave roof shall be determined by the following equation:
p=qhGCN (27.3-2)
with
qh= Velocity pressure is evaluated at the average roof heighthusing the exposure as defined in
Article 26.7.3 that results in the highest wind load for each wind direction at the location
G= gust-effect factor from Article 26.11

CN= The net pressure coefficient is determined from Figure 27.3-4 through Figure 27.3-7
net pressure coefficient,CN, incorporating contributions from both the top and bottom
surfaces. All load cases at any angle of roof slope should be investigated. The positive
and negative signs indicate pressure acting toward and away from the top surface of
the roof, respectively.
For free roofs with roof plane anglesθto a horizontal line of less than or equal to 5° and
containing a fascia panel, the fascia panel shall be considered as an inverted parapet.
The contribution of the loads on the fascia to the SPGAU load must be determined
using Article 27.3.5 withqptogether withqh.For open or partially closed buildings with
transverse frames and roofs with a slope of θ ≤ 45°, additional horizontal forces in the
longitudinal direction (parallel to the ridge) acting in combination with the roof loads
calculated in Article 27.3.3 shall be determined in accordance with Article 28.3.5 .
27.3.3 Console from roof
The positive external pressure towards the bottom surface of the roof console shall be
determined usingCp= 0.8 and combined with the top surface pressure determined from
Figure 27.3-1.
27.3.4 Parapets
Design wind pressure for parapet effect on SPGAU of rigid or flexible buildings with
flat, gable or shield roofs in lb/ft2(N/m2),must be determined by the following equation:
pp=qp(GCpn) (27.3-3)
with
pp = combined net pressure on the parapet due to combined net pressure from the surface
front and rear parapets. The positive (and negative) signs indicate the net pressure acting
toward (and away from) the front (exterior) side of the parapet
qp = pressure velocity evaluated at the top of the parapet =
(GCpn) combination of net pressure coefficients
= +1.5 for parapets from the windward side = –

1.0 for parapets from the windward side
© BSN 2020 128 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
27.3.5 Design wind load cases
SPGAU of buildings of all heights, the wind load of which has been determined based
on the provisions of this Article, must be designed for the wind load cases as specified
in Figure 27.3-8.
EXCEPTIONBuildings that meet the requirements of Article D1 in Appendix D only need to be

designed for Case 1 and Case 3 Figure 27.3.8.
Eccentricityefor rigid buildings it must be measured from the geometric center of the
building face and must be calculated for each main axis (eX,eY). Eccentricityefor flexible
buildings must be determined from the following equation and must be taken into
account for each main axis (eX,eY):
eQ-1.7Iz -gQQeQ- 2--gRR eR- 2

e- (27.3-4)
z -gQQ-2--gRR-
2
1-1.7I
with
eQ = eccentricityeas specified for rigid buildings in the Drawings
27.3-8.
eR = the distance between the center of elastic shear and the center of mass of each floor.
Iz,g ,Q,g , AndRshall be as defined in Article 26.11.

Q R
Sign of eccentricityemust be positive or negative, choose the one that causes the most harmful
load effects.
129 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Diagram
Roofmansards[NOTE 7]
Notation
B = horizontal dimensions of the building, measured perpendicular to the wind direction, in ft (m) =
L horizontal dimensions of the building, measured parallel to the wind direction, in ft (m)
h = average roof height, in ft (m), the height of the lower edge of the roof should be used ifϴ≤ 10
degrees
z = height above the ground, in ft
G (m) = wind gust influence factor
qz,qh=velocity pressure, in lb/ft2(N/m2), evaluated at their respective heights. θ = angle of
the roof plane from the horizontal, in degrees.
Figure 27.3-1 - Main Wind Force Resisting System, Part 1 (entire height):
external pressure coefficient,Cp,for closed buildings and
The building is partially covered by walls and roof
© BSN 2020 130 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Wall pressure coefficient,Cp

Surface L/B Cp Used with
The wall on the side where the wind comes Whole value 0.8 qz
0–1 - 0.5 qh
The wall on the windward side goes 2 - 0.3 qh
-4 - 0.2 qh
Edge wall Whole value - 0.7 qh
roof pressure coefficient,Cp, for use withqh
On the side the wind comes On the windward side go

Angle, θ (degrees) Angle, θ (degrees)
Wind direction h/L 10 15 20 25 30 35 45 ≥ 60c 10 15 ≥ 20
- 0.7 - 0.5 - 0.3 - 0.2 - 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.0a
Perpendicular - 0.3 - 0.5 - 0.6
-0.25 - 0.18 0.0a 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.01θ
to
- 0.9 - 0.7 - 0.4 - 0.3 - 0.2 - 0.2 0.0a
ridge - 0.5 - 0.5 - 0.6
0.5 - 0.18 - 0.18 0.0a 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.01θ
For
- 1.3b - 1.0 - 0.7 - 0.5 - 0.3 - 0.2 0.0a
θ-100 - 0.7 - 0.6 - 0.6
-1.0 - 0.18 - 0.18 - 0.18 0.0a 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.01θ
Distance horizontal of
Wind direction h/L Cp
the edge of the windward side comes
0 toh/2 h/2 up toh h - 0.9, -0.18

Perpendicular
-0.5 up to 2h - 0.9, -0.18
to - 0.5, -0.18
ridge > 2h - 0.3, -0.18
For
θ< 100
parallel
0 toh/2 - 1.3b, -0.18
ridge -1.0
for all >h/2 - 0.7, -0.18
θ
aValues are provided for interpolation purposes.
bThe values can be reduced linearly to the following appropriate areas:
cFor roof slopes greater than 80°, useCp=0.8
Area (ft2) Area (m2) Reduction Factor

≤ 100 ≤ 9.3 1.0
250 23.2 0.9
≥ 1000 ≥ 92.9 0.8
Notes:
1. Positive and negative signs indicate pressure acting towards and away from the surface.
2. Allowed linear interpolation for valuesL/B, h/L dan θ other than that shown. Interpolation should only be performed
between values with the same sign. If the values do not have the same sign, assume 0.0 for interpolation purposes.
3. If two values are listedCp, this indicates that the roof slope on the windward side experiences either positive or
negative wind pressure and the roof structure must be designed for both conditions. Interpolation for ratiosh/Lin this
case it should only be done between valuesCpof the same sign.
4. For a unilateral sloping roof, the entire surface of the roof is the surface on the incoming wind side or the outgoing wind side.
5. Refer to Figure 27.3-2 for a domed roof and Figure 27.3-3 for a curved roof.
6. For mansard roofs, the horizontal surface and the sloping surface on the windward side shall be treated as the surface on
the windward side of the table.
7. Except for SPGAU on roofs consisting of moment-resisting frames, the total horizontal shear force shall not be less than
that determined by ignoring wind forces on the roof surface.
Figure 27.3-1 (Continued) - Main Wind Force Resisting System, Part 1 (entire
height): external pressure coefficient,Cp,for closed buildings and
The building is partially covered by walls and roof
131 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Diagram
External Pressure Coefficient for a Dome with a Circular Bottom
Floor plan
Notation
f =Dome height, in ft (m)
hD=Height to base of dome, in ft (m) D=diameter,
in ft (m)
ϴ = Angle of the roof plane from the horizontal line, in degrees
Notes:
1. Two load cases should be
Mark
reviewed: Case A:Cpbetween A and B and between B and C shall be determined by linear interpolation along
curves in the dome parallel to the wind direction;
Case B The value of Cp must be a constant value of A for θ ≤ 250, and must be determined by linear interpolation of angle 250
to B and from B to C.
2. ValuesCpused withq-hD WherehD+fis the height of the top of the dome.
-f-
4.Cpis constant on the dome surface for circular curvatures perpendicular to the wind direction; for example, the arch
passes through B-B-B and all the arches are parallel to B-B-B.
5. For valuehD/Dbetween the graph curves listed, linear interpolation is permitted.
6. θ = 0 degrees at the base of the dome, θ = 900at the center point of the top of the dome.fmeasured from the base to the top of the dome.
7. The total horizontal shear force shall not be less than that determined by ignoring the wind force on the
roof surface.
8. For valuef/Dless than 0.05, use Figure 27.3-1.
Figure 27.3-2 - Main Wind Force Resisting System, Part 1 (all heights):
external pressure coefficient, Cp , for closed and partially enclosed
buildings and structures with domed roofs with circular bases
© BSN 2020 132 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
External Pressure Coefficient,Cp
Cp
High ratio
In a quarter Center In a quarter
Condition against the span,
windward side half the windward side goes
r
come
0 <r< 0.2 - 0.9 - 0.7 –r - 0.5
Roofs on elevated structures 0.2 ≤r< 0.3* 1.5r–0.3 - 0.7 –r - 0.5
0.3 ≤r≤ 0.6 2.75r –0.7 - 0.7 -r - 0.5
The roof is at ground level 0 <r≤ 0.6 1.4r - 0.7 -r - 0.5
* If the height-to-span ratio is 0.2 ≤ r ≤ 0.3, the alternative coefficient is (6r–2.1) should be used to quarter the windward
side.
Notes:
1. The values listed are to determine the average load on the main wind force resisting system.
3. For wind direction parallel to the roof curvature axis, use the pressure coefficient from Figure 27.3-1 with wind
direction parallel to the peak.
4. For building components and cladding: (1) At the roof perimeter, use the external pressure coefficients in Figure
30.3-2A, B and C with θ based on the base line slope and (2) for the remaining roof area, use the external pressure
coefficients from this table multiplied by 1.2.
Figure 27.3-3 - Main Wind Force Resisting System and Components and Clading,
Part 1 (all altitudes): external pressure coefficient,Cp,for buildings
closed and partially covered buildings and structures with curved roofs
133 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
L L
0.5L 0.5L 0.5L 0.5L
CNW CNW
CNL CNL
Wind direction Direction Ang n
θ θ
h h
γ= 0° γ= 180°
Notation
L :roof dimensions in the horizontal direction, measured along the wind direction, ft. (m):
h average roof height, ft. (m)
- : wind direction, in degrees
θ : the angle of the roof to the horizontal plane, in degrees
Net Pressure Coefficient,CN

Wind direction,-= 00 Wind direction,-= 1800
Corner
Case Windflow is not Windflow Windflow is not Windflow
Roof
θ
burden hindered hindered hindered hindered
CNW CNL CNW CNL CNW CNL CNW CNL
A 1,2 0.3 - 0.5 - 1.2 1,2 0.3 - 0.5 - 1.2
00
B - 1.1 - 0.1 - 1.1 - 0.6 - 1.1 - 0.1 - 1.1 - 0.6
A - 0.6 -1 -1 - 1.5 0.9 1.5 - 0.2 - 1.2
7.50
B - 1.4 0 - 1.7 - 0.8 1.6 0.3 0.8 - 0.3
A - 0.9 - 1.3 - 1.1 - 1.5 1.3 1.6 0.4 - 1.1
150
B - 1.9 0 - 2.1 - 0.6 1.8 0.6 1,2 - 0.3
A - 1.5 - 1.6 - 1.5 - 1.7 1.7 1.8 0.5 -1
22.50
B - 2.4 - 0.3 - 2.3 - 0.9 2,2 0.7 1.3 0
A - 1.8 - 1.8 - 1.5 - 1.8 2.1 2.1 0.6 -1
300
B - 2.5 - 0.5 - 2.3 - 1.1 2.6 1 1.6 0.1
A - 1.8 - 1.8 - 1.5 - 1.8 2.1 2,2 0.7 - 0.9
37.50
B - 2.4 - 0.6 - 2.2 - 1.1 2.7 1.1 1.9 0.3
A - 1.6 - 1.8 - 1.3 - 1.8 2,2 2.5 0.8 - 0.9
450
B - 2.3 - 0.7 - 1.9 - 1.2 2.6 1.4 2.1 0.4
Notes:
1.CNWAndCNLshows the net pressure (contribution from the top and bottom surfaces) of half of the roof
surface for the windward side and the windward side.
2. Unobstructed wind flow indicates relatively unobstructed wind flow with resistance less than or
equal to 50%. Obstructed wind flow indicates an object under the roof that obstructs wind flow
(resistance > 50 %).
3. For valueθbetween 7.5° and 45°, linear interpolation is permitted. For valueθ< 7.5° is used as a load
coefficient for 0°.
5. All load cases for each corner of the roof must be checked.
Figure 27.3-4 - Main Wind Force Resisting System, Part 1 (0.25≤h/L≤1.0): net
pressure coefficient,CN, for open buildings with sloping roofs
unilateral without walls, θ≤45°,--0o , 180°)
© BSN 2020 134 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Diagram
CNW CNL
Wind direction
θ θ
h
γ= 0°
Notation
Wind direction,-= 00, 1800

Roof angle
Load case Wind flow is not obstructed The wind flow is blocked
Θ
CNW CNL CNW CNL
A 1.1 - 0.3 - 1.6 -1
7.50
B 0.2 - 1.2 - 0.9 - 1.7
A 1.1 - 0.4 - 1.2 -1
150
B 0.1 - 1.1 - 0.6 - 1.6
A 1.1 0.1 - 1.2 - 1.2
22.50
B - 0.1 - 0.8 - 0.8 - 1.7
A 1.3 0.3 - 0.7 - 0.7
300
B - 0.1 - 0.9 - 0.2 - 1.1
A 1.3 0.6 - 0.6 - 0.6
37.50
B - 0.2 - 0.6 - 0.3 - 0.9
A 1.1 0.9 - 0.5 - 0.5
450
B - 0.3 - 0.5 - 0.3 - 0.7
Notes:
2. Unobstructed wind flow is indicated by relatively unobstructed wind direction obstruction ≤ 50%.
Unobstructed wind flow is indicated by objects under the roof that block the wind direction (> 50%
obstruction).
3. For valueθbetween 7.50and 450, linear interpolation is permitted. For valueθ< 7.50One-sided sloping
roof load coefficient is used.
4. Positive and negative signs indicate pressure acting towards and away from the upper roof surface.
pressure coefficient,CN,for open buildings with gable roofs
normal without walls, θ≤45°,--0o , 180°
135 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Diagram
CNW CNL
FigAhranhgin
θ θ
h
γ==00°°
Notation

Wind direction,-= 00, 1800
Roof angle
Load case Wind flow is not obstructed The wind flow is blocked
Θ
CNW CNL CNW CNL
A - 1.1 0.3 - 1.6 - 0.5
7.50
B - 0.2 1,2 - 0.9 - 0.8
A - 1.1 0.4 - 1.2 - 0.5
150
B 0.1 1.1 - 0.6 - 0.8
A - 1.1 - 0.1 - 1.2 - 0.6
22.50
B - 0.1 0.8 - 0.8 - 0.8
A - 1.3 - 0.3 - 1.4 - 0.4
300
B - 0.1 0.9 - 0.2 - 0.5
A - 1.3 - 0.6 - 1.4 - 0.3
37.50
B 0.2 0.6 - 0.3 - 0.4
A - 1.1 - 0.9 - 1.2 - 0.3
450
B 0.3 0.5 - 0.3 - 0.4
Notes
2. Unobstructed wind flow is indicated by relatively unobstructed wind direction ≤ 50%. Unobstructed wind
flow is indicated by objects under the roof that impede wind flow
(> 50 % resistance).
3. For valueθbetween 7.5° and 45°, linear interpolation is permitted. For valueθ< 7.5° is used as a one-
sided sloping roof load coefficient.
pressure coefficient,CN,for open buildings with gable roofs
inverted without walls, θ≤45°, --0o , 180°
© BSN 2020 136 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Diagram
Distance from the windward edge

Unilateral tilt PelaBnearbubung comes Saddle
erebtkCaulnikg
L L L
h h h
The distance from the edge of the wind comes

The distance from the edge of the wind comes
θ θ θ θ
Wind direction Wind direction Wind direction
γ= 90° γ= 90° γ= 90°
Notation
L =Roof dimensions in the horizontal direction are measured along the wind direction, ft. (m)
h = average roof height, ft. (m). See Figure 27.3-4, 27.3-5 or 27.3-6 for a graphical depiction of
this dimension.


Horizontal distance Wind flow is not Wind flow
from the edge on the side Roof angleθ Load case hindered hindered
the wind comes CN CN
All shapes A - 0.8 - 1.2
<h
θ ≤450 B 0.8 0.5
>h, < 2h
θ ≤450 B 0.5 0.5
> 2h
θ ≤450 B 0.3 0.3
Notes
1.CNshows the net pressure (contribution from the top and bottom surfaces).
2. Unobstructed wind flow is indicated by relatively unobstructed wind direction obstruction ≤ 50%.
Unobstructed wind flow is indicated by objects under the roof that impede wind flow (> 50%
obstruction).
5. For unilateral sloping roofs withθ< 50, markCNused in cases with-= 00And
0.05 less than or equal toh/Lless than or equal to 0.25. See Figure 27.3-4 for valuesh/Lother.
pressure coefficient,CN,for open buildings with no roof
wall, θ≤45°, --90o , 270°
137 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Notation
PWX,PWY = design pressure on the face of the incoming wind side acting on the main axisxAndy. =
PLX,PLY design pressure on the upwind side face acting on the main axisxAndy. = eccentricity for
e(ex,ey) the principal axisx,yfrom the structure.
mQ = torque moment per unit height acting on a vertical axis of the building.
Case 1 The full pressure of the design wind acting on the projected area perpendicular to each
principal axis of the structure, is considered separately at each principal axis.
Case 2 Three-quarters of the design wind pressure acting on the projected area perpendicular to
each principal axis of the structure together with the torsional moments as shown, is
considered separately for each principal axis.
Case 3 The wind loading is as defined in Case 1, but considered acting at 75% of the specified value.
Case 4 The wind loading is as defined in Case 2, but considered acting at 75% of the specified value.
Notes:
1. The design wind pressure for the incoming wind side and the outgoing wind side must be determined
in accordance with the provisions of Articles 27.3.1 and 27.3.2 which can be used for all building
heights.
2. Diagram showing the building plan.
Figure 27.3-8 - Main Wind Force Resisting System, Part 1 (entire

height): design wind load case
© BSN 2020 138 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Part 2: Closed simple diaphragm building

withh≤ 160 ft (48.8 m)
Notes:Part 2 of Article 27 is a simplified method for determining wind pressure for SPGAU
closed buildings, simple diaphragm buildings with highhis ≤ 160 ft (48.8 m). Wind pressure is
obtaineddirectly from the table. Buildings can be of any plan shape and roof geometry that
matches the specified drawings. This method is a simplification of the "all heights" traditional
(referral procedures) contained in Part 1 of Article 27.
27.4.1 Design procedures
The procedure required herein is applied to determine the SPGAU wind load of a closed
simple diaphragm building, as defined in Article 26.2, with an average roof heighth≤
160 ft (48.8 m). The steps required for determining the SPGAU wind load in closed
simple diaphragm buildings are shown in Table 27.4-1.
27.4.2 Conditions
In addition to the requirements in Article 27.1.2, buildings whose design wind loads are
determined according to this Article must meet all of the following conditions for Class
1 or Class 2 Buildings (see Figure 27.4-1):
Class 1 buildings:
1. The building must be a closed simple diaphragm building as defined in Article 26.2.
2. Buildings must have an average roof heighth≤ 60 ft (18.3 m).

3. RatioL/Bmust not be less than 0.2 or more than 5.0 (0.2 ≤L/B≤ 5.0).
Class 2 buildings:
1. The building must be a closed simple diaphragm building as defined in Article 26.2.
2. Buildings must have an average roof height of 60 ft <h≤ 160 ft (18.3 m < h ≤ 48.8 m).
3. RatioL/Bmust not be less than 0.5 or more than 2.0 (0.5 ≤L/B≤ 2.0).
4. The fundamental natural frequency (Hertz) of the building must not be less than 75/
h(246.06/h), withhin ft (m).
27.4.3 Wind load parameters specified in Article 26
See Article 26 for determination of Basic Wind SpeedV(Article 26.5), exposure

categories (Article 26.7) and topographic factorsKzt(Article 26.10).
27.4.4 Topographic effects
The wind pressure determined from this Article must be multiplied byKztas determined
from Article 26.10 using one valueKztfor buildings calculated at 0.33h. Alternatively, it is
permitted to include Tables 27.5-1 and
Table 27.5-2 with wind speed equal to KztwithKztdetermined
at a height of 0.33h.
139 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
27.4.5 Diaphragm flexibility
The design procedures set forth herein apply to buildings having rigid or flexible
diaphragms. The structural analysis must take into account the relative stiffness of the
diaphragm and the vertical elements of the SPGAU.
Diaphragms made of wooden panels can be idealized as flexible. Diaphragms made of

metal decks without topcoats, concrete-filled metal decks and concrete slabs, each
having a span-to-depth ratio of 2 or less, are permitted to be idealized as rigid for wind
load calculations.
Table 27.4-1 - Steps to determine the SPGAU wind force of a building

simple, closed, diaphragm buildingh≤ 160 ft. (48.8m)
Step 1:Determine the risk category of the building; see Table 1.5-1 Step 2:Determine
the basic wind speed,V,for the appropriate risk category; Look
Indonesian Wind Map Book.
- Exposure category B, C or D; see Article 26.7.
- Topographic factors,Kzt; see Article 26.8 and Figure 26.8-1
- Classification of closure; see Article 26.12
Step 4:Go to Table 27.5-1 to determine the net pressure on the walls above and at the base of
the building,ph,p0.
Step 5:Go to Table 27.5-2 to determine the net roof pressure,pz. Step 6:Determine
topographic factors,Kzt, and use factors for wall and roof pressures (if appropriate), see
Article 26.8
Step 7:Apply loads to walls and roof simultaneously.
27.5.1 Wall and roof surfaces: Class 1 and Class 2 buildings
The net wind pressure for wall and roof surfaces shall be determined from Tables
27.5-1 and 27.5-2, respectively, for the appropriate exposure categories as determined
by Article 26.7.
For Class 1 buildings with a valueL/Bless than 0.5, use tabulated air pressure forL/B=
0.5. For Class 1 buildings with a valueL/B greater than 2.0, use tabulated air pressure
forL/B=2.0.
Net wall pressure shall be applied to the projected area of the building wall in the
direction of the wind, and exterior side wall pressure shall be applied to the projected
area of the building wall perpendicular to the direction of the outward acting wind in
accordance with Section 3 of Note Table 27.5-1, together with the pressure roof from
Table 27.5-2 as shown in Figure 27.5-1.
When two load cases are shown in a roof pressure table, the effect of each load case
must be investigated separately. The SPGAU in each direction must be designed for the
wind load cases as specified in Figure 27.3-8.
EXCEPTION The torsional load cases in Figure 27.3-8 (Case 2 and Case 4) do not
needs to be taken into account for buildings that meet the requirements of Appendix D.
27.5.2 Parapets
© BSN 2020 140 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
The effect of horizontal wind forces applied to all vertical surfaces of the roof parapet
for SPGAU design shall be based on the application of an additional net horizontal wind
pressure applied to the projected area of the parapet surface equal to 2.25 times the
wall pressure tabulated in Table 27.5-1 forL/B=1.0. The net pressure is determined to
calculate the parapet loading on the windward side and the windward side on the
surface of the building on the windward side and the windward side. Parapet pressures
should be applied in conjunction with the required wall and roof pressures shown in
the table in Figure 27.5-2. Heighthused in Table 27.5-1 to determine the parapet
pressure should be high relative to the top of the parapet as shown in Figure 27.5-2
(useh=hp).
27.5.3 Console from roof
The effect of vertical wind loads on each roof console shall be based on the application
of a positive wind pressure at the bottom of the incident wind console equal to 75 % of
the roof edge pressure from Table 27.5-2 for Zone 1 or Zone 3 as appropriate. This
pressure should be applied only to the incoming wind roof console and should be
applied simultaneously with other tabulated wall and roof pressures as shown in Figure
27.5-3.
27.6 Consensus standards and other referenced documents
This article does not refer to consensus standards or any other documents considered
to be part of this Standard.
141 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Diagram
0.2L≤B≤ 5L
Floor plan
Average roof height
h60 ft. (h≤ 18.3
Elevation
Class 1 Building
0.5L≤B≤ 2L
Floor plan
Average roof height
h=60 ft – 160 ft. (h≤ 18.3m - 48.8m)
Elevation
Class 2 Building
Notes
B=The horizontal dimensions of a building, in ft (m), are measured perpendicular to the wind direction L=The
horizontal dimensions of a building, in ft (m), are measured parallel to the wind direction
h=Average roof height, in ft (m), except that heighteaveshould be used for ϴ ≤ 10 degrees
Notes
The roof shape can be flat, gable,mansardsor shield
Figure 27.4-1-Main Wind Force Resisting Systems, Part 2 [p≤160 ft (h≤

48.8m)]:building class for diaphragm buildings
simple closed (building geometry requirements)
© BSN 2020 142 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Diagram See Figure 27.5-2

for wind pressure
parapet Roof pressure
See Table 27.5-2
Average roof height
Direction
wind
Wall pressure
See Table 27.5-1
Floor plan
Notes
For air pressure applications, See Tables 27.5-1 and 27.5-2
Figure 27.5-1 - Main Wind Force Resisting System, Part 2 [h≤160 ft (h≤48.8
m)]: closed simple diaphragm buildings, wind pressure, walls and
roof
Diagram
Additional load on SPGAU from
pp
all parapets and
parapet surface
Average roof height
hp
phpressure
wall of
Table 27.6-1
on
heighth h
pp= 2.25 times the pressure

determined from Table 27.6-1
for the height measured to the
top of the parapet (hp)
Notes
For parapet wind load applications, See Table 27.5-1
m)]: closed simple diaphragm building, parapet wind load
143 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Diagram Applicable roof edge

pressures from Table Zone 1
or 3 poh=0.75 xp1orp3which can be applied, works as
an additional leaving wind load (positive
p1orp3
pressure) on the negative pressure of the roof
edge as shown in the figure
Wind direction
poh
Notes
For Console Roof Wind Load applications, See Table 27.5-1
Figure 27.5-3 - Main Wind Force Resisting System, Part 2: building structure
closed simple diaphragm, console roof wind load
Table 27.5-1 - Main Wind Force Resisting Systems, Part 2 [h≤ 160 ft (h≤
48.8m)]: simple diaphragm building closed wall wind pressure
Parameters for wall pressure applications
Wind
Floor plan Wind pressure Elevation
Notation:
L = plan dimensions of buildings parallel to the wind direction, ft. (m). =
B dimensions of the building plan perpendicular to the wind, ft. (m). =
h average roof height, ft.(m).
ph,p0= net wall pressure during wind blowing at the top and bottom of the building, psf (kN/m2)
Notes for Wind Pressure Table:

1. From the table for each Exposure (B, C or D)V,L/BAndh, determineph(top number) andP0(bottom number) horizontal
wind net wall pressure.
2. The external pressure of the side wall must be uniform along the surface of the wall working outwards and taken as
54% of the pressurephwhich is tabulated for 0.2 ≤L/B≤ 1.0 and 64% of pressurephtabulated for 2.0 ≤ L/B≤ 5.0. Linear
interpolation may be used for 1.0 <L/B< 2.0. The external pressure of the side wall does not include the effects of
internal pressure.
3. Apply the net wind wall pressure as illustrated above to the projected area of the building wall in the wind direction
and apply the external side wall pressure to the projected area of the building wall perpendicular to the wind
direction, together with the roof pressure from Table 27.5-2
4. The tabulated net wall pressure distribution between the wall faces on the downwind side and the downwind side must
be based on a linear distribution of total net pressure with building height as shown in the figure above and the
external wall pressure on the downwind side is assumed to be evenly distributed along the wall surface at the
windward side working outwards at 38% ofphfor 0.2 ≤L/B≤ 1.0 and 27% ofphfor 2.0 ≤L/B≤ 5.0. Linear interpolation
may be used for 1.0 <L/B< 2.0. The remaining net pressure must be applied to the wall on the downwind side as
external wall pressure acting toward the wall surface. The wall pressure on the windward side and on the windward
side does not take into account the effects of internal pressure.
5. Interpolation between the values of is allowedV,hAndL/B.
6. 1.0 ft = 0.3048 m; 1.0 lb/ft2= 0.0479 kN/m2.
© BSN 2020 144 of 302

Table 27.5-1 (Continued) - Main Wind Force Resisting Systems, Part 2 [h≤ 160 ft (h≤ 48.8 m)]:
simple diaphragm building closed wall wind pressure
Exposure B
145 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
"Copyright of the National Standardization Agency, a copy of this standard is made for Sub KT 91-01-S4 Materials, Science, Structure & Constr
Exposure C
© BSN 2020
SNI 1727:2020
146 of 302
"Copyright of the National Standardization Agency, a copy of this standard is made for Sub KT 91-01-S4 Materials, Science, Structure & Bangu Construction
"Copyright of the National Standardization Agency, a copy of this standard is made for Sub KT 91-01-S4 Materials, Science, Structure & Building Construction
SNI 1727:2020
147 of 302
D exposure
SNI 1727:2020
Table 27.5-2 - Main Wind Force Resisting Systems, Part 2 [h≤160 ft (h≤
48.8m)]: simple diaphragm closed roof wind pressure building
Notes for roof pressure table:
1. From the table for Exposure C,V,hand the slope of the roof, determine the roof pressurephfor each roof zone shown in
the drawing for the applicable roof shape. For other exposures B or D, multiply the pressure from the table by the
appropriate exposure adjustment factor as determined from the figure below.
2. When two load cases are presented, both load cases should be investigated. Load case 2 is required to check the
maximum overturning moment in the building from the displayed roof pressure.
3. Apply net wind wall pressure along the projected area of the building wall to the wind direction and exterior side wall
pressure applied to the projected area of the building wall perpendicular to the wind direction acting outward,
along with the roof pressure from Table 27.6-2.
4. The zero values shown in the table are for the flat roof case, provided for interpolation purposes.
5. Allowed interpolation betweenV,hand roof slope.
6. 1.0 ft = 0.3048 m; 1.0 lb/ft2= 0.0479 kN/m2.
Exposure adjustment factors, exposure B and D
D exposure
Exposure B
Building height h (ft.)
Exposure adjustment factor
© BSN 2020 148 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Table 27.5-2 (Continued) - Main Wind Force Resisting Systems, Part 2 [h≤ 160 ft (h
≤ 48.8m)]: simple closed diaphragm building roof wind pressure
Parameters for roof pressure applications
Flat Roof
(θ≤ 10o)
Wind
Gable Roof
Wind
Wind
Shield Roof
Wind
Wind
Wind
Sloping Roof
Wind
Wind
Mansard Roof
Wind Wind
149 of 302
simple diaphragm buildings covered by roof wind pressure
Exposure C:h=140 – 160 ft,V=110-120 mi/h
© BSN 2020
SNI 1727:2020
150 of 302
151 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
"Copyright of the National Standardization Agency, a copy of this standard is made for Sub KT 91-01-S4 Materials, Science, Structure & Const
m)]:
© BSN 2020
SNI 1727:2020
152 of 302
48.8m)]:
153 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
"Copyright of the National Standardization Agency, a copy of this standard is made for Sub KT 91-01-S4 Materials, Science, Structure & K
m)]:
© BSN 2020
SNI 1727:2020
154 of 302
m)]:
155 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
"Copyright of the National Standardization Agency, a copy of this standard is made for Sub KT 91-01-S4 Materials, Science, Structure & Cons
© BSN 2020
SNI 1727:2020
156 of 302
m)]:
157 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
m)]:
© BSN 2020
SNI 1727:2020
158 of 302
m)]:
159 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
48.8m)]:
© BSN 2020
SNI 1727:2020
160 of 302
m)]:
161 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
48.8m)]:
© BSN 2020
SNI 1727:2020
162 of 302
"Copyright of the National Standardization Agency, a copy of this standard is made for Sub KT 91-01-S4 Materials, Science, Structure
48.8m)]:
163 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Table 27.5-2 (Continued) - Main Wind Force Resisting Systems, Part 2 [h≤ 160 ft
(h≤ 48.8 m)]:
© BSN 2020
exposure c:h=20 – 40 ft,v=160-200 mi/h
SNI 1727:2020
164 of 302
Exposure C:h=15ft,V=110-120 mi/h
165 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
"Copyright of the National Standardization Agency, a copy of this standard is made for Sub KT 91-01-S4 Materials, Science, Structure & Building Construction, and t
© BSN 2020
SNI 1727:2020
166 of 302
"Copyright of the National Standardization Agency, a copy of this standard is made for Sub KT 91-01-S4 Materials, Science, Structure & Building Construction, and not
167 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
"Copyright of the National Standardization Agency, a copy of this standard is made for Sub KT 91-01-S4 Materials, Science, Structure & Building Construction, and ti
SNI 1727:2020
28 Wind loads on buildings: SPGAU (envelope procedure)
28.1 Scope
This article is used to determine the SPGAU wind load on low-rise buildings using the
Envelope Procedure.
Part 1 is applied to all low-rise buildings, the wind load acting on the walls needs to be
separated as incoming wind, outgoing wind, and the side walls of the building to obtain
the appropriate amount of internal force for the SPGAU structural components.
Part 2 applies to a special class of low-rise buildings designed as closed simple

diaphragm buildings as defined in Article 26.2.
28.1.2 Conditions
Design wind loads under this Article shall be applied to buildings that meet all of the
following conditions:
1. A building is a building with a regular shape as defined in Article 26.2.
2. Buildings that do not have response characteristics so that they experience

transverse wind loads, wind vortices, instability due to vibration or irregular
movement, or are not located in locations where channel effects or repeated
blowing as a result of obstructions on the downwind side require consideration.
special.
28.1.3 Limitations
The provisions of this article consider the effect of increasing loads caused by wind
gusts that resonate with wind vibrations along flexible buildings. Buildings that do not
meet the requirements of Article 28.1.2, or have unusual shapes or response
characteristics must be designed using recognized literature and have data such as
wind load effects, or must use the Wind Tunnel Procedures required in Article 31.
28.1.4 Protectors
There is no necessary reduction in velocity stress due to the apparent shielding provided by buildings
and other structures or terrain features.
Part 1: Enclosed and partially enclosed low-rise buildings

NOTES Use Part 1 of Article 28 to determine the wind pressure at the SPGAU
fromlow-rise buildingsclosed, partially closed or open having a flat, gable or shield roof. This
provision utilizes the envelope procedure by calculating the wind pressure fromspecific equation
which applies to every surface of the building. For building shapes and heights where these
provisions apply, this method generally produces the lowest wind pressures of all the analysis
methods specified in this standard.
© BSN 2020 168 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
The steps required to determine the SPGAU wind load on low-rise buildings are shown
in Table 28.2-1.
Table 28.2-1 - Steps to determine the wind load on a building's SPGAU

low-rise building
Step 1:Determine the building risk category, see Table 1.5-1.
Step 2:Determine the basic wind speed,V, for the appropriate risk category;

- Wind direction factor,Kd, see Article 26.6 and Table 26.6-1.
- topographic factors,Kzt; see Article 26.8 and Figure 26.8-1.
- Land surface elevation factor,Ke; see Article 26.9 and Table 26.9-1.
- Classification of closure, see Article 26.12.
- Internal pressure coefficient, (GCpi); see Article 26.13 and Table 26.13-1.
Step 4:Determine the velocity pressure exposure coefficient,KzorKh, see Table 26.10-1.
Step 5:Determine the velocity pressure,qzorqh, Equation 26.10-1.
Step 6:Determine the external pressure coefficient, (GCp), by using

Figure 28.3-1 for flat and gable roofs.
Notes:See Explanation Figure C28.3-2 for guidance on roof shields.
Step 7:Calculate wind pressure,p, from Equation 28.3-1
– Basic wind speedV(Article 26.5).

– Wind direction factorKd(Article 26.6).
– Exposure categories (Article 26.7).
– Topographic factorsKzt(Article 26.8).
– Land surface elevation factor,Ke(Article 26.9).
– Velocity pressure exposure coefficient,KzorKh(Article 26.10).
– Classification of closure (Article 26.12).
– Internal pressure coefficient (GCpi) (Article 26.13).
28.3.1 Design wind pressure for low-rise buildings
The design wind pressure for SPGAU of low-rise buildings should be determined by the
following equation:
p=qh[(GCpf) – (GCpi)] (lb/ft2) (28.3-1)
p=qh[(GCpf) – (GCpi)] (N/m2) (28.3-1.si)
169 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
with
qh = Velocity pressure is measured at the average roof heighthas specified in Article 26.3
(GCpf) = external pressure coefficient from Figure 28.3-1; and

(GCpi) = internal pressure coefficient from Table 26.13-1.
© BSN 2020 170 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Basic load case

Diagram
Direction
Wind
Corners on Sides
The Wind Comes
Corners on Sides
The wind comes
Wind direction
Corners on Sides
Direction
The wind comes
Wind
Corners on Sides
The Wind Comes
Wind direction
Load Case A
Direction
Wind
Corners on Sides
The Wind Comes
Wind direction
Corners on Sides Corners on Sides

The Wind Comes The Wind Comes
Wind direction
Wind direction
Corners on Sides
The Wind Comes
Notation
a : 10 percent of the smallest horizontal dimension or 0.4h, the smallest is chosen, but not less than 4 % of the dimensions
smallest horizontal or 3 ft (0.9 m). Load Case B
EXCEPTION For buildings with-= 0oto 7oand the smallest horizontal dimension is larger
of 300 ft (90 m), dimensionsamust be limited to a maximum0.8h.
h: Average roof height, in feet (meters) except for-≤ 100The height of the lowest part of the roof is used.
-: The angle of the roof plane to the horizontal, in degrees.
Figure 28.3-1 - Main Wind Force Resisting System, Part 1 [h≤ 60 ft. (h≤
18.3m)]: external pressure coefficient, (GCpf), closed buildings and
partially covered walls and low-rise roof
171 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
LOAD CASE A
Building Surface
Roof angle-(degrees) 1 2 3 4 1E 2E 3E 4E
0-5 0.40 - 0.69 - 0.37 - 0.29 0.61 - 1.07 - 0.53 - 0.43
20 0.53 - 0.69 - 0.48 - 0.43 0.80 - 1.07 - 0.69 - 0.64
30-45 0.56 0.21 - 0.43 - 0.37 0.69 0.27 - 0.53 - 0.48
90 0.56 0.56 - 0.37 - 0.37 0.69 0.69 - 0.48 - 0.48
LOAD CASE B
Building Surface
Roof Corner-
(degrees)
1 2 3 4 5 6 1E 2E 3E 4E 5E 6E
0-90 - 0.45 -0.69 -0.37 -0.45 0.40 -0.29 -0.48 -1.07 -0.53 -0.48 0.61 -0.43
Notes:
2. For values-other than those shown, it is permitted to use linear interpolation.
3. Buildings must be designed for all wind directions using the 8 loading patterns shown. This loading pattern is
applied to each corner of the building as a reference angle.
4. The combination of external and internal pressures (see Table 26.11-1) should be evaluated when necessary to obtain
the most severe impact loads.
5. For the torsional load case shown below, the pressure in the zones marked with “T” (1T, 2T, 3T, 4T, 5T, 6T) shall be 25
% of the full design wind pressure (zones 1, 2, 3 , 4, 5, 6).
EXCEPTION:One-story building withhless than or equal to 30 ft (9.1 m), buildings of two stories or less consist of
light frame construction, and buildings of two stories or less designed with flexible diaphragms do not need to be
designed for torsional load cases.
Torque loads must be applied to all eight basic load patterns using the figure below applied to each Reference
Angle (Angle On The Windward Side).
6. For SPGAU building design purposes, the total horizontal shear force must not be less than that determined by
ignoring wind loads on the roof.
EXCEPTION:This provision does not apply to buildings that use moment frames for SPGAU.
7. For flat roofs, use-= 00and the location of the boundary elements for zone 2/3 and zone 2E/3E in the middle of the width of
the building.
8. Roof pressure coefficient (GCpf), if negative in Zones 2 and 2E, must be applied in Zones 2/2E for a distance from the edge of
the roof equal to 0.5 times the horizontal dimension of the building parallel to the direction of the SPGAU being designed or
2.5 times the height of the lowest part of the roof at the wall on the side where the wind comes, choose the smallest; the
remainder from Zone 2/2E to the ridge line must use the coefficient (GCpf) for Zone 3/3E.
Torsional load cases
Case A Torque Case B Torque
Directional range
Directional range
wind
wind
Transverse Direction Longitudinal Direction
Figure 28.3-1 (Continued) - Main Wind Force Resisting System, Part 1 [h≤60 ft
(h≤18.3 m)]: external pressure coefficient, (GCpf),for buildings
closed and partially covered low-rise walls and roofs
© BSN 2020 172 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Diagram
n=5
Wind direction
Notation
B=Width of the building perpendicular to the ridge, in ft (m)

As=The effective solid area of the end wall, namely the projected area of each part of the end wall
exposed to wind.
AE=The total area of end walls for an equivalent enclosed building. n=
The number of frames cannot be taken less thann=3
Figure 28.3-2 - Horizontal wind loads in open or open buildings

partially covered with cross trusses and gable roof: definition
geometric terminology
28.3.1.1 External pressure coefficient (GCpf)
Combination of wind gust effect factor and external pressure coefficient for low-rise
buildings, (GCpf), cannot be separated.
28.3.2 Parapets
The design wind pressure for the parapet effect on SPGAU of low-rise buildings with
flat, gable or shield roofs should be determined by the following equation:
pp=qp(GCpn) (lb/ft2) (28.3-2)
pp=qp(GCpn) (N/m2) (28.3-2.si)

with
pp = combined net pressure on the parapet due to the combination of net pressures from
front and rear parapet surfaces. Positive (and negative) signs indicate net pressure
acting toward (and away from) the front (exterior) side of the parapet.
qp = the velocity pressure is evaluated at the top of the parapet; And
173 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
(GCpn) = combined net pressure coefficient = +1.5
for parapet on the downwind side = –1.0 for
parapet on the downwind side
28.3.3 Console roof
The positive external pressure on the lower surface of the console roof on the
downwind side shall be determined usingGCp=0.7 in combination with the top surface
pressure determined using Figure 28.3-1.
The wind load used in the SPGAU design for closed or partially closed buildings must
not be less than 16 lb/ft2(0.77 kN/m2) multiplied by the area of the building walls and 8
lb/ft2(0.38 kN/m2) multiplied by the roof area of the building projected into a vertical
plane perpendicular to the assumed wind direction.
28.3.5 Horizontal wind loads in open or partially closed buildings with transverse
frames and gable roofs
The horizontal pressure in the longitudinal direction (parallel to the ridge) acting in
combination with the roof load calculated in Article 27.4.3 for open or partially closed
buildings with transverse frames and gable roofs (θ < 45°) shall be determined by the
following equation:
p = qh[(GCpf)the wind comes– (GCpf)the wind goes away]KBKS (28.3-3)
with
qh = Velocity pressure is measured at the average roof heighthusing exposure as defined
in Article 26.7.3.
(GCpf) = The external pressure coefficients given in Figure 28.3-1 for Load Case B with
building surfaces 5 and 5E should be used to calculate the average windward end
wall pressure and building surfaces 6 and 6E should be used to calculate the average
windward endwall pressure. -flat.
KB = frame width factor = 1.8 – 0.01B,B<100 ft (B<30.5 m) or 0.8,B≥100 ft (B≥

30.5m).
KS = protective factor = 0.60 + 0.073(n–3) + (1.25ϕ1.8)
ϕ = solidity ratio =AS/AE.
B = Width of the building perpendicular to the ridge, in ft (m). number of
n = frames but must not be taken less thann=3.
AS = effective solid area of the end wall, that is, the projected area of each sectionfrom
the end wall exposed to the wind (Figure 28.3-2).
AE = total area of end walls for an equivalent enclosed building (Figure 28.3-2).
Longitudinal total forceFthat must be retained by SPGAU is determined by the following

equation:
F=pAE (28.3-4)
Equation (28.3-3) applies to buildings with open end walls and with full or closed end
wallspartly by cladding. For all
© BSN 2020 174 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
case,AEis the area equivalent to a fully enclosed end wall. longitudinal force,F, given by
Equation (28.3-4), represents the total force for which the SPGAU longitudinal bracing
must be designed. Distribution to each sidewall should be based on forceFwhich is
applied to the center of gravity of the end wall area AE. The fascia load does not need to
be calculated separately if the fascia area is included in the calculationAS.
Part 2: Closed simple diaphragm low-rise buildings

Notes:Part 2 of Article 28 is a simple method for determining wind pressure in SPGAU low-rise
buildings with simple closed diaphragms that have flat, gable or shield roofs. Wind pressure is
directly obtained from the table and applied to the horizontal and vertical projected surfaces of
the building. This method is a simplification of the Envelope Procedure contained in Part 1
Article 28.
The steps required to determine the SPGAU wind load in buildings with closed simple
diaphragms are shown in Table 28.4-1.
The following wind load parameters are specified in Article 26:

– Basic wind speed,V(Article 26.5);
– Exposure categories (Article 26.7);
– Topographic factors,Kzt(Article 26.8);
– Classification of closure (Article 26.12).
Table 28.4-1 - Steps to determine the wind load on a building's SPGAU

low-rise buildings with simple diaphragms
Step 1:Determine the risk category of the building; see Table 1.5-1
Step 2:Determine the basic wind speed,V, for the appropriate risk category; see Books
Indonesian Wind Map.
- Exposure category B, C or D; see Article 26.7
- topographic factors,Kzt, see Article 26.8 and Figure 26.8-1
Step 4:Enter numbers to determine the air pressure forh=30 ft (9.1 m),ps30;Look
Figure 28.5-1
Step 5:Enter numbers to determine adjustments for height and exposure
building,-; see Figure 28.5-1
Step 6:Determine the adjusted air pressure,ps; see Equation (28.5-1)
28.5.1 Scope
A building, with the design wind load determined according to this Article must meet
all the conditions of Article 28.5.2. If the building does not meet all the conditions of
Article 28.5.2, its SPGAU wind load shall be determined from Part 1 of this Article, by
the directional procedure of Article 27, or by the wind tunnel procedure of Article 31.
28.5.2 Conditions
175 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
For SPGAU design, the building must meet all of the following conditions:
1. A building is a building with a simple diaphragm as defined in Article 26.2.
2. Buildings are low-rise buildings as defined in Article 26.2.
3. The building is enclosed as defined in Article 26.2 and meets the windborne debris
requirements of Article 26.12.3.
4. Buildings are buildings with regular shapes as defined in Article 26.2.
5. Buildings that are not classified as flexible buildings as defined in Article 26.2.
6. Buildings that do not have response characteristics so that they experience cross
wind loads, wind vortices, instability due to vibration or irregular movement; and
not located in locations where channel effects or repeated blowing as a result of
obstructions on the upwind side require special consideration.
7. Buildings have almost symmetrical cross-sections in each direction for flat roofs or
gable roofs or shield roofs withθ≤ 45°.
8. Buildings that are free from torsion load cases as defined in Section 5 of the Note in
Figure 28.3-1, or torsion load cases as defined in Section 5 of the Notenot
controllingdesign of each SPGAU building.
28.5.3 Design wind load
Simplified design wind pressure,ps, for SPGAU of a low-rise simple diaphragm building
is the net pressure (the sum of internal and external) exerted on the horizontal and
vertical projections of the building surfaces as shown in Figure 28.5-1. For horizontal
pressure (Zones A, B, C, D),psis the combination of net pressure on the upwind side and
on the downwind side.psmust be determined by the following equation:
ps=- KztpS30 (28.5-1)

with
- = Adjustment factors for exposure and building height Figure 28.5-1
Kzt = The topographic factor as defined in Article 26.8 is evaluated at the average roof height,
0.33h
pS30= simplified design air pressure for Exposure B, ath=30 ft (h=9.1 m) from Figure 28.5-1
The effect of load on the design wind pressure of Article 28.5.3 shall not be less than
the minimum load defined by assuming pressure,ps, for zones A and C equal to +16 lb/
ft2(0.77 N/m2), Zones B and D equal +8 lb/ft2(0.38 N/m2), and assumptionspsfor Zones E,
F, G and H is equal to 0 lb/ft2(0 N/m2).
28.6 Consensus standards and other Reference documents
This article does not refer to consensus standards or any other documents considered to
be part of these standards.
© BSN 2020 176 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Diagram
Corners on Sides
the wind comes
Case A
Corners on Sides
The Wind Comes
Case B
Notation
a:10% of the smallest horizontal dimension or 0.4h, the smallest is chosen, but not less than 4 % of the dimensions
smallest horizontal or 3 ft (0.9 m).
EXCEPTION For buildings with-= 0oto 7oand the smallest horizontal dimension is larger
of 300 ft (90 m), dimensionsashould be limited to a maximum of 0.8h.
h:Average roof height, in feet (meters), except for roof angles < 10oThe height of the lowest part of the roof is used.
-:The angle of the roof plane to the horizontal, in degrees.
Notes
1. The pressures shown are applied to both horizontal and vertical projections, for Exposure B, ath=30 ft (9.1
m). Adjust for other exposures and heights with adjustment factors . -
2. The load pattern shown must be applied to each corner of the building as a reference angle. (See Figure 28.3-1).
3. For Case B use-= 0°.

4. Load cases 1 and 2 should be checked for 25° <-≤ 45°. Load case 2 at an angle of 25° is given only for interpolation
between 25° and 30°.
5. Positive and negative signs indicate pressure acting toward and away from the projected surface.
6. For roof slopes other than those shown, linear interpolation is permitted.
7. The total horizontal load shall not be less than that determined by the assumptionsps=0 in Zone B and Zone D.
8. If Zone E or Zone G is on a cantilever/overhangsroofs on the windward side of the building, use themEOHAndGOHfor the
pressure on the horizontal projection of the cantilever. The cantilever in the suction wind and at the edges must be
subjected to base zone pressure.
9. Unit conversion for tables:
Adjustment factors for exposure and building height, . -
Exposure
Average roof height (ft)
B C D
15 1.00 1.21 1.47
20 1.00 1.29 1.55
25 1.00 1.35 1.61
30 1.00 1.40 1.66
35 1.05 1.45 1.70
40 1.09 1.49 1.74
45 1.12 1.53 1.78
50 1.16 1.56 1.81
55 1.19 1.59 1.84
60 1.22 1.62 1.87
Notes:Unit conversion for table: 1.0 ft = 0.3048 m; 1.0 lb/ft2= 0.0479 kN/m2; 1 mph = 1.6 km/h = 0.447 m/sec
177 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
m)]: design wind pressure for buildings covered with walls and roofs
Wind Pressure Simplified design,Ps30(psf) for Exposure B ath=30 ft (h=9.1m)

Speed
Basic Wind Corner Case Zone
(mph) Roof burden
Horizontal Pressure Vertical Pressure Console
(degrees)
Figure 28.5-1 (continued) - Main Wind Force Resisting System, Part 2 [h≤60 ft
(h≤18.3 m)]: design wind pressurefor closed buildingswalls and
roof
© BSN 2020 178 of 302

"Copyright of the National Standardization Agency, a copy of this standard is made for Sub KT 91-01-S4 Materials, Science, Structure & Building construction
SNI 1727:2020

Speed
Wind Corner Case Zone
Base Roof burden
(mph) (degrees)
Figure 28.5-1 (Continued) - Main Wind Force Resisting System, Part 2 [h≤ 60 ft (h≤
18.3 m)]: design wind pressure for wall-enclosed buildings and
roof
179 of 302
"Copyright of the National Standardization Agency, a copy of this standard is made for Sub KT 91-01-S4 Materials, Science, Structure & Building construction
SNI 1727:2020

Speed
Wind Corner Case Zone
Base Roof burden
(mph) Horizontal Pressure Vertical Pressure Console
(degrees)
Figure 28.5-1 (Continued) - Main Wind Force Resisting System, Part 2 [h≤ 60 ft (h
≤18.3 m)]: design wind pressure for wall-enclosed buildings and
roof
© BSN 2020 180 of 302

SNI 1727:2020

Speed Corner Case Zone
Wind
Base Roof burden
(mph) (degrees)
*
See Note 4.
Figure 28.5-1 (Continued) - Main Wind Force Resisting System, Part 2 [h≤ 60 ft (h≤
18.3 m)]: design wind pressure for wall-enclosed buildings and
roof
181 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
29 Wind loads on other structures and building equipment: Main Wind Force
Resisting Systems
29.1 Scope
29.1.1 Structure type
This article is used to determine the magnitude of wind loads on building fixtures (such
as structures and roof top equipment) and other structures of all heights (such as free-
standing solid walls and free-standing solid sign panels, chimneys, tanks, open sign
panels, trusses open single plane, and truss towers) using a steering procedure.
The steps required to determine wind loads on building equipment and other
structures are described in Table 29.1-1.Steps required to determine the wind load on
the main wind force resisting system (SPGAU) inreceptacle (son), silos and round-
section tanks are in Table 29.1-2.
NOTES Use Article 29 to determine the wind pressure on the SPGAU from the wall
freestanding solid, freestanding solid guide panels, chimneys, tanks, open guide panels, single
plane open trusses and truss towers. Wind loads on roof-top structures and equipment can be
determined from the provisions of this Article. Wind pressure is calculated using a specific
equation based on a steering procedure.
Table 29.1-1 - Steps for determining wind loads on structures

other things and equipment for the roof of SPGAU
Step 1:Determine the Risk Category of buildings and other structures; see Table 1.5-1 Step 2:
Determine the basic wind speed,V, for the appropriate Risk Category; see Books
– Wind direction factor,Kd; see Article 26.6 and Table 26.6-1.
– Exposure category B, C or D; see Article 26.7.
– Topographic factors,Kzt; see Article 26.8 and Figure 26.8-1.
– Land surface elevation factor,Ke; see Article 26.9 and Table 26.9-1.
– Wind gust effect factor,G; see Article 26.11, except for roof top equipment.
– Combination of factors (GCr) for roof equipment; see Article 29.4.1.

Step 4:Determine the velocity pressure exposure coefficient,KzorKh, see Table 26.10-1 Step
5:Determine the velocity pressureqzorqh; see Equation (26.10-1). Step 6:Determine the
force coefficient,Cf, except for roof equipment:
– Free standing solid sign panel or free standing solid wall, Fig
29.3-1
– Chimney, tank, Figure 29.4-1
– Open instruction panel, single plane open frame, Figure 29.4-2
– Truss tower Figure 29.4-3
– Roof equipment, using a combination of factors (GCr) listed
– in Article 29.4.1.
– Rooftop solar panels, Figure 29.4-7 and Equation (29.4-6), or Figure 29.4-8.
Step 7:Calculate the wind force,F, or pressure,p:
© BSN 2020 182 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
– Equation 29.3-1 for sign and wall panels.

– Equation 29.4-2 and Equation 29.4-3 for roof structures and equipment.
– Equation 29.4-1 for other structures.

– Equation (29.4-5) or Equation (29.4-7) for rooftop solar panels.
29.1.2 Conditions
A device or structure with a design wind load determined according to this Article must
meet all of the following conditions:
1. Structure is one that has a regular shape as specified in Article 26.2; And
2. The structure does not have response characteristics so that it experiences
crosswind loads, wind vortices, or instability due to vibration or irregular movement,
or is not located in a location where channel effects or repeated blowing as a result
of obstructions on the upwind side require special consideration .
29.1.3 Limitations
The provisions of this Article take into account the effects of load magnification caused
by wind gusts that resonate with windward vibrations of flexible structures. Structures
that do not meet the requirements of Article 29.1.2 or that have unusual shapes or
response characteristics shall be designed using recognized literature addressing the
effects of such wind loads or shall use the wind tunnel procedures specified in Article
31.
29.1.4 Protectors
There shall be no reduction in velocity pressure due to apparent shielding provided by

buildings and other structures or terrain features.
Table 29.1-2 - Steps for determining the wind load on a container
(son), silo, round section SPGAU
Step 1:Determine the Risk Category of the structure; see Table 1.5-1.
Step 2:Determine the basic wind speed,V, for the appropriate Risk Category; see Books
– Wind direction factor,Kd; see Article 26.6 and Table 26.6-1
– Exposure category B, C or D; see Article 26.7
– Topographic factors,Kzt; see Article 26.8 and Figure 26.8-1.
– Land surface elevation factor,Ke; see Article 26.9 and Table 26.9-1
– Classification of closure, see Article 26.12.
– Internal pressure coefficient, (GCpi), see Table 26.13-1.
– Wind gust effect factor,G; see Article 26.11.
– Combination of factors (GCr) for roof equipment; see Article 29.4.1.
Step 4:Determine the velocity pressure exposure coefficient,KzorKh, see Table 26.10-1 Step
5:Determine the velocity pressureqh; see Equation (26.10-1).
Step 6:Determine the force coefficient for the wall, see Article 29.4.2.1 and Article 29.4.2.4.
Step 7:Determine the external pressure coefficient (GCp) for the roof and lower sides if
elevated, see Article 29.4.2.2 and Article 29.4.2.3.
Step 8:Calculate the wind force,F, or pressure,p:
– Equation (29.4-1) for walls.
– Equation (29.4-4) for the roof.
183 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
– Basic Wind Speed,V(Article 26.5);

– Wind direction factor,Kd(Article 26.6);
– Exposure categories (Article 26.7);
– Topographic factors,Kzt(Article 26.8);
– Land surface elevation factor,Ke(Article 26.9); And
– Classification of closure (Article 26.12)
29.3 Design wind loads: Freestanding solid walls and solid sign panels
29.3.1 Freestanding solid walls and freestanding solid sign panels
The design wind force for freestanding solid walls and freestanding solid sign panels shall
be determined by the following formula:
F=qhGCfAs(lb) (29.3-1)
F=qhGCfAs(N) (29.3-1.si)
with
qh = Velocity pressure is evaluated at heighth(specified in Figure 29.3-1) as determined
according to Article 26.10.
G = wind gust effect factor from Article 26.11. net
Cf = force coefficient from Figure 29.3-1.
As = gross area of freestanding solid wall or freestanding solid sign panel, in ft2
(m2)
29.3.2 Bonded solid guidance panels
The design wind pressure on a solid sign panel attached to the wall of a building,
where the plane of the sign panel is parallel to and in contact with the plane of the wall,
and the sign panel does not pass over the side or top edge of the wall, shall be
determined using procedures for wind pressure on the wall in accordance with Article
30, and set the internal pressure coefficient (GCpi) is equal to 0.
This procedure also applies to solid sign panels that are bonded to but not in direct contact
with the wall, provided that the gap between the sign panel and the wall is no more than 3
ft (0.9 m) and the edge of the sign panel is at least 3 ft (0.9 m) in the free edge of the wall,
that is, the sides and upper and lower edges of the elevated wall.
29.4 Design wind loads: other structures
Design wind forces for other structures (chimneys, tanks, open guide panels, single
plane open frames, and truss towers),both above ground level and at the top of the
roofmust be determined by the following equation:
F = qzGCfAf(lb) (29.4-1)
F = qzGCfAf(N) (29.4-1.si)
© BSN 2020 184 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
with
qz = pressure velocity evaluated at heightzas explained in Art
26.10, from center of gravityAf
G = wind gust effect factors from Article 26.11 force
Cf = coefficients from Figure 29.4-1 to Figure 29.4-4
Af = area projected perpendicular to the wind except withCfset to wide
actual surface, in ft2(m2)
Guide to determineG,Cf, AndAffor structures found in petrochemical and other

industrial facilities not addressed in ASCE 7 can be found in Wind Loads for
Petrochemical and Other Industrial Facilities(2011), published by ASCE, Reston, VA.
29.4.1 Roof structures and equipment for buildings
lateral force,Fh,and vertical style,Fv,for roof structures and equipment, unless otherwise
required for roof-mounted solar panels (Article 29.4.3 and Article 29.4.4) and structures
identified in Article 29.4, shall be specified as required below.
Lateral resultant forceFh, shall be determined from Equation (29.4-2) and applied at a
height above the roof surface equal to or greater than the center of gravity of the
projected area,Af.
Fh=qh(GCr)Af (lb) (29.4-2)
Fh=qh(GCr)Af (N) (29.4-2.si)
with
(GCr) = 1.9 for equipment and roof-top structures withAfless than (0.1Bh). (GCr) can be
reduced linearly from 1.9 to 1.0 when the valueAfincreases from (0,1Bh) to (Bh)
qh = Velocity pressure evaluated at the average height of the building roof. vertical
Af = projected area of a roof-top structure or fixture in a plane perpendicular to the
wind direction, in ft2(m2)
vertical lift force,Fv, on roof structures and equipment should be determined from
Equation (29.4-3):
Fv=qh(GCr)Ar(lb) (29.5-3)
Fv=qh(GCr)Ar(N) (29.5-3.si)
with
(GCr) = 1.5 for roof structures and equipment withArless than (0.1BL). (GCr) can be reduced
linearly from 1.5 to 1.0 when the valueArincreases from (0,1BL) to (BL)
qh = Velocity pressure is evaluated at the average building roof height of the horizontal
Ar = projected area of the roof-superstructure or fixture, in ft2(m2)
29.4.2 Wind load design: container (son), silos and tanks of circular cross section
withh≤ 120 ft (h≤ 36.5m),D≤ 120 ft (D≤ 36.5 m), and 0.25 ≤H/D≤ 4
Container grouping (son), silos and tanks of circular cross-section of the same size with
a center-to-center distance greater than two diameters shall be treated as isolated
structures. For distances less than 1.25 diameters, the structure must be
185 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
treated as grouped and the wind pressure shall be determined from Article 29.4.2.4.
For medium distances, linear interpolation of the valuesCp(orCf) must be used.
29.4.2.1 External walls of containers (son), silos, and insulated round-section tanks
To determinedragtotal on container (son), silos and tanks of circular cross section using
Equation (29.4-1), coefficientdrag(Cf) 0.63 based on projected wall (DH) is permitted for
use, withH/Dis in the range of 0.25 to 4.0 and cylindrical (diaD) standing on the ground
or supported by columns. Net height (C) must be less than or equal to the height of the
solid cylinder (H) as shown in Figure 29.4-4.
© BSN 2020 186 of 302

“Copyright Agency National Standardization, a copy of this standard is made for Sub KT 91-01-S4 Materials, Science, Structure & Building construction,
SNI 1727:2020
Diagram
Sign panels or walls

solid free standing
sebalanngg
e=0.2B
balanced
e=0.2B
CASE A CASE B CASE C
Notation
B = Horizontal dimension of the guide panel, in ft (m). =

e Eccentricity of force, in ft. (m).
F = Design wind force for other structures, in lb (N). =
h Height of the display panel, in ft (m).
Lr = Horizontal dimension of turning corner, in ft (m) n/
Rmin = min (B ands)
Rmax=n/max (B ands) s
= Vertical dimension of the guide panel, in ft (m). =
t Instruction panel thickness in ft (m).
ε = Ratio of solid area to gross area
Force Coefficient, Cf,for Case A and Case B
Ratio aspect ratio,B/s

distance,
s/h ≤ 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 4 5 10 20 30 -45
1 1.80 1.70 1.65 1.55 1.45 1.40 1.35 1.35 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30
0.9 1.85 1.75 1.70 1.60 1.55 1.50 1.45 1.45 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.40
0.7 1.90 1.85 1.75 1.70 1.65 1.60 1.60 1.55 1.55 1.55 1.55 1.55
0.5 1.95 1.80 1.80 1.75 1.75 1.70 1.70 1.70 1.70 1.70 1.70 1.75
0.3 1.95 1.90 1.85 1.80 1.80 1.80 1.80 1.80 1.80 1.85 1.85 1.85
0.2 1.95 1.90 1.85 1.80 1.80 1.80 1.80 1.80 1.85 1.90 1.90 1.95
≤ 0.16 1.95 1.90 1.85 1.85 1.80 1.80 1.85 1.85 1.85 1.90 1.90 1.95
and not for commercialization"
Figure 29.3-1 - Design wind load (entire height): force coefficient,Cf, for other
structures freestanding solid walls and freestanding guide panels
187 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Force Coefficient,Cf,for case C
Aspect Ratio,B/s
Area (horizontal distance from
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 13 ≥ 45
the edge of the incoming wind)
0 tos 2.25 2.60 2.90 3.10* 3.30* 3.40* 3.55* 3.65* 3.75* 4.00* 4.30*
ss.d. 2s 1.50 1.70 1.90 2.00 2.15 2.25 2.30 2.35 2.45 2.60 2.55
2s to d. 3s 1.15 1.30 1.45 1.55 1.65 1.70 1.75 1.85 2.60 1.95
3ss.d. 10s 1.10 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.00 0.95
3s to d. 4s 1.50 1.85
4s to d. 5s 1.35 1.85
5ss.d. 10s 0.90 1.10
> 10s 0.55 0.55
* The value must be multiplied by the following reduction factor when turning corners are present:
Plan of a wall or sign panel

Lr/S Reduction factor
with turned corners
0.3 0.90
1.0 0.75
≥2 0.60
Notes
1. The term “signature panel” in this note also applies to freestanding walls
2. Sign panels with openings of less than 30% of the gross area shall be counted as solid sign panels. The force
coefficient for solid sign panels with permitted openings is multiplied by the reduction factor (1 – (1 – ε)1.5).
3. To allow for oblique or perpendicular wind direction, the following two cases must be taken into account: For
cases/h<1:
CASE A: The resultant force acts perpendicular to the face of the guide panel on a vertical line
intersect the geometric center.
CASE B: The resultant force acts perpendicular to the face of the guide panel at a distance from the line
vertically through the geometric center is equal to 0.2 times the average width of the cue
panel.
For double-faced instruction panels with all sides covered andRmax≤0.4, allowed to use eccentric force,e = (
0.2 – 0.25Rmax)B.
For double-faced instruction panels with all sides covered andRmin≤0.75, allowed to multiply valuesCfin the table in
CASES A and B with a reduction factor, (1-0.133Rmin).
ForB/s≥ 2, CASE C must also be taken into account:
CASE C: The resultant force acts perpendicular to the face of the guide panel to the geometric center
every region
Fors/h=1:
The same as the case above except that the resultant force acting perpendicularly acts above the geometric center
equal to 0.05 times the average height of the guide panel.
4. For CASE C withs/h>0.8, the force coefficient must be multiplied by the reduction factor (1.8 –s/h).This
reduction is permitted to apply as required in Note 3.
5. Linear interpolation is permitted for pricess/h,B/sAndLr/swhich are not listed above.
Figure 29.3-1 (Continued) - Design wind load (entire height): force coefficient,Cf,
for other structures freestanding solid walls and solid guide panels
free standing
© BSN 2020 188 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
force coefficient,Cf
h/D
Cross-section Surface type 1 7 25
Rectangle (wind perpendicular to surface) Entire 1.3 1.4 2.0
Quadrangle (wind along the diagonal) Entire 1.0 1.1 1.5
Hexagon or octagon Entire 1.0 1,2 1.4
Round -D qz- 2.5 - Medium fine
Rough (D'/D=0.02)
0.5
0.7
0.6
0.8
0.7
0.9
(in S.I.) Very rough
0.8 1.0 1,2
D'/D=0.08)
Round -D qz- 2.5 - Entire 0.7 0.8 1,2

(in S.I.)
Notation
D= The diameter of a circular cross-section and the smallest horizontal dimension of a square cross-section,
facet
six or octagonal at the calculated elevation, in feet (meters); D'=Tall/depthfrom
protruding elements such as ribs andspoilers, in feet (meters); h=Structure height, in feet
(meters);
qz=Velocity pressure is evaluated at heightzabove ground level, in lb/ft2
(N/m2).
Notes
1. The design wind force must be calculated based on the area of the structure projected on a vertical plane
perpendicular to the wind direction.
The force must be assumed to act parallel to the wind direction.
2. Allowed Linear interpolation for valuesh/Dother than those shown.
Figure 29.4-1 - Other structures (entire height): force coefficient,Cf,For

chimneys, tanks, and similar structures
189 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Rounded structural components
Structural components D qz -2.5 D qz -2.5
-D q - s.i -D q - s.i
flat-sided
ε z -5.3 z -5.3
< 0.1 2.0 1,2 0.8
0.1 to 0.29 1.8 1.3 0.9
0.3 to 0.7 1.6 1.5 1.1
Notation
ε = ratio of solid area to gross area

D = diameter of a typical round member, in feet (meters)
qz=Velocity pressure is evaluated at heightzabove ground level, in lb/ft2
(N/m2).
Notes
1. Instruction panels with openings comprising 30% or more of the gross area are classified
as open instruction panels.
2. Calculation of design wind forces must be based on the area of all structural components and
exposed elements projected in a plane perpendicular to the wind direction. The forces must be
assumed to act parallel to the wind direction.
3. SpaciousAfconsistent with this force coefficient, namely the solid area projected perpendicular to the wind
direction.
Figure 29.4-2 - Other structures (entire height): force coefficient,Cf, for panels
open leads and single plane open frames
© BSN 2020 190 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Tower cross-section Cf
Rectangle 4.0ε2– 5.9ε + 4.0
Triangle 3.4ε2- 4.7ε + 3.4
Notation
ε = ratio of solid area to gross area of one tower face for the segment under consideration.
Notes
1. For all wind directions considered, areaAfconsistent with the required force coefficient, namely
the solid area of the tower face projected onto the face of the tower segment under
consideration.
2. Required force coefficients are for towers with structural angle iron or similar flat-sided
structural members.
3. For towers consisting of rounded structural components, it is acceptable to multiply the
required force coefficient by the following factor when determining the wind force for the
structural component:
0.51ε2+ 0.57, but not > 1.0
4. Wind force must be used in the direction that produces maximum force and reaction of structural
components. For towers with a square cross-section, the wind force must be multiplied by the
following factor if the wind is directed along the diagonal of the tower:
1 + 0.75ε, but not > 1,2
5. Wind forces on tower equipment such as stairs, ducts, lighting and elevators, should be
calculated using force coefficients appropriate to these elements.
6. The load due to increased ice must be taken into account as explained in Article 10.
Figure 29.4-3 - Other structures (entire height): force coefficient,Cf, For

open structure of truss tower
191 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Diagram
Wind direction
Floor plan
Elevation Elevation
Notation
C=Clear height above ground level, in ft (m). D=Diameter
of circular structure, in ft (m). h=Average roof height, in
ft (m). H=Height of solid cylinder, in ft (m).
Z=Height relative to the center of gravity of the projected area of a circular structure, in ft (m). α=
Angle of wind direction with respect to a point on the wall of the container (son), silos and tanks
circular cross-section, in degrees.
Figure 29.4-4 - Other structures, design wind loads for main wind force
resisting systems [h<120 ft (h<36.6 m)]: containers (bins), silos and tanks of round
cross-section at ground level or supported by columns, withD≤ 120 ft (D≤
36.6 m), 0.25 ≤H/D<4.0
29.4.2.2 Container roof (son), insulated round-section silos and tanks
Net design pressure on the roofreceptacle (son), silos and tanks of circular cross section must be
determined from Equation (29.4-4):
p=qh[GCp– (GCpi)] (lb/∕ft2) (29.4-4)
p=qh[GCp– (GCpi)] (N/m2) (29.4-4.si)
with
qh = pressure velocity for all evaluated surfaces at average roof heighth = external
Cp pressure coefficient from Figure 29.4-5 for the roof
(GCpi) = internal pressure coefficient for the roof structure from Article 26.13,
and G = wind gust effect factor from Article 26.11
External pressure on a conical, flat, or domed roof (roof angle less than 10°) of
receptacle (son), silos and tanks of circular cross sectionmust be equal to the external
pressure coefficient,Cp, given in Figure 29.4-5 for Zone 1 and Zone 2. External pressures
for domed roofs (roof angles greater than 10°) should be determined from Figure
27.3-2.
© BSN 2020 192 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
29.4.2.3 Bottom side of container (son), isolated elevated round-section silos and
tanks
External pressure coefficientCpfor the bottom ofreceptacle (son), silos and tanks of
circular cross sectionwith clear height,C, above ground level is less than or equal to the
height of the solid cylinder,H, should be taken as 0.8 and −0.6. For structures with a
clear height above ground level less than or equal to one third of the cylinder height,
use linear interpolation between these values andCp=0.0 corresponds to the ratioC/h,
WhereCAndhdefined as shown in Figure 29.4-4.
29.4.2.4 Roof and walls of containers (son), silos and tanks of round cross section
group ones
For closely spaced groups of three or more containers (son), silos and tanks of circular
cross-section with a center-to-center distance of less than1.25D, roof pressure
coefficient,Cp, and drag force coefficient,Cf, on the projected wall should be calculated
using Figure 29.4-6. The net design pressure on the roof should be determined from
Equation (29.4-4). The overall drag should be calculated based on Equation (29.4-1).
29.4.3 Rooftop solar panels for buildings of all heights with flat or gable roofs or
shield roofs with a slope of less than 7°
As illustrated in Figure 29.4-7, the design wind pressure for rooftop solar panels applies
to those located on enclosed or partially enclosed buildings of all heights with flat
roofs, or with gable or shield roofs with slopes.θ≤ 7°, with panels suitable for:
Lp≤6.7 ft (2.04 m), ω

≤35°,
h1≤2 ft (0.61 m), h
2≤4 ft (1.22 m),
with a minimum gap of 0.25 in. (6.4 mm) provided between all panels, and the gap between
panels does not exceed 6.7 ft (2.04 m). In addition, the minimum horizontal clear distance
between the panel and the roof edge must be greater than 2(h2–hPT) and 4 ft (1.2 m) for the
design pressures in this Article to apply. The design wind pressure for rooftop solar panels
is determined by Equation (29.4-5) and Equation (29.4-6):
p=qh(GCrn) (lb/ft2) (29.4-5)
p=qh(GCrn) (N/m2) (29.4-5.si)
with
(GCrn) = (γp)(γc)(γE)(GCrn)nom (29.4-6)
193 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
information
γp = minimum (1.2; 0.9 +hPT/h);
γc = maximum (0.6 + 0.06Lp; 0.8); And
γE = 1.5 for lifting load on exposed panels and within 1.5(Lp) from
the end of the row at the exposed edge of the row; γE=1.0 elsewhere for
lifting load and for all downward loads, as illustrated in Figure 29.4-7. A panel is
defined as exposed ifd1to the edge of the roof > 0.5h and one of the following is
applied:
1.d1to adjacent row > maximum (4h2, 4 ft (1.2m) or
2.d2to next adjacent panel > maximum (4h2; 4 ft (1.2m).
(GCrn)nom = nominal net pressure coefficient for rooftop solar panels as specified
from Figure 29.4-7.
If, ω ≤ 2°,h2≤ 0.83 ft (0.25 m), and a minimum gap of 0.25 in. (6.4 mm) is provided
between all panels, and interpanel gaps do not exceed 6.7 ft (2.04 m), the procedures
of Article 29.4.4 shall be permitted.
The roof must be designed for both of the following conditions:
1.Cases where solar collectors exist. Wind loads acting on solar collectors in accordance
with this Article must be applied simultaneously with roof wind loads required in
other Articles acting on roof areas not covered by the projected plane of the solar
collector. For this case, the roof wind load required in other Articles does not need
to be applied to the roof area covered by the projected plane of the solar collector.
2.Cases where rows of solar panels have been removed.
29.4.4 Solar panels on the roof are parallel to the roof surface of the building
throughout the height and slope of the roof
Design wind pressure for rooftop solar panels located on enclosed or partially enclosed
buildings of all heights, with panels parallel to the roof surface, with a tolerance of 2°
and with a maximum height above the roof surface,h2, not exceeding 10 in. (0.25 m)
shall be determined in accordance with this Article. Minimum gap 0.25 in. (6.4 mm)
shall be provided between all panels, with gaps between panels not to exceed 6.7 ft
(2.04 m). In addition, rows of solar panels must be placed at least 2h2from the edge of
the roof, gable roof ridge or shield roof ridge. The design wind pressure for roof top
solar collectors shall be determined by Equation (29.4-7):
p=qh(GCp)(γE)(γa) (lb/ft2) (29.4-7)
p=qh(GCp)(γE)(γa) (N/m2) (29.4-7.si)
with
(GCp) = external pressure coefficient for roof C&K with respective roof zoning,
determined from Fig. 30.3-2A-I to Figure 30.3-7 or Figure 30.5-1 ;
γE = edge row factor = 1.5 for lifting loads on exposed and deep panels
distance 1.5(Lp) from the end of the row to the exposed edge of the row;γE=1.0
elsewhere for lifting loads and for all downward loads, as illustrated in Figure 29.4-7. A
panel is defined as exposed ifd1to the edge of the roof> 0.5h and one of the following
applies:
1.d1to adjacent row > 4 ft (1.2 m) or
2.d2to next adjacent panel> 4ft. (1.2m);
γa = solar panel pressure equalization factor, defined in Figure 29.4-8.
© BSN 2020 194 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Diagram Flat, conical, or roofs Conical roof
Direction
Wind direction
wind
Floor plan
Floor plan
Direction
Wind direction
wind
Cone θ < 10o 10o≤ θ < 30o

Elevation Elevation
Notation
b=Defined below, in ft (m), depending onH/Dfor roofs with average θ
less than 10 degrees.
h=Average roof height, in ft (m). H=Height
of solid cylinder, in ft (m). D=Diameter of
circular structure, in ft (m).
θ = Angle of roof plane from horizontal, in degrees.
external pressure coefficient,Cp

Zone 1 - 0.8
Zone 2 - 0.5
Notes
For roofs with an average θ of less than 10 degrees, dimensions,b,must be determined as
follows:
H/D b
0.25 0.2D
0.5 0.5D
1.0 0.1h+0.6D
Linear interpolation must be permitted.
Figure 29.4-5 - Other structures, design wind loads for Main Wind Force Resisting
System [h < 120 ft (h < 36.6 m)]: external pressure coefficient, Cp, for the roof
isolated from containers (bins), silos and tanks of round cross section, with D ≤
120 ft (D ≤ 36.6 m), 0.25 ≤ H/D < 4.0
195 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Diagram
Flat, conical, or roofs Conical roof
Direction
Wind direction
wind
Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 1 Zone 2
Floor plan
Floor plan
Direction
Wind direction
wind
Cone θ < 10o 10o≤ θ ≤ 30o

Elevation Elevation
Notation
D =Diameter of circular structure, in ft. (m).

h =Average roof height, in ft. (m). = Height
H of solid cylinder, in ft. (m).
Force coefficientdrag(Cf)on a projected wall

H/D Cf Used with
<1 1.3 qh
2 1.1 qh
4 1.0 qh
Roof Pressure Coefficient,Cp,to use withqh

H/D Zone 1 Zone 2
θ < 10 ≤ 0.5 - 0.9 - 0.5
≥ 1.0 - 1.3 - 0.7
10o< θ < 30o ≤4 - 1.0 - 0.6
Figure 29.4-6 - Other structures, design loads for main wind force resisting
systems[h<120 ft (h<36.6m)]:drag force coefficient,Cf,and roof pressure
coefficient,Cp, for bins, silos and round-section tanks grouped at ground level or
supported by columns, withD≤ 120 ft (D≤ 36.6m),
0.25 ≤H/D<4.0, and center-to-center distance ≤ 1.25
© BSN 2020 196 of 302

"Copyright of the National Standardization Agency, a copy of this standard is made for Sub KT 91-01-S4 Materials, Science, Structure & Construct
SNI 1727:2020
Diagram
Panel
Sun
h2
h1
Roof
Surface
land
Building roof plan
Building elevation
Nominal Net Pressure Coefficient (GCrn)nom
Ground level
Ko
Ko effi
effi ien
ien tech
tech an
an an
an net
net o
o no
no mi
mi nal
nal (GC
(GC rn
rn
Normalized wind area,A Normalized wind area,A

0° ≤ ω ≤ 5° 15° ≤ ω ≤ 35°
Row edge factor,γε

Edge of a row of panels
adjacent solar or
EXAMPLE PLAN edge of the building
With: 1)d1> 0.5hAndd1> max (4h2,4 ft)
2)d2< max (4h2,4 ft) North
LEGEND
The solar collector is not exposed (γE=1.0)
Exposed solar panels (γE=1.5) Typical 1.5Lp
Row of solar panels

Roof
Solar panels
Pieces A-A Solar panel plan
Figure 29.4-7 - Design wind load (entire height): solar panels on roof
for closed and partially closed buildings, roof θ≤7°
197 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Notation
A = Effective wind area, in ft2(m2)

An = Normalized wind area, dimensionless
d1 = For a rooftop solar panel array, the horizontal distance perpendicular to the edge of the
panel to adjacent panels or the edge of the building, ignoring rooftop equipment in
Figure 29.4-7, in ft (m)
d2 = For a row of solar panels on a roof, the horizontal distance from the edge of one
panel to the nearest edge in the next row in Figure 29.4-7, in ft (m)
h = Average roof height of buildings except heighteaveshould be used for roof
angles θ less than or equal to 10°, in ft (m)
h1 = Height of gap between panel and roof surface, in ft. (m) Height of the solar
h2 = panel above the roof at the top edge of the panel, in ft. (m) Average parapet
hPT = height above adjacent roof surfaces for use with Equation 29.4-5, in ft. (m)
Lp = Panel chord length

WL = Width of the building on the longest side in Figure 29.4-7, in ft. (m) Width of the
WS = building at the shortest side in Figure 29.4-7, in ft. (m)
γE = Row edge factor as specified in Article 29.4-4 Angle of the
θ = roof plane from the horizontal plane, in degrees
ω = The angle of the solar panel with the roof surface in Figure 29.4-7, in degrees
Notes
1. (GCrn)work towards (+) and away (-) from the top surface of the panel
2. Linear interpolation is allowed forωbetween 5° and 15°
3.An= (1,000/[max(Lb,15)2]A,withAis the effective wind area of the structural element on the
solar panel under consideration, andLbis the minimum of 0.4(h WL)0.5, orhorWSin ft (m).
Figure 29.4-7 (Continued) - Design wind load (entire height): solar panels
on the roof for closed and partially closed buildings, Roof θ ≤ 7°
Fa
kt
or
pe
Mrs
et
ar
aA
n
te
ka
na
n
de
ret
an
pa
ne
l
su
ry
a,
(0.0929) (0.929) (9.29) (92.9)
effective wind area,A, ft2(m2)
Figure 29.4-8 - Solar panel array pressure equalization factor, γa , for

enclosed and partially enclosed buildings of the entire height
© BSN 2020 198 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
The roof must be designed to meet both of the following requirements:

1. Cases where solar panels are present. Wind loads acting on solar collectors in
accordance with this Article must be applied simultaneously with roof wind loads
required in other Articles acting on roof areas not covered by the projection area of
the solar collector. For this case, the roof wind load required in other articles does
not need to be applied to the roof area coveredby the projected plane of the solar
collector.
2. Cases where the solar panel has been removed.
29.5 Parapet
The wind load on the parapet required in Article 27.3.5 for buildings of all heights is
designed using a directional procedure and in Article 28.3.2 for low-rise buildings it is
designed using an envelope procedure.
29.6 Roof console
The wind loads on roof consoles required in Article 27.3.4 for buildings of all heights
are designed using the directional procedure and in Article 28.3.3 for low-rise buildings
are designed using the envelope procedure.
29.7 Minimum design wind loading
The design wind force for other structures shall not be less than 16 lb/ft2(0.77 kN/m2)
multiplied by the areaAf.
29.8 Consensus Standards and other referenced documents
199 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
30 Wind loads: Components and Clading (C&K)
30.1 Scope
This article is used to determine wind pressure on components and cladding (K&K) in
buildings.
1. Part 1 applies to enclosed or partially enclosed buildings
• Low-rise buildings (see definition in Article 26.2); or
• Buildings withh≤60 ft (18.3 m).
Buildings have flat roofs, gable roofs, multi-span gable roofs, shield roofs, unilateral
sloping roofs, tiered roofs, or sawtooth roofs and the wind pressure is calculated
from the wind pressure equation.
2. Part 2 is a simplified approach and applies to closed buildings

Buildings that have flat roofs, gable roofs, or shield roofs and wind pressures that
are determined directly from a table.
3. Part 3 applies to enclosed or partially enclosed buildings
• Buildings withh>60 ft (18.3 m).
Buildings that have flat roofs, pitched roofs, gable roofs, shield roofs, mansard
roofs, curved roofs, or dome roofs and the wind pressure is calculated from the
wind pressure equation
4. Part 4 is a simplified approach and applies to closed buildings
• Buildings with 60 ft <h≤160 ft (18.3 m <h≤48.8 m).

Buildings that have flat roofs, gable roofs, shield roofs, unilateral sloping roofs, or mansard
roofs and wind pressures are determined directly from the table.
5. Section 5 applies to open buildings of all heights that have free-pitched roofs, free-
sloping roofs, or free-sloping roofs.
6. Part 6 applies to building equipment such as roof consoles, parapets and roof top
equipment.
7. Section 7 applies to non-building–container structures (son), round-section silos and
tanks; and solar panels on the roof
• Receptacle (son), round-section silos and tanks:h≤120 ft (38.6 m).
• Rooftop solar panels: Buildings of all heights with flat or gable roofs or shield
roofs with a roof slope of less than or equal to 7°.
30.1.2 Conditions
A building with a design wind load determined according to this Article must meet all of
the following conditions:
1. The building has a regular shape as specified in Article 26.2; And
2. The building does not have response characteristics so that it experiences transverse
wind loads, wind vortices, instability due to vibration or irregular movement, or is
not located in a location where channel effects or repeated blowing as a result of
obstructions on the side of the incoming wind require special consideration. .
© BSN 2020 200 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
30.1.3 Limitations
The provisions of this Article take into account the effects of load magnification caused
by wind gusts resonating with vibrations along with the wind from flexible buildings.
Loads on buildings that do not meet the requirements of Article 30.1.2, or that have
unusual shapes or response characteristics, shall be determined using recognized
literature documenting the effects of wind loads or shall use the wind tunnel
procedures specified in Article 31.
30.1.4 Protectors
There is no reduction in velocity stress due to the apparent shielding provided by

buildings and other structures or terrain features.
30.1.5 Air permeable cladding
The design wind loads determined from Article 30 shall be used for air-permeable
cladding, including modular vegetative roof assemblies, unless approved test data or
approved literature proves a lower load for the type of air-permeable cladding being
considered.
30.2 General requirement
The following wind load parameters are required in Article 26:

• Basic Wind Speed,V(Article 26.5).
• Wind direction factors,Kd(Article 26.6).
• Exposure categories (Article 26.7).
• Topographic factorsKzt(Article 26.8).
• Land surface elevation factor,Ke(Article 26.9)
• Velocity pressure exposure coefficient,KzorKh(Article 26.10.1); velocity pressure, qz(
Article 26.10.2)
• Wind gust effect factor (Article 26.11).
• Classification of closure (Article 26.12).
• Internal pressure coefficient (GCpi) (Article 26.13).
30.2.2 Minimum design air pressure
The design wind pressure for components and cladding in a building shall not be less
than a net pressure of 16 lb/ft2(0.77 kN/m2) which acts in a direction perpendicular to
the surface.
30.2.3 Tributary area greater than 700 ft2(65 m2)
Component and Clading element area greater than 700 ft2(65 m2) must be designed
using the provisions of the Main Wind Force Resisting System (SPGAU).
30.2.4 External pressure coefficient
201 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Wind gust effect factor and combined external pressure coefficient for Components
and Clading, (GCp), which are given in the figures associated with this Article. The
pressure coefficient value and the wind gust effect factor must not be separated.
Part 1: Low Rise Buildings

NOTES Use Part 1 of Article 30 to determine the wind pressure at K&K
closed and partially enclosed low-rise buildings that have a roof shape as required in the
applicable drawings. The provisions in Part 1 are based on the envelope procedure, withWind
pressure is calculated using the established equationas applicable to every surface of the
building. For buildings to which these provisions apply, this method generally produces the
lowest wind pressure of all the analysis methods in this standard.
30.3 Building type
The provisions of Article 30.3 apply to closed and partially closed buildings:
Buildings that have flat roofs, gable roofs, multi-span gable roofs, shield roofs,
unilateral sloping roofs, terraced roofs, or sawtooth roofs. The steps required for
determining wind loads on components and cladding for this type of building are
shown in Table 30.3-1.
30.3.1 Conditions
To determine the design wind pressure on components and cladding using the
provisions of Article 30.3.2, the conditions shown on the selected drawing must be a
drawing that is appropriate for the building being considered.
30.3.2 Design air pressure
Design wind pressures on component elements and cladding of low-rise buildings and
buildings withh≤ 60 ft (18.3 m) must be determined from the following equation:
p=qh[(GCp) – (GCpi)] (lb/ft2) (30.3-1)
p=qh[(GCp) – (GCpi)] (N/m2) (30.3-1.si)
with
qh = Velocity pressure is evaluated at the average roof heighthas stipulated in
Article 26.10;
(GCp) = The external pressure coefficient is given in:
• Figure 30.3-1 (wall),
• Figure 30.3-2A–I (flat roof, gable roof, and shield roof),
• Figure 30.3-3 (multi-level roof),
• Figure 30.3-4 (multi-span gable roof),
• Figure 30.3-5A–B (unilateral sloping roof),
• Figure 30.3-6 ((saw roof),
• Figure 30.3-7 (dome roof),
• Figure 27.3-3, Note 4 (curved roof); Internal pressure
(GCpi) = coefficients are given in Table 26.13-1.
© BSN 2020 202 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Part 2: Low-rise buildings (simplified)

NOTES Part 2 of Article 30 is a simple method for determining pressure
wind on K&K onclosed low-rise buildingswhich has a flat roof, gable roof, or shield roof. The
provisions of Part 2 are based on the envelope procedures of Part 1 withwind pressure is
determined from the tableand adjusted as necessary.
30.4 Building type
The provisions of Article 30.4 apply to closed buildings:

• Buildings withh≤ 60 ft (18.3 m).
Table 30.3-1 - Steps for determining building C&C wind loads

closed and partially enclosed low-rise buildings
Step 1:Determine the risk category, see Table 1.5-1.
- wind direction factor,Kd, see Article 26.6 and Table 26.6-1.
- Exposure category B, C or D, see Article 26.7.
- topographic factors,Kzt, see Article 26.8 and Figure 26.8-1.
- Land surface elevation factor,Ke; Article 26.9 and Table 26.9-1.
- Internal pressure coefficient, (GCpi), see Article 26.13 and Table 26.13-1.
Step 4:Determine the velocity pressure exposure coefficient,Kh, see Table 26.10-1.
Step 5:Determine the velocity pressure,qh, Equation (26.10-1). Step 6:Determine the
external pressure coefficient, (GCp):
- Wall, see Figure 30.3-1.
- Flat roof, gable roof, shield roof; see Figure 30.3-2.
- Multi-level roof; see Figure 30.3-3.
- Multi-span gable roof, see Figure 30.3-4.
- Unilateral sloping roof; see Figure 30.3-5.
- Saw roof, see Figure 30.3-6.
- Dome roof, see Figure 30.3-7.
- Curved roof, see Figure 27.3-3, Note 4.
Step 7:Calculate wind pressure,p; Equation 30.3-1.
Buildings have flat roofs, gable roofs, or shield roofs. The steps required to determine
wind loads on components and cladding for the building types are shown in Table
30.4-1.
30.4.1 Conditions
For Component and Clading design, the building must meet all of the following
conditions:
1. Average roof heighthmust be less than or equal to 60 ft (18.3 m) [h ≤ 60 ft (18.3 m)].
2. The building is closed as stipulated in Article 26.2 and in accordance with the
windborne debris provisions of Article 26.12.3.
3. Buildings are buildings with regular shapes as stipulated in Article 26.2.
4. Buildings that do not have response characteristics so that they experience

transverse wind loads, wind vortices, or instability due to vibration or
203 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
irregular movements; or not located in a location where channel effects or repeated

blowing as a result of obstructions on the upwind side require special
consideration.
5. Buildings that have either a flat roof or a gable roofθ≤ 45º, or shield roof withθ≤ 27º.
Net design wind pressure,pnet, for components and cladding of a building designed
using the procedures required herein represents the net pressure (sum of internal and
external) that must be applied perpendicular to each surface of the building as shown
in Figure 30.4-1.pnetmust be determined by the following equation:
pnet=-Kztpnet30 (30.4-1)
with
- =adjustment factor for building height and exposure from Figure 30.4-1;
kzt = topographic factor as specified in Article 26.8, evaluated at 0.33 roof height
average, 0.33h; And
pnet30= net design wind pressure for Exposure B, ath =30 ft (9.1 m), from Figure 30.4-1.
© BSN 2020 204 of 302

"Copyright of the National Standardization Agency, a copy of this standard is made for Sub KT 91-01-S4 Materials, Science, Structure & Construction B
SNI 1727:2020
Diagram
Elevation
Notation
a= 10% smallest horizontal dimension or 0.4h,choose the smallest, but must not be less than 4% of the
smallest horizontal dimension or 3 ft. (0.9m).
EXCEPTIONFor buildings with θ = 0° to 7° and the smallest horizontal dimension greater than
300 ft (90 m), the dimensionsashould be limited to a maximum of 0.8h.
h =Average roof height, in ft (m), except elevationseaveshould be used for θ ≤ 10°. θ = Angle of roof
plane from horizontal, in degrees.
External Pressure Coefficient, (GCp) - Wall
Koe
physie
n
Tech
Ana
n
Ex
tern
al,
(GC
p)
Effective Wind Area, ft2(m2)
Notes
1. The vertical scale is expressed in (GCp)to use withqh.
2. The horizontal scale is expressed in effective wind area, in ft2(m2).
3. Positive and negative signs represent pressure acting toward and away from the surface.
4. Each component must be designed for maximum positive and negative pressure.
5. Value of (GCp)for walls it must be reduced by 10% if θ ≤ 10°.
Figure 30.3-1 - Components and Clading [h≤ 60 ft (h≤ 18.3 m)]: pressure coefficient
external, (GCp),for closed and partially closed buildings
wall
205 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Diagram
Elevation
Floor plan
Notation
B=Horizontal dimensions of buildings measured perpendicular to the wind direction, in ft (m). h

=Heighteaveshould be used for θ = 10°. θ = angle of the roof plane from the horizontal, in
degrees.
External Pressure Coefficient
Roof Console
ko Ko
effi effi
sie sie
n n
tech tech
an an
an an
ex ex
tar tar
nal nal
, ,
(G (G
Cp) C p)
Effective wind area, ft2(m2) Effective wind area, ft2(m2)
Notes
5. If a parapet is equal to or higher than 3 ft (0.9 m) around the perimeter of a roof with θ ≤ 7° , the negative
value of (GCp)in Zone 3 must be the same as Zone 2, and the positive value (GCp)in Zone 2 and Zone 3 should
be set the same as for Zone 4 and Zone 5 walls, in Figure 30.3-1.
6. Value (GCp)for roof consoles includes pressure contributions from the top and bottom surfaces.
7. If there is a console, the smallest horizontal dimension of the building structure shall not include the console dimension, but the edge distance,a,
should be measured from the outside edge of the console.
Figure 30.3-2A - Components and Clading [h≤ 60 ft (h≤18.3 m)]: pressure coefficient
external, (GCp), for closed buildings and partially covered roofs
saddle, θ ≤ 7°
© BSN 2020 206 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Diagram
Elevation
Notation Floor plan
a =10% smallest horizontal dimension or 0.4h,choose the smallest, but it should not be less than 4 % of the dimension
smallest horizontal or 3 ft. (0.9m). If there is a console, the edge distance must be measured from the outer edge of the
console. The horizontal dimensions used to calculate edge spacing should not include console spacing.
B=The horizontal dimensions of a building measured perpendicular to the wind direction, in ft (m). h
=Average roof height, in ft (m), except elevationseaveshould be used for θ ≤ 10°. θ = angle of the roof
plane from the horizontal, in degrees.
Ko Roof K Console
effi oe
si fis
en ie
te n
ka te
na ka
n na
oak n
st oak
er st
na er
l, na
Effective wind area, ft2 Effective wind area, ft2
Notes
Figure 30.3-2B - Components and Clading [h≤ 60 ft (h≤ 18.3 m)]: coefficient
external pressure, (GCp), for closed and enclosed buildings
partial—gable roof, 7° < θ ≤ 20°
207 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Diagram
Elevation
Notation
B=The horizontal dimensions of a building measured perpendicular to the wind direction, in ft
(m). h=Average roof height, in ft (m).
External pressure coefficient
K K
Roof Console
o o
ef ef
fill fill
e e
n n
te te
ka ka
n n
a a
n n
oak oak
st st
er er
n n
Notes
6. If there is a console, the smallest horizontal dimension of the building structure shall not include the console dimension, but the edge distance,a,should be
measured from the outside edge of the console.
Figure 30.3-2C - Components and Clading [h≤ 60 ft (h ≤ 18.3 m)]: external

pressure coefficient, (GCp), for closed and partially closed buildings
gable roof, 20° < θ ≤ 27°
© BSN 2020 208 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Diagram
Elevation
Notation Floor plan
(m). h=Average roof height, in ft (m).

K K
o
Roof o Console
ef ef
fill fill
e e
n n
te te
ka ka
n n
a a
n n
oak oak
st st
er er
n n

Notes
Figure 30.3-2D - Components and Clading [h≤ 60 ft (h≤18.3 m)]: pressure coefficient
saddle, 27° <θ≤ 45°
209 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Diagram
Elevation
Floor plan
Notation
h=Average roof height, in ft (m), except elevationseaveshould be used for θ ≤ 10°. B=The horizontal
dimensions of a building measured perpendicular to the wind direction, in ft (m). θ = Angle of roof
K
K
o Roof o
ef
ef
fill
fill
e
e
n
n
te
te
ka
ka
n
n
a
a
n
n
oak
oak
st
st
er
er
n
n

Notes
6. Interpolation (GCp)between two valuesh/Ndifferent required for 0.5 <h/N<0.8.

7.Bfor Zone 3 is the smallest horizontal dimension.Bfor Zones 1 and 2e it is perpendicular to the building width
and perpendiculareavedesignated Zone 2e.
Figure 30.3-2E - Components and Clading [h≤ 60 ft (h≤ 18.3 m)]: external
pressure coefficient, (GCp), for closed buildings and partially covered roofs
shield, 7° < θ ≤ 20° (roof)
© BSN 2020 210 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Diagram
Elevation
Floor plan
Notation
h=Average roof height, in ft (m), except elevationseaveshould be used for θ ≤ 10°. B=The horizontal
dimensions of a building measured perpendicular to the wind direction, in ft (m). θ = Angle of roof
Kexternal pressure coefficient
K K
o o
ef ef
fill fill
e e
n n
te te
ka ka
n n
a a
n n
oak oak
st st
er er
n n
Notes
7. Interpolation (GCp)between two valuesh/Ndifferent required for 0.5 <h/N<0.8.

8.Bfor Zone 3 is the smallest horizontal dimension.Bfor Zones 1 and 2e it is perpendicular to the building width
and perpendiculareavedesignated Zone 2e.
Figure 30.3-2F - Components and Clading [h≤ 60 ft (h≤ 18.3 m)]: external
shield, 7° <θ≤ 20° (console)
211 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Diagram
Elevation
Floor plan
Notation
(m). h=Average roof height, in ft (m)
K K
Console
o Roof o
ef ef
fill fill
e e
n n
te te
ka ka
n n
a a
n n
oak oak
st st
er er
n n
Notes
Figure 30.3-2G - Components and Clading [h≤ 60 ft (h≤ 18.3 m)]: external
shield, 20° <θ≤ 27° (roof and console)
© BSN 2020 212 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Diagram
Elevation
Floor plan
Notation
Ko
Ko Ko
effi
effi effi
si
si si
en
en en
Te
te Te
ka
ka ka
na
na na
n
n n
Oak
oak Oak
st
st st
er
er er
na
na na
l,
l, l,
Effective wind area, ft2(m2) Effective wind area, ft2(m2) Effective wind area, ft2(m2)
Notes
5. If there is a console, the smallest horizontal dimension of the building structure shall not include the console dimension, but the edge distance,a,should
be measured from the outside edge of the console.
6.Amin=minimum tributary area (for areas less thanAMin,use value (GCp)ForAmin).
7.Amax=maximum tributary area (for areas greater thanAmax,use value (GCp)ForAmax).
8. Value (GCp)given for the roof slope, θ = 450; for other slopes, use Eq.
Figure 30.3-2H - Components and Clading [h≤ 60 ft (h≤ 18.3 m)]: external
shield, 27° <θ≤ 45° (roof)
213 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Diagram
Elevation
Floor plan
Notation
K K
Ko oe
oe
effi fis
fis
si ie
ie
en n
n
te te
te
ka ka
ka
na na
na
n n
n
oak oak
oak
st st
st
er er
er
na na
na
l, l,
l,
Effective wind area, ft2(m2) Effective wind area, ft2(m2) Effective wind area, ft2(m2)
Notes
6. If there is a console, the smallest horizontal dimension of the building structure shall not include the console dimension, but the edge distance,a,should be measured
from the outside edge of the console.
7.Amin=minimum tributary area (for areas less thanAMin,use value (GCp)ForAmin.

8.Amax=maximum tributary area (for areas greater thanAmax,use value (GCp)ForAmax.
9. Value (GCp)given for the roof slope, θ = 450; for other slopes, use Eq.
Figure 30.3-2I - Components and Clading [h≤60 ft (h≤18.3 m)]: external pressure
coefficient, (GCp), for closed and partially covered buildings with shield roofs, 27°
<θ≤45° (console)
© BSN 2020 214 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Diagram
Elevation
Elevation
Notation
a =10% of the smallest horizontal dimension or 0.4h,choose the smallest, but not less
of 4 % of the smallest horizontal dimension or 3 ft.
b (0.9m). = 1.5h1, but not greater than 100 ft (30.5 m).
h = Average roof height, in ft (m).
hi =h1orh2;h=h1+h2;h1≥ 10 ft (3.1 m);hi/h=0.3 to 0.7.
W=Building width
Wi=W1orW2orW3in Figure 30.3-1.W=W1+W2orW1+W2+W3;Wi/W=0.25
to 0.75.
Notes
At the lowest level of the flat, multi-story roof shown here, the zone designations and pressure
coefficients shown in Figure 30.3-2A shall be applied, except that at the top wall-roof intersection,
Zone 3 shall be treated as Zone 2 and Zone 2 shall be treated as Zone 1 . Positive value (GCp)The
same as for the wall in Figure 30.3-1 should be applied to the cross-hatched area shown here.
graded
215 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Diagram
Building elevation
(2 spans or more)
Plan and elevation of a
Notation
single span module
a =10 % of the smallest horizontal dimension of a single span module or 0.4h,choose the smallest, but no
may be less than 4% of the smallest horizontal dimension of a single span module or 3 ft.
h (0.9m). = Average roof height in ft (m), except eave height must be used for θ ≤ 10°. = Width of the
W building module, in ft (m).
Ko
Ko
effi
effi
si
si
en
en
te
te
ka
ka
na
na
n
n
oak
oak
st
st
er
er
na
na
l,
l,
Effective wind area, ft2(m2)
Notes
5. For θ ≤ 10°, the value (GCp)from Figure 30.3-2A.
multi-span saddle
© BSN 2020 216 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Diagram
Elevation
Floor plan
Notation
a =10% smallest horizontal dimension or 0.4h,choose the smallest, but it should not be less than 4%
smallest horizontal dimension or 3 ft.
h (0.9m). = Higheaveshould be used for θ ≤ 10°.
W=Building width, in ft (m).
K
oe
fis
ie
n
te
ka
na
n
oak
st
er
na
Notes
Figure 30.3-5A - Components and Clading [h≤ 60 ft (h≤ 18.3 m)]: external
unilateral sloping roof, 3° < θ ≤ 10°
217 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Diagram
Elevation
Floor plan
Notation
smallest horizontal or 3 ft. (0.9m). =
h Average roof height in ft (m). = Width of
W the building, in ft (m).
K
oe
fis
ie
n
te
ka
na
n
oak
st
er
na
l,
Notes
2. The horizontal scale is expressed in terms of effective wind areaA, in ft2(m2).
Figure 30.3-5B - Components and Clading [h≤60 ft (h≤18.3 m)]: external

unilateral sloping roof, 10° < θ≤30°
© BSN 2020 218 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Diagram
Building elevation
Floor plan (2 spans or more)
Notation
a =10% of the smallest horizontal dimension or 0.4h,choose the smallest, but it should not be less than 4%
smallest horizontal dimension or 3 ft. (0.9m).
h = Average roof height in ft (m), except heighteaveshould be used for ϴ ≤ 100. = Width of the
W building module, in ft (m).
K
oe
fis
ie
n
te
ka
na
n
oak
st
er
na
Notes
2. The horizontal scale is expressed in effective wind areaA, in ft2(m2).
saw
219 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Diagram
Wind direction
Direction
Wind
Floor plan
Notation Elevation
f=Dome height, in ft (m).
D=Diameter of a circular structure or structural member, in ft (m). h
D=Height to base of dome, in ft (m). θ = angle of the roof plane from
the horizontal, in degrees

Coefficient for a dome with a round base
Pressure Pressure Pressure Pressure
external negative positive positive
θ, degrees 0-90 0-60 61-90
(GCp) - 0.9 + 0.9 + 0.5
Notes
1. The value expressed in (GCp) is used withq(hD+f)with (hD+f) is the height at the top of the dome.
2.The positive and negative signs represent pressure acting toward and away from the surface.
4. Valid values for 0 ≤hD/D≤ 0.5, 0.2 ≤f/D≤ 0.5.
5. θ = 0 degrees at the chord, θ = 90 degrees at the top of the dome,fmeasured from the chord to the top of the dome.
Figure 30.3-7 - Components and Clading (all heights): external pressure

coefficient, (GCp), for closed buildings and partially covered roofs
dome
Table 30.4-1 - Steps to determine the wind load C&K for

closed low-rise buildings (simple method)
Step 1:Determine the risk category, see Table 1.5-1

Step 2:Determine the basic wind speed,V, for the appropriate risk category; see Books
- topographic factors,Kzt; see Article 26.8 and Figure 26.8-1
Step 4:Enter the image to determine the wind pressure ath=30 ft.,pnet30; Look
Figure 30.4-1
Step 5:Enter an image to determine adjustments for height and exposure
building,-; see Figure 30.4-1
Step 6:Determine the adjusted air pressure,pnet; see Equation 30.4-1.
© BSN 2020 220 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Part 3: Buildings withh>60 ft (h>18.3m)

NOTES Use Part 3 of Article 30 to determine the wind pressure for the C&K of
enclosed and partially enclosed buildings with h >60 ft. (18.3 m) which has a roof shape as
specified in the appropriate drawing. These provisions are based on the Directive Procedure
withwind pressure calculated from established equations that apply to each building surface.
30.5 Building type
The provisions of Article 30.5 apply to closed or partially closed buildings with an
average roof heighth>60 ft. (h<18.3 m) with a flat roof, pitched roof, gable roof, shield
roof, mansard roof, curved roof, or dome roof. The steps required to determine wind
loads on components and cladding for building types are shown in Table 30.5-1.
30.5.1 Conditions
To determine the design wind pressure in K&K using the provisions of Article 30.5.2,
the conditions shown in the selected drawing must apply to the building under
consideration.
Design wind pressure in K&K for all buildings withh>60 ft (h<

18.3 m) must be determined from the following equation:
p = q(GCp) –qi(GCpi) (lb/ft2) (30.5-1)
p = q(GCp) –qi(GCpi) (N/m2) (30.5-1.si)

with
q =qzfor walls on the windward side it is calculated at heightzabove the surface
land;
q =qhfor walls on the windward side, side walls, and roofs are evaluated at heighth; =qhfor walls on
qi the side where the wind comes, side walls, walls on the side where the wind goes, and the roof
from closed buildings and to evaluate negative internal pressure in partially closed
buildings.
qi =qzfor evaluation of positive internal pressure in partially enclosed buildings in
where is the heightzwhich is defined as the level of the highest opening in a building
that can influence positive internal pressure. For evaluation of positive internal
pressure,qimay be conservatively evaluated at heighth(qi= qh);
(GCp) = external pressure coefficient is given in:

• Figure 30.5-1 for walls and flat roofs,
• Figure 27.3-3, note 4, for curved roof,
• Figure 30.3-7 for dome roof,
• Note 6 of Figure 30.5-1 for roof angles and other geometry;
(GCpi) = internal pressure coefficient given in Table 26.13-1.
qAndqishall be evaluated using the exposures specified in Article 26.7.3.
EXCEPTIONIn buildings with an average roof heighthgreater than 60 ft (18.3 m) and less than 90
ft (27.4 m), the value (GCp) from Figure 30.3-1 to Figure 30.3-6 are permitted if the height to
width ratio is one or less.
221 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Diagram
Flat Roof/Shield/Gable (0° ≤ θ ≤ 7°) Shield Roof (7° ≤ θ ≤ 45°)
Gable Roof (7° < θ ≤ 45°)
Notation
a=10% smallest horizontal dimension or 0.4h,choose the smallest, but it should not be less than 4 % of the dimension
smallest horizontal or 3 ft. (0.9m).
EXCEPTIONFor buildings with θ = 0° to 7° and the smallest horizontal dimension greater than 300 ft
(90m), the dimensionsashould be limited to a maximum value of 0.8h.
h=Average roof height, in ft (m), except heighteaveshould be used for roof angles < 10°. θ = angle of the
roof plane from the horizontal, in degrees.
Notes
1. The pressure shown is applied perpendicular to the surface, for Exposure B, ath=30 ft (9.1 m). Adjust for
other conditions using Equation (30.4-1).
3. For shield roofs with θ ≤ 25°, Zone 3 must be treated like Zones 2e and 2r.
4. For effective wind areas between those given here, the values can be interpolated; use values
adjusted to suit other lower effective wind areas.
should be measured from the outermost edge of the console.
Figure 30.4-1 - Components and Clading, Part 2 [h≤60 ft (h≤18.3 m)]:

design wind pressure for closed buildings—walls and roof
© BSN 2020 222 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Net Design Wind Pressure,pnet30, in lb/ft2, for Exposure B onh=30ft,V =95-130 mph
In
n
in
n
g
A
ta
p
D
at
ar
/P
er
is
ai
/P
El
Ata
p
Mop
Ana
>7
s.d.
200
Notes:
The positive and negative signs indicate wind pressure acting towards and away from the surface. For effective wind
areas between those given above, loads may be interpolated; otherwise, use a load associated with a lower effective
area. The values shaded in gray indicate the final values, including all permitted reductions, used in the design shall
not be less than those required by Article 30.2.2. Metric conversion: 1.0 ft = 0.3048 m; 1.0 ft2= 0.0929 m2; 1.0 lb/ft2=
0.0479 kN/m2; 1 mph = 0.447 m/sec
Figure 30.4-1 (Continued) - Components and Clading, Part 2 [h≤60 ft (h≤18.3 m)]:
design wind pressure for closed buildings—walls and roof
223 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
In
n
in
n
g
A
ta
p
D
at
ar
/P
er
is
ai
/P
El
At
a
p
P
El
a
n
a
>
7
s.
d.
2
Notes:
0.0479 kN/m2; 1 mph = 0.447 m/sec
Figure 30.4-1 (Continued) - Components and Clading, Part 2 [h ≤ 60 ft (h ≤ 18.3

m)]: design wind pressure for enclosed buildings — walls and roofs
© BSN 2020 224 of 302

"Copyright of the National Standardization Agency, a copy of this standard is made for Sub KT 91-01-S4 Materials, Science, Structure & Ko
SNI 1727:2020
At
ap
Pe
la
na
>
20
s.
d.
27
0
At
ap
P
El
an
a
>
27
s.
d.
45
0
Notes:
0.0479 kN/m2; 1 mph = 0.447 m/sec
Figure 30.4-1 (Continued) - Components and Clading, Part 2 [h≤ 60 ft (h≤ 18.3
m)]: design wind pressure for closed buildings—walls and roofs
225 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
At
ap
Mop
an
a>
20
s.d
.
270
At
ap
Mop
an
a>
27
s.d
.
450
Notes:
0.0479 kN/m2; 1 mph = 0.447 m/sec
© BSN 2020 226 of 302

"Copyright of the National Standardization Agency, a copy of this standard is made for Sub KT 91-01-S4 Materials, Science, Structures
SNI 1727:2020
At
ap
Pe
ris
ai
>7
s.d
.
200
At
a
p
P
er
is
ai
>
2
Notes:
0.0479 kN/m2; 1 mph = 0.447 m/sec
227 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
A
ta
p
P
er
is
ai
>
7
At
a
p
P
er
is
ai
>
2
Notes:
0.0479 kN/m2; 1 mph = 0.447 m/sec
© BSN 2020 228 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
At
a
p
P
er
is
ai
>
2
A
ta
p
P
er
is
ai
>
2
Notes:
0.0479 kN/m2; 1 mph = 0.447 m/sec
229 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Net Design Wind Pressure for Console Roofs,pnet30, in lb/ft2, for Exposure B onh=30ft,V =95-200 mph
At
a
p
0
s.
d.
A
ta
p
P
El
a
n
a
>
7
s.
Notes:
The positive and negative signs indicate wind pressure acting towards and away from the surface. Metric
conversion: 1.0 ft = 0.3048 m; 1.0 ft2= 0.0929 m2; 1.0 lb/ft2= 0.0479 kN/m2; 1 mph = 0.447 m/sec
© BSN 2020 230 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
A
ta
p
P
El
a
n
a
>
2
0
At
a
p
P
El
a
n
a
>
2
7
Notes:
conversion: 1.0 ft = 0.3048 m; 1.0 ft2= 0.0929 m2; 1.0 lb/ft2= 0.0479 kN/m2; 1 mph = 0.447 m/sec
Figure 30.4-1 (Continued) - Components and Clading, Part 2 [h≤60 ft (h≤18.3 m)]:
design wind pressure for buildings covered with walls and roofs
231 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
A
ta
p
P
er
is
ai
>
7
At
a
p
P
er
is
ai
>
2
Notes:
The positive and negative signs indicate wind pressure acting towards and away from the
surface.
Metric conversion: 1.0 ft = 0.3048 m; 1.0 ft2= 0.0929 m2; 1.0 lb/ft2= 0.0479 kN/m2; 1 mph = 0.447 m/sec
© BSN 2020 232 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Net Design Wind Pressure for Console Roofs,pnet30, in lb/ft2, for Exposure B onh=30ft, V =95-200 mph
Ata
p
Fairy
sai
> 27
s.d.
450
Notes:
conversion: 1.0 ft = 0.3048 m; 1.0 ft2= 0.0929 m2; 1.0 lb/ft2= 0.0479 kN/m2; 1 mph=0.447 m/sec
TinQi
ggroof height
Flat Roof
Exposure
ratraaverage (ft) B C D
15 0.82 1.21 1.47
20 0.89 1.29 1.55
30 1.00 1.40 1.66
35 1.05 1.45 1.70
40 1.09 1.49 1.74
45 1.12 1.53 1.78
50 1.16 1.56 1.81
55 1.19 1.59 1.84
60 1.22 1.62 1.87
Notes:
2 2 2 2
233 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Table 30.5-1 - Steps for determining the K&K wind load for enclosed or
partially enclosed buildings withh>60 ft (h>18.3m)
Step 1:Determine the risk category, see Table 1.5-1

see Figure 26.5-1 and Figure 26.5-2.
– Wind direction factor,Kd; see Article 26.6 and Table 26.6-1
– Exposure category B, C or D; see Article 26.7.
– Topographic factors,Kzt; see Article 26.8 and Figure 26.8-1
– Land surface elevation factor,Ke; see Article 26.9 and Table 26.9-1
– Classification of closure, see Article 26.12
– Internal pressure coefficient, (GCpi), see Article 26.13 and Table 26.13-1
Step 4:Determine the velocity pressure exposure coefficient,KzorKh; see Table
26.10-1
Step 5:Determine the velocity pressure,qh, Equation (26.10-1) Step
6:Determine the external pressure coefficient, (GCp):
– Flat walls and roof (θ < 10°), see Figure 30.5-1
– Gable roof and shield roof, see Figure 30.3-2 per Note 6 of Figure 30.5-1
– Curved roof, see Figure 27.3-3, Note 4

– Dome roof, see Figure 30.3-7
Step 7:Calculate wind pressure,p, Equation (30.5-1)
© BSN 2020 234 of 302

"Copyright of the National Standardization Agency, a copy of this standard is made for Sub KT 91-01-S4 Materials, Science, Structure & Ko
SNI 1727:2020
Diagram
Roof Plan Wall elevation
Notation
a=10% of the smallest horizontal dimension, but shall not be less than 3 ft. (0.9m).
h=Average roof height, in ft (m), except the height of the lowest part of the roof should be used for - ≤ 100. z
=height above ground, in ft (m).
- =The angle of the roof plane from the horizontal, in degrees.
Ko
effi
sie
n
tech
an
an
oak
ste
rn
al
(G
Cp

Notes
1. Vertical scale showsGCpused withqzorqhappropriate.
2. The horizontal scale shows the effective wind areaA, in ft2(m2).
3. Positive and negative signs indicate pressure acting toward and away from the surface.
4. Useqzwith a positive value (GCp)Andqhwith a negative value (GCp).
5. Each component is designed for maximum positive and negative pressure.
6. Coefficient here for roofs with an angle of - ≤ 7°. For angles and other roof geometries, use the value (GCp) from Figure
30.3-2A-2I and Figures 30.3-5A, 5B and the occurrenceqhbased on the exposure defined in Article 26.7.
7. If a parapet equal to or higher than 3 ft (0.9 m) is installed around the roof with - ≤ 10°, Zone 3 shall be treated as Zone
2.
Figure 30.5-1 - Components and Clading, Part 3 [h >60 ft (h >18.3 m)]: coefficients
external pressure, (GCp), for closed and partially closed buildings
walls and roof
235 of 302
SNI 1727:2020

enclosed building with 60 ft <h≤160 ft (18.3 m < h≤48.8m)
Step 1:Determine the risk category, see Table 1.5-1.

Step 4: For flat, gable, shield, one-sided and mansard roofs with
h≤60 ft (h≤18.3 m), refer to the figure in Table 30.6-2 and determine
roof and wall pressure directly from Figure 30.4-1.
Step 5: For flat roofs and unilateral sloping roofs withh>60 ft (h>18.3 m), see
Table 30.6-2 to determine the pressure on walls and roofs,ph, pz.
For flat roofs, shields, gables, one-sided sloping roofs and dormers
mansrad withh>60 ft (h>18.3 m) and roof slopeθ≤ 7 degrees, use roof
pressure as indicated in T30.6-2.
For shield and gable roofs withh>60 ft (h>18.3 m), and roof slopeθ> 7
degrees, use Figure 30.4-1 with the appropriate velocity pressureqh.
Step 6:Determine topographic factors,Kzt, and use a factor for that pressure
determined from the table (if appropriate); see Article 26.8.
© BSN 2020 236 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Part 4: Buildings with 60 ft <h≤160 ft (18.3 m <h≤48.8m)

(simplified)
NOTES Part 4 of Article 30 is a simple method for determining
wind pressure for K&K in closed buildings with 60 ft <h≤ 160 ft (18.3 m <h≤ 48.8 m)
which has a roof shape as specified in the applicable drawings. This provision is based
on the Steering Procedure from Section 3 with the wind pressure selected directly from
the table and adjusted as necessary. Figure 30.4-1 in Section 2 refers to buildings withh
≤ 60 ft (h≤ 18.3 m) for all roof shapes and for roof shapes required ifh>60 ft (h>18.3m).
30.6 Building type
The provisions of Article 30.6 apply to closed buildings that have an average roof height
of 60 ft <h≤ 160 ft (18.3 m <h≤ 48.8 m) with a flat roof, gable roof, shield roof, one-sided
sloping roof, ormansards. The steps required for determining the wind load on K&K for
this type of building are shown in Table 30.6-1.
30.6.1 Wind loads: Components and Clading
30.6.1.1 Wall and roof surfaces
The design wind pressure at the planned wall and roof surface zones shall be
determined from Table 30.6-2 based on the applicable base wind speedV, average roof
heighth, and roof slopeθ. Buildings with an average roof height of more than 60 ft (18.3
m) but less than 70 ft (21.3 m) must use a design wind pressure of 70 ft (21.3 m). The
pressures in the table must be multiplied by the Exposure Adjustment Factor (FPE)
shown in the table if the exposure is different from Exposure C. The pressures in Table
30.6-2 are based on an effective wind area of 10 ft2(0.93 m2). Reductions in wind
pressure for larger effective wind areas can be taken based on the Reduction Factors
(FR) shown in the table. Pressure must be applied throughout the zone designated in
the drawing.
The final design wind pressure must be determined from the following equation:
p=ptable(FPE)(FR)Kzt (30.6-1)
with:
FR = Effective area reduction factor from Table 30.6-2
FPE = Exposure Adjustment Factor from Table 30.6-2; and =
Kzt topographic factors as specified in Article 26.8
For flat roofs, shield roofs, gable roofs, one-sided sloping roofs and roofsmansards
with all roof slopesθAndh≤ 60 ft (h≤ 18.3 m), roof pressure should be obtained from
Section 2 and Figure 30.4-1.
For flat roofs, shield roofs, gable roofs, one-sided sloping roofs and roofsmansards
withh>60 ft (h>18.3 m) and roof slopeθ≤ 7 degrees, roof and wall pressure should be
applied as shown in Table 30.6-2. For shield and gable roofs withh>60 ft (h>18.3 m) and
all roof slopesθ> 7 degrees, Figure 30.4-1 must be applied with appropriate speed
pressureqh. For unilateral sloping roofs and dormersmansardswithh>60 ft (h>18.3 m)
and all
237 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
roof slopeθ> 7 degrees, see figure in Table 30.6-2 for roof zone determination. The roof
pressure should be applied from Figure 30.4-1 with the appropriate velocity pressureqh
. When Figure 30.4-1 is used, an adjustment factor λ shall be applied to the roof and
wall pressures shown in the figure for other exposure and height conditions.
30.6.1.2 Parapets
The design wind pressure at the parapet surface shall be based on the wind pressure
for the edge zone and the corresponding corner zone where the parapet is located, as
shown in Table 30.6-2, modified based on the following two load cases:
- Load Case A consists of applying the appropriate positive wall pressure from the table to
the front surface of the parapet while applying the appropriate negative edge roof
pressure or corner zone roof pressure from the table to the rear surface of the parapet.
- Load Case B consists of applying the appropriate positive wall pressure from the table to
the back surface of the parapet and applying the appropriate negative wall pressure
from the table to the front surface of the parapet.
The pressures in Table 30.6-2 are based on an effective wind area of 10 ft2(0.93 m2).
Reductions in wind pressure for larger effective wind areas can be taken based on the
reduction factors shown in the table.
Pressure should be applied to the parapet according to Figure 30.6-1. Tallhused in

Figure 30.6-1 to determine pressure should be the height to the top of the parapet.
Determine the final pressure from Equation (30.6- 1).
30.6.1.3 Console roof
Design wind pressure on console roofs for flat roofs, shield roofs, gable roofs,
mansards, and a one-sided sloping roof withh≤ 60 ft (h≤ 18.3 m) should be based on
the roof zone as shown in the drawing in Table 30.6-2 and the pressure in the table
shown in Figure 30.4-1. Design wind pressure on console roof withh>60 ft (h>18.3 m) as
shown in the figure in Table 30.6-2 shall be based on the wind pressure shown for the
applicable zone in Table 30.6-2 modified as described in this Article. For Zone 1 and
Zone 2, a multiplier factor of 1.0 is applied to the pressure shown in Table 30.6-2. For
Zone 3, a multiplier factor of 1.15 is applied to the pressure shown in Table 30.6-2. The
roof has other shapes as shown in the drawings in Table 30.6-2 andh>60 ft (h>18.3 m),
the design wind pressure on the console roof shall be based on the designated roof
zones and the roof pressures as shown in Figure 30.4-1 using appropriate velocity
pressuresqhfor building height.
The pressures in Table 30.6-2 are based on an effective wind area of 10 ft2(0.93 m2).
Reductions in wind pressure for larger effective wind areas can be taken based on the
reduction multipliers shown in Table 30.6-2. The pressure on the roof console includes the
pressure from the top and bottom surfaces of the console. The pressure on the bottom side
of the console is equal to the pressure of the adjacent wall. See the console drawing shown
in Figure 30.6-2. Determine the final pressure from Equation (30.6- 1).
© BSN 2020 238 of 302

"Copyright of the National Standardization Agency, a copy of this standard is made for Sub KT 91-01-S4 Materials, Science, Structure & Building construction,
SNI 1727:2020
Table 30.6-2 - Components and Clading, Part 4 [h≤160 ft (h≤48.8 m)]: Zone
K&K for closed buildings—roof and wall pressure K&K
Parameters for Use of K&K Wall and Roof Pressure
Flat Roof:θ≤ 7 degrees;h ≤60 ft

Flat Roof/Shield/Gable/Mansards:θ≤ 7 degrees;h ≤60 ft
Unilateral Sloping Roof:7 < θ ≤ 30 degrees;h ≤160 ft Gable Roof:7 < θ ≤ 45 degrees;h ≤160 ft
Shield Roof:7 ≤ θ ≤ 45 degrees;h ≤160 ft RoofMansards:7 ≤ θ ≤ 45 degrees;h ≤160 ft (See Note no. 2)
Notation
a=10 % of the smallest horizontal dimension but not less than 3 ft (0.9 m). h=
Average roof height, in ft (m).
V=Base wind speed, in mph (m/s).
Notes
1. See Article 30.6.1.1 for wall and roof pressures listed in Table 30.6-2 and Figure 30.4-1, as applicable.
2. For the roofmansards, apply roof pressure on the sloping surface as in the table for gable sloping surfaces; apply
roof pressure on a flat surface (θ<7°) as in the table for flat roofs.
239 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Table 30.6-2 (Continued) - Components and Clading, Part 4 [h≤160 ft (h≤48.8

m)]: K&K zone for pressure-covered buildings with roof and K&K walls
Roof and Wall Pressure for Components and Cladding, Exposure Adjustment Factor (FPE)
Ti Exposure B D exposure
ng
gi
ge
du
ng
h
(ft.
Exposure adjustment factor
Notes for K&K wall and roof pressure tables

1. For each roof shape, Exposure C,V, Andhdetermine roof pressure and wall cladding for appropriate
zones. For exposures other than B or D, multiply the pressure from the table by the appropriate
exposure adjustment factor as determined from the figure above.
2. Interpolation between valueshallowed. For the emphasis on valueVother than that shown in the
K&K Roof and Wall Pressure Table, multiply the value in the table forV'which is given using the
following equation:
Pressure onVreviewed = pressure from the current tableV'x [Vreviewed/V']2.
3. When two load cases are shown, both positive and negative pressures must be taken into account.
4. Pressure is indicated for an effective wind area equal to 10 ft2(0.93 m2). For larger effective wind
areas, the indicated pressure can be reduced by the reduction coefficient applicable to each Zone, as
shown in the Effective Wind Area Reduction Factor table and figure.
5. Metric conversion: 1.0 ft = 0.3048 m.
© BSN 2020 240 of 302

"Copyright of the National Standardization Agency, a copy of this standard is made for Sub KT 91-01-S4 Materials, Science, Structure & Building construction,
SNI 1727:2020

m)]: K&K zone for closed buildings—roof and wall pressure
K&K
Effective wind area reduction factor (FR)
F
a
kt
o
r
re
Effective wind area (ft2)

Reduction factors for pressures are shown in the wall & K&K roof
Notes
1. For flat, gable, shield, one-sided, and sloping roofs mansards
withh≤ 60 ft (h≤ 18.3 m) and all roof slope angles θ, apply the
requirements of Section 2 and Figure 30.4-1.
2. For flat, gable, shield, one-sided, and sloping roofs mansards

withh>60 ft (h>18.3 m) and roof slope angle θ ≤ 7°, apply roof
pressure as shown in the K&K Wall and Roof Pressure Table.
3. For shield and gable roofs withh>60 ft (h>18.3 m) and all roof
slope angles θ > 7° , apply Figure 30.4-1 and velocity pressureq
happropriate. See Note 6 in Figure 30.5-1.
4. For unilateral and sloping roofsmansardswithh>60 ft (h>

18.3 m) and all roof slope angles θ > 7°, refer to the figure in
“Parameters for Use” according to the appropriate roof zone
and apply the roof pressure from Figure 30.4-1 with the
velocity pressureqhappropriate. See Note 6 in Figure 30.5-1.
5. If Figure 30.4-1 applies, apply an adjustment factor λ to the roof

pressure as listed in the table for other height and exposure
conditions.
6. Metric conversion: 1.0 ft = 0.3038 m; 1.0 ft2=0.0929 m2;
2 2
241 of 302
© BSN 2020
SNI 1727:2020
Flat Roof
Unilateral Sloping Roof
Flat Roof
Flat Roof
Flat Roof
242 of 302
Flat Roof
Flat Roof

Flat Roof
Table 30.6-2 (Continued) - Components and Clading, Part 4 [h≤ 160 ft (h≤ 48.8
SNI 1727:2020

243 of 302
Flat Roof
Flat Roof
Flat Roof
Flat Roof
© BSN 2020
SNI 1727:2020
Flat Roof
Flat Roof
Flat Roof
Flat Roof
244 of 302
Flat Roof
Flat Roof

Flat Roof
SNI 1727:2020


Flat Roof
245 of 302
Flat Roof
Flat Roof
Flat Roof
Table 30.6-2 (Continued) - Components and Clading, Part 4 [h≤160 ft (h≤48.8 m)]:

Flat Roof
Flat Roof
K&K zone for roof and wall pressure-closed buildings K&K

Flat Roof
246 of 302
Flat Roof
Flat Roof
Flat Roof
Flat Roof
SNI 1727:2020
© BSN 2020
Table 30.6-2 (Continued) - Components and Clading, Part 4 [h≤160 ft (h≤48.8 m)]:
SNI 1727:2020
K&K zone for roof and wall pressure-closed buildings K&K
247 of 302
Flat Roof
Flat Roof
Flat Roof
Flat Roof
SNI 1727:2020
Diagram
Notes
Parapet on downwind side: Load Case A
1. Parapet pressure on the windward side(p1) which is determined using positive wall pressure(p5) Zone4 or Zone 5
from Table 30.6-2. Parapet pressure on the windward side (p2) is determined using negative roof pressure (p7) Zone 2
or Zone 3 from Table 30.6-2.
Parapet on the windward side: Load Case B
1. Parapet pressure on the windward side (p3) is determined using positive wall pressure(p5) Zone 4 or Zone 5 from Table
30.6-2.
2. Parapet pressure on the windward side (p4) is determined using negative wall pressure (p6) Zone 4 or 5 of Table
30.6-2.
NOTESSee Note 5 to Figure 30.3-2A and Note 7 to Figure 30.5-1 for reduction of roof pressure on components and
cladding when a parapet is 3 ft (0.9m) or more high.
Figure 30.6-1 - Components and Clading, Part 4 [h≤160 ft (h≤18.3 m)]: load
wind parapet for closed simple diaphragm buildings
application of parapet wind loads
Diagram
poh=1.0 x roof pressurepfrom the table for the edges of Zones 1, 2 p

oh=1.15 x roof pressurepfrom the table for Zone 3 corners
Notes
1. poh=roof pressure on the console for the corresponding interior zone, edge or corner from the figure on the roof pressure table.
2. pohfrom the figure includes the load from the top and bottom surfaces of the console.
3. Pressurepson the bottom of the console can be considered the same as the wall pressurepw.
Figure 30.6-2 - Components and Clading, Part 4 [p≤160 ft (h≤18.3 m)]: load
wind console roof for simple closed diaphragm building
application of roof console wind loads
© BSN 2020 248 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Part 5: Open buildings
NOTES Use Part 5 of Article 30 to determine the wind pressure for K&K on
open buildingwhich has a pitched roof, one-sided sloping or a concave roof. These provisions
are based on the Directive Procedure withWind pressure is calculated from the established
equationapplies to any roof surface.
30.7 Building type
The provisions of Article 30.7 apply to open buildings at all heights that have free-slope
roofs, free-sloping roofs or single-sided free-sloping roofs. The steps required to
determine the wind load in K&K for the building type are shown in Table 30.7-1.
30.7.1 Conditions
To determine the design wind pressure in K&K using the provisions of Article 30.7.2,
the conditions shown in the selected drawing must be appropriate for the building
being reviewed.
The net design wind pressure for component elements and cladding in open buildings
of all heights with one-sided sloping roofs, pitched roofs and concave roofs must be
determined using the following equation:
p=qhGCN (30.7-1)
with
qh = pressure velocity evaluated at the average roof heighthuse
exposure as described in Article 26.7.3 which results in the highest wind load for each
wind direction at the location;
G = wind gust effect factor from Article 26.11; and the
CN = net pressure coefficient is given in:
– Figure 30.7-1 for a one-sided sloping roof
– Figure 30.7-2 for pitched roof
– Figure 30.7-3 for a concave roof
Net pressure coefficientCNincludes contributions from both the top and bottom
surfaces. All load cases shown for each corner of the roof should be checked. Positive
and negative signs indicate pressure acting toward and away from the top surface of
the roof.
249 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Table 30.7-1 Steps for determining K&K wind loads

for open buildings
Step 1:Determine the risk category; see Table 1.5-1

- Wind direction factor,Kd, see Article 26.6 and Table 26.6-1
- topographic factors,Kzt; see Article 26.8 and Figure 26.8-1
- Land surface elevation factor,Ke; see Article 26.9 and Table 26.9-1
- Wind gust effect factor,G; see Article 26.11
Step 4:Determine the velocity pressure exposure coefficient,KzorKh; Look
Table 26.10-1
Step 5:Determine the velocity pressure,qh, Equation (26.10-1). Step
6:Determine the net pressure coefficient,CN
- Unilateral sloping roof, see Figure 30.7-1
- Pitched roof, see Figure 30.7-2
- Concave roof, see Figure 30.7-3
Step 7:Calculate wind pressure,p, Equation (30.7-1)
© BSN 2020 250 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Part 6: Building equipment and roof structures and equipment

NOTES Use Part 6 of Article 30 to determine the air pressure at the console C&K
roofs and parapets of buildings. These provisions are based on the Referral Procedure with wind
pressure calculated from the established equationapplies to any roof console or parapet
surface.
30.8 Parapet
Design wind pressure for component elements and parapet cladding for all building
types and heights, except closed buildings withh≤ 160 ft (h≤ 48.8 m) where the
provisions of Section 4 are applied, shall be determined from the following equation:
p=qp((GCp) – (GCpi)) (30.8-1)
with
qp = velocity pressure evaluated at the top of the parapet; = external
(GCp) pressure coefficient applied in
– Figure 30.3-1 for a wall withh≤ 60 ft (18.8 m)
– Figures 30.3-2A to 30.3-2C for flat roofs, gable roofs, and shield roofs;
And
– Figure 30.3-3 for multi-story roof;
– Figure 30.3-4 for multi-span gable roof;
– Figures 30.3-5A and 30.3-5B for one-sided sloping roofs
– Figure 30.3-6 for saw roof;
– Figure 30.3-7 for domed roofs of all heights;
– Figure 30.5-1 for walls and flat roofs withh>60 ft (18.3 m);
– Figure 27.3-3, Note 4, for curved roof;
(GCpi) =internal pressure coefficient from Table 26.13-1, based on the porosity of
parapet closure
Two load cases, see Figure 30.8-1, must be considered:

- Load Case A: The parapet on the downwind side shall consist of the application of
positive wall pressure as per Figure 30.3-1 [h≤ 60 ft (h≤ 18.3 m)] or Figure 30.5-1 [h>
60 ft (h>18.3 m)] for the surface on the windward side of the parapet in conjunction
with the corresponding negative edge roof pressure or corner zone roof pressure
of Figure 30.3-2A, B or C, 30.3-3, 30.3-4, 30.3-5A or B ), 30.3-6, 30.3-7, Figure 27.3-3
Note 4, or Figure 30.5-1 [h>60 ft (h>18.3 m)] as applied to the surface on the
windward side of the parapet.
- Load Case B: The parapet on the windward side shall consist of the application of
positive wall pressure as per Figure 30.3-1 [h≤ 60 ft (h≤ 18.3 m)] or Figure 30.5-1 [h>
60 ft (h>18.3 m)] for the surface on the windward side of the parapet, and the
application of the appropriate negative wall pressure from Figure 30.3-1 [h≤ 60 ft (h
≤ 18.3 m)] or Figure 30.5-1 [h>60 ft (h>18.3 m)] as applied to the surface on the
windward side. Edge zones and corner zones shall be arranged as shown in the
corresponding drawings. (GCp) shall be determined for the appropriate roof angle
and effective wind area from the applicable drawings.
If internal pressure is present, both load cases must be evaluated due to positive and negative
internal pressure.
The steps required to determine the wind loads on the components and cladding of a
parapet are shown in Table 30.8-1.
251 of 302
"Copyright of the National Standardization Agency, a copy of this standard is made for Sub KT 91-01-S4 Materials, Science, Structure & Construction Ba
SNI 1727:2020
Diagram
Elevation
Notation Floor plan
a = 10% of the smallest horizontal dimension or 0.4h, choose the smallest but should not be less than 4% of the smallest
horizontal dimension or 3 ft. (0.9m).
h = Average roof height, in ft (m).
L = The horizontal dimensions of the building, measured along the wind direction, in ft. (m). The
- = angle of the roof plane from the horizontal, in degrees.
Notes
1. CNshows the net pressure (contribution from the top and bottom surfaces).
2. The actual wind flow is relatively unobstructed wind flow is less than or equal to 50%. Blocked wind flow indicates an
object under the roof is blocking the wind flow (> 50% obstruction).
3. For values of θ other than those indicated, linear interpolation is permitted.
4. Positive and negative signs indicate pressure towards and away from the top surface of the roof.
5. K&K elements must be designed for the positive and negative pressure coefficients listed.
Figure 30.7-1 - Components and Clading (0.25 ≤h∕L≤ 1.0): net pressure coefficient,
CN,for open buildings with unilateral free-sloping roofs, θ ≤ 45°
© BSN 2020 252 of 302

"Copyright of the National Standardization Agency, a copy of this standard is made for Sub KT 91-01-S4 Materials, Science, Structure & Construction Ba
SNI 1727:2020
Diagram
Elevation
Floor plan Floor plan
Notation
a = 10% of the smallest horizontal dimension or 0.4h, choose the smallest but should not be less than 4% of the
smallest horizontal dimension or 3 ft. (0.9m). Dimensionsa, as shown in Figure 30.7-1. Average roof height, in ft (m).
h =
L = The horizontal dimensions of the building, measured along the wind direction, in ft. (m). The
- = angle of the roof plane from the horizontal, in degrees.
Notes
6.CNshows the net pressure (contribution from the top and bottom surfaces).
object under the roof is blocking the wind flow (> 50 % obstruction).
9. Positive and negative signs indicate pressure toward and away from the top surface of the roof.
Figure 30.7-2 - Components and Clading (0.25≤h∕L≤1.0): pressure coefficient

net,CN,for open buildings with free-roof roofs, θ≤45°
253 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Diagram
Floor plan Floor plan Elevation

Notation
a=10% of the smallest horizontal dimension or 0.4h, choose the smallest but it should not be less than 4% of the dimension
smallest horizontal or 3 ft. (0.9m). Dimensionsa: as shown in Figure 30.7-1. h=Average roof
height, in ft (m).
L=The horizontal dimensions of the building, measured along the wind direction, in ft. (m).
- =The angle of the roof plane from the horizontal, in degrees.
Notes
1. CNshows the net pressure (contribution from the top and bottom surfaces).
object under the roof is blocking the wind flow (>50% obstruction).
4. Positive and negative signs indicate pressure towards and away from the top surface of the roof.
Figure 30.7-3 - Components and Clading (0.25≤h∕L≤1.0): pressure coefficient

net,CN,for open buildings with concave-free roofs, θ≤45°
© BSN 2020 254 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Diagram
Notes
Parapet on downwind side: Load Case A
1. Parapet pressure on the windward side(p1) determined using positive wall pressure (p5) zone 4
or Zone 5 of the related image.
2. Parapet pressure on the windward side (p2) is determined using negative roof pressure (p7) zone 2 or
Zone 3 of the related image
Parapet on the windward side: Load Case B
1. Parapet pressure on the windward side(p3) is determined using positive wall pressure (p5) zone 4 or Zone 5 of
the related image.
2. Parapet pressure on the windward side (p4) is determined using negative wall pressure (p6) zone 4 or Zone 5 of
the related image.
NOTES:See Note 5 in Figure 30.3-2A and Note 7 in Figure 30.5-1 for reductions in Components and Clading – roof
pressure when there is a parapet with a height of 3 ft (0.9 m) or more.
Figure 30.8-1 - Components and Clading, Part 6 (all building elevations

building): parapet wind load, all types of building wind load
parapet
Notation
poh= net roof pressure on the console roof ps=
pressure on the bottom of the console roof pw=
pressure on the wall
Notes:
1. poh= net roof pressure, at the console for the corresponding
edge or corner zone from the figure in the roof pressure
table.
2. pohof the figure includes pressure contributions from the top
and bottom surfaces of the console.
3. Positive pressurepson the bottom of the console can be
considered the same as the wall pressurepw.
Figure 30.9-1 - Components and Clading (all building heights): roof console wind
loads for all building types wind loads C&K
on the roof console
255 of 302
SNI 1727:2020

parapet
Step 1:Determine the risk category of the building; see Table 1.5-1 Step 2:
Determine the basic wind speed,V, for the applicable risk category;
- Land surface elevation factor,Ke; see Article 26.9 and Table 26.9-1
Step 4:Determine the velocity pressure exposure coefficient,Kh, at the top
parapet; see Table 26.10-1
Step 5:Determine the velocity pressure,qp, at the top of the parapet with
using Equation (26.10-1)
Step 6:Determine the external pressure coefficients for wall and roof surfaces
adjacent to the parapet, (GCp)
- Wall withh≤ 60 ft. (18.3 m), see Figure 30.3-1.
- Flat roof, gables and shields, see Figure 30.3-2 A-I.
- Multi-level roof, see Figure 30.3-3.
- Multi-span gable roof, see Figure 30.3-4.
- Unilateral sloping roof, see Figures 30.3-5A and 30.3-5B
- Saw roof, see Figure 30.3-6
- Dome roof of all heights, see Figure 30.3-7
- Flat walls and roof withh>60 ft. (18.3 m), see Figure 30.5-1
- Curved roof, see Figure 27.3-3, Note 4.
Step 7:Calculate wind pressure,p, using Equation 30.8-1 on the parapet surface on the
downwind side and on the downwind side, considering two load cases (Case A and
Case B) as shown in Figure 30.8-1.
30.9 Rooftop console
Design wind pressure for roof consoles of closed and partially closed buildings for all
heights, except closed buildings withh≤ 160 ft (48.8 m) for the provisions of Section 4
used, shall be determined from the following equation:
p=qh[(GCp) – (GCpi)] (lb/ft2) (30.9-1)
p=qh[(GCp) – (GCpi)] (N/m2) (30.10-1.si)

with
qh = pressure velocity from Article 26.10 evaluated at the average roof heighth
using the exposures described in Article 26.7.3;
(GCp) = External pressure coefficients for consoles are given in Figures 30.3-2A through
30.3-2C (flat roofs, gable roofs, and shield roofs), including contributions from the top
and bottom surfaces of the console. The external pressure coefficient for the
covering at the bottom of the roof console is equal to the external pressure
coefficient on the adjacent wall surface, adjusted for the effective wind area,
determined from Figure 30.3-1 or Figure 30.5-1 as applicable;
(GCpi) = Internal pressure coefficients are given in Table 26.13-1
© BSN 2020 256 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
The steps required to determine the wind load on the K&K of a roof console are shown
in Table 30.9-1.
Table 30.9-1 - Steps to determine the wind load of K&K roof consoles
Step 1:Determine the building risk category, see Table 1.5-1. Step 2:Determine
the base speed,V, for the applicable risk category; Look
- Land surface elevation factor,Ke, see Article 26.9 and Table 26.9-1
- Classification of closure, see Article 26.12
Step 4:Determine the velocity pressure exposure coefficient,Kh, see Table 26.10-1.
Step 5:Determine the velocity pressure,qh, at an average roof heighthwith
using Equation (26.10-1).
Step 6:Determine the external pressure coefficient, (GCp), by using
Figure 30.3-2A-D, F, G and I for flat roofs, gable roofs and shield
roofs, as shown in the diagram.
Step 7:Calculate wind pressure,p, using Equation 30.9-1;
refer to Figure 30.9-1.
30.10 Building roof structures and equipment
The pressure on the K&K on each wall of the roof structure shall be equal to the lateral
force determined according to Article 29.4.1 divided by the surface area of the wall in
contact with the roof structure and shall be considered to act both inward and outward. The
K&K pressure on the roof shall be equal to the vertical lift force determined according to
Article 29.4.1 divided by the horizontal projected area of the roof of the roof structure and
shall be considered to act in an upward direction.
30.11 Canopies are connected to buildings withh≤ 60 ft (h≤ 18.3m)
Design wind pressure for canopies connected to walls of low-rise buildings withh≤ 60 ft
(h≤ 18.3 m) must be determined from the following equation:
p=qh(GCp) (lb/ft2) (30.11 - 1)
p=qh(GCp) (lb/ft2) (N/m2) (30.11-1.si)

with
qh = velocity pressure from Article 26.10 calculated at the average roof heighth
using exposures defined in Article 26.7.3; And
(GCp) = The net pressure coefficients for the connected canopy are given in Figure 30.11-1A-B
for the contributions of both the individual top and bottom surfaces and their
combined (net) effects on the connected canopy.
The steps required for the determination of wind loads on connected canopies are
shown in Table 30.11-1.
257 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Diagram
Ko
effi
sie
n
tech
an
an
(G
Cp
Elevation )

Notation
hc=average canopy height, in ft (m). ha=

talleaveaverage, in ft (m). (GCp)=pressure
coefficient.
qh=Velocity pressure is evaluated at heightz=h, in lb/ft2(N/m2) Notes
1. Pressure based on the most critical value for all ratioshc/he.

2. The vertical scale states (GCp) which is used withqh.
3. The horizontal scale represents the effective wind area, in ft2(m2).
4. Pressure with a negative sign acts away from the surface.
Figure 30.11-1A - Pressure coefficient on separate surfaces of the canopy

connected
Diagram
Elevation
Notation
hc = Average canopy height, in ft (m). =

ha Higheaveaverage, in ft (m). = Net
(GCpn) pressure coefficient.
qh =Velocity pressure is evaluated at heightz=h, in lb/ft2(N/m2)
Net Pressure Coefficient
Ko
effi
sie
n
tech
an
an
(G
Cp
)

Notes
1. The vertical scale states (GCpm) which is used withqh.
2. The horizontal scale represents the effective wind area, in ft2(m2).
3. Positive and negative signs indicate uplifting and downward pressure.
5. Use linear interpolation for intermediate valueshc/he.
Figure 30.11-1B - Net pressure coefficient on a connected canopy

considering simultaneous contributions from the top and bottom surfaces
© BSN 2020 258 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Table 30.11-1 - Steps for determining the K&K wind load at

canopy connected
Step 1:Determine the risk category of the building; see Table 1.5-1.
Step 2:Determine the basic wind speed,V, for the appropriate risk category; Look

• Wind direction factor,Kd; see Article 26.6 and Table 26.6-1.
• Exposure category B, C, or D; see Article 26.7.
• Topographic factors,Kv;see Article 26.8 and Figure 26.8-1.
• Land surface elevation factor,Ke; see Article 26.9 and Table 26.9-1
Step 4:Determine the velocity pressure exposure coefficient,Kh; see Table 26.10-1.
Step 5: Determine the velocity pressure,qh, at an average roof heighthwith

using Equation (26.10-1).
Step 6:Determine the surface or net pressure coefficient, (GCp) or (GCpn) with
using Figure 30.11-1A or B.
Step 7: Calculate the wind pressure,p, using Equation (30.11-1).
259 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Part 7: Non-building structures
30.12 Containers (son), silos and round-section tankswithh≤ 120 ft (h≤

36.6m)
Wind pressure on the surfacereceptacle, silos, and isolated round-section tanks must
be calculated based on Articles 30.12.1 through Article 30.12.5.
Grouped round-section containers, silos, and tanks of the same size with a center-to-
center distance greater than 2 diameters shall be treated as isolated structures. For
distances less than 1.25 diameters, the structure shall be treated as clustered and the
wind pressure shall be determined from Article 30.12.6. For the distance in between,
linear interpolation of the values must be usedCp(orCf).
Steps required to determine the wind load onreceptacle (son), silos, and round-section
tanks are listed in Table 30.12-1.

receptacle (son), silos and round-section tanks
Step 1: Determine the risk category; see Table 1.5-1.

Step 2: Determine the basic wind speed,V, for the appropriate risk category; see the
Step 3: Determine the wind load parameters:
• Wind direction factor,Kd; see Article 26.6 and Table 26.6-1.
• Exposure category B, C, or D; see Article 26.7.
• Topographic factors,Kzt;see Article 26.8 and Figure 26.8-1.
• Land surface elevation factor,Ke; see Article 26.9 and Table 26.9-1
• Classification of closure; see Article 26.12.
• Internal pressure coefficient; (GCpi); see Article 26.13 and Article 30.12.3.
Step 4: Determine the velocity pressure exposure coefficient,KzorKh; see Table
26.10-1.
Step 5: Determine the velocity pressure,qh, Equation (26.10-1).
Step 6: Determine the external pressure coefficient, (GCp).
• Wall; see Article 30.12.2 and Article 30.12.6.
• Roof; see Article 30.12.4 and Article 30.12.6.
Step 7: Calculate wind pressure,p, using Equation (30.12-1).
The wind pressure designed in the K&K forreceptacle (son), silos, and insulated round-
section tanks in (lb/ft2) (N/m2) must be determined from the following equation:
p=qh((GCp) – (GCpi)) (30.12-1)

with
qh = pressure velocity for all surfaces calculated at the height of the roof
averageh
(GCp) = external pressure coefficient applied in
• Article 30.12.2 for walls
• Article 30.12.5 for bottom sides
• Article 30.12.4 for roofs
(GCpi) = internal pressure coefficient given in Table 26.13-1 and Article 30.12.3.
© BSN 2020 260 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
30.12.2 External walls of containers (son), silos and round-section tanksisolated
External pressure on the wallreceptacle (son), silos and tanks of circular cross-section
must be determined from the external pressure coefficient (GCp) as a function of the
angleα, is given as follows for the indicated shape range:
(GCp(α))=kbC(α) (30.12-2)
if the cylinder (diaD) standing at ground level or supported by columns at a clear height
(C) less than the height of the cylinder (H), as shown in Figure 30.12-1.
H/Dis in the range of 0.25 to 4.0 inclusive.α= angle from the wind direction to a point on
the wallreceptacle (son), silos, and round-section tanks, in degrees.
kb = 1.0 for C(α)≥ -0.15, or (30.12-3)

= 1.0−0.55(C(α)+ 0.15)log10(H/D), for C(α)< −0.15
C(α) = − 0.5 + 0.4 cosα + 0.8cos 2α + 0.3cos 3α (30.12-4)

1 − 0.1 cos 4α − 0.05 cos 5α
Figure 30.12-1 lists the external pressure coefficients for the wall, including the graphical
distribution of external pressure (GCp(α)) on the perimeter of the wall.
30.12.3 Internal surfaces of exterior walls of containers (son), silos and round-
section tanksisolated open top
Pressure on the internal surface of an exterior wallreceptacle (son), silos, and open-top
round-section tanks shall be determined from Equation (30.12-5):
(GCpi) = − 0.9 − 0.35log10(H/D) (30.12-5)
261 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Diagram
Wind direction
Floor plan
Elevation Elevation
Receptacle (son), silos, and round-section tanks above ground or supported by columns
Notation
h=Average roof height, in ft (m). H=

Height of solid cylinder, in ft (m).
Z = Height relative to the center of gravity of the projected area of the circular structure, in ft (m).
α=The angle of the wind direction with respect to a point on the wall of bins, silos and round-section tanks,
in degrees.
D=Diameter of circular structure, in ft (m).
C=Clear height above ground level, in ft (m).
External compression coefficient, (GCp(α)), for the walls of the container (bin), silos and tanks of round cross section
Corner,α aspect ratio,H/D

(degree)
External pressure distribution, (GCp(α)), around the perimeter of the wall
Wind
Elevation Floor plan
Figure 30.12-1 - Components and Clading [h≤120 ft (h≤36.6 m)]: compression coefficient
external, (GCp), for the walls of the container (son), silos and sectional tanks
roundisolated withD<120 ft (36.6 m) and 0.25 <H∕D<4.0 another structure
© BSN 2020 262 of 302

"Copyright of the National Standardization Agency, a copy of this standard is made for Sub KT 91-01-S4 Materials, Science, Structure
SNI 1727:2020
Diagram
Conical, flat or domed roofs Conical roof
Zone 4
Zone 3
Zone 3
LEGEND LEGEND
a = 0.1 D hH
DeEnNaA
a = 0.1 D DEDNeAnH
Ah
Zone 1 Zone 2
Zone 1 Zone 2
Direction
Direction
wind
wind
Elevation Elevation
Cone θ < 10° 10° ≤ θ < 30°
Notation
a=10% of the smallest horizontal dimension.
b =Horizontal dimensions specified for the Zone of a conical roof, in ft (m). D =
diameter of circular structure, in ft. (m). h =average roof height, in ft. (m). H=height
of solid cylinder, in ft. (m).
θ = angle of the roof plane from the horizontal, in degrees.
External compression coefficient, (GCp(α)),for roofs of round containers, silos and insulated tanks
H/D 0.25 0.5 ≥ 1.0

b 0.2D 0.5D 0.1h+0.6D
Notes
For roofs with an average roof angle of less than 10 degrees,bmust be determined based on this table. Linear
interpolation is permitted.
Figure 30.12-2 - Components and Clading [h≤120 ft (h≤36.6 m)]: external compression
coefficient, (GCp),for the roof of the container (son), silos and round-section tanksi
isolated withD<120 ft (36.6 m) and 0.25 <H∕D<4.0 another structure
263 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Ko
effi
sie
n
tech
an
an
oak
ste
rn
al
(G
Cp
)

Notes
1. The vertical scale states (GCp) which is used withqh.
2. The horizontal scale represents the effective wind area, in ft2(m2)
3. Positive and negative signs indicate pressure acting toward and away from the top surface of the roof, respectively.
4. Each component must be designed for maximum positive and negative pressure
5. For roof console, (GCp) must be equal to the value in Zone 1 multiplied by 2.0
6. The value of line A applies to roofs with a slope angle of less than 10 degrees.
7. The value of line B applies to roofs with a slope angle of more than and equal to 10 degrees.
Figure 30.12-2 (Continued) - Components and Clading [h≤120 ft (h≤36.6 m)]:

external compression coefficient, (GCp), for the roof of the container (son), silos and tanks
round in sectionisolated withD<120 ft (36.6 m) and
0.25 <H∕D<4.0 — other structures
30.12.4 Roofs of containers (son), silos and round-section tanksisolated
External pressure on the roof or lidreceptacle (son), silos and tanks of circular cross-
section must be equal to the external pressure coefficient (GCp) given in Figure 30.12-2
for Zone 1, Zone 2, Zone 3, and Zone 4.
Zone 3 can be applied to the windward edge of roofs with a slope of less than or equal
to 30°, and Zone 4 applies to the area near the top of the cone for roofs with a slope of
more than 15°. Applicable areas are shown in Figure 30.12-2.
30.12.5 Bottom side of container (son), silos and round-section tanks isolated
elevation
Mark (GCp) for the bottom of circular containers, silos, and elevated tanks shall be
taken as 1.2 and −0.9 for Zone 3 and 0.8 and –0.6 for Zone 1 and Zone 2, as shown in
Figure 30.12-2.
30.12.6 Roofs and walls of containers (son), silos and tanks of round cross section
group
Closely spaced groups with a center-to-center distance of less than 1.25D, the external
pressure of the container (son), silos and tanks of round cross sectiongrouped, must be
equal to the external pressure coefficient (GCp) given in Figure 30.12-3 for Zone 1, Zone
2, Zone 3a, Zone 3b, and Zone 4 for the roof and Figure
30.12-4 for Zone 5a, Zone 5b, Zone 8, and Zone 9 for walls.
© BSN 2020 264 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
30.13 Rooftop solar panels for buildings of all heights with flat or gable roofs or
shield roofs with a slope of less than 7°
The design wind pressure for rooftop solar modules and panels shall be determined in
accordance with Article 29.4.3 for rooftop solar panel arrays in accordance with the
geometric requirements required in Article 29.4.3.

Diagram
Direction
wind External pressure coefficient

(GCp)
Roof angle <10o

Flat, conical or domed roofs
Direction
wind
10o≤ Roof angle ≤ 30o

Notation Conical roof
a=20% of the smallest horizontal dimension D=
diameter of the circular structure, in ft (m).
h=average roof height, in ft (m), see Figure 30.12-4 θ = angle
of the roof plane to the horizontal, in degrees
Notes
1. The vertical scale indicates (GCp) which is used withqh.
2. The horizontal scale indicates the effective wind area, in ft2(m2).
3. Positive and negative signs indicate pressure acting towards or away from the surface, respectively.
5. The value of line A applies to roofs with a roof angle of less than 10 degrees.
6. The value of line B applies to roofs with a roof angle greater than or equal to 10 degrees.
7. Zone 4 applies to roofs with a roof angle greater than 15 degrees.
8. For roof console, (GCp) is equal to the value for Zone 1 multiplied by 2.0.
coefficient, (GCp), for roofs of containers (bins), silos and round-section tanks in
groups withD<120 ft (D<36.6 m) and 0.25 <H/D<4.0 (center distance to
center < 1.25D) other structures
265 of 302
"Copyright of the National Standardization Agency, a copy of this standard is made for Sub KT 91-01-S4 Materials, Science, Structure & Tire Construction
SNI 1727:2020
Diagram
Direction Direction
wind wind
Case B Elevation
Case A Elevation
Silos
End
Direction CASE A : 0 < S < 0.25D CASE B: Middle
wind Silo with S ≤ 0 S = Clear spacing
Silos
Tenga
h
Silos
End
PLAN
Notation
D =Diameter of circular structure, in ft (m). h
=Average roof height, in ft (m). H=Height of
solid cylinder, in ft (m).
θ = Angle of the roof plane to the horizontal, in degrees.
Ko
effi
sie
n
tech
an
an
oak
ste
rn
al
(G
Cp
)

Notes
1. Vertical scale (GCp) is used withqh.
2. The horizontal scale shows the effective wind area, in ft2(m2)
3. Positive and negative signs indicate pressure towards and away from the surface respectively.
4. Each component is planned for maximum positive and negative pressure
5. Zone 9 is the area with the shortest distance between adjacent silos and the outer corner of the group.
6. Case A applies to silos with clearance greater than 0 and less than 0.25D. Case B applies to the middle silo of
a series of connected silos, except the end silo, with a clear distance equal to or
Figure 30.12-4 - Components and Clading [h≤120 ft (h≤36.6 m)]: compression coefficient
external, (GCp), for the walls of the container (son), silos and sectional tanks
roundgroup withD<120 ft (D<36.6 m) and 0.25 <H/D<4.0 (distance
center to center < 1.25D) other structures
© BSN 2020 266 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
31 Wind tunnel procedures
31.1 Scope
Wind tunnel procedures shall be used when required by Article 27.1.3, Article 28.1.3
and Article 29.1.3. Wind tunnel procedures may be used for any building or other
structure in lieu of the design procedures specified in Article 27 (SPGAU for buildings of
all heights and simple diaphragm buildings withh≤ 160 ft (48.8 m), Article 28 (SPGAU for
low-rise buildings and simple diaphragm low-rise buildings), Article 29 (SPGAU for all
other structures), and Article 30 (components and cladding for all types of buildings
and other structures ).
NOTES Article 31 may always be used to determine wind pressure for SPGAU
and/or for K&K of buildings or other structures. This method is considered to produce the most
accurate air pressure of any method specified in this Standard.
31.2 Test Conditions
Wind tunnel tests, or similar tests using fluids other than air, used to determine the
design wind load for any building or other structure, shall be conducted in accordance
with this Article. Tests for the determination of mean and fluctuating forces and
stresses shall meet the requirements of ASCE 49.
31.3 Dynamic response
Tests for the purpose of determining the dynamic response of buildings or other structures
shall be in accordance with Article 31.2. Structural models and related analyzes must take
mass distribution, stiffness and damping into account.
31.4 Load effects
31.4.1 Average repetition interval of load effects
The load effects required for the strength design must be determined for the same
average repetition interval as for the analytical method, which uses rational analysis
methods, defined in the known literature, to combine directional wind tunnel data with
directional meteorological data or based on probabilistic models. The load effect
required for allowable stress design shall be equal to the load effect required for
strength design divided by 1.6. For other structures that are sensitive to possible
variations in dynamic parameter values, sensitivity studies are required to provide a
rational basis for design recommendations.
31.4.2 Wind speed limitations
Wind speed or probabilistic estimates must meet the restrictions given in Article 26.5.3.
31.4.3 Wind direction
Wind climate direction based on recorded or simulated wind speed direction data must
be considered in determining wind loads, and the data must be presented as part of
the wind tunnel report submitted to the
267 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
authorized. Methods for combining wind tunnel model data with information about
wind speed and direction at the project site should also be clearly stated in the wind
tunnel report. Variations in wind direction, based on uncertainties in the wind climate
data, should be considered when determining wind loads, and design wind loads
should be based on the largest values resulting from these uncertainties.
Consideration of uncertainty in wind direction is not required in the determination
service abilityrelated to wind effects.
31.4.4 Limitations on loads
The load for the SPGAU determined by wind tunnel testing should be limited so that
the total primary load is in the directionxAndynot less than 80% of what would be
obtained from Part 1 of Article 27 or Part 1 of Article 28 for buildings or Article 29 for
other structures. The total ultimate load for a building must be based on moments
overturning for flexible buildings and base shear force for other buildings. The overall
primary load for other structures should be based on overturning momentsfor flexible
structures and basic shear forces for other structures.
Stresses for Components and Cladding determined by wind tunnel testing shall be
limited to no less than 80% for those calculated in Zone 4 for walls and Zone 1 for roofs
using the procedures of Article 30. These zones refer to Figure 30.3-1, Figure 30.3-2A ,
Figure 30.3-2B, Figure 30.3-2C, Figure 30.3-3, Figure 30.3-4, Figure 30.3-5A, Figure
30.3-5B, Figure 30.3-6, Figure 30.3-7, and Figure 30.5-1.
The limiting values of 80 % can be reduced to 50 % for SPGAU and 65 % for K&K if one
of the following conditions applies:
1. There are no buildings or objects of special influence in the detailed nearby model.
2. Loads and pressures from additional tests for all significant wind directions in which
the building or object has a specific impact are replaced by roughness
representative of roughness conditions adjacent to, but not rougher than
Exposure B, included in the test results.
31.5 Windborne debris
Glazing on buildings in windborne debris areas must be protected in accordance with

Article 26.12.3.
31.6 Roof-mounted solar collectors for roof slopes of less than 7°
The wind load on solar collectors installed on roofs with a roof slope of less than 7
degrees, is permitted to be determined by wind tunnel tests as a general load
applicable to a wide range of buildings, by determining the load coefficients to be used
in the analysis equations of the Directive Procedure in Article 27 and Article 29 for
SPGAU and Part 5 of Article 30 for K&K. Alternatively, the general load is permitted to
be determined by the analysis method specified in the wind tunnel test report. There is
no need to include specific nearby buildings in the test if the results will be used for
severalsite.
Wind tunnel testing must comply with ASCE 49, must meet specific requirements for
roof-mounted solar collectors, and must meet requirements
© BSN 2020 268 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Special additions for roof-mounted solar collectors, including the following variables.
These requirements include an accurately scaled solar collector model, including
collector tilt angles, row-to-row spacing, aisles or gaps between rows of collectors
compared to the main axis of the building, deflector shape, and the geometry of the
collector support structure. The test shall include at least eight rows of collectors, of
which more than eight rows may be applied, installed on the roof of a representative
public building. The generic building model must be large enough in plan area to
capture the wind flow environment over the different roof zones. The test matrix must
cover the range of building plan dimensions, heighteave, parapet height, roof slope,
and whether the building is open or closed.
Data analysis must consider wind loads from all wind directions. General load
coefficients shall be calculated to be consistent with the coefficients in Article 27, Article
29 and Article 30 or shall be determined to apply to the analysis procedures required in
the test report.
The test report should include methods of data collection, data analysis, boundary
layer modeling, collector and building modeling, measured wind loads and their
relationship to effective wind area, conversion of data to generalized coefficients, and
conditions for applying the results to building types and geometries different
collectors. Wind tunnel results should not be extrapolated to geometric configurations
not anticipated by the wind tunnel study. Interpolation between two or more tests
must be permitted. Limitations of wind tunnel studies, such as the range of collector
parameters and the geometry of the building being tested, should be clearly reported.
31.6.1 Wind tunnel test requirements
31.6.1.1 Wind load limitations for rooftop solar collectors
For a photovoltaic solar collector system that meets the limitations and geometric
requirements of Figure 29.4-7, the minimum design wind load based on a wind tunnel
study shall not be less than 65 % of the value resulting from 29.4-7 subject to
conditions as in Article 31.4.3. Minimum design wind forces based on wind tunnel
studies for roof-mounted solar collector systems do not necessarily correspond to the
minimum net pressure of 16 lb/ft2(0.77 kN/m2) in Article 30.2.2.
31.6.1.2 Peer review requirements for wind tunnel tests of roof-mounted solar
collectors
Wind load values lower than those indicated in Article 31.6.1.1 shall be permitted
when an independent review of the wind tunnel tests is carried out in accordance with
this Article.Independent reviewers must be objective; knowledgeable assessment
technicians who are experienced in conducting wind tunnel studies of buildings and
similar systems, and are good at simulating atmospheric boundary layers.The
minimum qualifications for reviewers are as follows:
• The reviewer must be independent from the wind tunnel laboratory conducting the
testing and reporting and must not create a conflict of interest.
• The reviewer must have technical expertise in applying wind tunnel studies to
buildings similar to those being reviewed.
269 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
• The reviewer should have experience in conducting or evaluating boundary layer

wind tunnel studies and should be familiar with the technical issues and regulations
governing wind tunnel procedures in ASCE 49 as applied to systems similar to
photovoltaic solar collectors that use general wind tunnel data for design .
The reviewer must review the wind tunnel report, including but not limited to data
collection methods, data analysis, boundary layer modeling, collector and building
modelling, generating wind loads and their relationship to effective wind area,
converting data into valuesGCrn, and the conditions for applying the results to different
building types, collector geometries, and other relevant issues identified by the
reviewer (reviewer).
The reviewer must submit a written report to the authorities and the client. The report
should include, at a minimum, a statement regarding the following: the scope of the
review with specified limitations; the status of the wind tunnel study at the time of the
review; compliance of wind tunnel studies with the requirements of ASCE 49 and Article
31.6.1; the reviewer's conclusions identifying areas requiring further review,
investigation, and/or clarification; recommendation; and whether, in the reviewer's
opinion, the wind loads derived from the wind tunnel study comply with ASCE 7-16 for
the intended use.
31.7 Consensus standards and other referenced documents
This article lists consensus standards and other documents that should be considered part
of this standard to the extent referred to in this Article.
ASCE 49,Wind Tunnel Testing for Buildings and Other Structures, American Society of Civil
Engineers, 2012.
Cited in: Sections 31.2, 31.6, 31.6.1.2, C31, C31.4.2, C31.6.1
© BSN 2020 270 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
APPENDIX C
Serviceability considerations
C.1 Serviceability considerations
This annex is not a mandatory part of this standard but provides serviceability design
guidance to maintain the function of the building and the comfort of its occupants
during normal use. Serviceability limits (e.g., maximum static deformation or
acceleration) should be selected taking into account the desired structural function.
Serviceability should be checked using loads suitable for the limit conditions
considered.
C.2 Deflection,driftand vibration
C.2.1 Vertical deflection
Deformation of floors and roof components and systems caused by service loads must not
compromise the serviceability of the structure.
C.2.2Driftwalls and frames
Lateral deflection ordriftstructure and deformation of horizontal diaphragms and

bracing systems caused by wind effects must not reduce the serviceability of the
structure.
C.2.3 Vibration
Floor systems that support large open areas free of partitions or other sources of
damping, where vibrations due to foot traffic may be unpleasant, should be designed
with such vibrations in mind.
Mechanical equipment that may cause unpleasant vibrations in any part of an occupied
structure must be isolated to minimize the transmission of such vibrations to the
structure.
The building's structural system must be designed so that vibrations caused by wind do
not cause occupant discomfort or damage to the building, its equipment, or its
contents.
C.3 Design for long term deflection
Where required for acceptable building performance, structural components and

systems must be designed to accommodate permanent long-term deflections due to
sustained loads.
C.4 Fight bending
Specific deflection resistance requirements of a structural component under load and

related work of other components must be specified in the design document.
271 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Beams without defined counter-flexes should be positioned so that during erection each small
counter-flex is upward. If deflection resistance involves the erection of structural components
due to pre-loading, it must be mentioned in the design documents.
C.5 Expansion and contraction
Dimensional changes in the structure and its elements caused by variations in

temperature, relative humidity, or other effects shall not reduce the serviceability of
the structure.
Provisions must be made to control crack width or limit cracks by providing joint
broadcasts.
C.6 Durability
Buildings and other structures must be designed to tolerate long-term environmental

effects or must be protected against such effects.
© BSN 2020 272 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
APPENDIX CC
Serviceability considerations
CC.1 Serviceability considerations
Serviceability limit conditions are conditions when the function of a building or other
structure is reduced due to local damage, weathering, or deformation of building
components, or due to occupant discomfort. Although safety is generally not related to
serviceability limit conditions (one exception is cladding falling from buildings caused
by simexcessive inter-storey feed due to wind loads), this may have major economic
consequences. The increasing use of computers as a design tool, the use of stronger
(rather than rigid) construction materials, the use of lighter architectural elements, and
the lack of dependencies between nonstructural elements and the structural frame can
result in building systems that are relatively flexible and less damped. Limit condition
design emphasizes that serviceability criteria (as is always the case) are very important
in ensuring the functional and economic performance of the design for the building's
structural system.
In general, serviceability is reduced due to:

1.Excessive deflection or rotation may affect the appearance, functional use, or
drainage of the structure or may result in load transfer that damages supporting
elements and fittings not intended to support the load;
2.Excessive vibration from the activities of building occupants, mechanical equipment,

or wind, which may cause occupant discomfort or service equipment malfunction;
And
3.Weathering, including weather effects, corrosion,decay, and color changes.
In inspection ability serve, designer recommended For

consider appropriate service loads, response of the structure, and reactions of building
occupants. Service loads that require consideration include static loads from occupants
and their property, rainwater on the roof, temperature fluctuations, and dynamic loads
from human activity, wind-induced effects, or the operation of building service
equipment. Service load is the load that acts on a structure at a certain time. (In
contrast, nominal loads have a small probability of being exceeded in any year;
factored loads have a small probability of being exceeded in 50 years). The appropriate
service load for a serviceability limit condition check may be only a small fraction of the
nominal load.
The response of a structure to service loads can generally be analyzed assuming linear
elastic behavior. However, structural components with residual deformation
accumulated under service loads may require examination of long-term behavior.
Service loads for analyzing creep or long-term effects may not be the same as those
used for analyzing elastic deflection or short-term structural behaviorreversible.
The serviceability limit depends on the function of the building and the perceptions of its
occupants. In contrast to ultimate boundary conditions, it is difficult to establish boundaries
273 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
general serviceability that applies to all building structures. The serviceability limits
presented in Article CC.2.1, Article CC.2.2, and Article CC.2.3 provide general guidance
that refers to past acceptable performance.
However, the serviceability limits for a specific building must be determined after
careful analysis by engineers and architects of all functional and economic
requirements and constraints associated with the building owner. It must be
recognized that building occupants may perceive structural deflections, movement,
cracks, and other signs of stress that may be occurring to a much lesser extent than
those exhibited when structural failure occurs. These signs may be wrongly considered
as an indication that the building is unsafe and may reduce its commercial value.
CC.2 Deflection, vibration, and drift
CC.2.1 Vertical deflection
Excessive vertical deflection and drift(misalignment) Whicharise mainly from three

sources: (1) gravity loads, such as dead loads and live loads; (2) effects of temperature,
creep, and settlement differences; and (3) construction tolerances and errors. Such
deformation may be visually unacceptable; may cause separation, cracking, or leakage
of exterior cladding, doors, windows, and gap filler (seal); and can cause damage to
interior components and finishes.
The allowable deformation value depends on the type of structure, detailing, and
intended use (Galambos and Ellingwood 1986). Historically, the allowable deflection
limits for horizontal structural members have been 1/360 of the span for floors carrying
the full nominal live load and 1/240 of the span for roof components. Deflections of
1/300 of the span (for cantilevers, 1/150 of the length) may be visible and cause general
architectural damage orleak oncladding. Deflections greater than 1/200 of the span can
damage the workings of moving components such as doors, windows and sliding
partitions.
In certain long-span floor systems, it may be necessary to place a limit (independent of

the span) on the maximum deflection to minimize the possibility of damage to adjacent
nonstructural elements (ISO 1977). For example, damage to non-load-bearing
partitions may occur if vertical deflections are greater than 10 mm (3/8 in.) unless
special provisions are made for differential movement (Cooney and King 1988);
However, some components can and do accept greater deformation.
Load combinations for checking static deflection can be developed using first-order
reliability analysis (Galambos and Ellingwood 1986). Current static deflection guidelines
for floor and roof systems are sufficient to limit surface damage in most buildings.
A combined load with an annual probability of exceedance of 0.05 is sufficient to cover

many load conditions. For serviceability limit conditions associated with no visual
deformationacceptable, repairable cracks or other damage tofinishinginterior, and
other short-term effects, the recommended load combination is
D+L (CC.2-1)
© BSN 2020 274 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
For serviceability limit conditions related to creep,decline, or similar long-term or

permanent effects, the recommended load combination is
D+0.5L (CC.2-2)
dead load effect,D, used in Equation (CC.2-1) and Equation (CC.2-2) may be part of the
dead load that occurs after installation of nonstructural elements. burden of life,L,
defined in Article 4. For example, in composite construction, the effects of dead loads
are often taken as determined after the concrete has cured; on ceilings, dead load
effects may only include loads acting after the ceiling structure is installed.
CC.2.2Driftfrom walls and frames
Drift(lateral deflection) which is of concern in serviceability examinations especially

those arising from wind effects. The drift limit for building design is in the range of
1/600 to 1/400 of the building height or story height (ASCE Task Committee on Drift
Control of Steel Building Structures 1988; Griffis 1993). These limits are generally
sufficient to minimize damage to cladding and nonstructural walls and nonstructural
partitions. Limitdriftsmaller ones should be used if the cladding is brittle. West and
Fisher (2003) provide recommendations for boundariesdrift which is higher and has
been successfully used in low-rise buildings with a variety of cladding types. This
contains recommendations for buildings that have faucets (cranes). Absolute limits on
deviations between levels also need to be proven that damage to non-structural
partitions, cladding and glazing can occur if deviations between levels exceed 10 mm
(3/8 in.) unless special details are made in the implementation.to accommodate
movement tolerance (Freeman 1977; Cooney and King 1988). Some components can
accept much greater deformation.
Use of nominal wind load (average return period/Mean Recurrence Interval/MRI 700
years or MRI 1,700 years) in checking serviceability is too conservative. The following
load combinations, derived similarly to Equation (CC.2-1), can be used to examine
short-term effects:
D+0.5L+Wa (CC.2-3)
withWais the wind load based on wind speedservice conditionin Figure CC.2-1 to Figure
CC.2-4. Some designers have used 10-year MRI (annual probability 0.1) to checkdriftdue
to wind loads for typical buildings (Griffis 1993), while others have used 50-year MRI
(annual probability 0.02) or 100-year MRI (annual probability 0.01) for buildings
sensitive to large drifts. Selection of MRI for serviceability evaluation is a matter of
engineering judgment that must be made in consultation with the building client.
The Indonesian Wind Map Book used is a map for serviceability limit functions and
should not be used for strength limit conditions. Due to its temporary nature, wind
loads do not need to be considered in analyzing the effects of creep or other long-term
actions.
Deformation limits apply to the entire structural assembly. The stiffness effects of
nonstructural walls and partitions can be taken into account in the drift analysis if
275 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
evidentiary information regarding its effects is available. If cyclic loading occurs, it is

necessary to consider that increased residual deformation may cause additional structural
collapse.
CC.2.3 Vibration
Movement of the floor structure or the building as a whole can cause discomfort to
building occupants. In recent years, the number of complaints about building
vibrations has increased. This increase in the number of complaints is partly related to
the more flexible structures resulting from modern construction practices.
Traditional static deflection checks are not sufficient to guarantee that disturbing
vibrations of the building floor system or the building as a whole do not occur (Ad Hoc
Committee on Serviceability Research 1986). Meanwhile, stiffness control is one aspect
of serviceability, mass distribution and damping which is also important in controlling
vibration.
The use of new materials and building systems may require the dynamic response of
the system to be explicitly considered. Simple dynamic models are often sufficient to
determine whether a potential problem exists and generate suggestions for possible
remedial measurements (Bachmann and Ammann 1987; Ellingwood 1989).
Excessive structural movement is mitigated by measures that limit building or floor

accelerations to levels that do not disturb occupant comfort or damage service
equipment.An individual's perception and tolerance of vibration depends on
expectations of the building's performance (related to the building's occupancy level)
and to the level of activity at the time the vibration occurs (ANSI 1983). Individuals find
continuous vibrations more unpleasant than temporary vibrations. Continuous
vibration (for several minutes) at an acceleration of 0.005g up to 0.01gdisturbing for
most people involved in activities that require calm, while for those involved in physical
activity or who are watching a spectacle can tolerate accelerationsteady state of 0.02g
up to 0.05g. The disturbance threshold for instantaneous vibrations (ending within a
few seconds) is much higher and depends on the amount of structural damping
(Murray 1991). For finished floors usually with damping of 5% or more, the peak
instantaneous acceleration is 0.05gup to 0.1gtolerable.
Some common human activities will exert dynamic forces on the floor at frequencies
(or harmonics) in the range 2 Hz to 6 Hz (Allen and Rainer 1976; Allen et al. 1985; Allen
1990a, b). If the fundamental frequency of the floor system's vibrations falls within this
range and if the activity is rhythmic (e.g., dancing, aerobic exercise, or cheering at a
spectator event), resonance amplification can occur. To prevent resonance from
rhythmic activity, the floor system must be tuned so that the natural frequency of the
harmonics can be removed from the excitation frequency. As a general rule, the
natural frequency of structural elements and their assemblies should be greater than
2.0 times the excitation frequencysteady stateexposed unless vibration isolation is
provided. Attenuation is also an effective way to control disturbing vibrations from
momentary events because research has shown that individuals are more tolerant of
vibrations that dissipate quickly than those that last for a long time (Murray 1991).
Some research shows that it is a simple and relatively effective way to minimize
vibrationscomfortablefor walking and general activities from
© BSN 2020 276 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
human control is to control the stiffness of the floor, which is determined from the
maximum deflection independent of the span. Justification for limiting deflections to
absolute values rather than to fractions of the span can be obtained by considering
the dynamic characteristics of a floor system modeled as a simple uniformly loaded
span. The fundamental frequency of vibration,fo, of this system is given by
(CC.2-4)
withEI=flexural stiffness of the floor,ℓ=span, andρ=w/g=mass per unit length;g=

acceleration due to gravity is 32.17 ft/s2(9.81 m/s2), Andw=dead load plus participating
live load. Maximum resulting deflectionwis
(CC.2-5)
Substituting EI from this equation into Equation (CC.2-3), we obtain
(CC.2-6)
These frequencies can be compared with the minimum natural frequencies for
vibration mitigation that occur in various occupancies (Allen and Murray 1993). For
example, Equation (CC.2-6) shows that the static deflection caused by a uniform load,w,
should be limited to about 0.2 in. (5 mm), regardless of span, if the fundamental
frequency of vibration of the floor system is to be kept above about 8 Hz. Some floors
that do not meet these guidelines are perfectly serviceable; However, this guide
provides a simple way to identify potentially troublesome situations where additional
considerations in design may be warranted.
CC.3 Design for long-term deflections
As a result of the load continuing to work (sustained), structural components may

exhibit time-dependent additional deformation caused by creep, which typically occurs
at a slow but persistent rate over long periods of time. In certain applications, it may be
necessary to limit deflections under long-term loading to required levels. This limitation
can be achieved by multiplying the direct deflection by a creep factor, as given in the
material standards, which ranges from about 1.5 to 2.0. These boundary conditions
must be checked using the load combinations in Equation (CC.2-2).
CC.4 Fight bending
If required, flexure resistance shall be applied to horizontal structural components to

provide a clean appearanceappropriateand on drainage to counter anticipated
deflection from loading and potential inundation.
CC.5 Expansion and contraction
Provisions must be made in the design so that if significant changes in dimensions

occur, the structure will move as a whole andmovementThe differential of similar parts
and structural components that meet at the joint will be minimal. Design expansion
joints to anticipate dimensional changes in parts
277 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
of the structure separated by the joint must take into account the displacement that
can return to the initial position and the displacement that can occurCannot return to
starting position. Conditiondistressof the structure in the form of wide cracks caused
by thermal confinement, shrinkage, and prestress deformation. Designers are advised
to style these effects throughjoint reliefor by controlling the crack width.
CC.6 Durability
Buildings and other structures may deteriorate in certain service environments. This
damage may be visible upon inspection (e.g., weathering, corrosion, and staining) or
may cause undetectable changes to the material. The designer must provide a certain
level of damage tolerance in the design or must establish adequate protection systems
and/or planned maintenance to minimize the likelihood that such problems will occur.
Water infiltration through poor construction or maintenance of walls or roof cladding is
not considered outside the design scope for damage tolerance. Design waterproofis
outside the scope of this standard. For parts of buildings and other structures exposed
to weather, the design should eliminate pockets that can accumulate water vapor.
Reference
Ad Hoc Committee on Serviceability Research. (1986). “Structural serviceability:
A critical appraisal and research needs.” J. Struct. Engrg., 112(12), 2646–2664.
Allen, D. E. (1990a). “Floor vibrations from aerobics.” Can. J. Civ. Engrg., 19(4), 771– 779.
Allen, D. E. (1990b). “Building vibrations from human activities.” Concrete Int., 12(6), 66–
73.
Allen, D. E., and Murray, T. M. (1993). “Design criteria for vibrations due to walking.”
Eng. J., 30(4), 117–129.
Allen, D. E., and Rainer, J. H. (1976). “Vibration criteria for long-span floors.” Can. J. Civ.
Engrg., 3(2), 165–173.
Allen, D. E., Rainer, J. H., and Pernica, G. (1985). “Vibration criteria for assembly
occupancies.” Can. J. Civ. Engrg., 12(3), 617–623.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI). (1983). Guide to the evaluation of human
exposure to vibration in buildings, ANSI S3.29-1983, ANSI, New York.
ASCE Task Committee on Drift Control of Steel Building Structures. (1988). “Wind drift
design of steel-framed buildings: State-of-the-art report.” J. Struct. Engrg., 114(9), 2085–
2108.
Bachmann, H., and Ammann, W. (1987). “Vibrations in structures.” 3rd Ed. Struct. Eng.
Doc., International Association for Bridge and Structural Engineering, Zurich,
Switzerland.
Cooney, R. C., and King, A. B. (1988). “Serviceability criteria for buildings.” BRANZ Report
SR14, Building Research Association of New Zealand, Porirua, New Zealand.
Ellingwood, B. (1989). “Serviceability guidelines for steel structures.” Eng. J., 26(1), 1–8.
© BSN 2020 278 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Freeman, S. A. (1977). “Racking tests of high-rise building partitions.” J. Struct. Div.,

103(8), 1673–1685.
Galambos, T. U., and Ellingwood, B. (1986). “Serviceability limit states: Deflection.” J.

Struct. Engrg. 112(1), 67–84.
Griffis, L. G. (1993). “Serviceability limit states under wind load.” Eng. J., 30(1), 1–16.
International Organization for Standardization (ISO). (1977). “Bases for the design of
structures—Deformations of buildings at the serviceability limit states.” ISO 4356.
International Organization for Standardization.
Murray, T. (1991). “Building floor vibrations.” Eng. J., 28(3), 102–109.
National Building Code of Canada. (1990). Commentary A, serviceability criteria for

deflections and vibrations, National Research Council, Ottawa.
West, M., and Fisher, J. (2003). Serviceability design considerations for steel buildings, 2nd
Ed., Steel Design Guide No. 3, American Institute of Steel Construction, Chicago.
OTHER REFERENCES (NOT CITED)
Ellingwood, B., and Tallin, A. (1984). “Structural serviceability: Floor vibrations.” J. Struct.
Engrg., 110(2), 401–418.
Ohlsson, S. (1988). “Ten years of floor vibration research—A review of aspects and
some results.” Proc., Symposium on Serviceability of Buildings, National Research
Council of Canada, Ottawa, 435–450.
Tallin, A. G., and Ellingwood, B. (1984). “Serviceability limit states: Wind induced
vibrations.” J. Struct. Engrg., 110(10), 2424–2437.
279 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
C3 Dead load, soil load and hydrostatic pressure
C3.1 Dead load
Table C3.1-1 - Minimum design dead load (kN∕m2)a
Component Load (kN∕m2)

CEILINGS
Acoustical fiberboard 0.05
Gypsum board (per mm thickness) 0.008
Mechanical duct allowance 0.19
Plaster on tile or concrete 0.24
Plaster on wood lath 0.38
Suspended steel channel system Suspended 0.10
metal lath and cement plaster Suspended 0.72
metal lath and gypsum plaster Wood furring 0.48
suspension system 0.12
COVERINGS, ROOF, AND WALLS
Asbestos-cement shingles Asphalt 0.19
shingles 0.10
Cement tiles 0.77
Clay tile (for mortar add 0.48 kN∕m2)
0.57
Book tile, 51 mm
0.96
Book tile, 76 mm
0.48
Ludowici
0.57
Romance
0.91
Spanish
Composition:
0.05
Three-ply ready roofing
0.26
Four-ply felt and gravel
0.29
Five-ply felt and gravel
0.05
Copper or tin
0.19
Corrugated asbestos-cement roofing
0.12
Deck, metal, 20 gauge
0.14
Deck, metal, 18 gauge Decking, 51-
0.24
mm wood (Douglas fir) Decking, 76-
0.38
mm wood (Douglas fir) Fiberboard, 13
0.04
mm
0.10
Gypsum sheathing, 13 mm Insulation, roof
boards (per mm thickness)
0.0013
Cellular glass
0.0021
Fibrous glass
0.0028
Fiberboard
0.0015
Perlite
0.0004
Polystyrene foam
0.0009
Urethane foam with skin
0.006
Plywood (per mm thickness)
0.04
Rigid insulation, 13 mm
0.38
Skylight, metal frame, 10-mm wire glass
0.34
slate, 5 mm
0.48
Slate, 6 mm
Waterproofing membranes:
0.26
Bituminous, gravel-covered
0.07
Bituminous, smooth surface
0.05
Liquid applied
0.03
Single-ply, sheet
Wood sheathing (per mm thickness)
0.0057
Plywood
0.0062
Oriented strand board
0.14
Wood shingles
FLOOR FILL
0.017
Cinder concrete, per mm
0.015
Lightweight concrete, per mm
0.015
Sand, per mm
0.023
Stone concrete, per mm FLOORS AND FLOOR FINISHES
Asphalt block (51 mm), 13-mm mortar Cement finish (25
1.44
mm) on stone–concrete fill Ceramic or quarry tile (19
1.53
mm) on 13-mm mortar bed Ceramic or quarry tile (19
0.77
mm) on 25-mm mortar bed
1.10
© BSN 2020 280 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Table C3.1-1 (Continued) Table C3.1-1 - Minimum design dead load (kN∕m2)a
Concrete fill finish (per mm thickness) 0.023 0.023
Hardwood flooring, 22 mm 0.19 0.19
Linoleum or asphalt tile, 6 mm 0.05 Marble and 0.05
mortar on stone–concrete fill 1.58 Slate (per mm 1.58
thickness) 0.028 0.028
Solid flat tile on 25-mm mortar base 1.10 1.10
Subflooring, 19 mm 0.14 0.14
Terrazzo (38 mm) directly on slab 0.91 Terrazzo 0.91
(25 mm) on stone–concrete fill 1.53 Terrazzo (25 1.53
mm), 51-mm stone concrete 1.53 Wood block (76 1.53
mm) on mastic, no fill 0.48 Wood block (76 mm) 0.48
on 13-mm mortar base 0.77 FLOORS, WOOD- 0.77
JOIST (NO PLASTER) DOUBLE WOOD FLOOR
Joint sizes (mm): 305-mm spacing 406-mm spacing 610-mm spacing

(kN∕m2) (kN∕m2) (kN∕m2)
51×152 0.29 0.24 0.24
51×203 0.29 0.29 0.24
51×254 0.34 0.29 0.29
51×305 0.38 0.34 0.29
FRAME PARTITIONS
Movable steel partitions 0.19
Wood or steel studs, 13-mm gypsum board each side 0.38
Wood studs, 51 × 102, unplastered 0.19
Wood studs, 51 × 102, plastered one side 0.57
Wood studs, 51 × 102, plastered two sides 0.96
FRAME WALLS
Exterior stud walls:
51 mm × 102 mm@406 mm, 16-mm gypsum, insulated, 10-mm siding 51 0.53
mm × 152 mm@406 mm, 16-mm gypsum, insulated, 10-mm siding Exterior 0.57
stud walls with brick veneer 2.30
Windows, glass, frame, and sash 0.38
Clay brick wythes:
102mm 1.87
203mm 3.78
305mm 5.51
406mm 7.42
Hollow concrete masonry unit wythes:
Wythe thickness (in mm) 102 152 203 254 305
Density of units (16.49 kN∕m3) with grout spacing as follows:
2.35
No grout 1.05 1.29 1.68 2.01
2.78
1,219mm 1.48 1.92 2.35
3.02
1.016mm 1.58 2.06 2.54
3.16
813mm 1.63 2.15 2.68
3.45
610mm 1.77 2.35 2.92
4.02
406mm 2.01 2.68 3.35
5.70
Full grout 2.73 3.69 4.69
Density of units (19.64 kN∕m3) with grout spacing as follows: 2.39
No grout 1.25 1.34 1.72 2.11 2.97
1,219mm 1.58 2.11 2.59 3.11
1.016mm 1.63 2.15 2.68 3.26
813mm 1.72 2.25 2.78 3.59
610mm 1.87 2.44 3.02 4.17
406mm 2.11 2.78 3.50 5.89
Full grout 2.82 3.88 4.88
Density of units (21.21 kN∕m3) with grout spacing as follows: 3.02
3.45
No grout 1.39 1.68 2.15 2.59
3.69
1,219mm 1.70 2.39 2.92
3.83
1.016mm 1.72 2.54 3.11
4.12
813mm 1.82 2.63 3.26
4.69
610mm 1.96 2.82 3.50
6.37
406mm 2.25 3.16 3.93
Full grout 3.06 4.17 5.27
281 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Table C3.1-1 (Continued) - Minimum design dead load (kN∕m2)a

Solid concrete masonry unit
Wythe thickness (in mm) 102 152 203 254 305
Density of units 1.53 2.35 3.21 4.02 4.88
(16.49 kN∕m3)
Density of units 1.82 2.82 3.78 4.79 5.79
(19.64 kN∕m3)
Density of units 1.96 3.02 4.12 5.17 6.27
(21.21 kN∕m3)
aHeavymansonryincludes mortar but not plaster. For plaster, add 0.24 kN/m3for any plastered
surface. The values given represent averages. In some cases, there is a sufficient weight range
for the same construction.
Table C3.1-2 - Minimum densities for design loads of materials
Material Density (lb∕ft3) Density (kN∕m3)

Aluminum 170 27
Bituminous products
Asphaltum 81 12.7
Graphite 135 21.2
Paraffin 56 8.8
Petroleum, crude 55 8.6
Petroleum, refined 50 7.9
Petroleum, benzine 46 7.2
Petroleum, gasoline 42 6.6
Pitch 69 10.8
Tar 75 11.8
Brass 526 82.6
Bronze 552 86.7
Cast-stone masonry (cement, stone, sand) 144 22.6
Cement, Portland, loose 90 14.1
Ceramic tiles 150 23.6
Charcoal 12 1.9
Cinder fill 57 9.0
Cinders, dry, in bulk 45 7.1
Coal
Anthracite, piled 52 8.2
Bituminous, piled 47 7.4
Lignite, piled 47 7.4
Peat, dry, piled 23 3.6
Concrete, plain
Cinder 108 17.0
Expanded-slag aggregate Haydite 100 15.7
(burned-clay aggregate) Slag 90 14.1
132 20.7
Stone (including gravel) 144 22.6
Vermiculite and perlite aggregate, nonload-bearing 25–50 3.9–7.9
Other light aggregate, load-bearing 70–105 11.0–16.5
Concrete, reinforced
Cinder 111 17.4
Slag 138 21.7
Stone (including gravel) 150 23.6
Copper 556 87.3
Cork, compressed 14 2,2
Earth (not submerged)
Clay, dry 63 9.9
Clay, damp 110 17.3
Clay and gravel, dry 100 15.7
Silt, moist, loose 78 12.3
© BSN 2020 282 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Table C3.1-2 (Continued) - Minimum density for the design load of the material
Silt, moist, packed 96 15.1
Silt, flowing 108 17.0
Sand and gravel, dry, loose 100 15.7
Sand and gravel, dry, packed 110 17.3
Sand and gravel, wet 120 18.9
Earth (submerged)
Clay 80 12.6
Soil 70 11.0
River mud 90 14.1
Sand or gravel 60 9.4
Sand or gravel and clay 65 10.2
Glass 160 25.1
Gravel, dry 104 16.3
Gypsum, loose 70 11.0
Gypsum, wallboard 50 7.9
Ice 57 9.0
Iron
Cast 450 70.7
Wrought 480 75.4
Leads 710 111.5
Limes
Hydrated, loose 32 5.0
Hydrated, compacted 45 7.1
Masonry, ashlar stone
Granite 165 25.9
Limestone, crystalline 165 25.9
Limestone, oolitic 135 21.2
Marble 173 27.2
Sandstone 144 22.6
Masonry, brick
Hard (low absorption) 130 20.4
Medium (medium absorption) 115 18.1
Soft (high absorption) 100 15.7
Masonry, concrete
Lightweight units 105 16.5
Medium weight units 125 19.6
Normal weight units 135 21.2
Masonry grout 140 22.0
Masonry, rubble stone
Granite 153 24.0
Limestone, crystalline 147 23.1
Limestone, oolitic 138 21.7
Marble 156 24.5
Sandstone 137 21.5
283 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Table C3.1-2 (Continued) - Minimum density for the design load of the material
Mortar, cement or lime 130 20.4
Particleboard 45 7.1
Plywood 36 5.7
Riprap (not submerged)
Limestone 83 13.0
Sandstone 90 14.1
Sand
Clean and dry 90 14.1
River, dry 106 16.7
Slag
Bank 70 11.0
Bank screenings 108 17.0
Machine 96 15.1
Sand 52 8.2
Slate 172 27.0
Steel, cold-drawn 492 77.3
Stone, quarried, piled
Basalt, granite, gneiss 96 15.1
Limestone, marble, quartz 95 14.9
Sandstone 82 12.9
Shales 92 14.5
Greenstone, hornblende 107 16.8
Terra cotta, architectural
Voids filled 120 18.9
Voids unfilled 72 11.3
Tin 459 72.1
Water
Fresh 62 9.7
Sea 64 10.1
Wood, seasoned
Ash, commercial white 41 6.4
Cypress, southern 34 5.3
Fir, Douglas, coast region 34 5.3
Hem fir 28 4.4
Oak, commercial reds and whites 47 7.4
Pine, southern yellow 37 5.8
Redwoods 28 4.4
Spruce, red, white, and Sitka 29 4.5
Western hemlock 32 5.0
Zinc, rolled sheet 449 70.5
aThe values in the table apply tosolid masonryand for solid parts of hollow masonry.
C4 Live load
C4.3 Live loads are evenly distributed
C4.3.1 Required live load
A list of selected loads for residential and more general uses is given in Article 4.3.1,
and approval of the competent authority is required for occupancies not listed in the
table. Table C4.3-1 and Table C4.3-2 are provided as a guide to regulatory authorities.
In selecting the occupancy and use for the design of a building or structure, the
building owner must consider the possibility of changes to the occupancy that involve
heavier loads than necessary. Lighter loading suitable for a first residence does not
have to be selected. Before being permitted and approved by the competent authority,
the building owner must ensure that live loads greater than the floor or roof shall not
be installed, or placed, on any floor or roof of the building or other structure.
© BSN 2020 284 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
It is known that floor loads measured in surveys, live loads are usually well below
current design values (Peir and Cornell 1973; McGuire and Cornell 1974; Sentler 1975;
Ellingwood and Culver 1977). However, buildings must be designed to withstand the
maximum loads that are likely to occurcarried over several Reference periodsQ, which
is often taken as 50 years. Table C4.3-2 briefly summarizes how load survey data are
combined with theoretical analysis of load processes for several common occupancy
types and illustrates how design loads can be selected for occupancies not specified in
Table 4.3-1 (Kapur and Corotis). 1980). Floor loads usually represent a specific function
of the dwelling and are referred to as permanent loads throughout the life of the
building. This burden is modeled as a constant burden until there is a change in owner
or change in occupancy. Live load surveys produce statistical quantities of the load that
remains (sustained). Table C4.3-2 shows the average values,ms, and standard deviation,
σs, for a specific Reference area. Apart from the burden that still exists (sustained), a
building is likely to experience a number of relatively short, high-intensity,
extraordinary loading events, or momentary load events (caused by crowds of people
in special or emergency situations, concentrated loads during renovations, and the
like). Limited survey information and limited theoretical considerations lead to
averages,mt, and standard deviation, σt, of a single instantaneous load shown in Table
C4.3-2.
The combination of continuous load and instantaneous load processes, taking into account
the probability of occurrence, leads to statistics of the maximum total load over the
required Reference periodQ. Statistics of the total maximum load depending on the
average duration of individual tenants,τ, the average rate of instantaneous load
occurrence,ve, and Reference period,Q. The average values are given in Table C4.3-2. The
average of the maximum loads is similar, in most cases, to the Table 4.3-1 values of
uniformly distributed live loads and, generally, is an appropriate design value.
Floor loading 150 psf (7.18 kN/m2) also applies to filing cabinet installations, provided
the aisle width is a minimum of 36 in. (0.92 m) is maintained. A conventional filing
cabinet or five-drawer cupboard, even with two tiers of bookshelves stacked on top, is
unlikely to exceed an average floor loading of 150 psf (7.18 kN/m2) unless all drawers
and shelves are completely filled with maximum density paper. Such conditions are
basically the upper limit with the normal load factor and safety factor applied to the
criteria of 150 psf (7.18 kN/m2) must still provide a safe design.
If the installation of library shelves does not fall within the parameters required in
Article 4.13, then the design must take into account the actual conditions. For example,
floor loading for medical X-ray film storage can easily exceed 200 psf (9.58 kN/m2),
especially due to improvementsthick/shelf width. Library shelvesmobilethat slide on
rails must also be designed to meet the actual requirements of the specific installation,
which can easily exceed 300 psf (14.4 kN/m2). The location of the rail supports and
deflection limits must be considered in the design, and the engineer must work with
the system manufacturer to provide a structure appropriate to the installation location.
For SNI 1727:2013, the provisions in the live load table for loads "Marquees" with a
distributed load requirement of 75 psf (3.59 kN/m2) has been removed, along with the "
promenade" which is 60 psf (2.87 kN/m2). Good load "marquee" and load "promenade"
is considered an archaic term that is not used anywhere else, with the exception of
those listed in live load tables. "Destination of the Promenade" is essentially an
assembly use and is more clearly identified as such.
285 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
“Marquee" has not been defined in this standard but has been defined in building
codes as a roofed structure that projects into a public right of way. However, the
connection between the structure and the right-of-way does not control the loads
applied to the structure. Therefore,marqueemust be designed with all the loads
appropriate for the roofed structure. If the structural arrangement is such that
additional residential loading must be provided (for example, there is a window access
that may provide loading for parade spectators), balcony loading must be considered
in the design.
Balconies and decks are acknowledged to often have different loading patterns than
most interior spaces. They often bear the burden of centralized living from people
gathered along the edges of the structure (for example, during viewing of strategic
points). These loading conditions are recognized in Table 4.3-1 as increasing live loads
for the area served, up to the point of meeting the loading requirements for most
assembly work. As always, designers should be aware of the potential for unusual
loading patterns in structures that are not covered by these minimum standards.
The minimum live load used for roofs with vegetative and landscape areas depends on
the use of the roof area. Live load of 20 psf (0.96 kN/m2) for unoccupied areas is the
same load as the roof area in general and is intended to represent the load caused by
maintenance activities and small decorative fixtures. Live load 100 psf (4.79 kN/m2) for
roof assembly areas are the same as those described for interior building areas
because the potential for dense clustering of residences is similar. Other residences
within the green roof area must have the same live load as in Table 4.3-1 for that
residence. Land and walkways, fences, walls and featureshardscaping others are
considered as dead weight in accordance with Article 3.1.4.
© BSN 2020 286 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Table C4.3-1 - Minimum live load evenly distributed
Occupancy or Use Live Load lb∕ft2(kN∕m2) Occupancy or Use Live Load lb∕ft2(kN∕m2)
Air conditioning (machine space) 200a (9.58) Laboratories, scientific 100 (4.79)
Amusement park structure 100a (4.79) laundry 150a (7,18)
Attic, nonresidential Manufacturing, ice 300 (14.36)
Nonstorage 25 (1.20) Morgue 125 (6.00)
Storage 80a (3.83) Printing plants
Bakeries 150 (7.18) Composing rooms 100 (4.79)
Boathouse, floors 100a (4.79) Linotype rooms 100 (4.79)
Boiler room, framed 300a (14.36) Paper storage e
Broadcast studio 100 (4.79) Press rooms 150a (7,18)
Ceiling, accessible furred 10b (0.48) Railroad tracks f
Cold storage Ramps
No system overhead 250c (11.97) Seaplane (see Hangars)
Overhead system Restrooms 60 (2.87)
Floor/Floor 150 (7.18) Rinks
Roof/Roof 250 (11.97) Ice skating 250 (11.97)
Computer equipment 150a (7,18) Roller skating 100 (4.79)
Courtrooms 50–100 (2.40–4.79) Storage, hay or grain 300a (14.36)
Dormitory Theatres
Nonpartitioned 80 (3.83) Dressing rooms 40 (1.92)
Partitioned 40 (1.92) Gridiron floor or fly gallery:
Machine room elevators 150a (7,18) Grating 60 (2.87)
Fan rooms 150a (7,18) Well beams 250 lbs∕ft (3.65 kN∕m) per pair
Foundries 600a (28.73) Header beams 1,000 lbs∕ft (14.60 kN∕m)
Fuel rooms, framed 400 (19.15) Pin rails 250 lbs∕ft (3.65 kN∕m)
Greenhouses 150 (7.18) Projection room 100 (4.79)
Hangars 150d (7.18) Toilet rooms 60 (2.87)
Incinerator charging floor 100 (4.79) Transformer rooms 200a (9.58)
Kitchens, other than domestic 150a (7,18) Vaults, in offices 250a (11.97)
aUse the weight of actual equipment or stored materials if greater. Note that fixed service
equipment is treated as a dead load, not a live load.
bAccessible ceilings are usually not designed to support people. The values in this table are
intended to account for light storage or hanging items. Should be provided where necessary to
support the weight of maintenance personnel.
cPlus 150 lb/ft2(7.18 kN/m2) for trucks.
dUse loads according to the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials.
Also carries no less than 100% of maximum axle load.
e50 lb/ft paper warehouse2per foot (2.395 kN/m2per meter) of the net level height.
fAs required by the railroad company.
C4.7 Reduction in even live load
C4.7.1 General
The concept of, and method for, determining the live load reduction of structural
components as a function of the area of influence of the structural component under
load,AI, was first introduced in 1982 and was the first change since the concept of live
load reduction was introduced more than 40 years ago. The revised formula is the
result of survey data and broader theoretical analysis (Harris et al. 1981). The change in
format to the reduction multiplier results in a formula that is simpler and more
convenient to use. Use of area of influence, now defined as a function of tributary
area,AQ, in a single equation has been shown to provide more consistent reliability for
a wide range of structural effects. The area of influence is defined as the floor area
where the surface influence for structural effects is significantly different from zero.
287 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
FactorKLLis the ratio of area of influence (AI) of the structural components to the
tributary area (AQ), that is,KLL=AI/AQ, and is used to better define the area of influence
of a structural component as a function of its tributary area. Figure C4.7-1 illustrates a
typical area of influence and tributary area for a structure with regularly spaced spans.
Table 4.7-1 has established valuesKLL(comes from value KLL calculated) for use in
Equation (4.7-1) for various structural components and structural configurations. Mark
KLLcalculated varies for column components and beam components having adjacent
cantilevered construction, as shown in Figure C4.7-1, and the values of Table 4.7-1
have been established for these cases to provide a slightly conservative reduction in
live load. For unusual shapes, the concept of significant influence effects must be
applied.
An example of a structural member without provision for continuous shear transfer

perpendicular to its span might be a precast T-beam or double T-beam that has
expansion joints along one or both ends of its span.flangeor those that only have welds
tabalternating along the edgeflange. These structural components do not have the
ability to share the load located within their tributary area with adjacent components,
resulting inKLL=1 for this type of structural component. Reduction is permitted for two-
way slabs and for beams, but care must be taken in determining the appropriate area
of influence. For multiple floors, the areas for structural components supporting more
than one floor must be added together.
The formula provides a continuous transition from unreduced load to reduced load.
The smallest permitted value of the reduction multiplier is 0.4 (giving a maximum
reduction of 60 %), but the minimum is 0.5 (giving a reduction of 50 %) for structural
components with load contributions from only one floor.
© BSN 2020 288 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
KLLactual KLLactual
Component Structural Components Example
Structure with Cantilever KLL component
Element without (Table 4.7.1) (Picture
n=0 n = 0.5 n = 1.0
Cantilever C4.7-1)
Interior columns 4 - - - 4 E4
Exterior columns without cantilevers 4 - - - 4 G7, J6
Edge column with cantilever - 4 3 2.67 3 B3
Corner column with cantilever - 4 2.25 1.78 2 K2
Edge beam without cantilever slab 2 - - - 2 D7 – E7
Interior beams 2 - - - 2 H4 – H5
Edge beam with cantilever slab - 2 1.5 1.33 1 B5 – B6
Cantilever beam without cantilever slab 2 - - - 1 E1 – E2
Cantilever beam with cantilever slab - 2* 1.5* 1.33* 1 K5 – L5
Figure C4.7-1 - Area of influence and size of typical tributary
C4.7.3 High live load
In the case of occupancies involving relatively high base live loads, for example
warehouse buildings, several adjacent floor panels may be subject to the full load.
However, data obtained in actual buildings shows that it is rare for a floor to be loaded
to more than 80% of the calculated average live load. It appears that the basic live load
should not be reduced for beam and floor designs, but may be reduced by up to 20%
for designs of components supporting more than one floor. Based on that, this
principle has been included in the recommended requirements.
289 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
C4.7.4 Passenger vehicle garage
Unlike live loads in offices and residential buildings, which typically occupy space
randomly, parking garage loads are caused by vehicles parked in a regular pattern, and
the garages are often full. Thus, the reasons/basis for reducing living loads in other
areas do not apply. Vehicle weight surveys were conducted in 9 commercial parking
garages in 4 cities of different sizes (Wen and Yeo 2001). A statistical analysis of the
effects of maximum loads on beams and columns caused by vehicle loads over the
lifetime of the garage was carried out using the survey results. The dynamic effects on
the deck caused by vehicle movement and on the ram due to impact have been
investigated. Equivalent uniformly distributed load (EUDL) which produces a maximum
column axial force that is always present and the mid-span beam bending moment is
estimated at 34.8 psf (1.67 kN/m2). Equivalent uniformly distributed load is not sensitive
to span size. From the perspective of the impact of very high vehicle loads in the future,
such as sports vehicles, a design load of 40 psf (1.95 k/n/m) is recommended.2) without
reduction depending on the span area.
Compared to a design live load of 50 psf (2.39 kN/m2) in SNI 1727:2013, the design load
contained here represents a reduction of 20 %, but is still 33 % higher than 30 psf (1.44
kN/m2) obtained is an area-based reduction to be applied to a value of 50 psf (2.39 kN/
m2) for large ranges as permitted in most standards. There was also found to be little
variability in the effect of maximum garage load, with a coefficient of variation of less
than 5 % compared to 20 % to 30 % for most other live loads. The implication is that
when a live load factor of 1.6 is used in the design, additional conservatism is built in
such that the recommended value will also be sufficiently conservative for special
purpose parking (e.g., valet parking) where vehicles may be parked more densely,
leading to greater load effects. tall. Therefore, the design value is 50 psf (2.39 kN/m2) is
too conservative, and can be reduced to 40 psf (1.95 kN/m2) without compromising
structural integrity.
Considering the large load effect generated by a single heavy vehicle (up to 10,000 lb
(44.48 kN)), the concentrated load of 2,000 lb (8.90 kN) should be increased to 3,000 lb
(13.34 kN) acting in area 4, 5 in. x 4.5 in. (0.11 m x 0.11 m), which represents the load
caused by the jack when changing a tire.
C4.7.6 Restrictions on one-way slabs
One-way slabs behave similarly to two-way slabs but do not benefit from the higher
redundancy that comes with two-way behavior. For this reason, it is permissible to
reduce the live load on one-way slabs but limit the size of the tributary area,AQ, to an
area that is the product of the slab span times the width perpendicular to the span not
greater than 1.5 times the span (thus producing an area with a ratio of 1.5). For one-
way slabs with a ratio greater than 1.5, the effect is to provide a somewhat higher live
load (if reduction is permitted) than for a two-way slab with the same ratio.
Structural components, such as hollow core slabs, that have continuous shear locks
along edges and span in only one direction, are considered one-way slabs for live load
reduction, even though the slab has continuous shear transfer perpendicular to the
span.
© BSN 2020 290 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
C4.8 Reduction in roof live load
C4.8.2 Ordinary roofs, awnings and canopies
The values specified in Equation (4.8-1) acting vertically on the projected area are
selected as minimum roof live loads, even where little or no snow load occurs. This is
because it is necessary to take into account the load of workers and equipment during
roof repairs.
C4.8.3 Occupied roofs
The designer must account for the additional dead loads created by saturated
landscape materials in addition to the live loads required in Table 4.3-1. The load
associated with a dwelling on a roof is the live load (L) which is usually related to the
floor design rather than the roof live load (Lr) and can be reduced according to the live
load provisions in Article 4.7.
C4.9 Crane load
All supporting components of moving bridge cranes and monorail cranes, including
runway beams, brackets, braces, and joints, must be designed to support the
maximum wheel load of the crane and the vertical impact, lateral, and longitudinal
forces caused by the moving crane. Also, the beam runway must be designed against
the crane stopping force. The method for calculating these loads varies depending on
the system type and crane support. MHI (2009, 2010a, b) and MBMA (2012) describe
types of bridge cranes and monorail cranes. The cranes described in this Reference
include overhead-operating bridge cranes with overhead-operating trolleys, bridge
cranes and downward-operating monorail cranes. AIST (2003) provides more stringent
requirements for runway crane design that are more suitable for crane systems with
higher capacities and speeds.
C4.11 Load on the helipad
C4.11.1 General
Provisions for helipads were added to SNI 1727:2013. For SNI 1727, the term “helipad”
is used to refer specifically to the surface of the structure. For SNIs for buildings and
other SNIs, different terminology can be used when describing helipads, for example
heliports, helipads, but these differences are not relevant to the structural loading
issues discussed in SNI 1727.
Although these structures are specifically kept away from non-helicopter and taxi
passenger loads, minimum uniform load requirements are used to ensure a safe level
of construction to withstand the effects of unusual events.
Additional information about helipad design can be found inAnnex 14 to the

Convention on International Civil Aviation, Aerodromes, Volume II (ICAO 2013).
291 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
C4.11.2 Centralized helicopter load
Centralized loads applied separately from distributed loads are intended to include the
primary load of the helicopter. As a basis for determining design loads, the designer
must always consider the geometry of the helicopter. A factor of 1.5 is used to account
for impact loads (two single concentrated loads equal to 0.75 times the maximum
takeoff weight) to account for hard landings with various types of landing gear.
Designers must consider that some helicopter configurations, especially those with
rigid landing gear, can produce much higher impact factors.
The concentrated load of 3,000 lb (13.35 kN) is intended to cover maintenance

activities, similar to the jack load in a parking garage.
C4.13 Library stacking cupboard room
If the installation of library shelves does not meet the parameter limits specified in
Article 4.13 and Table 4.3-1, the design must take into account the actual conditions.
For example, floor loading for medical X-ray film storage can easily exceed 200 psf (9.58
kN/m2), mainly due to the increase in shelf depth. Library shelving that moves on rails
must also be designed to meet the actual requirements of the particular installation,
which can easily exceed 300 psf (14.4 kN/m2). Track support locations and deflection
limits must be considered in the design, and engineers must work with the system
manufacturer to provide a structure that meets the requirements.
C4.14 Mounts for assembly use
Lateral loads apply to "stadiums and arenas" and for "tribunes and spectator seats".
However, that does not apply to the "main floor gym and balcony." Consideration
should be given to handling gymnasium balconies that have stepped floors for
spectator seating in arenas and appropriate rocking forces should be taken into
account.
C4.17 Solar panel load
C4.17.1 Roof load on solar panels
This provision was added to SNI 1727 to address the installation of solar panels on
roofs which is consistent with current practice (Blaney and LaPlante 2013). This
provision allows for an offset of the roof live load when the space beneath the solar
panels is deemed inaccessible. The 24 inch (610 mm) measurement was selected as the
clear vertical clearance because it is consistent with published requirements for solar
panel systems as well as the typical minimum height permitted for access into or out of
the space.
C4.17.3 Open grid roof structures supporting solar panels
This article reduces the roof live load evenly for building structures such as carportand
shade structures, excluding roof decks or thin roof coverings (sheathing), with the
minimum uniform roof live load value permitted in Article 4.8.2. The centralized roof
live load requirements in Table 4.3-1 are not modified by this Article.
© BSN 2020 292 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Reference
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO).LRFD
bridge design specifications, 7th Ed., 2014, with 2015 interim revisions, AASHTO,
Washington, DC.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). (2013).American national standard safety

code for elevators and escalators. ASME, New York, A17.
Association of Iron and Steel Technology (AIST). (2003). “Guide to the design and
construction of mill buildings.”Tech. Report No. 13, AISE, Warrendale, PA.
Blaney, C., and LaPlante, R. (2013). “Recommended design live loads for rooftop solar
arrays.” Proc.,SEAOC Convention, 264–278.
Chalk, P. L., and Corotis, R. B. (1980). “Probability models for designing live loads.”J.
Struct. Div., 106(10), 2017–2033.
Corotis, R. B., Harris, J. C., and Fox, R. R. (1981). “Delphi methods: Theory and design
load applications.”J. Struct. Div., 107(6), 1095–1105.
Ellingwood, B. R., and Culver, C. G. (1977). “Analysis of live loads in office buildings.”J.
Struct. Div., 103(8), 1551–1560.
Harris, M. E., Bova, C. J., and Corotis, R. B. (1981). “Area-dependent processes for
structural live loads.”J. Struct. Div., 107(5), 857–872.
International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO). (2013).Annex 14 to the convention on

international civil aviation, aerodromes, Vol. II: Heliports.
ICC/ANSI. (2009). “Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.”A117.1. International

Code Council, Washington, D.C.
McGuire, R. K., and Cornell, C. A. (1974). “Live load effects in office buildings.”J. Struct.
Div., 100(7), 1351–1366.
Metal Building Manufacturers Association (MBMA). (2012).Metal building systems

manual, MBMA, Cleveland, OH.
MHI. (2010a). “Specifications for top running bridge and gantry type multiple girder electric
overhead traveling cranes.”No. 70-2010, MHI, Charlotte, NC.
MHI (2010b). “Specifications for top running and under running single girder electric
overhead traveling cranes using under running trolley hoist.”No. 74-2010. MHI,
Charlotte, NC.
MHI. (2009). “Specifications for patented track underhung cranes and monorail
systems.”No. MH 27.1-2009, MHI, Charlotte, NC.
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). (2014a). “Code of federal

regulations, Section 1910.27.”OSHA Standards, Washington, DC.
OSHA. (2014b). “Powered platforms for building maintenance.” Code of federal

regulations, Section 1910.66.OSHA Standards, Washington, DC.
293 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
OSHA. (2014c). “Safety standards for scaffolds used in the construction industry.” Code of
federal regulations, Section 1926.451.OSHA Standards, Washington, DC.
Peir, J. C., and Cornell, C. A. (1973). “Spatial and temporal variability of live loads.”J.
Struct. Div., 99(5), 903–922.
Sentler, L. (1975). “A stochastic model for live loads on floors in buildings.”Report No. 60,
Lund Institute of Technology, Division of Building Technology, Lund, Sweden.
Wen, Y. K., and Yeo, G. L. (2001). “Design live loads for passenger cars parking garages.”
J. Struct. Eng., 127(3), 280–289.
© BSN 2020 294 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
APPENDIX D
Buildings are exempt from wind torsion loads
D.1 Scope
The torsional load cases in Figure 27.3-8 (Case 2 and Case 4) do not need to be
considered for buildings that meet the conditions of Articles D.2, D.3, D.4, D.5, or D.6
or, if it can be demonstrated in other ways that the torsional load case of Figure 27.3-8
does not control the design.
D.2 One- and two-story buildings that meet the following requirements
One-story building withhless than or equal to 30 ft (9.2 m), buildings of two stories or
less with light frame construction, and buildings of two stories or less designed with
flexible diaphragms are excluded.
D.3 Buildings controlled by seismic loads
D.3.1 Buildings with inflexible diaphragms at every level
The building structure is exempt and behaves regularly against seismic loads (as
defined in Article 12.3.2) and in accordance with the following provisions:
1. The eccentricity between the center of mass and the geometric center of the building
at that level does not exceed 15% of the total width of the building along each main
axis at each level, and
2. The design level shear force due to earthquake loads as required in Article 12 at each
floor level must be at least 1.5 times the design level shear force due to wind loads
as required here.
The design wind and earthquake load cases taken into account when evaluating this
exception are non-torsion load cases.
D.3.2 Buildings with flexible diaphragms at each level
The building structure is exempt and behaves regularly against seismic loads (as
defined in Article 12.3.2) and in accordance with the following provisions:
1. The design earthquake shear force calculated on the vertical elements of the lateral
load-bearing system is at least 1.5 times the corresponding design wind shear force
resisted by those elements.
The design wind and earthquake load cases taken into account when evaluating this
exception are non-torsion load cases.
D.4 Buildings are classified as regular against twisting due to wind loads
Buildings that meet the definition of regular buildings against twisting due to wind
loads in Article 26.2 are excluded.
295 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
EXCEPTION:If a building does not qualify as regular with respect to twisting due to wind loads, it
is permitted in the design to use a base wind load for case 1 which is proportionally increased so
that the maximum displacement at each level is not less than the maximum displacement for
twisting loads in case 2.
D.5 Buildings with flexible diaphragms and designed for increased wind loads
The case of twisting wind loads does not need to be taken into account if the design wind
pressure in Case 1 and Case 3 Fig. 27.3-8 is enlarged by a factor of 1.5.
D.6 Class 1 and Class 2 simple diaphragm buildings withh≤ 160 ft (48.8
m) meet the following requirements (see Article 27.5.2)
D.6.1 Case A — Class 1 and class 2 buildings
Square building withL/B=1.0 is excluded, when all the following conditions are met:
1. The combined stiffness of the SPGAU in each direction of the principal axis must be the same, and
2. The individual stiffness of each SPGAU in each direction of the main axis must be the
same and located symmetrically with respect to the working center of the wind load
along the main axis being calculated, and
3. The combined stiffness of the two most separated lines of the SPGAU in each direction of the
main axis must be 100% of the total stiffness in each direction of the main axis, and
4. The distance between the two most separated lines of the SPGAU in each direction of
the main axis is at least 45% of the effective building width perpendicular to the
axis being calculated.
D.6.2 Case B — Class 1 and class 2 buildings.
Square building withL/B=1.0 is excluded, when all the following conditions are met:
1. The combined stiffness of the SPGAU in each direction of the principal axis must be the same, and
2. The individual stiffness of the two most separated lines of the SPGAU in each
direction of the principal axis must be equal to that of all SPGAU lines symmetrically
located with respect to the working center of the wind load along the principal axis
under consideration, and
3. The combined stiffness of the two most separated lines of the SPGAU in each main
axis direction is at least 66% of the total stiffness in each main axis direction, and
the main axis is at least 66% of the effective building width perpendicular to the axis
being calculated.
D.6.3 Case C — Class 1 and class 2 buildings
Quadrangular building withL/Bequal to 0.5 or 2.0 (L/B=0.5,L/B=2.0) is excluded, when

all the following conditions are met:
1. The combined stiffness of the SPGAU in each direction of the main axis must be
proportional to the width of the side perpendicular to the axis being considered,
2. The individual stiffness of each SPGAU in each direction of the main axis must be the same
and symmetrically placed with respect to the working center of the wind load along the main
axis being calculated, and
3. The combined stiffness of the two most separated lines of the SPGAU in each direction of the
main axis must be 100% of the total stiffness in each direction of the main axis, and
© BSN 2020 296 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
the main axis is at least 80% of the effective building width perpendicular to the axis
being calculated.
D.6.4 Case D — Class 1 and class 2 buildings
Quadrangular building withL/Bequal to 0.5 or 2.0 (L/B=0.5,L/B=2.0) is excluded, when

all the following conditions are met:
1. The combined stiffness of the SPGAU in each direction of the principal axis must be
proportional to the width of the side perpendicular to the axis under consideration, and
2. The individual stiffness of the most separated lines of the SPGAU in each direction of
the main axis must be equal to all the lines of the SPGAU located symmetrically with
respect to the center of action of the wind load along the main axis under
consideration,
3. The combined stiffness of the two most separated lines of the SPGAU in each main
axis direction is at least 80% of the total stiffness in each main axis direction, and
4. The distance between the two most separated lines of the SPGAU in each direction of the
main axis must be 100% of the effective building width perpendicular to the axis being
calculated.
D.6.5 Case E — class 1 and class 2 buildings
A rectangular building that hasL/Bbetween 0.5 and 1.0 (0.5 <L/B <1.0) or between 1.0
and 2.0 (1.0 <L/B<2.0), the stiffness requirements and separation distance between the
two most separated lines of the SPGAU in each direction shall be interpolated between
each case A and case C and between each case B and case D. (See Figure D.6-1 ).
D.6.6 Case F — Class 1 building
A rectangular building that hasL/Bbetween 0.5 and 0.2 (0.2 ≤L/B<0.5) or between 2.0
and 5.0 (2.0 <L/B≤ 5.0) is excluded, see Figure D.6-2, with all of the following conditions
met:
1.There must be at least two lines of resistance in each direction of the principal axis, and
2.All SPGAU lines must be located symmetrically with respect to the center of action of the
wind load along the main axis under consideration, and
3.The distance between each SPGAU resistance line in the main axis direction must not exceed 2
times the effective width of the building in the main axis direction, and
4.The individual stiffness of the most separated lines of the SPGAU in each direction of
the main axis must be the same and not less than (25 + 50/n) percent of total
stiffness where n is the number of lines of resistance required in the principal axis
direction as required by provisions 1 and 3 of this section. Marknmust be 2, 3, or 4.
297 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
B=L B=2L
0.45L L 0.8L
L
0.45L 0.8B
Interpolation
Case A Case C
100% rigidity in outer lines 100% rigidity in outer lines
B=L B=2L
0.67L L
L L
0.67B B
Interpolation
Case B Case D
67 % stiffness in outer lines 80% stiffness in outer lines
Figure D.6-1 - Main Wind Force Resisting System, Appendix D (h ≤ 160 ft)
(48.8 m): SPGAU Requirements for Case E for Closed Simple Diaphragm
Buildings. For Exceptions to Twisting Due to Wind Loads, see
Figure 27.3-8
B≤ 5L
≤ 2L ≤ 2L
Min. (25+50/n) % of Remaining stiffness in each

total stiffness interior line
y direction on each
outer line
Notes
n=number of resistance lines required in each direction of the principal axis (2 ≤n≤ 4)
Figure D.6-2 - Main Wind Force Resisting System, Appendix D (h ≤ 160 ft) (48.8
m): SPGAU Requirements from Case F for Simple Diaphragm Buildings
Closed. For Exceptions to Twisting Due to Wind Loads, see Figure 27.3-8.
© BSN 2020 298 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
Appendix E
Performance-based design procedures for fire effects on structures
E.1 Scope
This annex is not a mandatory part of this standard. This appendix provides procedures
for performance-based design and evaluation of structures for fire conditions resulting
from the effects of fire on structural components and connections. The use of
performance-based fire resistance design procedures is an alternative methodology for
meeting project design requirements, as permitted by Article 1.3.7 and the alternative
materials, design, and methods of construction provisions in the building code. This
appendix does not provide standard fire resistance design by prescriptive methods, nor
does it address explosions.
E.2 Definition
The following definitions apply to the information in this Appendix.
fire
an oxidation process that results from the burning of combustible materials and
produces heat.
fire effect
thermal and structural responses caused by fire exposure and subsequent cooling.
fire exposure
the influence of the extent to which a material, product, or assembly is exposed to conditions caused
by fire.
fire resistance
the ability of a material, product, or assembly to withstand fire or provide protection
over a period of time.
fuel load
the total quantity of combustible material contents in a building, space, or area
expressed as total energy or equivalent mass.
heat transfer
Thermal energy exchange caused by temperature differences.
performance-based fire-resistant structural design

explicit design of structural components and connections that meet performance plans
for fire-resistant structural design.
standard fire resistance design

selection of fire resistance systems that meet regulatory requirements for fire-resistant
structures (also known as prescriptive design). A system's fire resistance rating is based
on its performance in standard fire testing.
fire for structural design
299 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
a fire that has the potential to affect the integrity and stability of a structure used for
structural design and evaluation.
thermal boundary conditions

the temperature and/or heat flux to which a system or structure is exposed during or
after fire exposure based on radiative and convection heating and/or cooling
conditions on exposed surfaces.
thermal insulation
a material or medium that reduces the transfer of heat between objects in thermal contact
or within the range of influence of radiation or convection.
thermal response
temperature distribution of structural components and connections when exposed to thermal boundary
conditions.
thermal restraint
a condition in which thermal expansion or contraction of a structural component is
resisted by forces external to the structural component. The degree of restraint
depends on frame details and adjacent joint details.
E.3 General requirements
Performance-based fire-resistant structural design and evaluation procedures shall meet the
requirements of Article 1.3.1.3.
Design and evaluation of structures for fire effects should include the following steps:
identifying performance plans, measuring fuel loads, identifying and evaluating fires
for structural design, determining temperature history of structural components and
connections, and determining structural response. These steps should include
evaluation of the subsequent heating and cooling of the structure due to fire exposure,
as appropriate.
The response of the structure should be evaluated against limit conditions based on the
performance plan. The analysis must take into account temperature-dependent material
properties, boundary conditions, and the variety of thermally induced failures and structural
stability, strength, deformation, and load path continuity must be evaluated.
E.4 Performance plan
The performance plan should be expressed as a quantitative metric for the design and
evaluation of structural response to fire for structural design. The performance plan for
structural integrity, including strength, stiffness, and stability, must meet the minimum
criteria required in Article E.4.1. Project-specific additional performance plans must
meet the requirements in Article E.4.2.
E.4.1 Structural integrity
Structural integrity must be provided for buildings and other structures subject to fire
for structural design so that the structural system remains stable with a continuous
load path to the extent necessary to ensure the safety of occupants' lives.
© BSN 2020 300 of 302

SNI 1727:2020
The performance of structural systems due to fire for structural design must allow
building occupants to move safely to protective areas inside the building or out of the
building onto public roads. Structural support for establishing escape routes must be
maintained for the period of time necessary to ensure safe and complete evacuation of
building occupants. The structural support of the refuge area building must be
maintained during heating and cooling of the structure.
E.4.2 Project specific performance plans
Buildings and other structures must be designed to meet project-specific performance

plans required by the owner, regulatory authorities, or applicable building regulations
other than those in Article E.4.1.
E.5 Thermal analysis of fire effects
The thermal response of structural components and connections during and after a fire for
structural design must be determined as input for structural analysis of the effects of fire.
E.5.1 Fuel load
Fuel loads must be calculated in evaluating fires for structural design.
E.5.2 Fire for structural design
Fires for structural design must be identified and used to develop thermal boundary
conditions over time used in heat transfer analysis.
E.5.3 Heat transfer analysis
The temperature history of structural components and connections must be

determined using a heat transfer analysis method based on thermal limit conditions
over time during a fire for structural design.
The temperature-dependent thermal properties of the materials that comprise the structural
system and thermal insulation must be used in heat transfer analysis to determine the thermal
response. It is permissible to use constant thermal property values if conservative results are
obtained.
E.6 Structural analysis of fire effects
The structural analysis shall include those parts of the structural system that are
exposed to the fire effects of a fire for structural design as specified in Article E.5, with
consideration of the parts of the structural system that are not exposed to heat
providing thermal restraint. It is permitted in the analysis to consider alternative load
paths capable of surviving structural damage or degradation due to the effects of fire.
E.6.1 Temperature history for structural components and connections
The temperature history for structural components and connections shall be determined from
301 of 302
SNI 1727:2020
Fire thermal analysis of structural design and should be used to analyze the effects of fire
on structural performance.
E.6.2 Temperature dependent properties
Temperature dependent properties of structural materials should be used to

determine the fire performance of structural components and joints for structural
design.
E.6.3 Load combination
The load combinations in Article 2.5 for extraordinary events shall be used for analysis
of fire effects and shall include time-dependent effects andorder. To check the residual
capacity in fire-damaged structures for structural design, the approach identified in
Article 2.5.2.2 should be used.
© BSN 2020 302 of 302

Supporting information regarding standard formulators
[1] Technical Committee/Technical Subcommittee formulating SNI
Technical Subcommittee 91-01-S4 Building Materials, Science, Structures and Construction.
[2] Membership composition of the Technical Committee/Technical Subcommittee formulating SNI
Chairman : Prof. Dr. Ir. Arief Sabaruddin, CES :

Vice Chairman Ir. Lutfi Faizal
Secretary : Dany Cahyadi, ST, MT :
Member 1. Ir. RG Eko Djuli Sasongko, MM
2. Prof. Dr. Ir. Suprapto, M.Sc, FPE, IPM
3. Dr. Ir. Johannes Adhijoso Tjondro, M.Eng
4. Ir. Asriwiyanti Desiani, MT
5. Ir. Felisia Simarmata
6. Ir. Suradjin Sutjipto, MS
7.Dr. Ir. Nugraha Nurjaman Day
8. Prof. Bambang Suryoatmono
[3] SNI design conceptor
No. Name Institution
Civil Engineering Study Program - Faculty of Engineering,

1 Dr. Ir. Djoni Simanta, MT
Parahyangan Catholic University
Faculty of Civil Engineering and Planning - Trisakti
2 Ir. Suradjin Sutjipto, MS
University/ Suradjin Sutjipto, Inc
Faculty of Civil Engineering and Planning – Sepuluh
3 Prof. Tavio, ST, MT, Ph.D
Nopember Institute of Technology (ITS)
Dr. Ir. Johannes Adhijoso Civil Engineering Study Program - Faculty of Engineering,
4
Tjondro, M.Eng Parahyangan Catholic University
Faculty of Earth Sciences and Technology, Bandung
5 Dr. Hamzah Latief, M.Sc
Institute of Technology (ITB)
Faculty of Earth Sciences and Technology, Bandung
6 Dr. Tri Wahyu Hadi M.Sc.
Institute of Technology (ITB)
7 Ir. Felisia Simarmata PT. DIRGA MULYA YASA
Civil Engineering Study Program - Faculty of Engineering,
8 Naomi Pratiwi, B.Eng, M.Sc
Parahyangan Catholic University
9 Ir. Lutfi Faizal Research and Development Center for Housing and Settlements, Kem.PUPR
10 Sutadji Yuwasdiki, Dipl. E. Eng Research and Development Center for Housing and Settlements, Kem.PUPR
11 Ferri Eka Putra, ST, MDM Research and Development Center for Housing and Settlements, Kem.PUPR
12 Ir. Wahyu Wuryanti, M.Sc Research and Development Center for Housing and Settlements, Kem.PUPR
13 Adjunct Hariono, ST, M.Sc., Eng Research and Development Center for Housing and Settlements, Kem.PUPR
14 Muhammad Rusli, ST, MDM Research and Development Center for Housing and Settlements, Kem.PUPR
[4] Secretariat managing the Technical Committee/Technical Subcommittee formulating SNI
Housing and Settlement Research and Development Center, Research and

Development Agency of the Ministry of Public Works and Public Housing.

SNI 1727 2020 en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SNI 1727 2020 en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Translated from Indonesian to English - www.onlinedoctranslator.

Minimum design loads and related criteria

List of contents................................................ ................................................................ ................................ i

List of images.................. ................................................................ ................................................xvii List of

tables . ................................................................ ................................................................ .................xxii

Foreword .................................. ................................................................ .......................................... xxv 1

General ..... ................................................................ ................................................................ ...................1

1.1 Scope................................................ ................................................................ .........1

1.2.1 Definition ................................................ ................................................................ .........................1

1.2.2 Symbols.................................................. ................................................................ .........................3

1.3 Basic requirements ........................................... ................................................................ ..4

1.3.1.2 Permissible stress procedures ............................................ ............................................4

1.3.1.3 Performance-based procedures ............................................ ................................................4

1.3.1.3.1 Analysis ............................................ ................................................................ ................6

1.3.1.3.2 Testing ............................................ ................................................................ ............6

1.3.1.3.4 Overview............................................ ................................................................ ............6

1.3.2 Serviceability ............................................ ................................................................ ...7

1.3.4 Forces and self-strain effects............................................ ...................................7

1.3.6 Action of opposing structures............................................ .....................................7

1.4 General structural integrity.............................................. ......................................8

1.4.3 Connections at supports............................................ ......................................8

1.5.2 Multiple risk categories............................................ ............................................11

1.6 Additions and renovations to structures that have been built.................. 12

1.8 Consensus standards and other reference documents ............................................ .....12

2.1 General................................................ ................................................................ ..................... 13

2.2 Symbols ................................................ ................................................................ .................... 13

2.3 Load combinations for strength design ............................................ ................... 13

2.3.2 Load combinations including flood loads ................................ 14

2.3.4 Load combinations including force and self-strain effects ......................... 15

2.4.2 Load combinations including flood loads ......................................... .........17

2.5.2 Load combinations ................................................ ................................................................ ... 19

2.5.2.1 Capacity ................................................ ................................................................ ........... 19

2.5.2.2 Remaining capacity.................................................. ................................................................ ..... 19

2.5.3 Stability requirements ............................................ ................................................ 19

2.6.2 Notional load combinations for allowable stress design............................................ 19

3.1.2 Weight of materials and construction............................................ ......................................... 21

3.1.3 Weight of fixed service equipment ........................................... ................................... 21

3.2 Soil load and hydrostatic pressure............................................ .......................... 21

3.2.1 Lateral pressure.................................................. ................................................................ .......21

3.2.2 Lifting loads on floors and foundations ............................................ ........................24

4.2 Unrequired expenses.................................................. ...................................25

4.4 Concentrated live loads ................................................ ................................................30

4.5.1.2 Loads of safety fence system components............................................ .............30

4.6 Impact loads ................................................ ................................................................ ...........31

4.6.1 General ................................................ ................................................................ ....................31

4.6.2 Elevator ................................................ ................................................................ ......31

4.7.2 Reduction of uniform live load ........................................... ...................................32

4.8.2 Ordinary roofs, awnings and canopies ............................................ ...................................34

4.8.3 Occupable roof............................................ ............................................34

© BSN 2020 iii

4.9.1 General............................................ ................................................................ .................... 35

4.9.2 Maximum wheel load............................................ ................................................ 35

4.9.4 Lateral forces.................................................. ................................................................ ............ 35

4.9.5 Longitudinal force ................................................ ................................................................ ... 35

4.10 Parking/garage loads ............................................ ......................................... 35

4.11.1 General ................................................ ................................................................ ................. 36

4.11.2 Centralized helicopter load ............................................ ...................................... 36

4.15.2 Concentrated load ................................................ ................................................................ .... 37

4.16 Steps ................................................ ................................................ 37

4.17.3 Open grid roof structure supporting solar panels.................................................. .... 38

4.18 Consensus standards and other reference documents ............................................ ...... 38

5 Robust flood load.............................................. ................................................................ .......... 39

5.1 General................................................ ................................................................ ..................... 39

5.2 Definition ................................................ ................................................................ ................... 39